Pinan cess msi ote 0d Tan hanes Ben oy ia 8, Sicha A isahs Sh t-te ise tate 5 . n! a a. Na Se ees x are a5 trent car ean ee eM, Gav eign sherri a es 3 Aion tee a te By PH sin elt aki A Ait he Spy h fy Wecteme Ee beyt= Seen ed ee A ae - ; oe B08 ‘ oe Redntiwe se waksbel mee . 2 iss 2 es eA Sacripets Pte es ae 4 * Ald Fo erin ie GRP AE ‘ sis eae : t . ~ Se ae oe Fo pea metab Sabah Begin, ee eae toch te Goce mn oh se ne — (Fooriet piv sire tental no alteieel pects Rot tent ot spate ce tant Sh tesa be ar sp wet? » ap eal te he nn tye eo ait Hee tag teehrectiem aot ee ae Tel at a Na ey oid gd mete ot : = . ay Memer® 5 sek ASS « 5 x Penne TON sas 5 . Pett tie eae I ee eg sna hy Balen ee aoe er ofc aie ax bien Pree Cadac oe aM Bem Semetiod Meisp tam eaeneh as ear ye tea gah ea en neieeedee Wane tenon ere 3 ~_ 8 AEE ETRE IEE ns - a aps oh ® x Gndeke PEPE SA BS 5 5 1 te ?. ~ = Say Sele fa Sry tT Sop wig et iy ee " An: A" cA : : maces Ge ee : a . o ‘ “ tl iene Batts’ Sen nesta STEED ¥ Oe tana Loe Me Rae Wy Ge Pe OP Het St AAD EEE ES tt ae PROCEEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MERTINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE AQVOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 1906, pp. 463-1052. (MA Y—DECEMBER.) PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, AND SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER-SQUARE, LONDON: 2 re) § 7 q MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. PATERNOSTER ROW. aS OF THE COUNCIL AND OFFICERS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 1906. COUNCIL. His Grace Tur Dukes oF Beprorp, K.G., President. Srr ALEXANDER Bairp, Br. JoHN Rosse BraprorpD, KEsq., M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., Vice- President. Major The Hon. WiuiiAm E. CAVENDISH. F. Dawrrey Drewirtt, M.A., M.D. CHARLES DrumMMonpn, Ksq., Treasurer. Str Epwarp Duranp, Br., C.B. FREDERICK GILLETT, Esq., Vice- President. W. R. Ocinvie-Grant, Esq. Major THe Marquis oF Hamitton, M.P. Ksq., JOSEPH JACKSON ListER, Esq., M.A., F.R.S. Sir Epmunp Gives Lover, Br., Vice-President. EK. G. B. Mzeapr-Watpo, Esq. P. Caatmers MircHety, Ksq., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Secretary. E. Lort Paris, Esa. Howarp SAunpers, Es@., Vice- President. Davin Setu-Sira, Esq. OLDFIELD THomAs, Hsq., F.R.S. CuAr_LeEs 8S. Tomes, Hsq., M.A., E.R.S., Vice-President. Aveustus F. Wiener, Esq. Henry Woopwarb, Ksq., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President. PRINCIPAL OFFICERS. P. Coaumers Mircueny, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Secretary. Frank EK. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., Prosector. R. I. Pocock, Superintendent of the Gardens. CHARLES Pathologist. GABRIEL SELIGMANN, M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., F. H. Watrrnouse, Librarian. JOHN Barrow, Accountant. W. H. Coz, Chief Clerk. GrorGE ARTHUR DouBLeEDAY, Clerk of Publications. ArtHur THomson, Assistant Superintendent of the Gardens. LIST OF CONTENTS, May 1, 1906. Page The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March 1906 ............ AG3 Mr. Oldfield Thomas, F.R.S. Description of a new Species of Duiker, Cephalophus walkeri. (Plate XX XV.) ...... 465 1. Further Notes on Anthropoid Apes. By the Hon. Wy Aamo’: Leyoweistscren 0), JEN ID A IAs Agpondecccssoscnonoosoce 465 2. On Mammals collected in South-west Australia for Mr. W. E. Balston. By Ouprietp Tuomas, F.R.S. ... 468 3. On the Lepidoptera collected by the Officers on the recent Tibet Frontier Commission. By H. J. Enwes, F.R.S., F.Z.S., Sir Grorce Hampson, Bt., F.Z.8., and J. Hartiey Durrant, F.E.S. (Plate XXXVI.)......... 479 4, Contributions to the Knowledge of the Vascular and Respiratory Systems in the Ophidia, and tothe Anatomy . of the Genera Boa and Corallus. By Frank E. Bepparp, © Wie, ID Ii Se, EARS OP IMO) THOS) ONE jonqnpacaecos650u000- 499 (ih 9 lv May 15, 1906. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of April 1906 ............... Mr. F. E. Beddard, F.R.S. Exhibition of a fetus of the Dr Mr Mi Ih. Ineclainarninedl IDSTWTO cocondoopeodsoacsouosodooooons0a0c0KscKsedes . C0. G. Seligmann. Exhibition of a skin of a caponised 1 Gi eee ences rele eR rn OEE oa omnonoods *. R. I. Pocock, F.Z.8S. Exhibition of a specimen of a Leaf-insect from the Seychelles Henry Munt, F.Z.S8. Exhibition of a skin of the Spotted-necked i Ottewwyn. oy-nr.c-ss-ce sete tee eee eae eee Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905. Report on the Hydrachnida. By J. N. HaArpert, ID alolinw Mises i eens yo rea, A 5 . On Mammals from Northern Australia presented to the National Museum by Sir Wm. Ingram, Bt., and the Hon. John Forrest. By Oupriretp Tuomas, F.R.S., De Aden PENIS. O-O- G0 HE) tea docton Goaap saapxatiee too wosnesacn . On the Skull of a Young Specimen of the Ribbon-fish, Regalecus. By W. B. Bennam, D.Sc., M.A., F.Z.S., Professor of Biology in the University of Otago, and W.J.Dunpar. (Plates XX XVIII. & XXXIX.) . On Worms of. the Family Gordiide from Corea. By Dr. von Linstow i a a er iy . Notes upon Menstruation, Gestation, and Parturition of some Monkeys that have lived in the Society’s Gardens. By Recinaup I. Pocock, F.L.8., Superintendent of the Gardens eee cee e were cree neem eee reer steer eseeeseseeeressoeecreresoecoes . Additions to the Herpetology of British East Africa. Bye G.wAvebOULENGER AE ahvSs, UE Zi Satan. Serer eeereeeeee Page 533 i 533 506 544 570 May 29, 1906. Mr. R. H. Burne, F.Z.S. Exhibition of dissections of certain animals from the Society’s Collection .....................065 Dr. L. W. Sambon. Exhibition of diagrams illustrating transmission of diseases by Insects and Ticks ...........- Prof. R. T. Jackson. Exhibition of a photograph of eggs of the Great Auk and of a long-focus lens ..................-.. ; The Secretary. Exhibition of the skull of a Wild Boar...... Mr. R. E. Holding. Exhibition of the skull and horns of a Wild Ivish Goat, of an abnormal skull of the Domestic Cat, and of a calculus from a Horse ............-...+.-..55. —_ . The Rudd Exploration of South Africa.—V. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in N.E. Transvaal. By Otpriretp Tomas, F.R.S., and Harotp Scuwayn, TR Ads, 3. Sao ebe Bee OS Rese seine Sen Gelatin aden eRe inc ane ABs 5 to 7 On the South-African Diaptosaurian Reptile Howesva. By R. Broom, M.D., D.Se., C.M.Z.8., Victoria College, Stellenbosch. (Plates XL. & XLI.) .............ceeeee eee 3. On the Vascular System of Heloderma, with Notes on that of the Monitors and Crocodiles. By Frank EH. Bepparb, M.A., F.R.S., &c., Prosector to the Society ... ise . Description of the External Characters of an unborn Feetus of a Giraffe (Giraffa camelopardalis wardi). By Frank E. Brepparp, M.A., F.R.S., Prosector to the SWOIEU” Gesad080 na00 bse eaosannondovoooboesebodcaspdocaandanecabend June 19, 1906. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month of May 1906 ............... The Hon. Walter Rothschild, Ph.D., F.Z.S.. Exhibition of specimens of African Forest- Pigs .......-.:...seeseeeeee ees o74 a4 591 601 Mi Dr aby Dr bo Or v1 ', W. Savile Kent, F.Z.S. Exhibition of lantern-slides of the fauna of the Polynesian Coral Reefs .................. . W. T. Calman, F.Z.8. Exhibition of a photograph of a ILolosiere jain, alomcrernell Cle). jroeoacacconansondesodosq00000002 , A. Dugés, C.M.Z.S. Exhibition of a specimen of the Crustacean Palemon jamaicensts ......00.0cecce ese esesne ene . C. G. Seligmann, F.Z.S. Exhibition of the aorta of a iliger Showins aneurysms) ie ethene ee eee eeee reer ere eE Ee eeene . C.G, Seligmann, F.Z.S. Exhibition of some tail-feathers from a Common Pheasant showing markings peculiar to Doth Sexes: .wch scintaecta ictal capac wee iene ee tee camer ee mene . On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with special reference to the Drawings by Kelaairt and the Collections belonging to Alder and Hancock preserved in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne. By Sir CuHartes Exnior, K.C.M.G., F.Z.8., Vice-Chancellor of the University of Sheffield. (Plates XLIJ.—XLVILI.). » Description of a new Zebra. By the Hon. Watrer NGS OEE, Pini), THis Meaney ager sae ater ace meee . Description of a new Bush-Buck. By the Hon. WatrEer NODES CHiUD: HPA Sd ZiS «ny tn-eie Coates eee eer ee eae ee . On the Entomostracan Fauna of the New Zealand Lakes. By G. Stewarpson Brapy, M.D., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., CIMEZ’S = (Pilates el W ah Wy snes saci merce ere . Note on some Crustacea from the Freshwater Lakes of New Zealand. By CHartes Cuinron, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, New Ferland a5. sjauasgerese pean newer ace Cee On the Marine Fauna of the Cape Verde Islands, from Collections made in 1904 by Mr. C. Crossland.—The Polyclad Turbellaria. By F. F, Larpiaw, M.A. Cantab. GBlarbe MUTT AW iets de, ce Ned eae me a Page 633 634 634 636 691 691 Vil 7. Description of an unknown Animal seen at Sea off the Coast of Brazil. By HE. G. B. MeapE-Watpo, F.ZS., ane) MiCHAm i me NCOmtemEY ZS upelcc. mc. cceesnevecctheceeacs 8. A Classification of the Selachian Fishes. By C. Tarr VEGAN, BSAC BEE Zi Suetaae eater ds aicichiaiaerctois a a nayuiee ae-aletsca eloeissvan November 13, 1906. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of June, July, August, ands September, gl 0 Osa. pases. acre ae nee mee eer ce Dr. P. L. Sclater, F.R.S. Extracts from a letter of Capt. P. HG p Bowell’ Cottongon the Oka piesa eceeeeereeness Mr. Arthur Dicksee. Exhibition of a variety of the Golden IPingeveenaty (W/OGOMUGUAD (00GIG)). 6646 .o6ebnosnncenconeonoadeccnsocce Mr. Horace C. Beck, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a skull of a Capybara showing abnormal dentition ..................... Prof. E. A. Minchin, F.Z.8. Exhibition of diagrams of Mypanosomes irom Setse- nies. eae: see-seceeee eee sete 1. On the Embryo of the Okapi. By Prof. R. Burckuarpr, SME ZS a) id sisted rea spaia sae steelstete ane aes eat eRe edie Ee 2. List of further Collections of Mammals from ‘Western Australia, including a Series from Bernier Island, obtained for Mr. W. E. Balston; with Field-notes by the Collector, Mr. G. C. Shortridge. By Otprienp AITO MAS ES IRV (MN Zi:Ste seen tite fo ee enti a Sian ter chy ae 3. Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905. Report on the Turbellaria. By F. F. Larpnaw ......... — . The Rudd Exploration of 8. Africa.— VI. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in the Eastern Transvaal. By OLDFIELD Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.8., and Harotp Scuwann, LBA ib bei i BS RSA No sen A UES a aE aa Page 719 760 761 761 761 762 763 777 vill 5. The Mollusca of the Persian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and Arabian Sea, as evidenced mainly through the Col- lections of Mr. F. W. Townsend, 1893-1906; with Descriptions of new Species. By JAmEs Cosmo Menyinn, M.A., F.L.S, F.Z.S., and Ropert STANDEN, Assist. Keeper, Manchester Museum.—Part I]. Pris- Gaxowr, (Planes IWNULAINAN)) sossasascenne0cactonvs0a00000 November 27, 1906. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of October 1906 ............ Mr. E. T. Newton, F.R.S. Exhibition of leg-bones of Foxes THONG [NENG IxSEIN CARUTIONS TN FNEES oosoobssonconcodsesacousbos000 1. On some Habits of the Lesser Horseshoe Bat (Rhinolophus yg DesxKelerus), yy We AX, OOwARID, INVAIS asses05000sa05060 2. The Marine Fauna of Zanzibar- and British East Africa, from Collections made by Cyril Crossland in the Years 1901 and 1902.—On some Species of Solenide. By Epear A. Smiru, 1.8.0., F.Z.8., and H. H. Buoomer ... 3. The Duke of Bedford’s Zoological Exploration in EKastern Asia.—II. List of Small Mammals from Korea and Quelpart. By OxLprietp Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.8.......... 4, On the Anatomy of Centrophorus calceus (crepidalbus Bocage & Capello) Giinther. By W. Woop.anp, F.Z.8., Demonstrator of Zoology, King’s College, London. (2 eyes ONO UDG.) eSandaccocesocosesccnavdoosdos0G0090400000 On . A Suggestion concerning the Origin and Significance of the ‘‘ Renal-Portal System,” with an Appendix relating to the Production of Sub-abdominal Veins. By W. Wooptanp, F.Z.S., Demonstrator of Zoology, King’s Collegerondomy fe 25. cece eenchoteoeensetcnee aeucemneeete December 11, 1906. The Secretary. Exhibition of a sketch of a young Gorilla. (CElem SD.@ 8 Ml nea ceaoinaeetscnceadnodadics dadanndagonochnosmonase Mr. H. B, Fantham, B.Sec., F.Z.S. Exhibition of drawings of “ Trypanosoma” balbianti, showing apparent cilia ... Page 783 855 858 865 886 901 301 Mr. 1X F,. E. Beddard, F.R.S. Exhibition of examples of the Earthworm Benhamia johnstont, from Mt. Ruwenzori... Mr. J. L. Bonhote, F.Z.S. Exhibition of an abnormal My. Dr. No ~ HEMMTNETE Ore ME IRGMOLW, sooscacacooooseocunaae PP Pa at ae ee R. I. Pocock, F.Z.S8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, Hae) ral!” CHE AY IPOICWTONNE oa5cnassoqnpoaoaassosdooooobganec CO. G. Seligmann, F.Z.8. Exhibition of a skull of a Domestic Sheep which had been castrated when YOUN © ascacRcroucre eet acter ee ele Pama eireeratcrescieistictewiscieiaeeroi2 On Collections of the Cape Verde Island Marine Fauna, made by Cyril Crossland, M.A. (Cantab.), B.Sc. (Lond.), F.Z.S., of St. Andrews University, July to September 1904.—The Ascidians. By Jonn Renniz, D.Sc., and Harry Wiseman, M.A., B.Sc., University of Aberdeen. (ellen Weta B.C Warts DDG We) ponunsenee buaceobsandddenoanojecsodane . On New Species of African Coleoptera of the Family Curculionide. By Guy A. K. Marsnaut, F.Z.S. Glaeser ds OXGV AI) orcas. dcractoiste Geineiner ene dncemews . The Cranial and Spinal Nerves of Chlamydoselachus anguineus (Gar.). By Mis. O. A. Mrrrivr Hawkes, M.Se. (Zoological Laboratory, University of Bir- mingham). (Plates LX VIII. & LXIX.) . Descriptions of Two Mammals from the Ituri Forest. [| With a Supplementary Note on the Buffalo of the Semliki district.] By R. Lyprxxrr. (Plate LXX.)... On the Occurrence of the Bruang in the Tibetan IPreonmianea, LEN Tee ILD ISAT coded boneusscoconedsboconbane én . On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with Special Reference to the Drawings by Kelaart and the Collections belonging to Alder and Hancock pre- served in the Hancock Museum at Neweastle-on-Tyne.— No. I. By Sir Cuarues Exrot, K.C.M.G., F.Z.8. . On Variations in the Arterial System of certain Species 903 903 Lil 992 997 999 of the Anura. By Lionrn R. Crawsuay, M.A.......... 1008 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE CONTRIBUTORS, With References to the several Articles contributed by each. Beck, Horace C., F.Z8. Exhibition of a skull of a Capybara showing abnormal SNE TT MG etre ses Oe are ate ea erer le clalat era, CeO MTN NEE aleraraseRcEAC eters BEDDARD, FRANK E., M.A., F.R.S., Prosector to the Society. Contributions to the Knowledge of the Vascular and Respiratory Systems in the Ophidia, and to the Anatomy of the Genera Boa and Corallus .....cccccccesceeceeceesessees Exhibition of a foetus of the Red-fronted Lemur ...... On the Vascular System of Heloderma, with Notes on theatpotunte) Monitors and) Crocodilestercenaseceseeee ce Description of the External Characters of an unborn Feetus of a Giraffe (Giraffa camelopardalis ward?) ......... Exhibition of examples of the Harthworm Benham yolmstonyt) trout Mitty HANI CNAONI peri -nehcereria dase eles eee 761 xu Page Brenuam, W. Buaxuanp, D.Sc., M.A., F.Z.8., Professor of Biology in the University of Otago, and DunBar, W. J. On the Skull of a Young Specimen of the Ribbon-fish, fegalecus. (Plate XXXVIII. & XXXIX.) ............... o44 Buioomer, H. H., and Smrrn, Epear A., 1,8.0., F.Z.8. The Marine Fauna of Zanzibar and British East Africa, from Collections made by Cyril Crossland in the Years 1901 and 1902.—On some Species of Solenide ... 855 Bonnore, J. Lewis, M.A., F.L.8., F.Z.8. Exhibition of an abnormal feather of the Knot......... 901 BovuLEencerR, GEorGE ALBERT, F.R.S., F.Z.S. Additions to the Herpetology of British Hast Africa... 570 Brapy, G. Srewarpson, M.D., LL.D., D.Se., F.R.S., C.M.Z.S8. On the Entomostracan Fauna of the New Zealand ltaikes, (Plawess SCID IUUL Ia) son scaocoegopoonancosensocoeoceac 692 Broom, Ropert, M.D., D.Sc., C.M.Z.S., Victoria College, Stellenbosch. On the South-African Diaptosaurian Reptile Howesia. (Gelewuaiss Sb /6's 2KILILS)) susosoe assbsoddoucsdoddosndéoooaagaocodsce 591 Burckuarpt, Prof. Rupour, C.M.Z.S. Onithe Eimbryorot tet Okappte ere ncreeceee meer beer 762 Burne, Ricuarp H., F.Z.S. Exhibition of dissections of certain animals from the SOAS Clolllleoui@i cose srandoudbassoobsbooovocosonsossnoseobuaadess 574 X1li CALMAN, WitLiAM Tuomas, D.Sc., F.Z.S8., of the British Museum (Natural History). Exhibition of a photograph of a Lobster with abnormal chele Peete teeter o ete eter et et tae sent eee essen aeeesseeeseeaeeeeerrenoese Cuiuron, Cuartres, M.A., D.Se., F.L.S., Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, New Zealand. Note on some Crustacea from the Freshwater Lakes of New Zealand i i ee i i i i i i ee ee ee rey CowarbD, THoMAS ALFRED, F.Z.S. On some Habits of the Lesser Horseshoe Bat (2hino- UDO [OD DOSITIGPUIS)) covoceanoccacacssunbotbobadcancennéoensoc0ns. Crawsuay, Lionet R., M.A. On Variations in the Arterial System of certain Species of the Anura Cece eee sees eeseseseesresses assess asseeceseeeserrereses DicksEE, ARTHUR. Exhibition of a variety of the Golden Pheasant (Thawnalea picta) Cee e ee eee ees e reese e eee esesaeeaeresereerseeteseeee Ducés, Dr. Atrrepo, C.M.Z.S. Exhibition of a specimen of the Crustacean Palemon jamaicensis Cece reece eee eee ero meee eaeseraees reaver eresereensesusscas Dunsar, W. J., and Bennam, W. Buaxtanp, D.Sc., M.A., F.Z.8., Professor of Biology in the University of Otago. On the Skull of a Young Specimen of the Ribbon-fish, Regalecus. (Plates XX XVIII. & XXXIX.) Page 633 1008 761 XIV Durrant, J. Hartisy, F.E.S., Exwes, H.J., F.RS., F.Z.8., and Hampson, Sir Grorce F., Bt., F.Z.S. On the Lepidoptera collected by the Officers on the recent Tibet Frontier Commission. (Plate XXXVI.)... Exior, Sir Cuarues, K.C.M.G., F.Z.8., Vice-Chancellor of the University of Sheffield. On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with special reference to the Drawings by Kelaart and the Collections belonging to Alder and Hancock pre- served in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne. (byes OTL LNW INE) ooocococsoenuserscracocuseoovocdvecesns a tT INO, i ec one wee sae eee Ewes, H. J., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Hampson, Sir Groree F., Bt., F.Z.S., and DurRANt, J. Hartiey, F.ES. On the Lepidoptera collected by the Officers on the recent Tibet Frontier Commission. (Plate XXXVI.) ... Fantuam, H. B., B.Sc., F.Z.S. Exhibition of drawings of “ Trypanosoma” balbianii, SION AUIS CY a|OPUREITID CUE, Goqacanoonbondossspapesssassndssen osens Ge Hausert, J. N., of the Dublin Museum. Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905. Report Claws NOS LRT O MOND, B8aace sone donddescabe cee Sov eseO LORS Ac8S oon Hampson, Sir GeorceE F., Bt., F.Z.S., Euwes, H. J., F.R.S., F.Z.8., and Durrant, J. Hartiery, F.E.S. On the Lepidoptera collected by the Officers on the recent Tibet Frontier Commission. (Plate XXXVI)... Hawkes, Mrs. O. A. Merrirr, M.Sc., Zoological Laboratory, University of Birmingham. The Cranial and Spinal Nerves of Chlamydoselachus anguineus (Gar.). (Plates LX VITI. & LXIX.) Page 479 636 999 479 901 D834 479 XV Ho.prne, R. EH. Exhibition of the skull and horns of a Wild Irish Goat, of an abnormal skull of the Domestic Cat, and of a calculus from a Horse Jackson, Prof. R. T. Exhibition of a photograph of eggs of the Great Auk and of a long-focus lens ec Ooo meee ese ese eseeeserseessoeeeseeseesers Kent, WILLIAM SaviLe, F.Z.8. Exhibition of lantern-slides of the fauna of the Polynesian Coral Reefs eee seer ese se ees oeeeseees eee eeveseesoeetece Larpuaw, F. F., M.A. Cantab. On the Marine Fauna of the Cape Verde Islands, from Collections made in 1904 by Mr. C. Crossland.—The PolycladsWurbellarias \(Plate Wil) ei te ss cecsess-e----see= Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W: A. Cunnington, 1904—-1905.— Report on the Turbellaria ec eer eseesooeceesessseseesoeseeseseesesoce Linstow, Dr. Orro von. On Worms of the Family Gordiide from Corea ......... LypEKKER, RicHArD, B.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S. Descriptions of Two Mammals from the Ituri Forest. [With a Supplementary Note on the Buffalo of the Sermiitst chiswaiet)| | (ERI IOS) socnnosascsenosocsonande 252062 On the Occurrence of the Bruang in the Tibetan Province. MarsHAtt, Guy A. K., F.Z.8. On New Species of African Coleoptera of the Family Curculionide. (Plates LXOQVE. & LVI.) .............:.... 574 574 633 7717 911 xv ; Page ME LvILL, JAMES Cosmo, M.A., F.L.S., F.Z.S., and STaANDEN, Ropert, Assist. Keeper, Manchester Museum. The Mollusca of the Persian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and Arabian Sea, as evidenced mainly through the Collections of Mr. F. W. Townsend, 1893-1906 ; with Descriptions of new Species.._Part II. Penecyrpopa. (Plates JIT. JW) Bae Nanri aeaiier MEP EROABEE EAD RH sadataduood doaneo basooscco00d000 783 Mincutn, Prof. E. A., F.Z.8. Exhibition of diagrams of Trypanosomes from Tsetse- HLTOS. Aitnctiecteine Wan » sit Ooo eRe) ise pene esr ese eee er ra ee 761 MircHeti, P. Cuatmers, M.A., D.Sce., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie hrmernmnye? WINS iaormndm Or Wikre WOOD .5oececcososocevovceeceopor coc AGS Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie Giana tne woormsdm OF Ajorelll WEOG ocoscocoss0nosnoeobonooscoaane 533 Exhibition of the skull of a Wild Boar .................. D74 Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie Ghuraines (ine irneimitln Ge Wiley WO 6 os 200s 000000 cna0s9s0ssecasdaa0a 632 Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of June, July, August, and September, Report on the Naginions to the Society's Menagerie during, the monthyof October OO G rece a-res----eeeteereerr ee 849 Exhibition of a sketch of a young Gorilla. (Plate 19p.@ BB Poe mueteeec bu bbescdachdosssegdouabonbasoocosPocomsas dnone dot 901 Mount, Henry, F.Z8. Exhibition of a skin of the Spotted-necked Otter...... 533 Meapbr-W apo, E. G. B., see Watno, E. G. B. MEADE-. XVil Newton, EK. T., F.R.S., F.Z.8. Exhibition of leg-bones of Foxes that had been caught TM SMAT OS hod fo cya etc ee IE ca ccc 1 a AEE Nicout, Micwart J., F.Z.S., M.B.O.U., and Meaps- W apo, E. G. B., F.Z.8., M.B.O.U. Description of an unknown Animal seen at Sea off the Coastiof- Brazilioss 3.559 eee ee eee ce eens Pocock, Reainaup L., F.L.S., F.Z.8., Superintendent of the Gardens. Exhibition of a specimen of a Leaf-insect from the Seycliellesin: tc taka nares Sein ore. rats. ok eee ina nee nar ep a ra Notes upon Menstruation, Gestation, and Parturition of some Monkeys that have lived in the Society’s Gardens. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, the “rattle” of a OIC UNINC aber es ars Sites ro secerelasciosa achat decdomraneinns sacar cal Rerean, C. Tate, B.A., F.Z.S., of the British Museum (Natural History). A Classification of the Selachian Fishes .................. Renniz, Jonn, D.Sc., and Wiseman, Harry, M.A., B.Sc., University of Aberdeen. On Collections of the Cape Verde Island Marine Fauna, made by Cyril Crossland, M.A. (Cantab.), B.Se. (Lond.), F.Z.8., of St Andrews University, July to September 1904.—The Ascidians. (Plates LXTV.& LXV.) RoruscuiipD, The Hon. L. Watrrer, M.P., Ph.D., F.Z.5. Further Notes on Anthropoid Apes...............:......-. Exhibition of specimens of African Forest-Pigs ...... Descriptionsolaynew: Ze bial messpeeeeer cee aeeereseee eee ‘ ID ESCH MOI Ox & WEN INSIMAIBOO Coccoscooscce oocesseoso00n Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1906. Page 849 719 533 598 902 903 XViil SamBon, Dr. L. W., F.Z.S. Exhibition of diagrams illustrating transmission of diseases by Insects and Ticks eee eee eee cee se eee eee ees ese ees esesen ScuatTer, Pitre Luruey, M.A., D.Sc., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.Z8. Extracts from a letter of Capt. P. H. G. Powell-Cotton on the Okapi Seviemann, C. G., M.B., M.R.C.P., F.Z.8., Pathologist to the Society. Exhibition of a skin of a Gaponised show aaeeeneeeenesecee Exhibition of the aorta of a Tiger showing aneurysms . Exhibition of some tail-feathers from a Common Pheasant showing markings peculiar to both sexes......... Exhibition of a skull of a Domestic Sheep which had been castrated when young see ete e eae c oe es asses eesresseseoesence Suir, Epear A., 1.8.0., F.Z.8., and Biroomer, H. H. The Marine Fauna of Zanzibarand British East Africa, from Collections made by Cyril Crossland in the Years 1901 and 1902.—On some Species of Solenide ............ StANDEN, Ropert, Assist. Keeper, Manchester Museum, and Me viii, JAMEs Cosmo, M.A., F.L.S., F.Z.8. The Mollusca of the Persian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and Avabian Sea, as evidenced mainly through the Collections of Mr. F. W. Townsend, 1893-1906; with Descriptions of new Species.—Part IT. Penecyropa. (Plates LIII— - LVI.) SPR ee ee eae ree ee ee ree eee roses enesreeeeesaeen eases seeensasssaae Page 574 760 533 634 635 903 855 SUK Tuomas, OLDFIELD, F.R.S., F.Z.5. Description of a new Species of Duiker, Cephalophus wWalkeree (Pinte PONexaVin) ree nenac ss f-.v8- osc Moccee sasne ests On Mammals collected in South-west Australia for VWI Ball Sto mina ae a eemn acetic a teers aiecae sth aimee eee a2Nic On Mammals from Northern Australia presented to the National Museum by Sir Wm. Ingram, Bt., and the Hon. John Forrest. (Plate XX XVII.) eee cee ett oe ere meee ene eecese List of further Collections of Mammals from Western Australia, including a Series from Bernier Island, obtained for Mr. W. K. Balston; with Field-notes by the Collector, My. G. C. Shortridge i er er i ir i i iki ica The Duke of Bedford’s Zoological Exploration in Eastern Asia.—II. List of Small Mammals from Korea and Quelpart ee i a ee ee ee iy Txomas, OLDFIELD, F.R.S., F.Z.8., and Scuowann, Haron, F.Z.S. The Rudd Exploration of South Africa.—V. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in N.K. Transvaal The Rudd Exploration of S. Africa —VI. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in the Eastem Teresa Sipe veneers ees rear tt ee att. dated eel OR aly cee REO Goer eh Watpo, KH. G. B. Mrapz-, F.Z.S., M.B.O.U., and Nicoxz, Micuar. J., F.Z.S., M.B.O.U. Description of an unknown Animal seen at Sea off the (ClO BON tall Bi BeIVAll Lakien See ee Me Anan MU Rr GA GR aMG aad Wiseman, Harry, M.A., B.Sc., University of Aberdeen, and RENNIE, JoHN, D.Sc. On Collections of the Cape Verde Island Marine Fauna, made by Cyril Crossland, M.A. (Cantab.), B.Sc. (Lond.), F.Z.8S., of St. Andrews University, July to September 1904.—The Ascidians. (Plates LXIV. & LXV.) 2) Page 463 468 536 763 719 XX Page Woopiann, W., F.Z.8,, Demonstrator of Zoology, King’s College, London. On the Anatomy of Centrophorus calceus (crepidalbus Bocage & Capello) Giinther. (Plates LVIT.-LXIT.)...... 865 A Suggestion concerning the Origin and Significance oO of the ‘‘ Renal- Portal System,” with an Appendix relating to the Production of Sub-abdominal Veins...............65 886 LIST OF PLATES. 1906, pp. 463-1052 Plate Page OOM, — COVMMINIS GHILAD. a 5uccboo etre oh aonaboadwecea 464 XXXVI. soe collected by the Tibetan I ixpedition Poin athe XXXVII. 1. Mus forrestt. 2. Phascogale ingrami 536 ee | : ieee am : XXXIX, kull of young Ribbon-fish (Reyalecus) ......65..-- 544 BELORWES TOOT ORUIVE tans a wheh scooter EH E MO eS a eee 591 ue a XLII. ) XLII. XLIV. XLv. XLVI. XLVII. J XLVIII.+ XLIX. ae 1th - Entomostraca from New Zealand Lakes .......... 692 LI.) LIT. Turbellaria from Cape Verde Islands.............. 705 LUA | LIV. | F ; LV * Mollusea of the Persian Gulf and Arabian Sea...... 783 ) | 7 Nudibranchs ofS. Indiayand) Ceylon yee cts 636 ra LVI. TGWVAlien LVIII. WX ie Texan ~Anatomy of Centrophorus calceeus ...............-. 865 LXI. LXIL ) XX Plate Page ILACTIDL, — omnes ermal (COM, on saeadecoe-cncereanencs- 901 LXIV. LXV. scidians tromyCape Werde ... 422.) soe ae 905 LXVI. : ate LXVII. Nien Audion (ClUumemlignnGes. Gaonsoascecoencccnane 911 LXVIII. Chlamydoseiachus. Cranial nerves LXIX. Chlamydoselachus. Viye-muscles and Brain ........ | LXX. 1, The Dusky African Tiger-Cat (Felix chrysothrix cottoni). 2. The Red African Tiger-Cat (Fc. rutila) 992 LIST OF TEXT-FIGURES. 1906, pp. 463-1092. Page . A portion of body-wall of Lrythrolamprus esculapit, to show arrangement of intercostal arteries 87. Right kidney and adjacent blood-vessels of Erythrolamprus CESCU UG UD mmeatntyeuchey Soeii hc GHAR SSE AG. sks AAO NS 8s OA 502 88. Left kidney and adjacent blood-vessels of ZLrythrolamprus COTCOMIETEDS MONBIOT ORES Or a et MMPS Cc paclo Tena iit a RRL, Ce eg 505 89. Anterior abdominal and renal afferent veins of Boa con- SENUCE OD heb ccoamebegel ori; oi te ea stleh sin ss ha eisai aeosokenene te ete es 509 90. Posterior cardinal and suprarenal veins of Boa divinilogua .... 511 91. Umbilical veins of (a) Boa and (b) Python regius............ 514 92. Commencement of lung of Erythrolamprus esculapw cut open . 526 GE ILE Ol JOR RO TOS CAIQUITTIIO 5 5a600000 002600000 0bobeS 526 94. A. Dorsal view of GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 1906. Paces 463-758. CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN MAY anv JUNE. OCTOBER 1906. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE. — - LONDON: | MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND @.,* PATERNOSTER-ROW; 5) [Price Twelve Shillings.] | | AE LIST OF CONTENTS. 1906, pp. 463-758. May 1, 1906.- Page The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of HVE AMIGA ENOO) Dae iat daclatete cee rein ster ee a. caokae anal sucteee Bec tai Grah ose yaa egies CIOCIG NaN coie, ¢ 463, Mr. Oldfield Thomas, F.R.8. Description of a new species of Duiker, Cephalophus walheri. mQPlaibe MONO Vs) fo... 5 «5's coh icit \shniate) a's niu olnve enjoin Sica le alay adel ora ars rice nGelb a tay oi ge eee fate 463 | 1. Further N otes on Anthropoid Apes. By the Hon. Waurer Roruscup, Ph.D., F.Z.8. . AG5 2. On Mammals collected in South-west Australia for Mr. W. E. Balston. By Onprimip MT BSERORVE: USPunl SMU RvRRO Rae NEMEC ie IDOE ART oa Beene Sh Foal DRA se itt EN) Pitt an aii 468 2. On the Lepidoptera collected by the Officers on the recent Tibet Frontier Commission. By H. J. Exwas, F.R.S., F.Z.S., Sir Grorczr Hampson, Bt., F,Z.S., and J. Harriry DURRANT, HS WSs) CP lette) XONNGV ILA) i). esas a soc tasdn iat eee ane ea ee eS 4, Contributions to the Knowledge of the Vascular andi Respiratory Systems in the Ophidia, and to the Anatomy of the Genera Boa and Corallus. By Frank HE. Bepparp, M.A,, PORN ee Osector Loi the: SOcieby vec. c 1s wtajsie v: etsiature siecrei oie. see stare beret eve enna bale ooo "May 15, 1906, The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of aly oes VANS 1O) 6S) ih As CORR oe ri eR IMEI E raed SCRE OSRN A SEN DIG MC Mc SIRE Se meK Ss duo Sec 533 ‘Mr. F. E. Beddard, F.R.S. Exhibition of a foetus of the Red-fronted Lemur .........- 583 Dr. C.. G, Seligmann, Exhibition of a skin of a caponised fowl .........0.0s0eeee cree 533 Mr. R.I. Pocock, F.Z.8. Exhibition of a specimen of a Leaf-insect from the Seychelles BEB Mr. Henry Munt, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a skin of the Spotted-necked Otter ............ 533 1. Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905. Report on the Hudrachnida. By J. N. Hauserr, Dublin MUS UI eee wos ura (etenatele niceties Mirofal\avallctelaieeleseceececaie intey tar aia ciel tian cance te eeeaahe nese O34 2. On Mammals from Northern Australia presented to the National Museum by Sir Wm. . Ingram, Bt., and the Hon..John Forrest. By Oxprirerp Tnomas, F.R.S., F.Z:S. (Pleibe RORGY DES) 2s lehetec gente siatg a> eine toate cee erese afar nee er tale sins Sree . 586 3. On the Skull of a Young Specimen of the Ribbon-fish, Fegalecus. By W. B. Bennam, DSc., M.A., F.Z.S., Professor of Biology in the University of Otago, and W. J. Donzar, (lathes XOX VADUT. 85 2X SONAR nosey hearer Beate ictiete cere ne te ae asters Saseatie Sethe ric 544 4. On Worms of the Family Gordiide from Corea, By Dr. von Linstow ...........+-- 556 5. Notes upon Menstruation, Gestation, and Parturition of some Monkeys that have lived in the Society’s Gardens. By Recap I. Pococx, F.L.S., Superintendent of the Gardens). 0. 15 relays Wh etae le het ceo ns At 2 Se ARR easiness ee Fascia ee hates Le isteic IO 6, Additions to the Herpetology of British East Africa. By G. A. Boutenenr, F.R.S.,F.Z.8. 570 May 29, 1906. Mr. R. H. Burne, F.Z.S. Exhibition of dissections of certain animals from the Society’s Collection wane keoee cee ARM See Asia MHI Ae ea OOS SMO MOST eae TOR ONO C - O74 Dr. L. W. 8ambon. Exhibition of diagrams illustrating transmission of diseases by Insects Pivote Ved Uae) gene Na nee aa aa UE MN en a uhage hike a SPR SGP Sane VRS ar aia eysreesvenu ane See PROCEEDINGS OF TIIE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. (May to December, 1906.) May 1, 1906. Dr. Henry Woopwarb, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following report on the additions that had been made to the Society’s Menagerie in March 1906 :— ~ The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March were 124 in number. Of these 52 were acquired by presentation and 6 by purchase, 44 were received on deposit, 12 in exchange, and 10 were born in the Gardens. The total number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 182. Amongst the additions special attention may be directed to :— A young female Gorilla (Anthropopithecus gorilla) from Cape Lopez, purchased on March 30th. A young male Lar Gibbon (Hylobates lar) and a Leopard Cat (felis bengalensis) from Perak, presented by the Perak State Museum on March 31st. A Narrow-banded Mongoose (G'alidictis vittata) from Madagascar, new to the Collection, deposited on March 12th. A female Eland (Taurotragus oryx), born in the Menagerie on March 12th. A new Species of Duitker. Mr. Oldfield Thomas, F.R.S., exhibited the skin of a Duiker which had been shot in Nyasaland by Mr. 8. W. Frank, and presented by him to the National Museum. -It proved to bea Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. XXXII. 32 464 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON A NEW ANTELOPE. [May 1, most distinct new species, widely different from any known form, and was described as follows :— CEPHALOPHUS WALKERI Thos.* (Plate XX XV.) Abstr. P.Z.S. No. 31, p. 1, May 8, 1906. Size medium, about as in C. lewcogaster. General ground- colour of body dark greyish brown (between sepia and Prout’s brown), the hairs finely speckled with pale buffy ; but along the back, over an area about six inches wide, the speckling died out, and the colour darkened to nearly black, the hairs here being “ hair-brown” at their bases and dark blackish brown at their tips. Under surface and inner side of limbs little lighter than sides, about ‘“‘hair-brown.” Top of muzzle brownish black; forehead to between ears, including the frontal tuft, deep glossy black. Cheeks and chin pale fawn, a narrow edging to the black above the eyes stronger buffy. ars large, their backs grizzled brown or blackish, their bases and the fringe along their anterior edges fawn. Nape with a narrow median black line connecting the frontal and dorsal areas of black, edged on each side first with a lighter and then with a rather darker longitudinal band. Limbs wholly dark, before and behind, the digits nearly black. Tail imperfect in the type, its base dark above, dull whitish below. Length of fore foot, from “knee” to tip of hoof, 180 mm., this being about the same length asin C. lewcogaster and other middle- sized species. No other exact measurement was obtainable, but the prepared skin was 33 inches from nose to base of tail. Hab. 'Tuchila River, about 25 miles from Blantyre, Nyasa. Type. Adult female; skin without skull. B.M. No. 6.4.21.1. Shot in September 1905, and presented by Mr. Samuel W. Frank. This interesting Duiker differed so widely from any known species that Mr. Thomas found it difficult to say to what group of the genus it should be assigned. Perhaps it would prove to have an affinity with C. niger, but in any case no definite opinion could be expressed until male specimens, with skulls and horns, had been obtained. In some respects Herr Neumann’s description of C. lewco- prosopus t applied to C. walkeri, but the statements that in the former “‘ Bauch, Innenseite der Beine und Kehle sind weiss” and “ die Stirn ist roth” conclusively proved that it could not be of the same species. By Mr. Frank’s wish the species had been named after Mr. E. G. Walker, of Ndirandi, Blantyre, who had actually shot the specimen, though Mr, Frank had been the first to see it. The following papers were read :— * (The complete account of the new species described in this communication appears here; but since the name and preliminary diagnosis were published in the * Abstract,’ the species is distinguished by the name being underlined.— Error. ! + SB. Ges. nat. Fr. Berl. 1899, p. 18. DZS 1906 PIZOeCy: H.Goodebild, del, et lith. Huth imp CEPEBATZFORPINUWS WleAIUC IE ILI. 1906. | ON ANTHROPOID APES. 465 1, Further Notes on Anthropoid Apes. By the Hon. Water Roruscuinp, Pb.D., F.Z.S. [Received May 1, 1906.] Since my former paper (P. Z. 8. 1904, vol. ii. pp. 413-440) was read, I have obtained a considerable amount of fresh material including skins, skeletons, and skulls of Gorilla, Simia, and Pongo. I propose, however, here to deal only with a few facts, corrections, and additions in connection with the genera Gorilla and Simia. I have received several fresh skulls of Gorilla gorilla matschiet from the Camaroons collected by Mr. Bates, and they fully confirm both the distinctness of this geographical race and my diagnostic characters. A point in connection with these Gorillas I omitted to mention in my original article is that both Gorilla gorilla from Gaboon and Gorilla gorilla matschiet from 8S. Camaroons have individuals with red heads and others with dark heads with no ved. In the case of the typical Gaboon Gorilla gorilla the red- headed individuals outnumber the dark ones by 4 to 1, but of the S. Camaroons race, although we have a large number of skulls, the skins are too few to enable me to gauge the proportion. In Gorilla gorilla the dark-headed specimens have the head of a brownish-olive colour, while in G. g. matschiet the dark- headed individuals have a rufous-brown head. A striking difference between red-headed specimens of G. gorilla and G. g. matschiei is that in the former the red colour is sharply defined, while in the latter the brown forehead passes gradually into a deep rufous red on the crown and occiput. In a former collection Mr. Bates sent a skull of Professor Matschie’s G. gorilla diehli and in his last collection is a not very perfect skin of this race of Gorilla. As Prof. Matschie described the race from skulls only, this specimen completes the diagnosis. GORILLA GORILLA DIEHLI Matschie. Differs from the dark-headed specimens of other races in having the head almost entirely black, only the forehead having a few brown hairs. Black colour of arms and shoulders very intense. Back, belly, legs, and chest ashy grey, but darker than in G. gorilla and G'. g. matschiei. Beard on chin much longer than in G. g. matschiei, thus proving that G. beringert of Kirunga is only a local race of G. gorilla and not a distinct species ; the latter must stand as Gorilla gorilla beringert Matschie. Beard on sides of face black, instead of yellowish grey as in G. g. matschiei or ashy grey as in G. gorilla. Professor Matschie has recently described (Sitzungsb. natur- forsch. Fr, Berl. Nr. 10, pp. 279-283, 1905), under the name of Gorilla jacobi, another race of Gorilla gorilla. The type came from the station at the mouth of the Lobo River, near the influx of the River Djong, in the Dscha river-system, West Central Camaroons. The characters given depend on the immensely broad bones of the 32* 466 THE HON. W. ROTHSCHILD ON [May 1, skull, compressed face, and large size; the measurements given here explain this :— GORILLA GORILLA MATSCHIEI. GORILLA GORILLA JACOBI. Hind surface of Head: Greatest breadth at the mastoid pro- cesses 170 mm. 182 mm. Length of skull from arcus superciliaris to front of premawilla 160 mm. 138 mm. Premaxilla across canine alveole 90 mm. 78 mm. Width at last molar tooth 67 mm. 70 mm. Width outside upper edge of eye 145 mm. 154 mm. We thus know at present 5 geographical races of Gorilla as follows :— Gorilla gorilla, Gaboon. Gorilla gorilla matschiei. South Camaroons. Gorilla gorilla jacobt. West Central Camaroons. Gorilla gorilla diehli. North and Central Camavroons. Gorilla gorilla beringert. Kirunga, German Hast Africa. I give here three comparative measurements of the 5 races of Gorilla gorilla, which show how very widely the proportions of the skulls differ :— ; From centre of Crista Length of skull from Fee ey el eae: lambdoidea to anterior Arcus superciliaris to ; edge of Foramen magnum. end of Premawxilla. Gorilla gorilla 166 mm. 136 mm. 174 mm. Gorilla gorilla diehli 178 mm. 115 mm. 144 mm. Gorilla gorilla beringert 145 mm. 105 mm. 134 mm. Gorilla gorilla jacobi NSP To co seg 000 138 mm. Gorilla gorilla matschiet 177 mm. 140 mm. 160 mm. It may appear ridiculous to some that the Gorillas of the Camaroons should be divided into 3 races, but I must re- mind my readers that these large Apes, like the Orangs, probably cannot swim and therefore these races are separated and entirely isolated by the large rivers. I have in my possession 1 Gorilla gorilla diehli and 4 Gorilla gorilla and skulls of each, and also 2 skulls of Gorilla gorilla matschiet. Besides much other material of great interest, I have received a 1906. ] ANTHROPOID APES, 467 fully adult skin and skeleton and several skulls of Simia vellerosus Juliginosus (Schauf.), and from these I am able to point out the most striking differences between the skulls of this form and of an adult Sima vellerosus and to give measurements of both. The specimens came from Sette Cama. SIMIA VELLEROSUS. SIMIA V. FULIGINOSUS. Crista sagitalis: Slightly developed; greatest height Strongly developed; greatest height 3 mm. 9 mm. Supra- and exoccipital anchylosed: Ovoid; from top of ecrista to base of Triangular; from top of crista to foramen magnum 47 mm.; width base of foramen magnum 47 mm. ; 83 mm. width 77 mm. Parietals (together) : Length 62 mm.; breadth 95 mm. Length 72 mm.; breadth 87 mm. Hrontals (together) : Length 76 mm.; breadth at arcus Length 76 mm.; breadth at arcus superciliaris 114mm, superciliaris 106 mm. Nasals : Length 36 mm.; breadth 15 mm. Length 30 mm.; breadth 16 mm. Premavxilla: Length 30 mm.; breadth across canines Length 33 mm.; breadth across 62 mm. canines 58 mm. Length of skull front of arcus super- ciliaris to front of Premazxilla 97 mm. 95 mm. Binder surface of head: Greatest breadth at mastoid processes 123 mm. 126 mm. Breadth above mastoid processes 85 mm. 84 mm, Foramen magnum : Length 30 mm.; breadth 25 mm. Length 25 mm.; breadth 21 mm. Breadth outside occipital condyles 39 mm. 41 mm. Basioccipital : Length from front edge of foramen magnum 28 ram. 28 mm. Occipital condyles : Breadth at base 38 mm. 37 mm. Breadth at anterior edge 29 mm. 26 mm. Vomer : Length 24 mm. 23 mm. Breadth 9 mm. 10 mm. Pterygoid processes of sphenoid : Length 35 mm. 41 mm. Breadth singly 13 mm. 11 mm. Breadth across 50 mm. 42 mm. Articular condyle of lower jaw : Width 26 mm. 24 mm. Coronoid process: Greatest width 18 mm. Width between coronoid process and articular condyle 24 mm. 29 mm. Width from outside coronoid process to outside articular condyle 54 mm. 58 mm. Width between canines of upper jaw 39mm. 32 mm Lower jaw from base of canine to outer edge of articular condyle 128 mm. 135 mm. Width of facial part of skull at zygoma 124 mm, 106 mm. Besides the very striking differences in the supra- and exocci- 468 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [May 1, pital portion of back of the head, the measurements show that most of the bones of the skull are differently proportioned. The width of the face in S. vellerosus, moreover, is very much greater than in S. v. fuliginosus. 2. On Mammals collected in South-west Australia for Mr. W. E. Balston. By OLpFiELp Tuomas, F.R.S.* [Received March 7, 1906.] Following the generous example of our President and Mr, C. D. Rudd, Mr. W. E. Balston has been good enough to defray the expenses of a zoological collector, working for the benefit of our National Museum. The country chosen is Western Australia, where Mr. Balston has many personal interests, and where few Mammals have been collected since Mr, Gilbert, about 1842, made a collection for Mr. Gould, who was then preparing his great work on the Mammals of Australia, For his exploration of Western Australia Mr. Balston has secured the services of Mr. Guy OC. Shortridge, who had already had experience in Pondoland, South Africa, where he had collected Mammals and Birds for the South African Museum. The collections worked out in the present paper were obtained during the end of 1904 and the course of 1905 from the following localities :—. King River, on Mr. Balston’s estate near Albany, King George’s Sound, where Mr. Shortridge had the assistance of Mr. Balston’s sons. Wagin, on the railway halfway towards Perth. . Beverley, just south of York, about 70 miles east of Perth. York, Northam, Toodyay, and the Wongan Hills, all near together, are the localities which most frequently oceur on Mr. Gilbert’s labels. Southern Cross, on the Hastern Railway, about 220 miles east of Perth. Kalgurli, the gold-mining town, 140 miles further east, and about 200 miles from the south coast. Laverton, 150 miles N.E. of Kalgurli, and about 470 miles inland from the west coast at Geraldston. While the collections made at the first four places are full of interest and value, it has been a great disappointment to find that the gold-field country, at the two last-named localities, does not contain any desert mammal fauna, Mr. Shortridge having found that practically all mammals were absent except Bats. This seems to be due to the fact that the whole area is saline, without fresh water of any sort. Still further east, on the Spinifex flats, Mr. Shortridge has hopes of finding a desert fauna * [The complete account of the new species described in this communication appears here; but since the names and preliminary diagnoses were published in the * Abstract,’ such species are distinguished by the name being underlined.—Ep1rTor. | 1906.] MAMMALS FROM SOUTH-WEST AUSTRALIA. 469 comparable with that occurring in Central Australia, the region of Votoryctes. But even in the fertile south-west area, although the country supports a mammal-fauna rich in individuals, that richness is unfortunately now largely made up of introduced animals—cats, rabbits, rats, and mice, which appear to be the dominant members of the fauna at most places. Many of the smaller species, found in numbers by Mr. Gilbert in 1842, would seem to have been almost or quite exterminated by these introduced pests, and Mr. Shortridge has had great difficulty in catching any but the latter. The following extract from a letter of his from Beverley will give some idea of the character of the country and his trapping experiences :— “There are so many trappers about that I am beginning to get a good idea of the distribution of most of the larger mammals. With the exception of Pseudochirus occidentalis, I think I have obtained all the well-known larger mammals around Albany. “There is a very well-defined coast-belt extending about 25 to 30 miles inland, which is generally low and rather swampy, thickly covered with Jarrah and Red-Gum trees intermixed with very thick undergrowth, On following the railway northwards from Albany, the country makes a sudden change at about Mount Barker, where the grass-land begins; it then remains very much the same as far as York, the White Gum being the most plentiful tree and the under erowth being replaced by grass. The country in the grass-region is much easier to hunt in, as there are patches of undergrowth here and there where the animals collect. In this district there are many species which are quite unknown around Albany; in fact, all the mammals and birds which I got during a fortnight’s stay at the Arthur River, 20 miles west of Wagin, were different to those collected around Albany. I secured specimens of Macropus eugenet, Onychogale lunata, Thala- comys lagotis, and Bettongia lesuewri, and I heard that Spiny Anteaters, Dasyures, and Cheropus castanotis were also plentiful around the district.” The collection now described contains examples of 32 species, of which two bats have proved to be new, while I have also given subspecific names to the Dasyure and Hchidna, which have been previously known from Western Australia, but not distinguished from their eastern allies. It is, however, not the novelties which give to this fine col- lection its very great value to the Museum, but the excellent series of specimens belonging to species of which the original examples have become deteriorated by time, and in many cases by that most destructive agency of all, exhibition im a public gallery. These good modern specimens, for which we are in- debted to the generosity of Mr. Balston, will now form a basis on which further scientific work can be done on the fauna of this most interesting region. 470 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [May 1, 1. NycTroPHILUS TIMORIENSIS Geoff. @ (Bat). King River, King George’s Sound. Near sea-level. 190, 191. Southern Cross. 1160’. Forearms 44-45 mm. 2. NycroPHiLus GEOFFROYI Leach. ¢. 166. Jaurdi Hills, near Kalgurli. 1250’, 6.175. @. 176,189. Laverton. 1650’. These specimens are of much interest, for they conclusively prove the correctness of Mr. Tomes’s assertion that the small NV. geoffroyt of Leach, with a forearm of about 35-36 mm., is a different species from JV. timoriensis. 'Tomes’s specimen No. 1, from Albany, King George’s Sound, recently acquired with his collection by the British Museum, may be treated as typical of Leach’s species, whose type was without locality. Mr. Shortridge’s specimens agree very well with this Albany individual in proportions, but are rather browner in colour. 3. VESPERTILIO PUMILUS Gray. 3 (Bat a). 2&3, King River, King George’s Sound. Near sea-level. February. 3. 139, 141, 142, 143. Parker's Range, Southern Cross. 1163’. 9-17 August. g-. 161, 164. @. 140, 148, 162, 163, 167. Jaurdi Hills, Kalgurli. 1250’. 21 Sept.—5 Oct. “The most plentiful bat around Albany.”—G. C. 8. 4, PIPISTRELLUS TASMANIENSIS Gould. Noctulina tasmanensis Gray, List Mamm. B. M. p. 194 (1843) (sine descr.). Vespertilio tasmaniensis Gould, Mamm. Austr. ui. pl. xlviii. (1858). Vesperugo krefftit Peters, MB. Ak. Berl. 1869, p. 404; Dobson, Cat. Chir. B. M. p. 232 (1878). @ (Bat c 1). King River, King George’s Sound, 26 February, 1905. Near sea-level. This is a very rare bat, no previous specimen having reached the Museum since the original type referred to by Gray and Gould. Another example, from Tasmania, is in the Tomes collection. 5. PIPISTRELLUS REGULUS, sp. n. Bats 4,5. King River, King George’s Sound. Sea-level. A medium-sized species of the group with minute outer incisors. Size rather larger than in P. kuAli. Fur rather long and shaggy (hairs of back slightly over 5 mm. in length), extending thickly as a well-defined band on the interfemoral above for its basal half-inch to the level of the knees. Below, the same area is more thinly covered, and there are a few hairs on the membrane near the sides of the body. General colour above dark Prout’s 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM SOUTH-WEST AUSTRALIA. ATI brown, the terminal third of the hairs lighter and more ap- proaching russet, especially posteriorly, the basal two-thirds blackish. Below, the ends of the hairs are nearer wood-brown, except on the interfemoral band, where they become whitish. Kars small, too much shrunk and distorted for exact description, but their inner margin appears to be unusually convex; tragus not broadened. Wings to the base of the toes. A narrow post- calcareal lobule present. Skull long and narrow, with an unusually low flattened brain- case; no occipital helmet, the lambdoidal crests commencing rather low down on each side. Inner upper incisor bifid, with a well-marked external secondary cusp near its tip, wearing off in older specimens. Outer incisors small, not reaching halfway from the cingulum to the outer cusp of the inner incisors; hollowed out behind to receive the tip of the lower canine; a small secondary cusp on its internal edge. Small premolar quite minute, crushed in the angle between the canine and second premolar, which press against each other out- side it; it is evidently in an extreme state of reduction, and has become altogether lost on one side in the type. Lower incisors tricuspid, transverse, overlapping. Dimensions of the type, measured in skin :— Forearm 38 mm. Head and body (c.) 47 mm.; tail 44; third finger 65; lower leg and foot (c.u.) 26. Skull—greatest length to base of incisors 12°7; basal length in middle line 9:5; mastoid breadth 7°2; intertemporal breadth 3; palate length 4:6; front of canine to back of m® 4:7; front of lower canine to back of m, 5. Type. No. 4, sex not ascertainable. B.M. No. 6.8.1.18. Although without any very strongly marked characteristics, this dull-looking little bat does not agree with any species hitherto described. Altogether Australia is poor in members of this widely distributed genus, the only other Pipistrelles being one from N. Australia, referred to P. abramus, and the large and aberrant P. tasmaniensis. The two specimens of P. regulus sent home by Mr. Shortridge were not captured by him, but were made into skins from old mounted specimens. 6, CHALINOLOBUS GOULDI Gray. 3. 144, 145, 146, 147. Parker's Range, Southern Cross. 1163’. 9-17 August. 6. 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157,159, 2. 149,158, 160. Jaurdi Hills, near Kalgurli, 1250’. 21-24 September. 6.169. 92.168. North Pool, Laverton. 1650’. 28 October. Not previously recorded from Western Australia. 7. CHALINOLOBUS MORIO Gray, 3. 50 (in spirit), King River, King George’s Sound. 472 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [May 1, 8. SCOTEINUS BALSTONI Thos. Abstr. P. Z. 8. No. 31, p. 2, May 8, 1906. Or fs, 2,170, 171, 172. North Pool, Vavertons cae? 19-26 October, 1905. 2.177 (inspirit). Hawksnest, Laverton. 1650'. 7 November. Allied to S. greyt Gray ; the fur bicolor instead of unicolor. General characters and size very much as in S.greyi*, Fur of medium length; hairs of back about 4-5 mm. in length. General colour above, when the hairs are smoothed down, pale brown (varying from a tone between wood-brown and fawn to one between fawn and drab), this colour occupying the terminal third of the fur, the basal two-thirds being dark smoky brown, con- trasting markedly with the light tips. Below, the hairs are equally dark at base, with their tips pale pinkish buff. Hairs of chin, throat, and pubic region nearly or quite pale to their bases. Ears and membranes pale brown throughout. Ears slightly larger than in S. greyt, but very similar in shape. Wings to the base of the outer toe. A well-marked postcalcareal lobule present. Skull broad, stout and flat, as usual in this group; larger and flatter than in the alcoholic topotype a of S. greyi. A well- marked occipital “ helmet” present, but the anterior ridge from it does not run forward on to the middle line of the frontals, where, indeed, there isa slight longitudinal concavity. Brain-case rather small in proportion to the size of the skull. Teeth about as in S. greyt. Upper incisors standing rather further away from the canines. Dimensions of the type, the starred measurements taken in the flesh :-— Forearm 36 mm. (four other specimens 34-35). *Head and body 55; *tail 40; *hind foot 7; *ear 15 (13 ina spirit-specimen). Skull—ereatest length to base of incisors 15; basal length in middle line 10°8; zygomatic breadth 10-1; front of upper canine to back of m® 5:2; front of lower canine to back of m, 5:9. Type. Adult female. B.M.No. 6.8.1.41. Original number 170. Although the essential characters of this bat are very much as in S. greyt, its conspicuously different bicolor fur readily separates it from that species, whose fur is quite unicolor, dark brown or chestnut. No doubt better material of S. greyi, for reso would show further points of difference. I have had much pleasure in naming this well- marked species in honour of Mr. Balston, to whose generosity science is indebted * The alcoholic specimen a of S. greyi, called “ type” hy Dobson (who was under the impression that the species was first described by himself), is rather smaller than the skin figured ‘by Gray in the ‘ Voyage of the Erebus and Terror,’ specimen } of Dobson’s Catalogue. Nowthat a named figure is recognised as conferring priority, the species will stand to Gray’s credit, with specimen 6 the type of it. Even were Gray’s naming invalid, however, Gould’s descr iption in the ‘Mammals of Australia’ (1858) would ‘antedate Dobson’s. 1906.] MAMMALS FROM SOUTH-WEST AUSTRALIA. 473 for the valuable results due to Mr. Shortridge’s expedition to Western Australia. 9, NycrinomuUs AUSTRALIS Gray. @. 176. North Pool, Laverton. 29 October, 1905. 1650! This is the first record of this fine species in Western Australia. The specimen does not seem to differ in any important respect from the type described by Gray. _ That type, however, is not specimen a of the Catalogue, a spirit example presented by Mrs. Stanley in 1855, but specimen d, which was purchased in 1861 at Stevens’s sale-rooms, from the collection of the United Service Museum, to which it had been given in or before 1838 by Major Macarthur. Both the original description by Gray in 1838, and an independent one by Gould in the ‘Mammals of Australia’ (1858), agree so closely with this specimen as to show that no error has been made in tracing its history. Mr. Shortridge says: “‘ These Bats come out rather late and are swift flyers. When passing over water they often dive right into it, probably in pursuit of water-beetles. The stomach contained remains of beetles.” 0. Mus ratrus L. 6. 53, 61,62. 9. 60. King River. fel 11. Mus norvecicus Hrxl. G00. QD. 59. Wiking iver. 12. Mus muscuuus L. 6. 126, 129-130, 131. 9. 127, 128. Cookerdine Lake Southern Cross. 1163’. 3g. 133. 9.132. Parker’s Range, Southern Cross. 3. 165. Jaurdi Hills, near Kalgurli. 1250’. @. 174. North Pool, near Laverton. 1650’. 9.178. Hawksnest, near Laverton. 1650’. Ce een OOM OANOA, Wr 3. I Li, don oon Ol. kane, River. 13. Mus Fuscrpes Waterh. @ 9; 12) 14) 15, 31) 2.6, 7, 10, 11; 32) S468. Kame River. These specimens are clearly Waterhouse’s Jf, fuscipest, of which they are practically topotypes, while the aquatic Rat figured and described by Gould as I. fuscipes in the ‘ Mammals of Australia’ should bear Gray’s name of JL, lutreola §. * The figures in italics represent specimens numbered by species before Mr. Shortridge commenced the continuous notation of his skins. + Zool. Voy. ‘ Beagle,’ Mamm. p. 66, pl. xxv. (1839). { Vol. iii. pl. xi. (1851). § Grey’s ‘ Expeditions in Australia,’ ii. Appendix, p. 409 (1841). AT4 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [May 1, 14. Hypromys Fruuiernosus Gould. 6. 8,97. ©. 4,65. King River. 3. 4,6. 92.5. Big Grove, King George’s Sound. “Trapped near water. Feeds chiefly on fresh-water Crustacea.” These specimens all agree in their dark colour with the original specimens described by Gould. 15. Macropus Gicantevs Zimm. @. 18. King River. 100’. Represents the I. ocydromus of Gould. “Caught by dog. Not plentiful around King River.”—G. C.S. 16. Macrorus rnuFrus Desm. 6. 182, 183, 184, 185, 186,188. ©. 180,181,187. Hawks- nest, near Laverton. 1650’. One of these specimens, a male, is abnormal in having a well- marked rudimentary pouch in the position of that of the female. Only one of the testes of this example had descended into the scrotum. Although at the date of the ‘ Catalogue of Marsupials’ the Red Kangaroo was not known with certainty to occur in Western Australia, it has since been recorded by several observers, and Mr. Rothschild has given a subspecific name to a form of it from the north-west corner of the continent. 17. Macroprvus 1rMa Jourd. 6. 23. Mount Barker, Southern Cross. 500’. 6. 4,44. 9.16. King River. 100’. “Local name, ‘ Brush Kangaroo.’ Seldom seen in the daytime, comes out to feed in the evening.”—G@. C. 8. 18. MAcropus EUGENEI Desm. 2.1. Arthur River, Wagin. 19. Macropus BRACHYURUS Quoy & Gaim. 3. 19, 20, 23, 34,56. 9. 58, 67,68. King River. GOT 12) Ns lo. 2.9) 14 1G) BieGrove; kane: George’s Sound. “Seems to be found only along the coast districts. Trapped in marshy ground with maize as bait.”—G@. CS. 20. ONYCHOGALE LUNATA Gould. 36.% 2.1. Arthur River, Wagin. 21, BErronGIA PENICILLATA Gray. Ono; 6. 2), 3) 2,35)40, Kine River, “Trapped with oatmeal.”—G. OC. S. 1906. | MAMMALS FROM SOUTH-WEST AUSTRALIA. 475 22. BErronGIA LESUEURI Quoy & Gaim. @. 1,2. Arthur River, Wagin. 23. TARSIPES SPENSERZ Gray. CeO, O22. Kame iriver ‘No. 70, Caught in the bottom of a well.” ‘‘No. 2. Had one young in the pouch; probably just born, being about the size of a grain of wheat.”—G. C. S. As Mr. Palmer has shown*, Gray’s name spensere has priority of publication over that of rostratus given by Messrs. Gervais and Verreaux. 24, Dromicta concinNA Gould. @. 192. Southern Cross. 25, TRICHOSURUS VULPECULA Kerr. 24° 20, 2%, 28, 30.) 9 26, 29. Mi Barker: . 41, 48, 49, 55, 73, 74. ©. 3, 4, 20, 36, 42, 45, 46, 47, 66, 71, 72. King River. “Trapped among Red Gums. Bait, oatmeal.’”—G. C.S. The majority of these specimens have the end of the tail white, thus corresponding with Ogilby’s Phalangista xanthopus‘. Mr. Shortridge says that ‘ specimens without the white tip to the tail are considered rare.” 96. THALACOMYS t LAGOTIS Reid. Perugale lagotis of the ‘ Catalogue of Marsupials.’ 6.1. Arthur River, Wagin. 2.134. Parker’s Range, Southern Cross. “‘The tail seems to be slightly prehensile.”—G@. C. S. 27. IsooDON OBESULUS Shaw. Perameles obesula auctorum. Cl Oey GikGinemhyiven: $. 3,5. 9.4. Big Grove, King George’s Sound. Arthur River, Wagin. ‘¢ Native name, ‘ Waint.’ “Trapped in marshy country.”—G. CS. It appears to me that it would be more in accordance with the modern estimate of the value of genera to subdivide the old genus * Index Gen. Mamm. p. 664, footnote (1904). + P,Z.S. 1831, p. 135. < Mr. Palmer (Index Gen. Mamm. p. 677, 1904) criticises my adoption of the term Thalacomys for this genus on the ground that it is an ‘‘obvious misprint” for Thylacomys, which latter was used (but as a nomen nudum) in the ‘ Athenzeum’ two years before Blyth put Thalacomys in a tenable manner in his 1840 edition of Cuvier. But we ought to be very chary of changing names, supposed to be misprints, unless their obviousness as such is quite clear, and in this case I do not think we are justified in calling Thalacomys a misprint, when it was the second of the two forms to occur, as though it had been “corrected,” and was again twice repeated by its author in subsequent editions (ef. Ann. Mag. N. H. [7] v. p. 222, 1900). 476 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [May 1, Perameles into four, corresponding to the groups A, ¢, ¢’, and f” of the cranial synopsis of the species in the ‘ Catalogue of Marsupials.’ These are all natural groups of species, easily distinguishable both by external and by well-marked cranial characters, as follows :— Iscopon Desm. . Type, J. obesulus. Other species, macrurus, moresbyensis, auratus, barrowensis. Incisors 3. Bulle large, complete, pear-shaped. HcuyMirPerA Less. Type, H. doreyana. Other species, cockerelli. Incisors 4. Bull small, hemispherical, more or less incomplete. PERORYCTES, g. 0. Type, P. rafrayanus. Other species, broadbenti, longicaudatus, ornatus. Incisors 2. Bulle as in Hehymipera. Brain-case normal. Lacrymal bone rounded externally. PERAMELES Geoff. Type, P. nasuta. Other species, gunni, bougaimvillei, eremiana. Incisors 3. Bulle small, hemispherical, complete. Brain-case abnormally short. Lacrymal forming a sharp overhanging edge externally. All the Australian species thus fall into Zsoedon and Perameles, which were long ago recognised as very different groups by Gould. The other two genera are Papuan. With regard to the name used for the first genus, /soodon, I find on reconsideration that my selection of obesula as the type of Thylacis Iliger was incorrect, as it is in opposition to the sound principle supported by Dr. Allen*, that if a genus contains exactly the same species as an earlier one it is a synonym of that one, and no elimination or selection of different types can make it valid. For Thylacis (and Thylax Oken also) consisted of obesula and nasuta, which were likewise the constituent members of the original Perameles, so that neither Thylacis nor Thylax can be withdvawn from their positions as full synonyms of that genus, and the next name in date, Jsoodon, has to be taken for the common Australian Bandicoot. 28. DASYURUS GEOFFROYI FORTIS, subsp. n. 6. 1,2. Arthur River, Wagin. Alt. 840°. Similar in essential characters to true geoffroyi, but larger, the difference specially marked in male skulls. Externally fortis has the belly hairs whiter terminally, while in true geoffroyi they are more or less tinged with creamy yellow. The underside of the tail is dark for a rather greater extent. Skin of palms, * Bull. Am. Mus. N. H. xvi. p. 116 (1902). See also Thos., P. Biol. Soc. Wash. xy. p. 153 (1902). 1906. ] . MAMMALS FROM SOUTH-WEST AUSTRALIA. AT7 sides and underside of digits wholly blackish ; in geoffroyi there is generally a whitish tinge on these parts. In the skull the only point to be noticed, besides the superior size, is that the bulle are decidedly larger in fortis than in geofroyt. Dimensions of the type, measured in the flesh :— Head and body 650 mm.; tail 350; hind foot 63; ear 50. Skull—basal length 72 mm. Type. Male. B.M. No. 6.8.1.340. Original number 1. Col- lected 1 July, 1905, by G. C. Shortridge. Tn the ‘ Catalogue of Marsupials’ I drew attention to the greater size of the West Australian representatives of the Black-tailed Dasyure; and now that Mr. Shortridge’s specimens fully confirm the difference, I think the animal should have a subspecific name. More detailed skull-measurements are given in the Catalogue. In the female sex there does not seem to be so marked a difference between the two forms, but the material available for comparison is at present very imperfect. 29. PHASCOGALE FLAVIPES LEUCOGASTRA Gray. Ge ise on ee era River, These fresh examples of the West Australian form of Ph. flavipes are very welcome, as the few skins contained in the Museum collection are much deteriorated. My. Shortridge’s specimens, coming from the rainy south-west district, are of a rather more “ saturate” colour than the old skins, but how much these latter have faded it is not easy to say. 30. SMINTHOPSIS MURINA Waterh. 6. 1,2,3. King River. ‘“‘ Trapped on marshy ground in Ti-tree scrub.”—G. C. 9. 31. Myrmecospius FASCIATUS Waterh. ©. i. Arthur River, Wagin. 32. TACHYGLOSSUS* ACULEATUS INEPTUS Thos. Abstr. P. Z.S. No. 31, p. 2, May 8, 1906. 6. 122, 123,124. ©. 125. Parker’s Range, Southern Cross. A very spinous form, with small brain-case and short snout. Coat completely spinous, no hairs perceptible on the upper surface at all, except the well-marked tuft over each ear. Below also the fur consists wholly of flattened bristles. Colour above more mottled than usual, owing to the large proportion of white or black and white spines. Third hind claw not lengthened, little longer than the fourth, as usual in typical aculeatus. Skull small, with a fairly broad but not greatly inflated brain- case and very short snout. As a result the index of breadth is as high as in the large Tasmanian 7’. a. setosus (average of three - * Not Echidna. See Ann. Mus. Genov. [2] xviii. p. 621 (1897). 478 ON MAMMALS FROM SOUTH-WEST AUSTRALIA, [May 1, skulls 45:1), while the rostral index (78°8) is very considerably less than in any specimens hitherto recorded. The following measurements, when compared with the table I published in 1885*, will show these differences better than any description :— Pee rctligreatest bs Length | Length aetna Inter- length. | breadth g . of of index orbital Page all *| breadth. | brain-case. | rostrum. * | breadth. | ys g...| 104 | 478 | 459 | 565 435 | 769 | 165 124 g...| 1035 46°7 45°1 54°5, 43 78°8 15 125 2 ...| 1038 46 44:3 54:5 44, 80°7 15°5 lAverages...| 1037 | 468 | 45:1 | 551 435 | 788 | 163 |Averages ) in true 110°9 45°7 41-2 53°4 53:2 99°7 —_— laculeata As usual in mainland specimens there are no condyloid vacuities. Nasal and anterior palatine foramina short. Postorbital projection unusually strongly marked. Anterior, cylindrical, part of zygo- mata bowed downwards, so as to form a more or less downwardly projecting angle; as a result of this, when the skull is laid on a flat surface the tip of the muzzle stands up some way above the surface, as though the muzzle itself were bent upwards; in true aculeata it lies perfectly flat. External dimensions of the type, taken in the fiesh :— Head and body 420 mm. ; tail 90; hind foot 55. Type. Adult male. B.M. No. 6.8.1.363. Original number 123, Collected 16 August, 1905. The first discoverer of the Echidna in Western Australia was Mr. Gilbert, who, in collecting for Mr. Gould about 1840, obtained specimen / of the ‘Catalogue of Marsupials.’ Another example, in every way similar to those now sent by Mr. Shortridge, was pre- sented to the Museum by Baron F. von Miiller in 1888. The animal has therefore long been known to inhabit this region, but for a knowledge of its correct affinities we are indebted to the uniform series presented by Mr. Balston. That West Australia should possess a special race is only natural, since New Guinea, Eastern Australia, and Tasmania have each a characteristic form. In Mr. Rothschild’s recent description of Echidna hystria multiaculeata t no reference is made to the skull; but from the locality (South Australia) and the presence of hairs between the spines it would appear to have nothing to do with 7. a. ineptus. * P, Z.S. 1885, p. 335. + Nov. Zool. xii. p. 306 (1905). NASW IL\O\i ial OOO 15 Horace Knight del.et lith. West, Newman chromo. ie PIDOP TRA CORE C TED BY ALTE, VIBE EAN SBpe2 ab ai@Ne 1906.] ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. 479 3. On the Lepidoptera collected by the Officers on the recent Tibet Frontier Commission. By H. J. Hiwss, E.R.S., F.Z.8., Sir Grorce Hampson, Bt., F.Z.8., and J. HartLeEy Durrant, F.E.S. [Received May 1, 1906. ] (Plate XXXVI.*) | BUTTERFLIES. By H. J. Euwes, F.R.S. A large collection of Butterflies was sent to the British Museum in 1905 made by various officers who took part in the Tibet Frontier Commission in 1903 and afterwards accompanied the Expedition to Lhasa. The localities in which they were taken have been so fully described by Capt. H. J. Walton, who was Medical Officer and Botanist to the Commission, in ‘The Ibis’ for January 1906, that I need not say much about the country ; but remembering that the expedition was, during a large part of the time, in a state of actual warfare and that there was no ento- mologist with the party, it will be understood that this collection must be regarded as only representing a part of the species which exist there. The localities are as follows :—Tungu, a valley near the head of the Lachen River in Native Sikhim close to the Tibetan frontier, elevation 15,000—16,000 feet ; Lhanak, a valley to the west of this at an equal or greater elevation; Khamba Jong, a Tibetan fort fifteen miles beyond the Kongra-lama Pass, at an elevation of 15,000-16,000 feet, where the Commission stayed during the summer of 1903; on the march from Phari to Gyantze in June and July 1904; Gyantze, where the Mission was besieged for some time and the greater part of the insects were collected ; and at and near Lhasa, where a few specimens were afterwards taken in August. With a few exceptions most of the species enumerated are known to occur in Ladak. My paper on Butterflies from Sikhim, P.Z.8. 1882, p. 398, should be referred to; also Col. Fawcett’s paper, op. cit. 1904, ii. p. 134. 1. PAPILIO MACHAON var. SIKKIMENSIS Moore, J. A.S. B. 1884, p. 47. Seems to be common in Alpine Sikhim and at Khamba Jong; some specimens have shorter tails than usual, approaching the variety ladakensis Moore. 2. PARNASSIUS EPAPHUS var, SIKKIMENSIS Elwes, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 399, pl. xxv. £.4; rectitis jacquemonti var., id. op. cit. 1886, p. 36. Though Staudinger, Oberthiir, and other writers have used the * Wor explanation of the Plate, see p. 498. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. XX XIII. 33 480 DR, H, J. ELWES, SIR G. HAMPSON, AND MR. J. H. DURRANT [May 1 name of epaphus for this insect, I venture to maintain the opinion expressed in my paper on the genus above cited, that it should properly be called jacquemonti Bdv. A few specimens only from Tungu and Lhanak. 3, PARNASSIUS IMPERATOR var. AUGUSTUS. P. augustus Fruhstorfer, Insekten Borse, xx. A fair series of specimens taken at Tungu and Khamba Jong seems to show that this form is not sufficiently unlike imperator to be distinguished, though some of the specimens are more yellowish in tint and more heavily marked than those from Kast Tibet, to which they come closer than to the form imperatria Alph., with which Fruhstorfer compares it. 4, PARNASSIUS HARDWICKEI Gray. Several specimens from Tungu; small and as variable as usual from this district. 5. Pieris (APoBIA) DUBERNARDI Obth., var. chUMBIENSIS Nicév. J.A.S. B. lxvi. p. 563, pl. i. f. 6. A number of specimens from Gyantze, taken in June 1904, are smaller on the average than the type, and come nearer to the form from N.E. Tibet which has been called koslovi by Alphéraky. 6. Preris Brassica L. A few specimens from Gyantze do not differ from those found in Alpine Sikhim and usually called var. sikkimensis. 7. PrIERIS CANIDIA Sparrm. var. PALHARCTICA Ster. Stett. ent. Zeit, 1886, p. 198. A good deal of variation is shown in the series sent from Tungu, Gyantze, and Lhasa, most of them being heavily marked and dark on the under side. 8. PIERIS MELETE var. AJAKA Moore, P. Z.8. 1865. p. 490. A few from Tungu and Gyantze. 9. Cotas BERYLLA Faweett, P. Z. 8. 1904, ii. p.139, pl. ix. £.8, 9. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 13 3.) C. nina, id. op. cit. p. 140, t. 9. f. 9, 2. A large series of this fine species from Khamba Jong and Gyantze shows so much variation that I am inclined to believe that C. nina is nothing more than an extreme form of the female. A much greater range of variation is found in some of the Tibetan Colias, especially in the females of eogene; and some females of the var. arida Alph. from N.E. Tibet are very similar to this. The specimens taken at Gyantze are on the average much darker in colour than those from Khamba Jong, and without the inter- mediate forms one might be able to distinguish them. 1906.] ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION, 48] 10. Cotas DuBIA, sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. figs. 83,99.) Though very unwilling to add a new name to this difficult genus, which already suffers from much synonymy, Iam unable to avoid so doing under the following circumstances, which I will describe chronologically :— 1. In 1865 Felder described from Ladak as C. eogene a large brilliant form which is now known to have a very wide range in Central Asia and to vary extremely, though the males without exception have a black unspotted marginal band on both wings. 2. In 1878 Moore described as C. stoliczkana a small high- Alpine form of this or possibly a distinct, species (cf. Elwes in J.A.8. B. 1898, p. 465). 3. In 1893 Griim, in Hor. Soc. Ent. Ross. xxv. p. 477, described as eogene var. leecha a female collected by McArthur in Ladak, of which the type is now in the British Museum. 4, In 1904 Col. Fawcett (¢f. P. Z.S. 1904, ii. pl. ix. figs. 10, 10 a) referred a species which now turns out to be quite distinct to var. leecht Griim. I may say that Colias cocandica var. leechi Elwes, J. B.N.H.S. xi. p. 466, though it belongs to the same section and comes from the same valley in Ladak, the Chonging Valley, is a distinct species of a much paler colour and different pattern. 5. In 1903 Fruhstorfer described first in the ‘ Insekten-Bérse’ and afterwards in the ‘ Iris,’ vol. xvii. p. 48, t.1.3¢,49,a Colias from Alpine Sikhim as C’.. eogene miranda, which was stated by Col. Fawcett to have been described from his figures; but Mr. W. Rothschild has kindly lent me for comparison three specimens sent him by Fruhstorfer, of which two males are un- doubtedly stoliczkana, and the female marked type is apparently the same species, but not the specimen figured by Faweett, of which the female figured in the ‘ Iris’ might be a bad copy. In J.B. N. H.8. Uc. I mentioned as probably closely allied to stoliczkana a pair of small Colias from Alpine Sikhim, of which the male, being badly rubbed, did not show clearly what I now see in fresher specimens, namely, that the borders are distinctly spotted. In 1904, writing of these specimens in the ‘ Iris,’ p. 390, and having no fresh male of the species before me, I still confused them with the specimens sent as miranda by Fruhstorfer to Mr. Rothschild; but now, on receipt of a pair, of which the male is from Khamba Jong and the female from the Lhanak Valley, I find them identical with my old pair, and, so far as Mr. Heron, Col. Bingham, and myself can judge, they must have a new name. The species might be regarded as a distant relative of cocandica, but the orange colour is much deeper than in any specimen of that species; and as the variety which, geographically, comes nearest (var. leecht Griim) is most unlike dubia in colour, I dismiss this theory. If we could adopt the assumption that stoliczkana was in this locality sexually dimorphic, having the males with spotted bands like the females, the difficulty would be solved ; but with the exception, perhaps, of OC. boothii Curt. we 33* 482 DR. H. J. ELWES, SIR G. HAMPSON, AND MR. J. H. DURRANT | May 1, know of no species in which sexual dimorphism exists in the male, and I am thus driven to give a name to an insect of which my knowledge is not sufficiently complete to enable me to describe it properly. 11. CoLIAs FIELDII. A large series from Tungu and Gyantze shows a good deal of variation as usual. 12. CALLEREBIA WALTONI, sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. figs. 14 ¢, 1h), Dp) This is one of the group named Paralasa by Moore, to which shallada, kalinda, and mani belong, but it seems to be sufficiently distinct to be described as a new species. It is smaller than any of the above-named, and above shows only a faint trace of chocolate on the fore wing, where the ocelli are very small and sometimes absent; the hind wing is plain dark brown. Below, the fore wing is chocolate with the apex and outer margin pale fawn- colour, a large apical ocellus with two black spots surrounded by a yellowish ring. Hind wing below pale fawn freckled with darker spots, an indistinct submarginal band, having obscure whitish spots on its outer edge in the same position as those of shallada. Female like the male, but showing more or less chocolate on the fore wing above. 2 ¢ and 1 2 come nearer in all characters to C. kalinda, of which they might be considered a small, starved form. 13. CHNEIS PUMILUS Var. SIKKIMENSIS Stgr. Cat. 1901, p. 53. GH. pumilus Klwes, P. Z.8. 1882, pl. xxv. f. 3. Numerous specimens from Tungu agree with the figure aheve cited, which has been consider ed by Staudinger andl others sufficiently distinct from the paler form from Tadak and that from the Pamirs and N.E. Tibet (palearcticus Stgr.) to require a varietal name. 14, Ca@nonympuHa sinica Alph. Stett. ent. Zeit. 1888, p. 66. A few taken at Chaksam on the Brahmaputra River at 12,000 feet on July 30 agree with those in Leech’s collection from near Ta-tsien-lu. 1 ARGYNNIS PALES var. SIFANICA Griim, Hor. Soc. Ent. Ross. xxv. p. 406, Four specimens from Tungu agree with two previously received by me from Alpine Sikhim, where it seems to be rare, and belong to a race which occurs in imaseern Tibet near Ta- eee lu and at Amdo in N.E. Tibet, so named by Griim. 16. ARGYNNIS LATHONIA var, ISHEA Elwes (ex Gray), Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1885, p. 556. A few specimens of the usual Himalayan type. 1906. ] ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. 483 17. Ar@ynnis cLARA Blanch. Jacq. Voy. iv. p. 20, Ins. t. (1844). A. claudia Fawcett, P. Z.8. 1904, ii. p. 136, pl. ix. f. 3. Specimens from Khamba Jong and Gyantze seem to be inter- mediate between the typical form from Kashmir and the smaller, paler form described as clarina by Staudinger from N.E. Tibet. I venture to think that if Col. Fawcett had seen a series of both he would not have described A. claudia. 18. Araynnis cemmata Butl. Ann. N. H. 1881, vii. p. 32. Numerous specimens from Khamba Jong and Tungu. 19. ArGyNNIS ALTIssimA Elwes, P. Z.8. 1882, p. 403. Many specimens from Tungu and the Lhanak Vallev_ 20. MELITHA SINDURA Var. SIKKIMENSIS Moore. M. tibetana Fawcett, P. Z.8. 1904, 11. p. 135, pl. 1x. f. 3. A very long series of specimens from Khamba Jong and Gyantze leaves me in doubt whether to treat the insects as varieties of the same species: those from the former locality being the same as those which I formerly described and figured in my ‘ Catalogue of the Butterflies of Sikhim’ asa variety of sindwra, afterwards called stkkimensis by Moore; whilst those from Gyantze, bein larger, might be referred to balbita Moore by those to whom names are dearer than Nature. I confess my inability to draw a line between them on account of the great variation in both sexes. Anyone who will examine carefully the magnificent series of Melitea from Asia now incorporated in the British Museum Collection must see that any attempt to define many of them in such a way that they can be recognised with any degree of certainty will be a failure, and Staudinger’s Catalogue, full as it is of marks of interrogation, proves the truth of what he told me himself, namely, that their classification must be largely a matter of personal opinion. 21. VANESSA KASHMIRENSIS Koll. Hiigel, Kaschmir, p. 442, t. 9. A few specimens from Tungu, Khamba Jong, and Gyantze. IT cannot follow Staudinger in placing V. kashmirensis as a variety of wrtice, which is represented in the Western Himalayas by var. rigana, and in the east by var. chinensis, which, however, has not yet been taken, so far as I know, in Sikhim. 22. VANESSA URTICH var. CHINENSIS Leech, Butt. China &. ee OO leexccvart. lk A few specimens from Gyantze. 23. VANESSA LADAKENSIS Moore, Ann. Nat. Hist. 1878, p. 227. A few specimens from Khamba Jong and Gyantze. 484 DR. H.J, ELWES, SIR G., HAMPSON, AND MR, J. H. DURRANT [May 1, 24, PyRAMEIS INDICA Herbst. One specimen from Khamba Jong. 25, Pyramers carpur Linn. Several specimens from Gyantze. 26. PoLYGONIA C-ALBUM var. TIBETANA Elwes, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1888, p. 197, pl. x. f. 1. A few specimens from Gyantze agree with those formerly received from the Chumbi Valley. 27. CHRYSOPHANUS PHLG@AS Linn. Specimens from Lhasa and Gyantze might be called var, chinensis Felder ; but this variety is not constant. 28. LycHNA YOUNGHUSBANDI, sp.n, (Plate XXXVI. fig. 103.) Nearest to L. felicis Ob. (Et. Ent. xi. p. 21, t. 7. £.52; Leech, Butt. China, ii. p. 8307) from Eastern Tibet. Both sexes, how- ever, differ from that species in being dark leaden grey instead of greyish brown above, and in having the marginal spots on the hind wing absent or but very faintly marked; and on the under side in having the second external band of marginal spots on the fore wing absent or only faintly marked. This may stand a good species until intermediate forms are obtained, and though allied to felicis it has no other near ally known tome, It was abundant at Gyantze, and was also taken further south on the march from Phari. I name this species in recognition of the great assistance given by Sir F. Younghusband to the officers of the Mission in their scientific explorations. 29. Lycana orion Pall., var. A single specimen only from between Phari and Gyantze is not separable from orion, though it might be called var. orithyia Griim, of which the types, from Amdo, are before me. 30. Lycamya semiarcus Roth. var. ANNULATA, var.n. (Plate XXXVI. figs. 12g, 119.) Though this may be distinguished from all the numerous varieties of semiargus known to me by the well-marked white ring round the central spot on the fore wing below, yet this is hardly a character of sufficient importance to be specific, being found as a local variation in some others of the genus. The males are of the same dull blue above, but the border is darker than usual in semiargus, and the under side is more silvery as in sebrus. There is also a more or less well-marked series of marginal black spots on both wings below as in var. bellis, the eastern form of semiargus, but no orange ocelli on the hind wing below as in that form. The females are dark brown above as in semiargus. 1906. | ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. 485 This variety was taken abundantly at Gyantze. No form of sennargus has hitherto been found in Tibet, so far as I know, though it is found in the Pamir and Thianshan Mountains. 31. Lyc@NA PHERETES Hiibn. Two forms of this species, which seem distinguishable, were taken. One is from Gyantze, and is large, and, like the form from East Tibet, of a duller blue above than the European insect. The other, var. asiatica Klwes (L. pheretes var. pharis Fawcett, P. Z, 8.1904, ii. p, 138, pl. ix. ff. 5, 6), from Tungu, Khamba Jong, and the Lhanak Valley, is smaller and has the hind wing below suffused with blue on the inner half of the wing, by which when fresh it may be distinguished from the West-Tibetan form lehanus Moore. Some specimens are of a brighter more silvery blue above than the majority, but I do not think this is constant, and it may be due to a change of colour in the relaxing-box. The characters by which Col. Faweett has tried to distinguish his var. pharis seem to me to be merely individual variation. 32, Lyc@NA ICARUS, var. Specimens from Lhasa are larger than the next species, and agree with the form which Leech calls icarws from West Tibet in having black margined spots on the hind wing above. The forms of icarus in Central Asia, of which Griim described several, seem extremely variable. 33. Lyc@NA STOLICZKANA Feld. L. ariana var. arene Fawcett, P. Z.S. 1904, 11. p. 137, pl. ix. f. 4 Specimens from Gyantze and Khamba Jong agree best with this species from Ladak, but are on the average larger. Two or three of them are marked below almost as in arene, which I cannot look upon as a distinct form. Staudinger thought that stoliczkana might be a form of venus, of which I have a good series from various places in Turkestan, and all these may perhaps best be treated as allies of ‘eros, which has many local variations in Central Asia. There were no specimens of Hesperiidze in the Collection. LEPIDOPTERA-PHALAIN A, By Sir Grorce F. Hampson, Bt., B.A., F.Z.8., &e. The Moths taken by the Tibet Expedition were unfortunately few in number, under 150 specimens in all, and of these about half came from low elevations in the Teesta Valley and are of comparatively small interest. Those, however, from Alpine Sikhim and the Tibet Plateau, belonging to the Palearctic fauna, which I mark by an *, contain a large proportion of new and interesting species, and larger collections from the same district would be certain to contain many new forms, 486 DR. H.J. ELWES, SIR G. HAMPSON, AND MR. J. H. DURRANT [May 1, SYNTOMIDA. ERESSA MULTIGUTTA WIk. i. p. 134 (1854); Moths Ind.i. p. 220. Sixuim, Gantok, vi.03. 129. ARCTIADA. LITHOSIANA. ASURA STRIGIPENNIS Herr.-Schaff. Aussereur. Schmett. f. 437 (1855) ; Moths Ind. ii. p. 111. Srkuim, Gantok, vi.03, 19; Raitdong, vi.03, 1 2. AROCTIANA, *DIACRISIA BRETAUDIAUI Oberth. Et. Ent. xx. p. 55, pl. x. ff. 179, 180 (1896); Moths Ind. iv. p. 491. SrxHim, Tungu, vii.03. <6. DIAcRISIA ImPLETA Wlk. xxxi. 286 (1864); Moths Ind. ii. p. 24. S1kHIM, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 6. EstieMENE tmBuTA WIk. iii. 614 (1855); Moths Ind. ii. p. 21. Sixuim, Gantok, vi.03. 19. PERICALLIA GALAcTINA Hoev. Tijdschr. Nat. Ges. Phys. vii. p. 280, pl. vi. f. 5 (1840); Moths Ind. ii. p. 25. Sixuim, Raitdong, vi.03. 2 9. AGARISTIDA. ExsuLa vicrrix Westw. Cab. Or. Ent. pl. 33. f. 3 (1848); Moths Ind. ii. p. 150. Sikuim, Raitdong, v1.03. 1 9. NoctTtuiDa. AGROTINA, * ANARTOMORPHA FLAVESCENS, Sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 3.) 6. Head and thorax clothed with black, brown, and grey scales and hair; palpi whitish banded with brown; lower part of frons whitish ; fore tibiz and tarsi with white rings; abdomen ochreous white irrorated with fuscous. Fore wing black-brown suffused with greyish; subbasal line indistinctly double filled in with grey, angled inwards in cell and extending to vein 1; antemedial line indistinctly double filled in with grey, oblique from costa to sub- median fold, then erect; claviform moderate, defined by black; orbicular and reniform with brown centres and slight whitishannuli defined by black, the former oblique elliptical, the latter angled inwards on median nervure and touching the former; an indistinct dentate whitish mark below end of cell on vein 2; postmedial line double filled in with greyish, bent outwards below costa, oblique to vein 5, where it is angled, then inwardly oblique and 1906. | ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. 487 minutely waved; subterminal line whitish slightly defined by black on outer side, angled outwards at vein 7 and to termen at veins 4, 3, incurved at discal and submedian folds; a terminal series of slight black lunules; cilia whitish and brown with a blackish line through them. Hind wing white strongly tinged with ochreous; the basal area suffused with fuscous; a black discoidal lunule ; a terminal fuscous band, rather broad at costa, narrowing to a point at tornus; some black strize on termen ; cilia pure white; the under side ochreous white, the costal area slightly irrorated with fuscous, a slight discoidal lunule and diffused subterminal band. Hab. Stkuim, Tungu, v.03. 1, type. Hap. 28 millim. The mid and hind legs are missing, but the small reniform hairy eyes and the close resemblance in pattern to A. potanini Alph. from ¢@W. China, and diodonta Piing. Iris, xix. p. 80 (1906) from Lob-nor, makes it practically certain that it belongs to the genus Anartomorpha Alph. (1892) = Ala Staud. (1882) nec Lock. Crust. (1877) = Trichanarta Hmpsn. (1896). *CHLORIDEA TRANSLUCENS Feld. Reis. Nov. pl. 108. f. 49 (1874) ; Moths Ind. ii. p. 176. Tipet, Gyantze, vi. 04 (H. J. Walton). 1 Ss. *CHLORIDEA NANNA, sp. n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 1.) 6. Head and thorax ochreous white mixed with fuscous and sometimes tinged with rufous; palpi at base, pectus, and legs white, the fore tarsi banded with fuscous; abdomen ochreous dorsally suffused and irrorated with fuscous black. Fore wing pale ochreous, sometimes tinged with rufous, the basal area suffused with grey and irrorated with fuscous; an indistinct antemedial line, oblique from costa to vein 1, then bent inwards to inner margin; a medial fuscous or rufous band, diffused on outer side, incurved from costa to median nervure, where it is strongly angled outwards, then again incurved ; reniform blackish, rather diffused and with grey lunule in centre; postmedial line brown, slightly bent outwards below costa, excurved to vein 4, then incurved, the postmedial area from just beyond it fuscous or rufous, its outer edge forming the subterminal line, slightly angled outwards at vein 7, excurved at middle, then incurved ; a terminal series of dark points. Hind wing ochreous white ; the basal area suffused with black, leaving a pale streak below median nervure; a large black discoidal lunule; terminal area broadly black, its inner edge curved inwards between veins 4 and 1 and leaving some ochreous on termen between veins 3 and 1; cilia ochreous white. Under side of both wings ochreous white, with large black discoidal spots and black postmedial line excurved at middle and with dark suffusion beyond it, slight on fore wing, broad on hind wing. Hab. Trset, Khamba Jong, vii.03. 2¢, type. Hap. 28 millim. Allied to C. dipsacea. 488 DR. H. J, ELWES, SIR G. HAMPSON, AND MR. J. H. DURRANT [May 1, *ISOCHLORA METAPHMA, sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 2.) 3. Head and thorax emerald-green; palpi and sides of frons purplish red; antenne fulvous; pectus and legs greyish ochreous, the front of pectus and fore and mid legs in front purplish red ; abdomen pale ochreous, the ventral surface suffused with purplish red, the anal tuft fulvous. Fore wing emerald-green, the costal edge white; cilia white at tips. Hing wing ochreous white uniformly suffused with pale brown; cilia yellowish white. The under side of fore wing pale purplish red, the termen greenish ; hind wing brownish white, the costal area tinged with purplish red. Hab. Sixuim (Walton), 1904. 2¢,type. Hap. 42 millim. *EKuxoa conrusA Alph. Hor. Soc. Ent. Ross. xvii. p. 61, ph 2. f. 47 (1882); Staud. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 136. Stxum (Walton), 1904. 19. *HUXOA BASIGRAMMA Staud. Berl. ent. Zeit. 1870, p. 111; id. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 150. Trser, Gyantze (Walton), vi. 04. 1 9. *Euxoa opertHurt Leech, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1900, p. 30; Hmpsn. Cat. Lep. Phal. B.M. iv. p. 310, pl. 67. f. 1. Trpet, Gyantze (Walton), vi. 04. 16. *METALEPSIS ALETES, sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 6.) ¢o. Antenne ciliated. Head and thorax pale rufous with a few black hairs; patagia with a white fascia edged on each side by black; pectus, legs, and abdomen brownish grey, the anal tuft ochreous. Fore wing pale rufous, the veins streaked with white and defined on each side by grey ; a slight black streak below base of costa; a black streak below base of cell and another above basal half of inner margin ; two black streaks in cell, the upper interrupted beyond middle, the lower not reaching lower angle; an obliquely curved post- medial series of wedge-shaped black streaks in the interspaces from above vein 7 to above 1, the streak above vein. 5 displaced inwards and the streak above vein 1 longer; a terminal series of wedge-shaped black streaks in the interspaces. Hind wing pale brownish grey. Hab. S1xuim (Walton), 1904. 1 g,type. Hap. 30 millim. The antenne are missing, but the base of the shaft of one is sufficient to show they are ciliated. This Lewcania-like Agrotid is like nothing known to me from the Old World; it, however, closely resembles a species of the same genus with pectinated antenne from Tierra del Fuego and several species in allied genera from the Higher Andes. *HPISILIA VITTATA Staud. Iris, viii. p. 314, pl. 5. f. 15 (1895); id. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 137. Trset, Khamba Jong, vii. 03, 1g; 8 miles 8. of Khamba Jong (Walton), 1 3 with the orbicular stigma absent. 1906. | ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. 489 . *EPISILIA ASTIGMATA, sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. figs. 45,59.) 6. Head and thorax brown suffused with fuscous, the hairs tipped with grey; tarsi with slight pale rings; abdomen ochreous brown, with fuscous-brown lateral stripes. Fore wing dull rufous, the basal, inner, and terminal areas suffused with fuscous, the costal edge and veins fuscous; subbasal line represented by a slight black striga from costa; antemedial line oblique, very minutely dentate, slightly angled inwards on vein 1; orbicular absent; reniform represented by a dark line on discocellulars ; postmedial line single, black, bent outwards below costa, then minutely dentate and produced to short streaks on the veins, obliquely incurved below vein 4, the area from just beyond it suffused with fuscous and with slight pale points on costa ; subterminal line absent; a terminal series of slight black lunules; cilia fuscous, with fine whitish line at base. Hind wing pale brownish grey, the terminal area slightly darker; cilia pale brown, with a whitish line at base; the under side whitish, the costal area tinged with brown, a faint discoidal spot and postmedial series of minute dark streaks on veins 8 to 6. Q. Fore wing much blacker, showing a faint rufous tinge on medial area in cell only, irrorated with a few white scales. Hab, Trper, Gyantze (Walton), vi. 04. 146,12, type. Hap, 34-38 millim. Remotely allied to H. subplumbea Staud. *LYCOPHOTIA POLIOCHROA, sp. n. (Plate XXXVI. figs. 16 d, If Qs) ¢. Antenne strongly serrate and fasciculate. Head and thorax grey-white mixed with some brown and fuscous ; abdomen ochreous white. Fore wing grey and white, tinged with ochreous and slightly irrorated with brown; subbasal line represented by black striz from costa and cell; antemedial line single, black defined by whitish on inner side, mterrupted at the veins, erect from costa to vein 1 and angled outwards above inner margin; claviform moderate, defined by black; orbicular and reniform defined by rather diffused black, the former with its inner edge produced inwards as a streak to antemedial line; traces of a diffused medial line touching orbicular and claviform ; postmedial line single, black slightly defined by whitish on outer side, bent outwards below costa, then dentate and produced to short streaks on the veins, confluent with outer edge of reniform, oblique below vein 4; faint traces of a whitish subterminal line slightly defined by fuscous on inner side, excurved at vein 7 and middle; a terminal series of slight black lunules; cilia ochreous white, with two slight dark lines through them. Hing wing white tinged with pale brown, the cilia pure white; the under side white, with slight disccidal spot and indistinct postmedial line from costa to vein 4. 2. Wings aborted, small; the fore wing elongate, narrow, the 490 DR. H. J, ELWES, SIR G. HAMPSON, AND MR, J. B. DURRANT [May 1, termen rounded; the hind wing triangular. Fore wing with the lines browner, the antemedial line excurved below cell and above inner margin; claviform absent; orbicular reduced to a point, the reniform a slight lunule well separated from postmedial line ; the subterminal line more distinct and dentate. Hind wing whiter. Hab. Tipet, Khamba Jong, vil. 03. 13 ,type. Sikri, Teesta Valley, Lhanak Valley, vii.03. 19. Hap., 5 36, 9 12 millim. There is no proof that these are sexes of one species, but the structure is identical, and the general colour, scaling, and pattern the same. In Lpisilia argillacea Alph. from Tibet, of which the © has aborted wings, the fore wing is very produced and acute at apex and the hind wing rounded. HADENINA. *BaRATHRA BRASSICH Linn, Syst. Nat. i. p. 516 (1758); Moths Ind. ii. p. 202. Tipe, Gyantze (Walton), vi.04. 36,19. *TRICHOCLEA ALBICOLON Sepp, Ins. ii. pl. 1. ff. 1-9 (1786); Staud. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 156. Tiset, Khamba Jong, vii.03. 1 2. *MANOBIA XENA Staud. Iris, viii. p. 317, pl. 6. f. 8 (1875); id. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 161. Trper, Gyantze (Walton), vi.04. 1 9. CUCULLIANZ. *BLEPHARIDIA PASPA Pung. Iris, xiii. p. 123 (1900); Staud. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 255. TrBet, Gyantse (Walton), vi.04, 1 3. ACRONYCTINA. *KUPLEXIA LATERITIA Hiifn. Berl. Mag. iii. p. 306 (1766) ; Staud. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 173. Tiper, Gyantze (Walton), vi.04. 13,59. CATOCALINA. Nyctrpao eiaucoris Wlk. xiv. 1306 (1857); Moths Ind. ii. p- 461. S1kHim, Chengtong, vi.03. 1 9. PLUSIANZ. *OMORPHINA AURANTIACA Alph. Hor. Soc. Ent. Ross. xxvi. p. 452 (1892); id. Rom. Mém. ix. p. 41, pl. 1. f.2; Staud. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 220. Sr1KkuIM (Walton), 1904. 29,129. 1906. | ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. AQ] Nocruinz. Sypna Punctosa Wlk. xxxiii. 939 (1865); Moths Ind. il. p. 447. Srkuim, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 ¢. HRASTRAINA. * KERALA MULTIPUNCTATA Moore, Lep. Atk. p. 93, pl. 4. f. 4 (1882); Moths Ind. ii. p. 62. SikHIM, Tungu, vil.03. 1 9. HYPENINE. DicHROMIA TRIPLICALIS Wlk. xvi. 16 (1858); Moths Ind. iii. p. 73. SiguHim, Raitdong, vi.03. 19. LYMANTRIADE. PANTANA BICOLOR WIk. iv. 787 (1855); Moths Ind. i. p 444, Siku, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 6. MARDARA CALIGRAMMA WIk. xxxu. 402 (1865); Moths Ind. i. p. 455. Sixuim, Gantok, v1.03. 1 9. HyPsipD&. ArcInA ARGus Koll. Hiig. Kaschm. iv. p. 467, pl. 21. f. 3 (1844); Moths Ind. ii. p. 51. SrxHIM, Raitdong, vi.03. 19. SPHINGIDA. Hers— convotvunt Linn. Syst. Nat. i. p. 798 (1758); Moths dindinsp. 035 Sikuim, Gantok, v1.03. 1 <6. Marvumpa Dyras W1k. vii. 250 (1856) ; Moths Ind. i. p. 69. Sixuim, Gantok, vi.03. 14,1 2. GEOMETRIDAE. BoARMIANZ. ANONYCHIA GRISEA Butl. P. Z.8. 1883, p. 172; Moths Ind. iii, ans: SikHim, Gantok, vi.03. 16,1 9. *CROCALLIS OBLIQUARIA Moore, P.Z.S. 1867, p. 622; Moths Ind. iii. p. 232. Tipet, Gyantze (Walton), vi.04. 1 ¢. DALIMA SCHISTACEARIA Moore, P. Z. 8. 1867, p. 615; Moths Ind. i. p. 239. Sikuim, Gantok, vi.03. 16,1 2. 492 DR, HJ. ELWES, SIR G. HAMPSON, AND MR. J. H. DURRANT | May 1, *GNOPHUS EOLARIA Guén. Phal. i. p. 294 (1857); Moths Ind. iii. p. 253. Tiset, Gyantze (Walton), vi.04. 16. *BoARMIA SELENARIA Hibn. Samml. Eur. Schmett., Geom. f. 163 (1827); Moths Ind. i. p. 264. Sixuimm, Gantok, vi.03. 1 9. BoaRMIA DUPLEXA, Moore, Lep. Atk. p. 293 (1888); Moths Ind. iii. p. 258. Siku, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 ¢. OBEIDIA MILLEPUNCTATA, Warr. P. Z. 8. 1893, p. 389; Moths Ind. ii. p. 310. Srxuim, Chengtong, vi. 03, 3 ¢ ; Gantok, vi. 03,7 ¢d. LARENTIANA, *CIDARIA SILACEATA Schiff. Wien. Verz. p. 113 (1776); Moths Ind. iil. p. 357. SikuHim, Gantok, vi.03,. 1 ¢. *LARENTIA ALBIGIRATA Koll, Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. p. 419 (1844) ; Moths Ind. iii. p. 367. Trser, Khamba Jong, vil. 03. 1 ¢. * VENUSIA CONISARIA Hmpsn. J. Bomb. Soc. xiv. p. 647 (1903). SikHIM, Tungu, vil,03. 1 ¢. ACIDALIANA, ERYTHROLOPHUS HYRIARIA Wlk. xxxv. 1617 (1866) ; Moths Ind lil. p. 453. Sixum, Gautok, vi. 03, 1 9. TIMANDRA CORRESPONDENS Hmpsn. Moths Ind. iii. p, 459 (1895). Srkuim, Gantok, vi. 03. 1 @. BoMBYCIDA. _ Awnpraca BrpuNcTATA W1k, xxxil. 582 (1865); Moths Ind. i, p. 40, Siku, Gantok, vi. 03. 1 @. LIMACODID4. CERATONEMA ALBIFUSA Hmpsn. Moths Ind. i. p. 394 (1892). SixHim, Tungu, v.03. 1 6. ARMOGYIA PHZOPASTA, Sp.n, (Plate XXXVI. fig. 22.) Fore wing with veins 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked; fore and mid tibia, 1906.] ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. 493 the lst joint of fore tarsi, and the first two joints of fore and hind tarsi fringed with long scales. 3. Head and thorax grey irrorated with dark brown, the tips of scales on the legs black; abdomen ochreous tinged with rufous. Fore wing ochreous thickly irrorated with dark brown, leaving an indistinct oblique ochreous line from lower angle of cell to inner margin, an elliptical spot between bases of veins 5, 4, some ochreous on costa towards apex and on termen from vein 5 to tornus ; cilia fuscous, with an ochreous line at base. Hind wing uniform silky brown; cilia ochreous at base, brown at tips. Hab. Sixuim, Darjiling (Atkinson), 1 3, type; Gantok, vi. 03, 1 ¢ in bad condition. Hay, 22 millim. AYGENIDA. CHALCOSIANA, CAMPYLOTES HISTRIONICA Westw. Royle’s Ill. Himal. p, liii, pl. 10. f, 1 (1840); Moths Ind. i. p. 274. Siku, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 9, PHILOPATOR BASIMACULA Moore, P. Z. 8.1865, p, 800, pl. 42. £. 6; Moths Ind. i. p. 282. SrxHim, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 2. AZYGENINAE, PLATYZYGHNA MOLLERI Hlwes, P, Z. 8. 1890, p. 385, pl. 32. f. 13; Moths Ind. i. p, 243. Srxurm, Chengtong, vi.03, 1 °. Arrona conrusa Butl, Journ, Linn, Soc., Zool. xii. p. 357 (1876) ; Moths Ind. 1. p. 236, Sixuim, Raitdong, vi.03, 1 9. PHAUDINA. PHAUDA FLAMMANS WIk, i. 257 (1854); Moths Ind. i, p, 287. Sixuim, Raitdong, vi.05. 1 9. DREPANIDAE. KucuERA RECTIFICATA Wlk, xxiv. 1142 (1862); Moths Ind, i, p. 328, S1xuim, Gantok, vi.03. 1 ¢. THYRIDIDA. CAMADENA VESPERTILIONIS Moore, Lep. Atk, p. 214, pl. 7. f. 13 & pl. 8. f. 7 (1888); Moths Ind. i. p. 367, Sixuim, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 ¢. 494 DR. H.J, ELWES, SIR G. HAMPSON, AND MR. J. H. DURRANT [May 1, CAMADENA POLYSTACTA, sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 7.) 6. Head and thorax dark brown suffused with greyish ; abdomen red-brown suffused with dark greyish brown. Fore wing red-brown thickly striated with dark brown, on terminal area forming numerous annulate spots; the costal and inner areas suffused with dark brown to the medial band; two indistinct, somewhat irregular dark antemedial lines; a broad oblique dark medial band before the indistinct postmedial line, which is bent outwards below costa, excurved to vein 5, then oblique; an indistinct subterminal line excurved from costa to vein 5, then oblique. Hind wing red-brown thickly striated with dark brown, on terminal half forming numerous annulate spots; a small black discoidal spot and slight medial line excurved between veins 5 and 2; the termen strongly excurved at middle. Had. Stxuim, Gantok, vi.03. 1 3, type. Hap. 32 millim. PYRALIDA. GALLERIANA. MEGARTHRIA VELUTINA Hmpsn. J. Bomb. Soe. xii. p. 304 (1901) ; id. Rom. Mém. viii. pl. 53. f. 12. Sikuim, Gantok, v1.03. 1 <6. CRAMBINE. *CRAMBUS PERLELLUS Scop. Ent. Carn. no. 620 (1763); Staud. Cat. Lep. pal. p. 4. Tiper, Lhasa (Walton), vii. 04. 1 6. *CRAMBUS BRACHYRHABDA, sp. n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 18.) ¢. Head, thorax, and abdomen black-brown. Fore wing fuscous brown with a cupreous tinge; a white fascia on median nervure emitting very short streaks on veins 2, 3, 4; cilia brown at base, brownish grey at tips. Hind wing fuscous brown; cilia brown at base, brownish grey at tips. Hab. Stkum (Walton), 1904. 16, type. Hap. 16 millim. Allied to C. furcatellus Zett., which is redder with the white streaks beyond lower angle of cell of fore wing much more produced. EscHaTa CHRYSARGYRIA Wlk. xxxili. 634 (1865); Moths Ind. Iv. p. 29. SrkHIM, Raitdong, vi.03. 1 9. PYRAUSTINA. *PHLYCTHNODES STICTICALIS Linn. Faun. Suec. no. 1354 (1761); Moths Ind. iv. p. 407. Trpet, Gyantze, vi.04, 11 6, 4 23; Lhasa (Walton), viii. 04, 5 Game *PHLYCTMNODES XUTHUSALIS, sp. n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 19.) Head, thorax, and abdomen yellow irrorated with brown; palpi 1906. ] ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION, 495 brown at sides, white below. Fore wing yellow; the costal area suffused with brown to beyond middle; the inner area suffused with brown to the blackish streak in basal half of submedian fold, then to vein 2, below which it ends in a dark point near tornus; a very elongate oblique wedge-shaped brown mark in end of cell ; an oblique irregularly quadrate discoidal blackish spot with a slight dark streak beyond it usually present; an oblique band formed of confluent brown streaks in the interspaces from apex to vein 2, where it joins the brown suffusion on inner area, the streaks longer and paler below vein 5; a fine blackish terminal line; cilia brownish at base. Hind wing orange, the costal area rather paler, the inner area faintly tinged with brown; an indistinct diffused brown subterminal band; a fine blackish terminal line and brown line at base of cilia except towards tornus. Hab. Tiser, Khamba Jong, vii.03, 12 ¢, 3 9, type; Gyantze (Walton), vi.04,1 9. Hap., 3 30-34, 2 26 millim. Allied to P. rhabdalis Hmpsn. from Thianshan, *“EVERGESTIS PEROBLIQUALIS, sp.n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 20.) 6. Head and thorax greyish mixed with dark olive-brown; frons with lateral white lines; abdomen pale olive-brown with slight segmental pale lines. Fore wing grey tinged with olive- brown and thickly irrorated with dark brown; a slight dark discoidal bar; a very oblique black line slightly defined on inner side by flesh-white from median nervure near end of cell to vein 1; a very oblique black line defined on inner side by a band of flesh-white from apex to middle of vein 1; an oblique flesh-white postmedial line from vein 4 to vein 1 and a subterminal narrow flesh-white band between veins 7 and 1; cilia whitish with three slight brown lines through them. Hind wing fuscous brown, the apical area rather darker; a diffused fuscous subterminal line; a fine dark terminal line; cilia yellowish white with a brown line near base; the under side brownish grey, the costal area tinged with brown, the subterminal line indistinct, fine, waved. Hab. Tiput, Gyantze (Walton), vi. 04, 1 3, type, zp. 38 millim. Remotely allied to #. wmbrosalis F. R. SESIADA. *TROCHILIUM LASICERA, sp. n. (Plate XXXVI. fig. 21.) Proboscis absent; palpi with the 2nd joint fringed with very long hair in front and reaching above vertex of head, the 3rd joint long; antennz of male with fascicles of very long hair. Head and thorax black, with some white hair; palpi ochreous with some black hair and scales, white behind; frons white; legs mostly white, with some ochreous hair and black scales; abdomen black, with ochreous and white segmental bands except on Ist segment, the band on 3rd segment slight, the ventral surface with the bands broad, the anal tuft ochreous with subdorsal black Proc. Zoou, Soc.—1906, No. XXXIV, 34 496 DR, H. J. ELWES, SIR G, HAMPSON, AND MR. J. H. DURRANT [May 1, streaks. Fore wing with the costal area black-brown, with ochreous streak on costa to beyond middle and slight streaks in the interspaces ; the median nervure and veins 4, 5 black-brown ; the inner area ochreous white; the cell and a slight streak below it before middle and streaks beyond it above veins 3 to 6 hyaline; discoidal spot black-brown with ochreous outer edge; a terminal black-brown line with ochreous suffusion on its inner side; cilia pale brown. Hind wing hyaline with some black at base, the veins and margins black; cilia pale brown, yellowish white towards tornus. Hab. Trexr, Gyantze (Walton), vi.04. 5 3,3 9, type. Hap. 20-26 millim. TINEINA. By J. Hartiey Durrant, F.ES. (I COPHORIDA. 365. Erumia Hb. =PSECADIA Hb.; Stgr.-Rbl. Cat. 3145:1, Erumta AssAMEnsis Btl. =hockingella W\sm. Hyponomeuta assamensis Btl. Tr. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1879. 6-7 (1879) *. Psecadia hockingella Wism. Pr. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1880. 90-1, pl. xii. 8-9 (1880) *. Azinis assamensis Wrn. Pr. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1888. 338 (1888) *. Psecadia hockingella Swinh. & Cotes, Cat. Moths Ind. 718, No. 4912 (1889) *. Azinis assamensis Swinh. & Cotes Cat. Moths Ind. 719. No. 4918 (1889) °. Hab, CASHMERE (ex Coll. Ragonot). Punzas—Dharmsala, Larva “ Poonah” (probably=Lhretia serrata) 1v—-v, excl. VI"; Kulu*; Kala Pani, 1v*. Srkarm—Gantok, 24-26 vi. 1903 (Tibet Exped. 1905: 172); 7000 ft., v1. 1894 (Pilcher) ; 5000 ft., 1x. 1895 (Pilcher). Byoran—ix. 1894 (Dudgeon). AssAmM— Cachar!; Golaghat (Naga Hills, Doherty 1890). HYPONOMEUTIDA. 292. PLUTELLA Schrk. 2448 :1. PLUTELLA VIATICA, sp. n., Drnt. Antenne ochreous, becoming blackish from two-thirds. Palpi ochreous, the triangular tuft on the median joint almost fuscous externally ; terminal joint suffused with dark fuscous, except on its upper edge and towards the tip. Head ochreous. Thorax whitish. Sorewings dirty creamy 1906.] ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. 497 whitish with fuscous markings (the specimens are not in good condition and they will be more recognisably described as fuscous with a sinuate creamy-white dorsal stripe); the paler colour, which is most noticeable on the dorsum, leaves the base at about one- third the wing-width descending obliquely to the fold, it is thence slightly sinuate upwards, thence descending it ascends triangularly, and again obscurely, thence occupying the terminal area of the wing (and perhaps irrorating the subcostal portion); there is a strong short black streak from the base to above the flexus, and along the dorsum are some irregular dark spots; above the pale dorsal portion of the wing the fuscous colouring becomes more concentrated, appearing as a length-streak from the base; originating from the costa are several transverse dark markings, the most distinct being a cloudy spot at about two-thirds, below which is a cloudy patch at the end of the cell; there is a dark (somewhat triangular) spot at the apex and others along the costa and termen; cilia greyish ochreous, with a cinereous dividing line near their base. Hap. al. 23mm. Hindwings plumbeous ; cilia greyish fuscous, with a dark dividing-line near their base. Abdomen cinereous. Legs pale cinereous, tarsi blackish, with narrow whitish bands above. Type c. Hab. Trset, Gyantse, 13,000 ft., vr. 1904 (2. J. Walton, Tibet Expedition 1905: 172). Two specimens, Intermediate between senzlella Zett. and annulatella Crt.; in size and coloration more nearly resembling the former, but in pattern more like the latter, from which it differs in the pale dorsal marking beimg less abruptly (less angularly) bent upward and being divided bya black length-streak from the base—these would appear to be good diagnostic characters, but the poor condition of the specimens makes the matter uncertain. TORTRICIDE. 249, KNARMONIA Hb. 1990: 1. ENARMONIA VEXILA, sp. n., Drnt. Antenne (broken) fuscous. Palpi whitish cinereous. Head and Thorax cinereous. orewings appearing greyish, but actually chalky-white with fuscous markings and irrorations; a basal patch terminated at about one-third by a darker sooty marginal line, which leaving the costa obliquely outward becomes concave and thence projects strongly along the fold, receding obliquely backward to the dorsum—this basal patch is slightly darker than the rest of the wing and contains some darker transverse markings ; before two-thirds a somewhat similar dark fascia includes a chalky, transversely irrorated, band; beyond this the wing is whiter in appearance, and on the costa are three distinct fuscous triangular spots separated by the white ground-colour and succeeded by a patch of a more creamy colour; from the last dark marking 34* 498 ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF THE TIBET COMMISSION. [May 1, descends slightly inwardly a transverse narrow dark fascia, becoming forked at the tornus; beyond this fascia the terminal area of the wing is fuscous with a white transverse dorsal patch divided by a dark line; cilia whitish tipped with blackish, with a blackish line near their base, followed by two obscure lines which coalesce and vanish at the position where a white subapical spot interrupts the dark tips of the cilia (in really fine specimens it would seem that the extreme tips of the cilia would be white). Exp. al. 15 mm. Hindwings appearing dark cinereous (but actually blackish tessellated with whitish); cilia cinereous, with a dark dividing-line near their base. Abdomen cinereous. Legs whitish, the tarsi with blackish bands externally. Type ©. Hab. Tisnt, Gyantze, 15,000 ft., vi. 1904 (1. J. Walton, Tibet Expedition 1905: 172). Unique. 227. TortRix LL. TORTRIX sp. Hab. Stxuim—Teesta Vy., Tungu, 13,000-14,000 ft., 1-15. vit. 1903 (Tibet Exped. 1905: 172). A broken and worn specimen in unrecognisable condition. 1607. TortRIx ARGENTANA Cl. argentana Ol. + plumbeana | B.-Haas, Stgr. List 42. 24(1899) LN |. Hab, Siperia (Stgr.). Kasaurr—Deosai Plains, 13,000 ft., vit. 1887 (Leech). Stxuim—1904 (H. J. Walton, Tibet Exped. 1905: 172); Khamba Jong, 15,000-16,000 ft., 15-30. viz. 1903 (Tibet Exped. 1905: 172). Two specimens belonging to the Siberian and Central Asian form distributed by Staudinger as var. plumbeana. As this melanic form is quite recognisable, it will be well to refer to it under this varietal name, describing it briefly as plumbeous irro- rated with white, the white scales tending to be more distinctly noticeable between the veins, along the fold and on the cell, but in most specimens no such attempt at white markings is to be observed ; the hind wings are cinereous or plumbeous. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVI. 1. Chloridea nanna g, p. 487. 12. Lycena semiargus var. annulata 6, 2. Isochlora metaphea 6, p. 488. p. 484, 3. Anartomorpha flavescens 6, p.486. 13. Colias berylla 8, p.480. 4. Hpisilia astigmata 6, p. 489. 14. Callerebia waltoni 8, p. 482. 5. Episilia astigmata 9, p. 489- 15. Callerebia waltoni 2 , p.482. 6. Metalepsis aletes 8, p. 488. 16. Lycophotia poliochroa 3, p. 488. 7. Camadena polystacta 6, p. 494. 17. Lycophotia poliochroa ° , p. 489. 8. Colias dubia S, p. 481. 18. Crambus brachyrhabda 6, p.494. 9. Colias dubia 9, p. 481. 19. Phlyctenodes xuthusalis 8, p.494. 10. Lycena younghusbandi 3, p. 484. 20. Hvergestis perobliqualis 8, p. 495. ll. Lycena semiargus var. annulata, 21. Trochilium lasicera 8, p. 495. ?, p. 484. 22. Areogyia pheapasta g, p. 492. 1906.] THE VASCULAR AND RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN OPHIDIA. 499 4, Contributions to the Knowledge of the Vascular and Respiratory Systems in the Ophidia, and to the Anatomy of the Genera Boa and Corallus. By Frank EH. BEpDpDARD, M.A., F.R.S., Prosector to the Society. [Received March 7, 1906. } (Text-figures 86-93.) The facts of structure which I lay before the Society, in continuation of other memoirs* dealing with the Ophidia, may be conveniently considered under the following headings, Viz. :— (1) On certain Arteries and Veins in the Genera Hrythrolamprus and Coluber, p. 499. (2) Some Notes upon the Anatomy of Boa divinilogua and B. constrictor, p. 507. (3) Notes upon the Boine genus Corallus, p. 516. (4) On the Modifications of Structure in the Lungs of certain Ophidia, p. 519. (1) On certain Arteries and Veins in the Genera Erythrolamprus and Coluber. Inasmuch as the arrangement of the arteries and veins is known in so few genera of Ophidia, it is clearly useful to collect the facts, even if they appear to have for the time being no bearing upon the classification and relations of the group. I therefore direct attention in the following pages to a few new facts concerning the vascular system of Hrythrolamprus esculapit and Coluber corais, especially of the former species, which was very successfully injected in both the arterial and venous systems. I may observe that with the exception of Tropidonotus natria, investigated by many anatomists, and most recently by Hoch- stetter 7, no Colubrine snake has received so much attention as I give to Hrythrolamprus in the following account of some of the principal features in the arrangement of its arteries and veins. Intercostal Arteries—The arrangement of these arteries in Lrythrolamprus (see text-fig. 86, p. 501) recalls in some particulars the intercostal arteries of Python, and in others the intercostal arteries of Colubrine Snakes generally t. The anterior region of the aorta down to about the middle of the liver, or rather beyond that point, gives off very numerous intercostals which * “ Contributions to our Knowledge of the Circulatory System in the Ophidia,” P.Z.S. 1904, vol. i. “On the Trachea, Lungs, &c., of the Hamadryad,” P.Z.S. 1903, vol. ii. ‘‘ Notes upon the Anatomy of certain Snakes of the Family Boidex,” P.Z.S. 1904, vol.uu. “ Visceral Anatomy of Hydrus and Platyurus,’ ibid. ,‘‘ Con- tributions to the Anatomy cf Ophidia,” P. Z.S. 1906, vol. 1. + Morph. Jahrb. xix. 1893. t P.Z.S. 1904, vol. i. p. 835, fig. 67. 500 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, bifurcate as in Python, &c., and thus supply both sides of the vertebral column. Interspersed among these are a few arteries which, as in Colubrines generally, plunge into the dorsal parietes on one side or the other of the middle line. There is in these arteries no question of a bifurcation. In this anterior section of the body from the junction of the two aorte I counted 16 bifurcated intercostals, and only three which were single arteries throughout supplying only one side of the body. It must be pointed out, however, that there is not here, as there is in Python, an artery to each intercostal space. There are interspaces of several vertebree between consecutive arteries. Rarely there are arteries following each other immediately. For a considerable region of the body, beginning towards the end of the liver, the intercostals are mostly single trunks, and therefore entering the body-wall to the right or to the left of the dorsal median line as the case may be. Further back the arteries again become prevalently double. It is clear therefore that there are some grounds for comparing the intercostal arteries of this genus with the Pythons on the one hand and with the Colubrines on the other. Theirregularity of those arteries in the Colubrines generally (though it must be remembered that after all our knowledge is at present very deficient) is shown in Lrythrolamprus, and coupled with this the bifurcation in the middle line before entering the body-wall of some of those arteries, which is a Pythonine characteristic. We may perhaps also see in this latter character a point of likeness to the Viperide. In these Snakes there is up to the present no exception to the rule that the inter- costal arteries arise irregularly, but enter the middle line of the dorsal parietes instead of to the right or to the left as in the Colu- brines. The division of these vessels therefore takes place within the thickness of the parietes, instead of outside as in Python and its allies. It seems therefore that, starting from the conditions observable in the Boidee—and there is now much evidence for the reasonableness of the assumption that this family lies nearest to the base of the Ophidian series—we can trace the modifications of the intercostal arteries in at any rate two directions. The usual Colubrine arrangement may be derived, as I have already suggested *, by an obliteration, now on one side and now on the other, of one of each of the paired intercostals, the usual gaps being already indicated among the Boids by the secondary longitudinal intercostal trunks which are connected only at intervals with the aorta. The second path of development is completed in the Vipers, where in one way the Boid arrangement may be looked upon as more obviously preserved. It appears to me that Erythrolamprus may be looked upon as a stage in this metamor- phosis. The Boid character has been largely retained and the Colubrine character correspondingly feebly developed. The dis- appearance of the latter and a slight change (already referred to) in the former would give the Viperine character. It is note- * P.Z.S. 1904, vol. ii. p. 108. 1906. | RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 501 Text-fig. 86. A portion of body-wall of Erythrolamprus esculapit, to show’ arrangement of intercostal arteries. a. An intercostal bifurcating to supply both sides of mid-dorsal line; 6. An intercostal supplying ‘only left side; c. An intercostal supplying only right side. 502 MR. F, E, BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May I, worthy that the opinion has been expressed that the Viperide are nearer to the Opisthoglyphs than to other Colubrines. Renal Arteries—Coupled with the usual inequality of size of Text-fig. 87. Right kidney and adjacent blood-vessels of Erythrolamprus esculapii. Ao. Aorta; int. Rectal branch of renal afferent vein; K. Kidney; p.v. Parietal vein; A. Renal arteries; 7.aff. Afferent renal vein; 7.eff; Efferent renal vein. the kidneys in Serpents and their asymmetry in position, there is frequently, though not always (the Boide furnish exceptions), 1906. | RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 503 an inequality in the number of renal arteries supplying each kidney. I find two renal arteries only in the case of the right kidney, and three in the case of the left. The vertebral artery also varies in the Ophidia, In the present Text-fig. 88. P: Vv. Left kidney and adjacent blood-vessels of Erythrolamprus esculapii. Lettering as in text-fig. 87. species it ceases to run superficially, perforating the musculature about 4 inches behind the snout. The branches of the vertebral are almost segmentally disposed one to each vertebra, Hach 504 MR, F. E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, enters a distinct foramen larger than itself, formed in the tendons exactly in the middle line. Before entering this foramen it gives off a slender branch to the esophagus. The intercostal artery can then be plainly seen to divide into two. Lrythrolamprus has only one gastric artery proper. This arises from the aorta about on a level with the posterior end of the liver*. The following superior mesenteric artery arises from the aorta about on a level with the gall-bladder. It sends off, of course, a gastric branch. The number of gastric arteries varies much among Snakes‘, and it is therefore of importance to record the fact, though its systematic value is not yet apparent. The azygos vein of Hrythrolamprus is in some ways remarkable as compared with that of other serpents. For it is particularly short though its branches are of considerable calibre. There are, in fact, only three branches, supplying as many intercostal spaces, which unite to form the single azygos trunk. This lies on the right side of the body, and of course joins the anterior vertebral vein before the latter entersthe heart. This is apparently shorter than the azygos of any snake yet described. The azygos of Coronella getula is just larger—four interspaces. In Coluber corais the single azygos vein also lies on the right side of the body. It is, however, a little more extensive though perhaps slighter. I+ supplies six intercostal spaces. It is to be noticed that in both these Colubrines the azygos vein is of very limited extent as compared with the Pythonine and Boine Snakes, speaking generally, for Hunectes is an exception. This fact is in correspondence with the generally limited development of super- ficial parietal veins in non-Boine Snakes as compared with the Boide. Even in Hryx, though a genus containing small-sized species, the azygos is, as I have pointed outt, comparatively long. I may take this opportunity of pointing out that in Python regius —a small Python—the azygos extends over about 15 vertebre, to 2 inches or so behind the heart. The vena cava inferior of Coluber corais shows an interesting vestige of the umbilical vein. Near to the anterior end of the liver the vena cava has a short diverticulum, which seems hardly to be pervious, lying to the left side and extending obliquely backwards. I take it that this seam is the equivalent of the thick branch of the same vein in the same position which I have described in Python sebe §, and which I then regarded, and still regard, as a last remaining fragment of the embryonic umbilical. It is clearly even more rudimentary in the present species. * I take this opportunity of noting that in Erythrolamprus esculapii there is a detached fragment of the liver lying upon the post-caval vein about an inch behind the extremity of the liver. This is quite analogous to the division of the pancreas and of the spleen which is to be seen in other Snakes. It is also to be compared to the extremely thin posterior end of the liver in Corallus (vide infra, p.518). In these cases the gland appears to be in course of reduction in length. It is possible that this is connected with a shortening of the body generally which has con- spicuously taken place in certain Vipers. + Beddard, “Circulatory System in Ophidia,” P. Z. S. 1904, vol. i. p. 331. ~ P.Z.S. 1904, vol. ii. p. 119. § P. Z.S. 1906, vol. 1. p. 28. 1906.» RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 505 It is to be noted that there is no development of longitudinal trunks running along the vertebral column in the liver-region which give off branches to the portal vein. There are a number of the branches to the portal; but each of these emerges separately from the parietes or is formed of the junction of two or three. There is no extensive fusion such as occurs in the Boine Snakes generally. I do not think that this absence of a longitudinal trunk is due to the emptiness of the blood-vessels. It seems to me to be an anatomical fact. The vena renalis advehens (text-figs. 87, 88, pp. 502, 503), as is known to be the case in other Snakes, communicates directly with the mesenteric vein underlying the gut*. Between this point and the right kidney the renal vein receives about eight branches from the parietes. In the case of the left kidney, which is nearer to the cloaca than the right, there are only five of these branches. At the anterior end of the kidney the vein distinctly ends, though at the very extremity. ‘There is no continuation forwards such as occurs so generally (? universally) among the Boide and occasionally (Zamenis gemonensis) among the Colubrines. Each kidney also receives a special branch from the dorsal parietes, which is not mentioned by Hochstettter in Tropidonotus. This arises from the parietes at about the middle of the kidney and from several intercostal spaces on the left side of the body, but from one only on the right. In both cases these veins closely accompany the second renal artery (reckoning from the anterior end of the kidney). Their course, however, is rather different on the two sides of the body. The vein of the left side (text-fig. 88) perforates the kidney, or rather runs between the lobules of that organ ; it ultimately joins the renal afferent vein. It is remark- able that the corresponding vein of the right side of the body is different in its relation to the veins of the kidney. It was thoroughly injected, and therefore quite easy to follow. The vein is seen to have no connection whatever with the renal afferent vein of the right kidney, but it opens without doubt into the renal efferent vein (see text-fig. 87) at a point roughly opposite to its point of emergence from the parietes. This anatomical relationship is obviously very unexpected, and it is quite possible that we have here an abnormal state of affairs. The venous system of the kidneys in Coluber corais differs in some details from that of other genera. The afferent renals, some way before they reach the kidneys, give off two important branches. One of these is to the dorsal parietes, and is a vein which is very general among the Ophidia. The other forms with its fellow of the opposite caudal, which it meets at an angle of 180 degrees, what is practically the commencement of the inferior mesenteric vein running along the dorsal surface of the intestine. * In Tropidonotus and Coluber esculapii, according to Hochstetter (Morph. Jahrb. xix. p. 489), whothus confirms Schlemm and Jourdain as regards the former. I have found this vein in Coluber corais, in Zamenis gemonensis, ‘and Ancistrodon piscivorus. 506: MR, F, E, BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND | May 1, That this vein originates from the afferent renal has been shown by Hochstetter and myself in other Snakes*. The afferent renal runs along the margin of the kidney and only dies away at the very end anteriorly. It is distinctly not continued forwards as in the Pythonide, or if so by the minutest of twigs. In the case of the right kidney, the renal afferent receives affluents from the dorsal parietes along its course upon the kidney. The existence of affluents occupying this position seems in the present state of our knowledge to be a distinctive feature of the Colubrine Snakes as opposed to the Boide 7. These affluents are two in number. The first is near to the posterior end of the kidney, and is formed by the junction of two intercostal veins. The second is at the end of the first third of the kidney, and seems to arise from only one intercostal space. These veins join the main trunk of the afferent renal; they do not plunge independently into the kidney-substance, as they apparently do in Erythrolamprus. I could find no corresponding veins upon the opposite side of the dorsal middle line supplying the left kidney. The efferent renals do not retain their independence until they are free of the region occupied by the kidneys. The two vessels join at the anterior end of the left kidney, which is situated, as in other Snakes, behind the larger right kidney. The anterior part of the conjoined renal efferents, which is of course the vena cava inferior, received twigs from the right kidney. It is to be noted that in both cases the branches flowing from the kidneys into the vene renales efferentes have a free course of some millimetres after emerging from the kidney-tissue. Hepatic Portal System.—The portal vein receives very few affluents from the parietes before it reaches the liver. Directly after reaching the liver the portal trunk shows a spiral twisting, such as is figured by Hochstetter £ in the case of the portal vein of Lacerta, just before entering the liver. As in other Snakes, the portal runs to the extreme anterior end of the liver. The affluents of the vein are, as usual, dorsal and _ ventral. The dorsal affluents are mainly in the region of theliver. In fact I could find only one dorsal parietal vein before the liver is reached. This vein, which springs from three intercostal spaces, joins the portal in the region of the gall-bladder, and corresponds in position with the first mesenteric artery. It is apparently general in Snakes for a vein to exist in thisregion. In the course of the liver, the portal receives seven or eight twigs from the dorsal parietes, which all arise from the left side of the vertebral column. These are roughly at equal distances. The one nearest the posterior end of the liver, situated at about the beginning of the posterior third of the liver, arises by three roots from the parietes, * Hochstetter, Morph. Jahrb. xix., and supra p. 505 footnote. + See infra, p. 509. But in Hunectes (P. Z. S. 1906, vol. i. p. 21) we may find an exception. It seemed to me that in this snake an affluent vein entered the kidney as in Ophisaurus (P. Z. S. 1905, vol. ii. p. 477), { Morph. Jahrb. xix. pl. xvi. fig. 14. 1906. | RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 507 At the anterior end of the liver is another equally stout dorsal parieto-hepatic, which also arises by three or four twigs from the parietes. Between these two are smaller affluents which spring from two roots. In every case, these vessels are joined by a branch or branches from the stomach before entering the portal vein. At the extreme anterior end of the liver the portal vein, greatly diminished in calibre, is continuous with a slender vein which runs along the dorsal side of the cesophagus; this vein was traced forward to the front end of the heart, and apparently extends rather further, but I am unable to be exact as to its relationships here. It has, I think, a branch fromthe parietes very far forward, in which case it conforms in its construction to the other veins from the parietes. It is noted that these dorsal parieto-hepatic veins are not in any way connected together to form a continuous longitudinal vein running along the parietes in the region of the liver or near to it. In the Boide there is constantly such a development of longitudinal veins in the hepatic region. It is possible to compare the anterior vein, which enters the portal vein in a straight line with it at the extremity of the liver, to a somewhat similar vein which in Varanws enters the anterior tip of the left lobe of the liver *. There are also the usual branches of the epigastric vein concerned with the circulation of the liver. The most anterior of these are two which enter, close together, the cesophageal vein already referred to as joining the portal at the anterior extremity of the liver. Along the course of the liver there are also two branches from the epigastric, each of which arises from that vein by two or three roots. Finally, at the end of the liver a strong branch joins the epigastric and portal just before the latter reaches the liver. There are some further connections between the epigastric and the portal and anterior abdominal posteriorly ; but | have not mapped them accurately. The occurrence of a marked anterior and posterior communication between the epigastric vein and the vessels of the liver appears to be general in the Ophidia. It should be noted that the epigastric branches entering the liver at its middle plunge into the liver-substance, and are not directly connected with the portal vein, (2) Some Notes upon the Anatomy of Boa diviniloqua and B. constrictor yf. I have had the opportunity of dissecting two specimens of the former Snake which have recently died in the Menagerie. I am therefore able to make known a few anatomical facts which have not hitherto received much attention. So far as I am aware, this particular species has not been studied up to the present. Some other species have been examined with regard to particular points, * Beddard, P. Z.S. 1906, vol. ii. + For a few notes on anatomy see Hering, Wurttemb. naturw. Jahreshefte, xvi. 1860, p. 103. 508 MR. F, E, BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, and I shall take occasion to refer in the course of the following notes to what is already known relating to the organs and systems which I have myself examined in Boa divinilogqua. My own notes chiefly refer to the vascular and respiratory systems. Anterior Abdominal Veins.—These veins in the present species of Boa retain their distinctness until within an inch of the gall- bladder. Posteriorly each arises, as Gadow has figured *, from the divided caudal. The exact arrangement in Boa diviniloqua is shown by dis- section to be this:—Hach half of the divided caudal vein again divides into two trunks considerably behind the kidneys. This occurs at a slightly different level on the two sides of the body. On the left side, the division took place, in a male individual measuring 52 inches from the tip of the snout to the cloaca, at a point 34 inches from the cloaca and 64 inches from the posterior end of the left kidney. On the other side of the body, the point of separation was a trifle further forward in correspond- ence with the anterior shifting of the right kidney. Only the left side is figured in the work referred to below, but the junction of both anterior abdominals with the corresponding renal afferent is mentioned in the text. The figure* of Pelophilus madagascariensis shows a difference from what I have found in Boa diviniloqua. In the latter species, immediately after the separation of the renal trunk from the caudal vein, the renal branch receives an important affluent from the parietals. This is found on both sides of the body. I ascertained with care the exact point of entrance of this vein, since there are apparently differences among the Boidee. By Gadow the vein is represented as debouching into the caudal before it has divided into the renal afferent and anterior abdominal. In Hunectes and Hryx I have described and figured or described the vein as opening exactly at the point of divergence of the afferent renal and anterior abdominal 7, or as in the present species. In the example of Boa constrictor which I dissected the details (text-fig. 89) are somewhat different. The two anterior abdominals retain their separateness until within 47 inches of the gall-bladder. As the snake measured 70 inches from the snout to the cloacal orifice, the porportions are very much the same as those given above. The origins of the two posteriorly from the caudals are quite symmetrical; they are exactly opposite to each other. And this isin spite of the fact that the kidneys are unsymmetrical as in Boa diviniloqgua. In fact the kidneys are more unsym- metrical, The left kidney, which is 53? inches in length, is 12 inches from the cloacal orifice. The right kidney is smaller, 43 inches, and only overlaps the left kidney for the space of lj inches. There is a greater overlap in boa diviniloqua. Renal Veins.—The afferent renal veins, after parting from the roots of the anterior abdominal, receive affluents from the parietes. * Tn Bronn’s ‘ Thierreich,’ Bd. vi. pl. exxxv. fig. 2 v.a.8., v.a.d. + “Notes upon the Anatomy of certain Snakes of the Family Boide,” P. Z.S. 1904, yol. ii. p. 118, text-figs. 21, 22. 1906. | RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 509 Text-fig. 89. Lt. Ant. Abd: RA | Anterior abdominal and renal afferent veins of Boa constrictor. ep. Epigastric veins; K. Kidneys: L.Ant.Abd. Left anterior abdominal vein; p. Parietal veins; R.Ant.Abd. Right anterior abdominal vein; V.r.aff. Renal afferent vein. 510 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND | May 1, In Boa constrictor the left vein had only two of these: I counted four joining the right renal afferent. 1 did not count these veins in Boa divinilogua. In the latter species (of which one example was in a particularly good condition for observing the point) the renal afferent, as in other Boide*, extends beyond the kidney and forms a delicate vein running up to the testis. This is doubtless the posterior cardinal. Epigastric Vein.—I did not note the number of branches which connect in oa diviniloqua the anterior abdominal with the epigastric vein. In oa constrictor I was able to observe that all these branches connect the epigastric vein with the left larger anterior abdominal. I could find no branches running between the smaller right anterior abdominal and the median single epigastric vein. This vein appeared to be concerned only with the fat-body. Several branches, however, join the anterior abdominal and the epigastric after the former has become a single vessel by the union of the right and left halves. Posteriorly to this point there were in all about eight transverse vessels uniting the left anterior abdominal and the epigastric. The epigastric, | may take this opportunity of remarking, is one of the most constant veins in the Ophidia in its position, form, and relations with other veins. It appears to be nearly always single. In the case of Lioheterodon madagascar iensis, however, a specimen which I dissected showed an epigastric vein constantly alternating between the single and double condition, like the dorsal vessel in certain Harthworms. As is so usual in the Ophidia, a considerable parietal vein flows into the afferent renal shortly before the latter reaches the kidney. At the anterior end of each kidney there is another such vein ; and a careful dissection of the same shows that it does not open into the kidney-substance or into the efferent renal, but into the very slender forward prolongation of the afferent renal, This vein, the posterior cardinal, is traceable, as already mentioned, to a little way m front of the testis. In the neighbourhood of each testis the vein receives the Suprarenal Portal Veins.—Of these veins (text-fig. 90, p. 511) I counted three separate trunks on the left side; two of these reached the cardinal in the region of the corresponding testis; the third vein lay further back, it emerged from the parietes, and joined the cardinal some little way behind the left testis. On the right side of the body there were only two of these parieto-suprarenal veins. They reached the posterior cardinal of their side of the body in the region of the corresponding testis. In describing certain points in the anatomy of the Anaconday, I recorded the presence of an extensive vein running along the body-wall on both sides of and near to the spinal column in the region of the kidney. This vessel connects the aftluents of the * Of. Beddard, “Contributions to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,” P.Z. S. 1906, vol. 1. p. 28. + P. Z.S. 1906, vol. i. p. 23, text-figs. 6, 7. 1906.] RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. d1i afferent renal before it reaches the kidney with its affluents after it has left the kidney in front. I have not referred to any similar vein in Boa, and I have not found one. The existence or non- existence of this vein does not, however, seem to be of any systematic importance. I find, in fact, that it may either exist Posterior cardinal and suprarenal veins of Bow diviniloqua. K. Left kidney; pe. Post-cardinal vein (continuation forward of renal afferent vein) ; S.R. Left suprarenal body; sr. Suprarenal portal veins; r.ef- Efferent renal vein of left side; 7. Testes. or not in the Pythonine division of the Boide. In both Python molurus and P. sebe I have found this vein to be very extensively developed both in the region of the kidney and behind it, and furthermore on both sides of the body. It seemed to me to be Proc. Zoou. Scc.—1906, No. XXXYV. 3D 312 MR, F, E, BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, slightly better developed on the right side than on the left in P, molurus. This vein ran nearly to the cloaca. It is connected by numerous branches with the renal afferent up to the point where the latter reaches the kidney; but after that point there are no more branches to the renal afferent until the latter leaves the kidney anteriorly. Here the vessel is connected with he anterenal prolongation of the renal afferent by one branch, or rather ends in it, for the lateral dorsal is not itself prolonged beyond the kidney, although numerous intercostal veins arise separately in front of the kidney and join the post-cardinal, as I regard this forward prolongation of the afferent renal. The absence of any intercostals running from the parietes in the region of the kidney across that gland to the renal afferent vein, such as are met with in Hrythrolamprus and Coluber*, may prove to be a distinguishing feature of the Boine Snakes. Python regius may be an exception. In an injected example of that snake, the renal afferent vein was seen to receive from the parietes a branch just behind the kidney and one a little way in front. Just behind the latter, and therefore arising from the parietes just in the kidney-region, was a vessel of which I could not detect the ending. It may, however, very well have reached the post-cardinal in front of the kidney. In this species there is no continuous lateral vein in the kidney-region. And as the specimen was well injected in this region, [ am confident of this difference from P. molurus. Azygos Vein.—The azygos vein in Boa divinilogua is in many respects much like that of other Snakes—that is to say, it is not very extensive, extending down the body not much beyond the beginning of the liver. It gives off branches of two kinds, both of which are not always developed in Snakes, or are, at least, not always visible in examples which I have dissected. These branches are firstly those which flow from the body close to the median ventral line, on the right side of the vertebral column of course, 2. €. on that side which the azygos lies upon. Besides these there is a series of veins which run so superficially to the lateral parietes as to le actually above the surface of the body-wall. They are supported by membranes, and are not in close con- nection with the parietes. Two of these veins arise from the main azygos trunk before the latter reaches the level of the parietes. The main trunk of the azygos divides into two branches soon after the region of the heart. An outer branch runs back for some distance before again approaching the median line and giving branches to the intervertebral spaces. These branches generally are fewer than the intercostal spaces, and they must therefore divide within the parietes. The azygos, then, of this species supplies two regions of the body. It draws blood from the parietes in the immediate neigh- bourhood of the dorsal median line, and also from the body-wall * See p. 502 (text-fig. 87) and p, 503 (text-fig. 88). 1906. | RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 513 more laterally. In Boa constrictor the same area is drawn from, but there is more specialisation in the veins. There are, in fact, two longitudinal trunks, one of which is lateral in position and the other close to the medial dorsal line. These arise by separate origins from the jugular. The branch of the azygos which draws blood from the immediate neighbourhood of the vertebral column does not form a long vessel running freely in the body-cavity. It divides directly after its opening near the heart into three equally sized branches, which run straight to the body-wall and plunge into the parietes between two successive vertebre. This specialisation of the azygos into a proximal and a more distal trunk is an approach to the con- ditions observable in the Crocodilia, and is an advance upon the structure which has been as yet recorded among most of the Ophidia. In Python sebe, however, there is a similar division of the azygos into two branches concerned with different regions of the dorsal parietes*. A specimen of Python sebe which I have dissected since writing the account of the azygos of that snake referred to below affords confirmation of that account (which is of importance in view of getting at the normal arrangement of the veins in these animals) and enables me to add a few details. In the individual to which I now refer, a female, the azygos shows the same division into a more dorsal and a more lateral branch. The trunk is bifid behind the point where the third intercostal is given off from the un- divided trunk. The more lateral branch only supplies three intercostal spaces. After this point the main trunk gives off eleven branches to as many rib-spaces, the last two of which are very slender. There is then a gap, but the very next rib is accompanied by a vein which is the first of a continuous series of fourteen intercostals arismg from the right side of the median line which communicate with the hepatic portal system. So large a development of intercostal veins on the right side is not common in Snakes. On the left side, in this specimen as in other snakes, there is a strong development of the longitudinal parietal vessel. Remains of Umbilical Vein.—In the case of Loa diviniloqua the male and female examples which I dissected showed traces of the umbilical vein (text-fig. 91, p. 514). I do not think that there were any noticeable differences in the several examples. But I made more complete notes in one case than in the other. In the larger female specimen the vena cava, immediately after emerging from the liver, was joined by a slender vein expanding somewhat at its debouchment into the vena cava. The extreme anterior end of the liver occupied the angle formed by the con- fluence of the two veins. Traced backwards, this affluent of the vena cava continued to be full of blood for some little distance ; but soon it seemed to be impervious, and to be a mere ligamentous * See Beddard, “ Contributions to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,” P. = S. 1906, p. 30. oo. 514 MR, F, E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, thread lying on the ventral surface of the body-wall. It did not extend for a great distance, but was visible for four inches or so down the body. It did not join any of the veins putting the epigastric into communication with the portal system within the liver. It was quite clear from dissection that such of these veins as occurred in its neighbourhood crossed it without forming a junction with it. These various facts leave little doubt in my mind that this vein is the persistent umbilical, which is longer than in Python, and more like that of Hunectes for this reason. Text-fig. 91. | i Ve. ure. Uwhbilical veins of (a) Boa and (b) Python regius. ep. Epigastric veins ; LZ. Liver; wm. Umbilical vein; Vez. Post-caval vein. The umbilical vein in oa constrictor offers some interesting variations from the condition found in oa diviniloqua, though I do not assert for the present that they are actually specific varia- tions. In the example which I dissected, the vein was longer than in the last species, and also vascular for a greater extent, thus resembling the Anaconda. Its relations to the postcaval vein were, however, quite as in Boa divimilogua. ‘The vein is as usual attached to the ventral surface of the liver, and it extended down to about the middle of that organ. A careful examination of the vein showed that it gave off, or rather received, a number of subsidiary trunks of very small calibre. These branches run over the liver, but they do not appear to form any part of the portal system. They are, in fact, so far as I could make out, distributed 1906.] RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 515 entirely to the peritoneal sac in which the liver lies. They ramify over the walls of this sac, and do not plunge beneath it to enter the substance of the liver. This recalls the branches of the um- bilical vein of Birds, many of which ramify in the umbilical ligament which bears the vem. It may be that these veins are also present in Bou divinilogua; indeed, one would assume that they were present but they were not visible. With regard to the Arterial System, I call attention here to two points only. Firstly, in both Boa diviniloqua and BL. constrictor each kidney is supplied by a single renal artery, which enters the kidney at the anterior end. These additional instances imcrease the probability that the Boide in general are to be characterised by this anatomical fact. Though it has to be admitted that the number of Boine genera at present examined from this point of view is not large, only one exception has been met with, viz. Hryx jaculus, in which snake there are sometimes, but not always, two renal arteries to each kidney. I may take this opportunity of increasing the list of Boide known to possess only a single renal artery to each kidney. I have recently had the opportunity of dissecting an example of Python molurus measuring over 9 feet in length. In this snake the right kidney measured eight and a quarter inches in length, and the left kidney was nearly as long. In spite of this length, each kidney had only one renal artery. In Python regius, which is a smaller species but still of con- siderable size, there was no doubt about the fact that each kidney had only a single artery. In an example of Hnygrus carinatus* the left kidney at any rate had but one renal artery. I did not examine the right. The second point concerns the intercostal arteries, which resemble those of Hunectes and Hryxt and Python spilotes =, and not those of Python sebe and Corallus. Hach pair of arteries, in fact, does not issue directly from the aorta; but several pairs are given off from a common trunk which runs longitudinally for varying distances in different cases, These trunks arise at varying intervals from the aorta. Lungs.—In Boa diviniloqua there are two lungs which are, of course, unequal in size, though both are vascular. The trachea in the neck-region has incomplete rings, which are united posteriorly by a tract of membrane. There is, however, no trace, that I could discover, of a tracheal lung. The lungs, both of them, end ina very distinct line at the point of opening into them of the bronchi, The vascular and red membrane ceases abruptly. A point in which the genus Boa differs from Python is in * T owe the opportunity of examining this snake to Dr.C. G. Seligmann. I may take this opportunity of remarking that the kidneys are very small, asin Erya, measuring respectively 16 and 17mm. ‘The right kidney lay 72 mm. from the cloaca. The snake measured 192 inches from the tip of the snout to the cloaca. + Beddard, “ Anatomy of Boide,”’ P. Z. 8. 1904, vol. ii. p. 108. { Beddard, P. Z. S. 1904, vol. i. p. 362. This species has been placed in a separate genus. 516 MR, F, E, BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, the bronchus in each case being continued far into the interior of the lung as a gutter, which is, however, so narrow as not to be functionally a gutter at all; it is for the greater part merely a flat band composed of tracheal, or rather bronchial semi- rings. Relatively to the length of the two lungs, the bronchial rings extend perhaps nearly as far towards the posterior extremity of the lung in both cases. In the larger lung the bronchial semi- rings reach down a long way, nearly to the anangious part of that sac. They die away rather gradually, becoming narrower at the end of the series. It is also important to notice that the two bronchi do not diverge as they do in Python. In Boa the shorter bronchus does not arise by a perforation of the tracheal rings; but the aperture is seen to lie in a thickened area on one side of the bronchial rings appertaining to the right bronchus. The lungs of Low constrictor present certain differences from those of &. divinilogua. Miline-Hdwards has mentioned the tracheal gutter in this species. The larger lung is vascular up to about the end of the first third of the liver. The bronchial gutter runs nearly as far as this point and ends rather abruptly; its rings do not decrease much in breadth towards their termination ; they do not fine off to a point. The smaller lung is vascular to a point about one inch beyond the commencement of the liver. It extends altogether about halfway down the liver. There is no trace of a bronchus belonging to this lung. It presents the appearance at its orifice of communication of being merely a lobe of the larger lung. It is clear that there is no orifice in the tracheal gutter such as is obvious in various Snakes which are provided with a second lung. But on a careful examination it may be seen that the edge of the tracheal gutter is slightly bitten out, as it were, for a space of a few lines where the smaller lung arises. There is no question of a bronchial gutter continued along this lung. (3) Motes upon the Boine genus Corallus. This snake is placed by systematists among the Snakes of the Boine division of the Boide*. A dissection of the Madagascar species Corallus madagascariensis enables me to record certain anatomical facts which bear upon the question of its systematic placing, and which will also serve as a contribution to our know- ledge of the anatomy of this division of Serpents. The example of this serpent which I dissected was not in a very favourable condition for unravelling the details of the cir- culatory system, for the veins, and, naturally, the arteries, were largely empty of blood, an anzemic condition which is not infrequent in reptiles that die in the Society’s Gardens. Nevertheless, I have been able to ascertain a few facts about the veins which are of importance from the systematic standpoint. The first vein which I endeavoured to find was the wmbilical. * Boulenger, Catalogue of Snakes in the British Museum, vol. i. p. 99._ 1906. } RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. BG It will be remembered that in Python*, contrary to what is found in Hunectest, and even, though to a less extent, in Boat, the umbilical vein is represented in the adult by a rudiment only. Nevertheless this rudiment was quite obvious in the several examples in which I sought for, and succeeded in finding, it. Lt am therefore inclined to regard my inability to find the least trace of such a rudiment in Corallus as evidence that the vein has completely disappeared in that snake. This state of affairs is, however, more like that of Python than of the two Boine genera Eunectes and Boa, The vein running from the front end of the liver to the pericardium showed no indications whatever of a branch. Although in this particular the evidence afforded is rather in favour of the placing of Corallus in the Pythonine subdivision, it has less value in that it is a negative character. The intercostal arteries offer a positive character pointing in the same direction. In Boa, Hunectes, and Hryx§ the intercostal arteries are apt to arise at widely separated intervals from the aorta, a single branch thus arising running backwards or forwards or both for a considerable distance, and giving off a regular series of branches to the right and left of the dorsal middle line of the body. In Python, on the other hand, as the researches of Jacquart|| and my own observations have shown, the intercostals arise regularly from the main trunk of the aorta. Hach artery springs separately from the aorta and divides below into two, one for each side of the body. In Hryx, &ec. each artery may leave the aorta separately from the point of its origin. There is but a slight development at most of secondary longitudinal intercostal trunks. Now it is important to record the fact that in these charac- teristic features Corallus is on the side of Python, and departs equally from the conditions observable in the Boas. I do not venture upon any further details concerning the circulatory organs for the reasons already stated. The position of the viscera in the Ophidia is of importance to note as a means of comparison between various genera and even various species. In the present serpent, which measured 55 inches including the short tail, the liver begins fairly close to the heart, its anterior end being only 24 inches from the apex of the heart. The liver itself presents peculiarities worth noting. It is very long, measuring 124 inches altogether. Of these the last 4 inches belong to a backward extension of one of the two lobes. It is very usual for this lobe to extend back beyond the other lobe among Ophidia, and the proportions vary somewhat in different cases. I have not, however, as yet had the opportunity of dissecting a snake in * Beddard, “Contribution to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,” P. Z.S. 1906, vol.i. p. 28. I may take this opportunity of recording the fact that Python molurus and P. regius agree with P. sebe in the retention of a similar rudiment. + Beddard, loc. cit. p. 18. t Supra, p. 514. § Beddard, loc. cit. p.33, and P, Z.S. 1904, vol. 11. p. 109, text-fig. 19. || Ann. Sci. Nat. (4) vol. iv. 518 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, which the posterior tail-like extremity of the right lobe is so lengthy in proportion as it is in Corallus madagascariensis. Not only is it very long, but it is also very thin, ending posteriorly in the tiniest filament of liver-tissue. There is no doubt, however, that the extreme end is liver-tissue, and that I have not confounded with this unusual extension a portion of the vena cava, with which, possibly, in a badly preserved specimen one might have confounded it. The liver almost, if indeed not actually, touches the spleen behind, and comes very near to the gall-bladder, which organ is, as a rule, separated by a considerable space from its posterior termination. The spleen is smallish and dark red in colour and uneven in form, being lobulated, the lobules, however, showing no tendency to become separate from each other. It lies, as will be gathered, just in front of the gall-bladder. The pancreas is firmly fixed at the junction of the slender pyloric part of the stomach with the wider small intestine and lies on both sides of the gut. The ducts arising from the gall-bladder form a plexus upon it. Both lungs of Corallus are functional; but there is the usual disparity of size between them. The difference of size, however, is greater than in Python. Both lungs possess a headward extension in the form of a short pyramidal cecum directed forwards. The tissue of the larger lung is continued headwards as the membranous interval between the tracheal rings dor- sally. There is, however, no trace whatever of any invasion of this membrane by lung-tissue. It is merely membranous. The bronchus belonging to the larger lung is continued for a long way down it, very much further than in any species of Python which { have had the opportunity of examining. This tracheal or bronchial extension reaches, in fact, some little way down the liver. Its exact place of ending is rather difficult to define. Towards the end it narrows rather rapidly, but is thereafter continued further as a fibrous band. A similar fibrous band exists in the Python, P. spilotes; but it begins much earlier in the lung. The extension of the bronchus is remi- niscent of the lung of Boa diviniloqua rather than of any Python with which I am acquainted. in the smaller left lung the bronchus is also continued, but extends only for two or three rings. The origin of the left bronchus appears as a perfora- tion in the right bronchus; it is exactly in the middle of the rings of the latter, not to one side for example. It is to be noted that the extension of the bronchus down ‘the right lung differs from a similar extension in Coluber and some other Snakes by reason of the fact that the rings are flattened out. There is no such occlusion of the rings dorsally to form a practically closed tube as we meet with in the genus Coluber. The fibrous band which seems to continue the bronchus down the lung is probably really to be looked upon as morphologically the posterior end of the cartilaginous series of bronchial semirings. The present species, when compared with Python, offers evidence that this is 1906. | RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 519 actually the case. For the shorter the tract of bronchial semi- rings within the lung, the longer the seam running down that organ. The lungs of Corallus therefore conform to the usual Boid pattern. They lean more towards the Boine than the Pythonine structure, but offer differences of detail from those of other genera which have been examined. ‘These facts therefore clearly justify the generic independence of Coralius, coupled with its inclusion within the Boine section of the Boide. The only other organs which I have especially noted are the kidneys, and this by reason of the fact that they offer cha- racters of systematic value in discriminating certain Ophidia. In Corallus, as in the Boide generally, the renal glands lie at a considerable distance from the cloaca. I did not make an absolute measurement, since at the time I only noted that they appeared to occupy much the same position as do those of Hryw, Xe. Furthermore, the kidneys are very small relatively speaking. The two of them measure about an inch and three-quarters, and there is not a great deal of difference between that of each side of the body. The smallness of the kidneys is exactly the same as in the cases of Hryx and Hnygrus; and, as in those two genera, the kidneys of Corallus are deeply separated into lobes, more so than can be noted in some Snakes. Finally, the present genus agrees with other Boide in the fact that each kidney is served by a single renal artery. This latter appears to be one of the most decisive characters of the Boide, and, so far as present observations enable a statement, is only found in /lysia outside that family; Zlysia has also other Boine characters *. (4) On the Ee ae of Structure in the Lungs of certain Ophidia. The most recent general paper dealing with the lungs in the Ophidia is by the late Prof. Copet, who refers in that com- munication to some of the previous work upon the subject, mainly to be found in Siebold & Stannius’ well-known text-book. It is now known, both from Prof. Cope’s work and from the memoirs of others, that the chief variations in structure which the lungs in this group show are:—(1) the existence in most Boide of two functional lungs, a right and left, of which the right is the larger; (2) that other Snakes have only one functional lung, which Butler = has proved to be the right in every case; (3) that the rudimentary left lung may be altogether absent; and (4) that the lung-substance may exist from the very commencement of the trachea forming the so-called ‘tracheal lung,” which itself shows considerable variations in its condition in different Serpents. To the facts collected together by these authors I have been * Beddard, P. Z.S. 1906, vol. 1. p. 31. + “On the Lungs of the Ophidia,” Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. xxxiil. p. 217. £ “Onthe Complete or Partial Suppression of .. . . the Left Lung in Snakes, &c.,” P.Z.S. 1895, p. 691. 520 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, able to add the description of the lung in the Hamadryad*, which shows a new form of tracheal lung or rather air-sac, and an account of the lung in the two sea- ‘snakes Platy yurus colubrinus and Hydrus platyurusy, extending the observations of Cantor upon one of these, and I have lately brought forward some evi- dence in favour of regarding the existence of the tracheal lung as typical for the Squamatat. I have now to direct attention to further facts collected during the last few months which fill in several lacune in our knowledge of the respiratory system in the Ophidia, and permit of some more general statements than could be made by previous observers, who had examined compara- tively few species and genera. I am able considerably to extend the knowledge of the occurrence of the tracheal lung, and thus to put upon a firmer basis my view that this part of the lung is not a secondary development, but that its presence is a primary condition of the lung in those reptiles, and probably in the allied Lacertilia. In the following pages I direct attention to the structure of the lungs in a few Colubrine Snakes, I have alr eady referred to the lungs of certam Boide §. The lungs of Coluber corais are in several respects remarkable. In this s serpent the tracheal lung is developed to a very great extent, but as an air-sac. The trachea ceases to be a closed tube. almost immediately after its origin; half way between the free and the attached ends of the mandibles the trachea opens out into a gutter. It is not a question here of a narrow membranous interval dorsally between the free ends of the tracheal rings. These extremities are connected by a wide thin-walled sac several times the diameter of the trachea itself. Towards the heart this tracheal lung becomes slightly honeycombed in structure and vas- cularised ; but it is avery small tract that can possibly serve as an organ of respiration. The lung proper begins at the heart ; there is no change at this point either in the calibre of the tracheal lung, which is continuous with the thoracic lung, or in the form of the tracheal gutter. The latter ceases almost immediately after the commencement of the thoracic lung. An aperture leads into the rudimentary left lung. This lung although small is evidently functional ; its walls tere the usual honeycomb structure and are red with blood capillaries. Moreover, the cartilaginous semirings of the trachea are con- tinued for a short distance into the second and smaller lung. The large and principal lung retains its vascularity down to just after the beginning of the liver. After this point it 1s merely a thin-walled air-sac like the tracheal lung. Its length is unusual, at least if it be compared, for instance, with the lungs of the Python. It is traceable nearly to the cloaca posteriorly. It must therefore form a very efticient swim-bladder or enable the snake to puff itself “On the Trachea, Lungs, &c. of the Hamadryad,”’ P. Z.S. 1903, vol. 11. p. 319. On the Visceral Anatomy of Pelagic Serpents,” 2bid. 1904, vol. 11. p. 147. “ Contributions to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,” zd. 1906, vol. 1. p. 41. Supra, p.5lo. COHrtt—br 1906. | _ RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 521 up, when adopting a threatening demeanour, to an unusual extent. It will be observed that the tracheal lung of Coluber corais is planned on the model of that of the Viperide. But instead of being vascular as in those Snakes, it is just the part of the lung which is non-vascular, the vascularity commencing with the thoracic lung. In the Vipers it is the tracheal lung which is vascular and the thoracic lung which is not so. I am fortunately able to compare the state of affairs in this species Coluber corais with that of other species of the genus Coluber. These will now be dealt with. Tn Coluber longissimus (=C. esculapii) there is also a tracheal lung, which is, however, different in detail from that of C. corais. The lung-tissue is, as usual, continuous with the dorsal mem- branous interval between the tips of the incomplete tracheal rings. This interval is narrow as in Serpents, with no tracheal lung; but for some distance, an inch or so, in front of the heart it has the honeycombed structure of the lung proper. This fades away gradually anteriorly into the ordinary membranous appearance of this part of the respiratory apparatus in those Ophidia which possess no tracheal lung. It does not seem to be vascular except perhaps just at its commencement below, and has not the pink colour characteristic of the functional Jung. There is a rudi- mentary second lung which is vascular as in Coluber corais, and the existence of which has been duly noted by G. W. Butler *. Coluber obsoletus (= alleghaniensis).— In a spirit-preserved example of this Coluber there are also traces of the tracheal lung invading the membrane for some little distance in front of the heart. There is also in this species a very distinct headwardly directed cecum of the lung, as in other species of Coluber. There is also present the second though rudimentary lung, which is, however, cellular in structure and not a mere thin-walled sac. The orifice into the second lung is exactly on a level with the . apex of the heart. The orifice has the form of a perforation of the tracheal gutter. It does not lie in the lung-substance beside it. The tracheal gutter is in this species fairly extensive. It can be traced easily to a point lying about half an inch behind the commencement of the liver, that is about 4 inches behind the apex of the heart. Its termination coincides with the end of the vascular region of the lung. The total length of the Snake itself from mouth to vent is 47 inches. Coluber leopardinus, though a small Snake like Coluber longissi- mus, has vestiges of the tracheal lung more like those of the large Coluber corais. It resembles that species, in fact, by reason of the great width of the anangious membrane which divides the tracheal rings at their tips anteriorly. The honeycomb structure of the lung extends for a shorter distance than in Coluber longissinvus in front of the heart, and in this region the width of the “lung” is less than anteriorly. Close to the apex of the heart—a little in * P, ZS. 1895, p. 705. 522 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, front of it—the thoracic lung is marked off from the tracheal by a short forwardly extending pouch of the former which lies dorsally, and therefore, as seen in dissection, beneath the lower end of the tracheal lung. Such a forward process of the thoracic lung is common in Snakes, but I have not found it in Coluber longissimus. It has in C. leopardinus obviously nothing to do with the tracheal lung. There is asecond honeycombed and vascular rudimentary lung. In Coluber melanoleucus* there is a type of lung differing in many respects from that of the three species of Coluber already, or to be, dealt with. The trachea is continued down the lung fora very great distance. It is from high up in the neck an open gutter and runs as such to a point about half way down, or not far from the posterior end of, the liver. The trachea does not cease at the end of the vascular region of the lung, but extends some way beyond the point at which the lung ceases to be vascular. When a transverse section is made of the lung behind the heart, the appearances presented suggest at first that the trachea is quite independent of the lung. ‘The elasticity of the cartilaginous rings keeps the trachea closed, and produces the impression of a closed tube running within the lung. It is not, however, closed but freely communicates along its whole length with the cavity of the lung. ‘The lung-tissue does not extend forwards beyond the region of the heart; this species has therefore no tracheal lung. The honeycombed structure ceases in a very abrupt fashion along a line which is rather oblique. I found a pocket running forwards such as is met with in Coluber longissimus and is not uncommon among Snakes. There is a considerable distance in the neck-region between the separated extremities of the tracheal semirings. But the membrane which divides them is not swollen out into such a thin-walled sac as occurs in Coluber corais. tis rather thick, and nowhere could I find any traces of a honeycombed structure, which, considering the abrupt way in which the lung ends at the heart, would hardly be expected. Furthermore, there does not seem to be in this serpent any rudimentary left lungatall. Ifit be present, which I doubt, it is so small as to have escaped my observation. It is clear that Coluber melanoleucus presents more differences from the three species of Coluber that have been described than any of them do from each other. The absence of a rudiment of the left lung7y, the enormous extension down the lung of the trachea, and finally the abrupt ending of the lung-tissue in the region of the heart, are the salient points of difference. Jam much inclined to doubt whether the inclusion of this species in the same genus with the three species already referred to is, anatomically considered, a sound procedure. But I hope later to offer some observations upon the systematic arrangement of certain Ophidia. * JT dissected two examples. + Even if this has been overlooked considerable differences remain. Cope, however, was unable to find it like myself. 1906.] RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 523 Coluber catenifer agrees in most respects with Coluber melano- lewcws, and these species, together with two or three others, have been placed in a genus apart, viz. *Pityophis. The trachea in the same way extends a long way down the lung, further, indeed, than in Coluber melanoleucus. I traced the tracheal gutter some way behind the liver, in fact to a point about two inches behind that organ and close to the gall-bladder. In this region of the body the lung has ceased to be vascular. As in the last species, the lung-tissue is sharply marked offanteriorly and there is an anterior diverticulum of the lung. Nor could I find the orifice of a second lung. ‘Transverse sections of the lung in the vascular part of that organ showed precisely the same features as have been indicated in describing Coluber melanoleucus. The structure of the trachea and lung, in fact, of the present species shows a slightly exaggerated replica of the structure of the same parts in Coluber melanoleucus. Coluber catenifer var. sayi.—l have examined a snake which is thus labelled, but I am not aware by whom it was identified. It forms part of a small collection of Snakes in spirit belonging to the Society. In Boulenger’s ‘Catalogue of Snakes in the British Museum,’ ‘ Coluber catenifer var. sayi” is placed under Coluber melanoleucus, which is distinguished from C. catenifer. In the example referred to here, I find absolutely no difference from the lungs of Coluber catenifer as described above. So alike are they that I find no occasion for a description 7. * Of the 45 species of Coluber described by Boulenger (Catalogue of Snakes in the British Museum, vol. 11. 1894, pp. 29 et seg.) the two above mentioned are the only species in which only one labial scale forms a part of the margin of the eye and there are two suboculars. In four other species which have been assigned to the genus Pityophis both of these characters do not occur. The presence of a subocular segmented off from the preocular is common and occurs, I may take this opportunity of remarking, in an example of Coluber longissimus which I have examined, on one side of the head with indications of approaching separation onthe other. This point is not mentioned by Boulenger in his definition of the species and is theretore, I presume, not usual. J am able therefore here to correlate a peculiarity of internal structure with an external modification, viz. in the scaling of the head. But without a more exhaustive survey of the structure of the species of Coluber, it would be unwise to attempt generic rearrangements. + It is clear therefore that the question of the species requires some consideration. I extract from Boulenger’s description in the Catalogue (p. 68) the following features as distinctive of the two, viz.:— C. catenifer. Rostral as broad as deep or slightly deeper. Anterior chin-shields longer than the posterior. Subcaudal scales more than 65. C. melanoleucus. Rostral much deeper than broad. Parietals usually broken up behind. Anterior chin-shields much longer than the posterior. Subcaudals less than 65. Some or all of labials with black sutures. The other characters used either overlap or are not diagnostic so far as these two species are concerned, In one specimen of C. catenifer and two of C. melanoleucus belonging to the Society I distinguish the above-mentioned characters with the exception of the black edges of the labial, which occur in both species. In the latter the subcaudal scales were 48 and 57 pairs respectively ; in the single specimen of C. catenifer 71 pairs. In this specimen, the prefrontals were not broken up, as is the case, according to Cope (P. U.S. Nat. Mus. 1892), with C. wilkesit ; there was a subocular below the preocular and one subocular below the two postoculars. In the two specimens of C. melano- leweus there was no subocular in front and one below the two postoculars. In all other respects, save colour, these several individuals agreed with Boulenger’s description. Yet Baird & Girard (Cat. N. Amer. Reptiles in Mus. Smiths. Inst. 524 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, Coluber guttatus has a lung which is slightly different in various ways from the species already described. The tracheal gutter extends a good way down the lung, in fact a little way beyond the point where it ceases to be vascular. This point is 5 inches from the apex of the heart, and rather more than 2 inches after the commencement of the liver. The lung-tissue does not cease abruptly anteriorly, but dies away gradually some little way in front of the heart. Here and further forward the membrane lying between the extremities of the tracheal semirings is of considerable breadth. At about on a level with the apex of the heart there is an aperture in the lung-tissue which leads into a forwardly directed diverticulum of the lung. I could find a minute though decided trace of a second lung arising from the tracheal gutter on a level with the apex of the heart. The lung in Hrythrolamprus csculapit is single, there being only a rudiment of the second lung. This rudiment, however, is distinctly vascular and cellular in appearance, and a branch from the pulmonary artery serves it. It is not, however, more than about ? of an inch in length, and communicates with the trachea not by a separate bronchus, but by a round hole in the trachea before the latter ends in the interior of the perfect lung. The complete lung extends headwards beyond the point where the trachea enters it, as in various Snakes and Lizards. This section of the lung has a kind of independence, for it possesses a restricted lumen which is not broadly continuous with that of the lung 1853, pp. 65 & 69) distinguish “ Pityophis” catenifer and ‘ P.” melanoleucus by, inter alia, the numerous dorsal blotches of the former and the fewer and larger of the latter. Boulenger does not use this difference, and for the good reason (so far as his own views are concerned) that he regards as a synonym of C. melanoleucus “ Churchillia” or “ Pitoyphis” bellona of Baird & Girard (loc. cit. p. 66), which has, like C. catenifer, numerous smallish dorsal blotches, but has the narrow rostral and other characters of C. melanoleucus. The specimen of Coluber described above as “Ooluber catenifer var. sayi’’ is quite obviously Baird & Girard’s Pityophis bellona. It has the additional frontal shield mentioned and figured by those authors. In other respects, save colour, it agrees in all the characters that I have just men- tioned with my two examples of C. melanoleucus; the subcaudal scales are 55 pairs. The colour is paler than that of my example of C. catenifer, but the pattern is the same. These facts seem to me to support the view (held by Cope and others) that Coluber sayi is a distinct species. And I have further evidence pointing the same way. ‘The arrangement of the tracheal gutter is like that of Coluber catenifer, not of C. melanoleucus. In Coluber melanoleucus (measuring 41 inches from snout to cloaca) the liver, 72 inches long, commences 4 inches away from the apex of the heart. A second specimen showed the same proportion. In an example of Coluber catenifer (36% inches from snout to cloaca) the liver (7 inches long) commences 2 inches from the apex of the heart. Finally, in “‘ Coluber catenifer var. sayi,’ measuring 32 inches from snout to cloaca, the liver (6% inches long) begins 2 inches from apex of heart. ‘To resume— the snake called Coluber sayi by Schlegel and Churchillia bellona by Baird & Girard is not to be confused with either C. melanoleucus or C. catenifer. While the scaling of the head agrees with that of O. melanolewcus, the colour plan is that of C. catenifer. Certain visceral characters also agree with those of C. catenifer rather than C. melano- leucus. We must therefore either fuse all these varieties into one species or distinguish three. The latter course seems to be the more reasonable. But it obviously remains to be determined what are the limits of the species, so far as external characters are concerned. 1906. | RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 525 itself, but certain of the alveoli (about two I think) of the latter are deeper than the rest and communicate with the pulmonary appendage. In a transverse section of the latter it is seen to be for the most part solid, with a cavity at either side. It seems to be a prolongation of the outer edge of the lung proper, which is thicker in its wall than the rest of the lung. There i is no special communication of the headward extension of the lung with the trachea. The lung ceases to be vascular some way down the liver, and ends altogether a few inches before the termination posteriorly of the liver. When the trachea of Hrythrolamprus (text-fig. 93, p. 526) is cut open, it is seen that, as in many (probably in all) Snakes, the tube is not completely encircled with the cartilaginous hoops. There is a median dorsal area which is occupied by soft tissue. This area of soft tissue is continuous with the lung-tissue, and, more than that, it is not merely a fibrous membrane but is divided into hexagonal cells. It presents, in fact, the honeycombed appearance of the lung though less marked. This is obviously a tracheal lung, recorded in this Serpent here for the first time, so far as I am aware, ‘The tracheal lung of Hrythrolamprus is, however, of small dimensions. The cells are ranged not more than two or three deep, The lung therefore does not project dorsally from the trachea as in the better-developed forms of tracheal lung. It is not, in fact, wider than in many forms where there is no deve- lopment of pulmonary tissue in this region, but merely a fibrous connecting-band between the tracheal semirings. The tracheal lung, however, inextensive as it is, seems to function as a lung, for it is vascular and of the same red colour as the functional lung below. It has, moreover, a special branch of the pulmonary artery supplying it. The pulmonary artery of this Snake is single (text-fig. 93). Tt reaches the lung at the apex of the anterior lobe, and passes obliquely back, lying ultimately to the outside of the lung outside of the vena cava inferior, which covers in the natural position of the viscera the pulmonary vein. ‘The artery before it quite reaches the lung gives off a branch which at once divides into two. ‘The lower of these branches supplies the anterior lobe of the lung. The upper branch turns back, and runs up the trachea along the pulmonary surface of that tube. It corresponds therefore to the anterior branch of the pulmonary artery in Bitis*, and to the tracheal branch of the pulmonary artery in certain Lizards. The pulmonary artery can be traced nearly to the end of the lung; it is to be seen in the posterior anangious region of that viscus. At regular intervals it gives off branches running across the lung. In the anangious region these branches are slender; it is an interesting fact that they end by anasto- mosing with the intercostals above. The nutritive blood of the lung is therefore not separated from the respiratory blood. * Beddard, “Contributions to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,”’ P. Z.S. 1906, vol. i. p. 36. + Id. ibid. p. 44. 526 MR, F. E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND | May 1, It is correctly stated by Duvernoy* that ‘on voit dans un long espace des traces de la trachée intrapulmonaire dans le poumon unique + de l’Lrythrolamprus aesculapii.” There is not, however, a distinct gutter such as occurs in so many Snakes Text-fig. 92. Text-fig. 93. ne Text-fic. 92.—Commencement of lung of Erythrolamprus esculapti cut open. a. Forward extension of lung along trachea; 7. Lung; 7’. Rudimentary second lung, the orifice into which is shown in the tracheal semirings; o. Orifice of head- ward extension of lung (a) into main lung. The tracheal lung is shown in front of (above) o. Text-fig. 93.—Lung of Hrythrolamprus esculapii. referred to in the present communication. It is a stout, though narrow flat band, showing no incurving of its sides to form a * Lecons d’Anatomie Comparée de Georges Cuvier, red. par G. L. Duvernoy, ed. 2, vol. vii. (Paris, 1840) p. 188. + This particular statement is inaccurate. 1906. ] RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 527 gutter, which extends beyond the commencement of the liver. This band seems to me to present a stage which I have not yet met with in any other Snake, lying between the more usual tracheal gutter and the rudimentary seam, which in a few Snakes (e. g., Python sebe and, which is more to the point at the present moment, Z'arbophis) seems to be all that is left to represent the continuation backwards of the trachea within the lung. Tarbophis obtusus closely resembles Hrythrolamprus cesculapii in the structure of its respiratory organs, and both Snakes are placed by Boulenger in the same subfamily of Opisthoglypha. Tt has a very distinct tracheal lung. This tracheal lung, how- ever, as in Hrythrolamprus, is of very modest dimensions. Although it presents the characteristic honeycombed structure only, two or three of the cells intervene between the free ends of the tracheal semirings. The tracheal lung is, in fact, very narrow. The trachea is continued for a short distance into the lung proper, and shortly before its termination gives off a bronchus to the rudimentary left lung. From the point where the tracheal semirings apparently terminate in the interior of the lung a fibrous seam is continued onwards, which recalls at once a very similar seam or ridge in the lungs of the Lacertilian genus Teius* as well as of Python sebe, and of Hrythrolamprus just described. In Leptodira hotambaia, which belongs, like Hrythrolamprus and Yarbophis, to the Dipsadomorphine family of the Opistho- glypha, the lungs are not widely different from those of Tarbophis. The advantage of examining a recently dead specimen is chiefly seen in the ease with which the vascular can be marked off from the anangious region of the lung. The minute portion of the lung which in this Snake (and others) serves as an efficient breathing- organ, contrasts with the large extent of the functional lung in such a snake as itis arietans. There are about 10 inches of vascular lung in the Puff-Adder and about 14 inches in Leptodira hotambeia. Nor is this enormous difference to be explained by relative bulk. Leptodira possesses a rudimentary left lung which in spite of its small size is red, and thus entirely vascular. I have had to remark in other cases upon the vascularity of the rudi- mentary lung in Snakes. Assuming that the point where the rudimentary lung arises marks the line of division between the thoracic and tracheal lungs, Leptodira may be said to possess a functional tracheal lung. As there is no headward extension of the larger lung, it is not possible to fix the boundary of the thoracic and tracheal lung otherwise. There is, however, an exten- sion of lung-tissue further forward than the very short tract lying in front of the bifurcation of the trachea which is vascular. The tracheal lung is very wide. The membranous interval between the dorsal ends of the tracheal semirings is very much wider than the diameter of the trachea itself. This Snake, therefore, in the * Milano, Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Anat. vii. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—l1906, No. XXXVI. 36 528 MR. F, E, BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May 1, relations of the tracheal to the thoracic lung, bears the same relation to Zarbophis as does Coluber corais to e. g. Coluber melanoleucus. Finally, I have to point out that the bronchus does not extend very far down the functional lung. The bronchial gutter, which is quite flattened out and not gutter-like as it is in Coluber *, reaches back to a point not more than half an inch behind the apex of the heart. In afresh example of Boodon lineatus the conditions of the lung were very plainly visible on opening the body. The limits between the vascular and the anangious regions of the respiratory organ were easily mapped. The trachea was seen to be provided dorsally with a tracheal lung, the cells of which were especially plain and presented the appearance, before the trachea was split up, of bubbles of air lying between the ends of the tracheal rings. At a level with the commencement of the ventricle, this tracheal ring took on a red hue, this part being vascular. The vascularity of the lung was seen to continue down about an inch along the liver, before the middle of which it ceased to be visible. The bronchus is not, in this species, continued far down the lung. It ceases, in fact, at the very commencement of the thoracic lung. A careful examination failed to reveal any trace of a second rudi- mentary lung. There was no perforation of the open bronchus at the end of the heart. Neither is there any forward extension of the functional lung headwards. The lung of this Snake is therefore primitive in that it has retained considerable traces of the tracheal lung, but modified in the entire absence of a second lung and of a forward extension of the lung headwards. A second specimen showed identical characters. Sepedon hemachates.—In view of its relationship to the Hama- dryad, I have been particularly anxious to examine this Snake, which, however, shows only slight resemblances to the peculiar precardiac diverticula of the windpipe in Ophiophagust. The single lung—I have been unable to find a rudimentary lung {— commences to be vascular in the region of the heart and con- tinues to be so a little distance down the liver. The lung-tissue does not, however, abruptly end or begin anteriorly ; it commences gradually at about on a level with the auricles of the heart, this portion being the equivalent of the tracheal lung of other species, though not vascular. In front of this again the ends of the tracheal rings are separated by a very wide membranous interval, fully as wide as the true thoracic lung, and forming an air-sac continuous with the lung which extends up to the head. The arrangement is, in fact, like that of Coluber corais described above. The tracheal gutter does not extend far into the thoracic lung and is continued a little way further by a fibrous band. The new facts which have been here detailed seem to afford See p. 522. P. Z. S. 1908, vol. 11. p. 332. Milne-Edwards (Phys. et Anat. Comp. ii. 1857, p. 308 footnote) states that there ne. Ott * is 1906. ] RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 529 additional evidence for the position which I ventured to take up in arecent communication tothe Society*. I there expressed the view that the tracheal lung typically exists in the Ophidia, and that those cases where no traces are to be found are to be looked upon as a reduction from a former state of affairs where the tracheal lung was fully developed and functional. It seem unlikely that the reverse is the case, and that the various genera in which undoubted remains of a tracheal lung are now to be found have independently acquired that structure. If such instances were limited in number to a very few, that view might with greater reason be adopted. As it is, it appears, from what we know of comparative anatomy, to be not at all likely that a complex series of modifications, resulting in the change of structure and vascularisation of a membrane uniting the separate edges of the tracheal semirings, should independently and so con- stantly occur as the facts would then demand. The new instances which I have been able to bring forward in the present communication thus furnish additional arguments for the correctness of my way of looking upon the matter, as I think. Tt is interesting to note the ways in which the tracheal lung has disappeared. In two Snakes so remote in the system as are Coluber corais and Sepedon hemachates we have a practically identical disposition of the lung. In both, the precardiac portion of the lung is a very wide sac along which the trachea runs as a gutter, and at the lowest extreme of which only is there any development of lung-tissue. There is no question here of a tracheal sac separate from the ensuing lung. Both organs are evidently continuous. Nor is there a fixed line of demarcation between the two regions; the one fades into the other. On the hypothesis of a reduction, the structure of both of these genera can be derived from such a condition as is preserved in the Viperide ; or, if the introduction of a family, generally regarded as much modified, be objected to (though it does not follow that the Vipers are not archaic in one particular structure), then the Boid Ungalia may be adduced, so far as I can judge from Prof. Cope’s statements. In Coluber longissimus and Hrythrolamprus csculapii, two Snakes equally as remote from each other as are the two examples just treated of, the modification is evidently taking place along slightly different lies. In these Serpents the lung has apparently shrunk in diameter before commencing to atrophy as a lung, but the process of lung disappearance has taken place from before backwards. ‘The initial stage of this series of modifications is offered by such a type as Chersydrus granulatus, in which the tracheal lung, according to Cope’s figure f, is of considerably less calibre than the tracheal lung of a Viper. These are the two principal lines along which the degeneration of the tracheal lung has taken place: 7. ¢., firstly the disappearance of the lung-tissue, * “Contributions to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,” P. Z. S. 1906, vol. i. p. 41. + Loc. cit. pl. xiii. 36* 930 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE VASCULAR AND [May l, and then the restriction of the membrane left; or, firstly the re- duction in diameter of the lung and then the disappearance of the lung-tissue. That degeneration of this kind should occur in more than one way is not surprising. It may be obviously matched by parallel instances. Tt is well known that among the Boide, for example, the lung, or lungs, extend, like those of Lizards, beyond (7. e. headwards of) the point of entrance of the bronchus into the lung. I have mentioned several instances in the present communication. This recess is enormously exaggerated in Heterodon platyrhinos, as Prof. Cope (as well as others) has pointed out, and I can confirm him from the examination of several mdividuals. It is in this pocket of the lung that Prof. Cope seeks the origin of the tracheal lung, if I rightly interpret the following passage, viz. (loc. ett. p- 218) :—‘ The dorsal lung may present proximally alongside of the trachea an auricle or pocket, and this is so developed im the genus Heterodon as to reach to the head, without communication with the trachea, other than that furnished by the normal portion of the lung. In the Solenoglypha, without exception, this ex- tension of the dorsal lung is present, and extends to the head, and its lumen is continuous with the trachea throughout its length. The same structure exists,” &. In the above-given account of various species of Ophidia, it will be seen that I have found the pocket in question to coexist with the rudiments of a tracheal lung independent of it. I cannot therefore accept Prof. Cope’s view of the origin of the tracheal lung, and I put forward my own suggestions in its place. His attempt to classify Serpents by the character of the lungs will possibly form the groundwork of a more successful scheme. At present the facts are not sufficient for the elaboration of a com- plete arrangement of those Reptiles. Cope is probably justified in some of the details of the scheme, for example in the separation of the genus Ungalia from other Boas and Pythons. It is clear, however, that he is not necessarily right in separating Lepto- | gnathine from Scytalinz, for though the former doubtless possess a tracheal lung, I have shown that Hryihrolamprus has considerable traces of one. In details I have myself pointed out that the characters of the lungs offer useful facts of assistance in classi- fication. This is shown, for instance, among the species of the genus Coluber, and the minute points of likeness between Lrythro- lamprus and another Opisthoglyph genus, viz. Yarbophis, are noteworthy. The presence or absence of the rudimentary lung is obviously not so useful a character. The usefulness of the lung-structure in settling details of classification is also well shown in the case of Lioheterodon. This genus was confused by earlier systematists with the American Heterodon. Boulenger has shown%, utilising a structural pecu- liarity in the dorsal vertebre first made use of by Prof. Cope, * B. M. Cat. Snakes, vol. i. 1893, p. 171. 1906.] RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN THE OPHIDIA. 531 that Zroheterodon and Heterodon are distinct. The lung con- firms Boulenger’s view of the separateness of these genera. I have already referred to the long headward extension of the lung in Heterodon, which nearly reaches the head. In Lioheterodon madagascariensis this diverticulum of lung is only 2 of an inch in length, and is anangious at its free extremity. Moreover, in Heiteredon, the interannular membrane is very narrow; in Lio- heterodon on the other hand, as I have already partly indicated in another communication upon the Ophidia*, the membrane in question is much wider than are the tracheal semirings. Near to the heart are two folds across the membrane which result in the formation of a pouch. This is not unsuggestive of the pouches in the Hamadryad Snake. In any case the differences in lung- structure between the two genera will be obvious. § Résumé of Principal Facts. From the foregoing account of new facts in the structure of the Ophidia I may select the following as embodying the principal results :— (1) The umbilical vein largely persists in Boa, as in Hunectes, as a functional vessel. In Python there are less conspicuous traces of it; but it is distinctly recognisable in P. molurus and P. regius as well asin P. sebe. No blood-holding diverticulum of the post-caval has been yet met with in Colubrine Snakes, the enly vestige of the embryonic umbilical being a membranous seam on the liver of Coluber corais. (2) The additional facts recorded in the present communication support the probability that a forward prolongation of the renal afferent vein to the region of the gonads, which is to be regarded as part of a persistent post-cardinal, is characteristic of the Boidse and at least not characteristic (though rudiments may occur) of the Colubrine Snakes. So far the Boide lie at a lower level than other Snakes. (3) In some, but not in all, Boide the parietal tributaries of the renal afferent vein are connected at their emergence from the body-wall by a continuous longitudinal trunk which extends from behind to in front of the kidney. In the region of the kidney this longitudinal vessel gives off no branches to the kidney itself. In the Colubrine Snakes, on the contrary, there is no such longi- tudinal dorsal parietal vessel; but intercostal veins may emerge from the parietes in the region of the kidney to cross it and enter the afferent renal vein. But there is no direct connection of these intercostals with the capillary network of the kidney such as has been found to occur in the snake-like Lizards Ophisaurus and Amphisbena. (4) The generality of the occurrence in the Boide of but a * P. ZS. 1906, vol. i. p. 12. + Beddard, P. Z. S. 1903, vol. ii. p. 319. 532 THE VASCULAR AND RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS IN opHIDIA. [May 1, single renal artery to each kidney, a fact quite independent of the size of the kidney, is confirmed by several fresh examples. (5) More evidence is adduced to show that among the Boine Snakes the relations of the anterior abdominal vein to the afferent renal veins are those of the Lacertilia; and it has been pointed out that (in Boa constrictor) these veins may be symmetrical in their origins in spite of the asymmetry of the kidneys. This is, of course, a further point of likeness to (presumably) primitive conditions. (6) In considering the relations of the more or less double anterior abdominal vein of the Boidz to the same vein or veins in other Sauropsida, it is (or may be) important to note that, at any rate occasionally (Loa constrictor), the left trunk is associated by transverse connections with the epigastric vein, and the right trunk only with the fat-body, and not at all with the epigastric vein. (7) Attention is directed to the intercostal arteries of Hrythro- amprus, which appears to offer an intermediate condition between the Boid Snakes and the Viperide. ‘To others it has appeared that the Viperine Snakes are to be derived from the Opistho- glyphous Colubrines. (8) The structure of the genus Corallus on the whole confirms the current view that it is to be referred to the Boine section of the Boide. (9) The existence of rudiments, apparently functional, of the tracheal lung are more numerous in the Ophidia than would be inferred from a consultation of the literature of the subject. Such traces have been described above in a number of species where they have not been hitherto recorded. (10) The prevalence of at least traces of a tracheal lung in so many and often not nearly related families is an argument for considering that its existence is a retention—that it has not been acquired separately in the several genera or families where it occurs, but has rather been lost in those genera, &c., where there is now no tracheal lung. (11) The view of Prof. Cope that the tracheal lung is a further extension of the Lizard-like pocket extending beyond the entrance of the bronchus, which is found in the functional lung or lungs of many Snakes, cannot be correct, since this pocket coexists with remains of the tracheal lung in some forms. (12) The structure of the lungs offers facts of detailed classi- ficatory value; but the wide prevalence of the tracheal lung or remains of it does not tend to support the scheme of classification set out by Prof Cope in its entirety. 1906.] MR. H. MUNT ON AN OTTER FROM UGANDA. 533 May 15, 1906. Dr. J. Ros— Braprorp, F.R.8., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following report on the additions that had been made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April 1906 :— The number of registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of April was 171. Of these 71 were acquired by presentation and 6 by purchase, 80 were received on deposit, 4 in exchange, and 10 were born in the Gardens. The number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 150. Among the additions special attention may be called to :— A Samango Guenon (Cercopithecus samvango) from South Africa, deposited on April 25th. A Pallas’s Cat (felis manul) from Tibet, deposited on April 3rd, new to the collection. Fourteen Desert Jerboa Rats (Notomys cervinus) from Australia, deposited on April 20, new to the collection. A Canadian Porcupine (£rithizon dorsatus) from North America, presented by Mr. Munro Walker on April 11th. My. F. BE. Beddard, F.R.S., exhibited a nearly full-time fetus of the Red-fronted Lemur (Lemur rujfifrons), and called attention to the carpal vibrisse, which were extremely conspicuous, though the rest of the ventral surface of the arm was devoid of hair. Mr. Beddard also exhibited, on behalf of Dr. C. G. Seligmann, a cock of mixed breed which had been caponised for commer cial purposes whilst young. The bird, which had been under obser- vation for over a year, at no time showed any evidence of sexual attraction for or towards either sex. On dissection, there was no trace of testicular tissue. The head was hen-like, but the bird possessed well-marked and rather stout but short spurs, whilst the tail, which contained sickle-feathers, was “ over-furnished.” Mr. R. I. Pocock, F.Z.S., Superintendent of the Gardens, exhibited and made remarks upon a specimen of a Leaf-insect (Phylliwm) from the Seychelles, which had been brought to the Ceredlens by Mr. H. G. B. Meade-Waldo, F.Z.8. Mr. Henry Munt, F.Z.S., exhibited, on behalf of Mr. Bussell, a skin of the Spotted-necked Otter (Lutra maculicollis) obtained at Fort Johnston, Uganda. The skull and carcase had been extracted through the mouth, thus leaving the skin intact. The following papers were read :— 534 MR. J. N. HALBERT ON THE HYDRACHNIDA [| May 15, 1. Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905. Report on the Hydrachnida. By J. N. Haperr, Dublin Museum *. [Received March 9, 1906. } (Text-figure 94.) The Water Mites collected by Dr. W. A. Cunnington were taken in Lake Nyasa and are referable to two species, which have been described by Dr. F. Koenike in his papers on the Hydrachnida of Madagascar and Hast Africa. ENCENTRIDOPHORUS SPINIFER (Koen.). Two of the three specimens of Hydrachnida collected at Nyasa are to be referred to this species. Dr. Koenike includes it in the Text-fig. 94. cols A. Dorsal view of Arrhenurus plenipalpts, Koen. (legs and palps not drawn). B. End segment of fourth pair of legs of Encentridophorus spinifer (Koen.). genus Atax (1); but Piersig makes a new genus Lncentridophorus for its reception (2), chiefly on account of the peculiar spine which replaces the claws on the end segment of the fourth pair of legs * Communicated by Dr. W. T. Caumay, F.Z.S. 1906.] OF THE THIRD TANGANYIKA EXPEDITION. 535 (text-fig. 9 B), and the absence of a large chitinous disc-bearing plate on each side of the genital field. The genital discs are imbedded in the soft skin of the body. The colouring of the Nyasa specimens is pale green with brownish blotches on the dorsal surface, the central czcal area is yellow, and the legs and palps green. Localities. Zanzibar (Stuhlmann); Dromira Bay, Lake Nyasa, June 19, 1904, amongalgz &e. (Cunnington). ARRHENURUS PLENIPALPIS Koen. A male Arrhenurus found in the same locality as the preceding species seems to be referable to A. plenipalpis Koen. On com- parison, however, with the description and figures of this species some rather puzzling differences are apparent, notably the presence in the Nyasa specimen of a chitinous petiolus-like organ. This structure is situated in the middle line of the body and projects in the posterior indentation of the body appendage in the form of a short bluntly-pointed process (text-fig. 94 A). This, however, is a sexual characteristic, which in the Micrwrus section of the genus may possibly be prominent only in some specimens or under certain conditions. The forked chitinous organ in the centre of the appendage, which Dr. Koenike calls the “ Hautgebilde,” seems to differ somewhat in outline, but I suspect that this may be due to the preservation of the specimens or to slight differences in the drawing. Otherwise the Nyasa mite agrees closely with the description of A. plenipalpis (3), and a full description of the Nyasa specimen is unnecessary. Although Dr. Koenike describes the present species in the letterpress of his paper (8) under the name of 4. plenipalpis, and makes reference to plate xxi. figures 36-40, yet in the explanation of the plates these particular figures are referred to as representing a new species, pertusus (page 427). No explanation is given for this change of name. The species is included in Dr. Piersig’s recent work on the Hydrachnida (4) as A. plenipalpis. Localities. Madagascar ; Nossi-Bé; German East Africa (Quili- mane); Dromira Bay, Lake Nyasa (Cunnington). Bibliography. 1. Kornrxt, F.—“ Die von Herrn Dr. F. Stuhlmann in Ostafrica gesammelten Hydrachniden.” Jahrb. Hamburg. wissenschaft. Anstalten, 1893, x. 2. Prersic, R.—“ Bemerkungen zur Hydrachnidenkunde.” Zool. Anz. 1897, xx. pp. 59-61. 3. Kounrxn, F.—“ Hydrachniden: Fauna von Madagascar und Nossi-Bé.” Abhand. Senckenb. Ges. 1898, xxi. pp. 297-435. 4, Prorsic, R.—“ Hydrachnide und Halacaride.” Das Tierreich, 1901. 13. Lieferung. 536 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON | May 15, 2. On Mammals from Northern Australia presented to the National Museum by Sir Wm. Ingram, Bt., and the Hon. John Forrest. By OLprizyp Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.8.* [Received April 2, 1906.] (Plate XX XVIL-4) The Northern Territory of South Australia has a Mammalian fauna of a very peculiar type, and one that is far from being worked out, in spite of the labours of Dr. Elsey, Mr. Gould’s collectors, and others in early days, and of Dahl, Tunney, and others more recently, Similarly the centre of the continent is badly represented in the National Collection, although Prof. W. B. Spencer, of Melbourne, who first went there with the Horn Expedition, has laid the foundation of a proper knowledge of it. Now, thanks to the liberality of Sir Wiliam Ingram, Bart., and of the Hon. John Forrest, of Brisbane, a zoological collector has been put to work at Alexandria, a station intermediate in position between the two areas above referred to, and therefore in a district possessing a very special interest to the student of Australian zoology. Alexandria is situated about lat. 19°S., long. 137° E., about 200 miles inland from the 8.W. coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria, and lies in an area draining inwards to the Polygonum swamp. The watershed-boundaries would, however, appear to be low, and unlikely to act as barriers to the dispersal of species, so that in this region the question of drainage is not likely to be of great zoological importance. Collections have also been made near Alroy, about 100 miles to the west of Alexandria. Perhaps later the exploration may be extended still further west to the ranges along the Trans-continental Telegraph-line. Mr. W. Stalker, the collector employed, has naturally found immense difficulties in the way of collecting in this desert region, owing to the long-continued drought, no rains of any value having fallen for several years, and the fauna being therefore at. its lowest ebb. For this reason the collection of which I here give a list is a most creditable one for the time in which it was obtained, and as rain has since fallen in the district we may hope that Mr. Stalker will now be enabled to capture many further forms of interest that have hitherto escaped him. The present collection contains examples of 16 species, of which five are new. The most interesting of these is the peculiar little flat-headed Marsupial mouse which I have named Phascogale * [The complete accounts of the new species described in this communication appear here; the names and preliminary diagnoses of two of the species were published in the ‘ Abstract,’ and these are distinguished by the vames being under- lined.—Eprrokr. | + For explanation of the Plate, see p. 543. PZ.S.1906. Pl XXXVI. H Goodchild, del. et lith. Fhatth imp 1, MUS i ORR Swi, Be IP levATS COG Nile ING AIVE 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA. 537 ingrami, after Sir William Ingram, though a new species of Aus (IZ. forresti) has such peculiarities of dentition that their study has resulted in a recent. rearrangement of the murine genera of Australia. 1. NyctorHiLus GEOrFRoYI Leach. ¢. Alexandria. Forearm 35 mm. 2. CHALINOLOBUS GOULDI Gray. 3. 122,127. ©. 125,128. Bluff Hole, Alexandria, 21-24 May, 1905. 3. SCOTEINUS GREYI Gould. Ten specimens. Alexandria. A, NYCTINOMUS PLICATUS COLONICUS, subsp. n. ¢. Alexandria. B.M. No. 6.3.9.16. Type. Similar in all essential particulars to the true Indian phcatus, but rather larger in body and limb dimensions, and markedly larger in the skull, the cranial crests, sagittal and lambdoid, very well developed. Dimensions of the type, measured on the spirit-specimen :— Forearm 50 mm. . Head and body 67 mm.; tail 42; ear 22; third finger, meta- carpal 50, 1st phalanx 21, 2nd phalanx 22; lower leg 18. Skull—egreatest length to occipital crest 22; basal length 17-7; zygomatic breadth 13-5; mastoid breadth 12; palate length 8°7 ; front of upper canine to hack of m* 8; front of lower canine to back of m, 9. Hab. and Type as above. A South-Australian specimen of WV. plicatus received from Prof. Leche in 1890 also belongs to this larger race. On the other hand, examples from New Guinea and the Fiji Islands correspond in size with Javan and Indian specimens. 5. Canis pinco Blum. Skin and two skulls. Alexandria. 6. Mus viLLosisstuus Waite. M., longipilis Gould nec Waterh. 6 PSO Si 80 lO OG NOSIS SAO Ahi Ory era ie 141,143. Alexandria. gd. 145, 186, 187. 2. 147, 148, 184, 185. 8.W. of Alroy. This species is so common at the station as to be a serious est. The type locality of Gould’s M. longipilis was the Victoria River, about 400 miles to the west of Alexandria, but in the same faunal area. 538 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [May 15, ¢. Mus rorresti Thos. (Plate XX XVII. fig. 1.) Abstr. P. Z.8. No, 32, p. 6, May 22, 1906. ©. 92, 101, 104, 117, 118, 119. Alexandria. es Caught on dry grassy ‘plain. Native name ‘ Keragenga.’ Mamme 4,”—_W. 8. Size medium, intermediate between “rat” and “mouse.” Fur of medium length; hairs of back 9-10 mm. long, fairly coarse, but not spinous. General colour above pale ‘“ drab-grey,” paling to a creamy drab on the sides. Some specimens are, however, more buffy in tone. Under surface pure sharply defined white through- out, the hairs white to their bases. Ears rather short, their proectote pale brown, not darker than the general colour of the head ; a tuft of creamy-drab hairs at their anterior base. Upper surface of hands and feet pure white. Tail well-haired, greyish white, little darker along the upper side. Skull rather lightly built, with a slender muzzle. Interorbital region narrow, parallel-sided, its centre concave upwards, its edges rounded anteriorly, squared behind, but without ridges. Palatal foramina long, reaching backward to the anterior fourth of m'’, unusually narrow, especially posteriorly, their edges rounded, Palate extending in middle line some way behind m‘, the interpterygoid fossee commencing further forward than the mesopterygoid one between them; the former very broad, the latter narrow. Bulle comparatively little swollen. Incisors slender, even in old specimens. Molars of rather unusual structure as compared with typical Mus (ratius, &e.), but there is a great deal of variation among the Australian Muride in this respect, and the characters of J. forresti are led up to by other described species—e. g., M. nanus and M. gouldii. M* with a very strongly marked cingular ledge at its antero-internal corner, practically forming a small supplementary anterior lamina ; the normal anterior and second laminz very strongly slanted backwards internally, their outer cusps hardly perceptible. M? with the large antero-internal cusp (“6” of Winge) about equal to the postero-external (“5 5”), the normal main lamina between them strongly tilted, as in m’, and with its inner and median cusps subequal, the outer practically absent; a minute antero- external supplementary cusp present. Lower teeth unusually brachyodont; m, and m, each with a small median supplementary cusp behind. Dimensions of the type :— Head and body 104 mm.; tail 72; hind foot 19; ear 15. Skull—greatest length 25; basilar length 21; zygomatic breadth 13:5; nasals, length 8°5; interorbital breadth 3°6 ; palatilar length 13; diastema 7:6; palatal foramina 5°5x 1:4; length of upper molar series 4:4. Hab. Alexandria. Type. Old female. B.M. No. 6.3.9.39. Original number 118. Collected 10 May, 1905. 1906. | MAMMALS FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA. 539 This strikmg species may be readily distinguished from all others by its intermediate size, pale colour, pure white belly, peculiarly narrowed palatal foramina, and the unusual dental characters above described. Mus fieldi Waite, in other respects apparently near it, has a very much longer tail. I have named it in honour of the Hon. John Forrest, who has shared with Sir William Ingram the expense of supporting a collector at Alexandria station. 8. Mus HERMANNSBURGENSIS Waite. 3. 126, 131. 9%. 124, 130. Bluff Hole, Alexandria, May 1905. 3. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 169,179,182. 9. 167, 168, 170, 180, 181, 183. 35 miles 8.W. of Alroy, Alexandria. Alt. 800’. “These Mice make large burrows in the hard stony ridges, piling up the excavated stones on the surface. The entrance is about 15 or 20 feet from the pile of stones, and is a small hole surrounded by a ring of stones.”—IW. S. Many of the dental peculiarities of M. forresti are present in this species, notably the strong development of the antero-internal cingular cusp of m"’, and the slanting position of the inner part of the laminz of the same tooth. There is, however, an unusual amount of variability in the development of the different cusps, especially in the degree to which the outer cusp of the upper molars is separated from the main middle one. The palatal foramina are not specially narrowed behind. No skins of this interesting species had been previously sent to Kurope. 9. Notomys miTcHELLI Og. Slo a Lod wy Vor glosn 2. Lit, MiSs Sea Oue hie 152, 156, 171, 173, 176; and one in spirit. S.W. of Alroy, Alexandria. Mamme 0—2=4, The range of WV. mitchelli seems to extend through the western part of New South Wales and Queensland. The British Museum contains examples collected by Sir Thomas Mitchell in Central New South Wales, while the type, now in the Sydney Museum, was obtained near the junction of the Murrumbidgee with the Murray. My reasons for applying the name Notomys to the Jerboa- footed members of the Conilwrus group have been explained elsewhere *. All these specimens have an indication of a glandular organ on the throat, but whether it is such a “pouch” as that on which Mr. Waite founded the genus Ascopharyna, the condition of the specimen does not enable me to state. * Aun. & Mag. N. H. (7) xvii. p. 81 (1906). 540 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [ May 15, 10. Macrorus rurus Desm. 2 (young). Alexandria. 11. TRIcHOSURUS VULPECULA ARNHEMENSIS Coll. OP 2s ls3en Alexandria: 12. DasyuRUS HALLUCATUS Gould. ©. 138. Alexandria, 800’. “Trapped near water. lives in lakes under and in rocks,.”— WS 13. PHASCOGALE MIMULUS, sp. n. @. Skinned from spirit. Alexandria. (B.M. No. 6.3.9.75.) A small species with a red patch behind each ear. No lower secator *, Size small, the general bulk far less than in Ph. macdonnellensis, with which alone comparison is needed. Fur short and fine; hairs of back only about 5 mm. in length, as compared with 8 mm. in the allied species. General colour above rather browner than “smoke-grey,” rather greyer than “ broccoli-brown,” but some slight alteration may have occurred during the few months the specimen has been in spirit. Under surface dull cream-buff, probably whiter originally, the hairs dark slaty for three-fourths their length. Head clearer grey than back, a light line edging the eyes above and below. Ears of medium length, their fine hairs rufous brown. Behind each ear a large and prominent patch of light rufous hairs, contrasting strongly with the general colour. Upper surface of hands and feet dull whitish; soles with the main pads arranged as in Ph. macdonnellensis, but the general surface less granulated and the foot itself markedly narrower, measuring in the type only 3:4 mm. in breadth as compared with 5:2. Tail nearly the length of the head and body, slightly incrassated at base, thinly haired, not tufted or crested, dull rufous brown above, rather paler below. Skull considerably smaller than that of Ph. macdonnellensis, but of the same general proportions. Nasals rather shorter and broader. Bulle conspicuously smaller. Teeth as in the allied species, with the remarkable exception that the last premolariform tooth, the ‘“secator” (p* of the Catalogue of Marsupials), while similarly absent in the lower jaw, is in the upper well developed, two-rooted, barely smaller than the tooth in front of it, and slightly larger than p'. In Ph. mac- donnellensis this tooth is minute and single-rooted above in the usual correlation to its total absence below. * The secator is the changing premolar, “ p*” of the Catalogue of Marsupials, but probably more correctly homologised with the tritus, or p* of other mainmals: cf. Ann. & Mag. N. H. (7) xvi. p. 425 (footnote) (1905). In that footnote the words “or more probably mp?” should be deleted. 1906.] MAMMALS FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA. 54l Dimensions of the type, measured in spirit :— Head and body 76 mm.; tail 74; hind foot 13:5; ear 16. Skull—ereatest length 24:7; basal length 22; zygomatic breadth 14:6; nasals 9; interorbital breadth 5:3; height of crown above basion 5°6; palate length 13; breadth at outer corners of penultimate molar 8°8; antero-posterior length of bulle 5:8 (6°8 in Ph. macdonnellensis); combined length of three anterior molariform teeth 5:2. i Hab. and Type as above. This species shows affinity to the Central-Austratian Ph. mac- donnellensis by its absent lower secator and its rufous ear-patches, but is distinguished by its smaller size, shorter fur, greyer colour, smaller bulle, and by the increased development of its upper secator, a development quite anomalous in the case of a species without a lower one. In Ph. macdonnellensis Prof. W. B. Spencer records that in every one of 13 specimens examined this tooth is either absent or very minute, so that the presence of a well- developed double-rooted upper secator clearly indicates specific distinction. 14, PHAscocaLe 1ncRAMI Thos. (Plate XX XVII. fig. 2.) Abstr. P.Z.8. No. 32, p. 6, May 22, 1906. 6. 110,111. @. 109,113. Buchanan, Alexandria, 600’. 6. 120. Bluff Hole, Alexandria, 600’. A remarkably small species, with minute teeth and flattened skull. Size very small, slightly smaller even than in Ph. minutissima. Fur soft, close, and fine; hairs of back about 4 mm. in length. General colour above not unlike that of the paler wild-living forms of JMus musculus, something between Ridgway’s “ wood- brown” and “ broccoli-brown,” the hairs slaty grey with pale tips. A younger specimen is clearer grey, without the drabby tone. Under surface paler, with a yellowish tinge, not sharply defined, the hairs slaty at base except on the chin. Crown like back. Cheeks and chin whitish. A whitish-buffy line just over each eye. Ears of medium length, their fine hairs buffy whitish. Upper surface of hands and feet whitish. Tail of medium length, uniformly short-haired, about as in Mus musculus, not pencilled, pale brownish white, scarcely lighter below. Skull remarkable for its extraordinary flattening, a flattening only equalled in 4 other mammals*, three being bats, the height in profile view from the base of the skull in front of the bulle to the crown only 3°3 mm., as compared with 4°7 mm. in a skull, other- wise little larger, of Ph. minutissima. Zygomata evenly convex outwards. Nasals well expanded in their posterior half. Inter- orbital region flat, its edges without ridges. Occipital crests almost obsolete. Anterior palatine foramina reaching to the level * Graphiurus platyops, Tylonycteris pachypus, Mimetillus moloneyi, and Pla- tymops macmillant. 542 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [May 15, of the front of the canines. Posterior palate practically without vacuities. Anterior portion of bull considerably larger than posterior. Teeth with the same relative proportions to each other as in Ph. minutissima, but conspicuously smaller throughout, both abso- lutely and in proportion to the size of the skull. Upper secator (last premolar, the “p*” of the Catalogue of Marsupials) about twice the size of the subequal anterior and median premolars. Lower secator about half the size of the anterior premolar, which is in turn about half the size of the median one. Dimensions of the type, measured in the flesh :— Head and body 80 mm.; tail 60; hind foot 10; ear 9. Skull—greatest median length 18; basal length 17; zygomatic breadth 9:7; nasals 6°6 x 3; interorbital breadth 3:8; breadth of brain-case 8:5; palate length 8:7; length of upper tooth-row 8; combined length of three anterior molariform teeth 3-1; length of lower tooth-row 7:2. A female skull is smaller, 16 mm. in greatest length. Hab. Alexandria, central part of Northern South Australia. Alt. 600". T'ype. Male. B.M. No.6.3.9.77. Original number 111. Col- lected 30 April, 1905. Three specimens. This remarkable little species looks externally likea more pallid representative of Ph. minutissima, but the peculiar characters of its skull and teeth show that it is really a quite distinct animal. I have much pleasure in naming it after Sir William Ingram, to whose initiative and generosity the Museum is indebted for the sending of a collector to this most interesting locality. 15. SMINTHOPSIS LARAPINTA Spencer. 6. 101, 102, 112, 116. ©. 93, 100, 119, 144. Alexandria, 600. 3. 146. 8.W. of Alroy, Alexandria. “Native name ‘Baraga.’ Caught among dead timber on plain.”—W.S. This is a very beautiful drab-grey species, with a contrasted dark line running down the muzzle, and with the centre of the sole naked as far back as a point equidistant between the heel and the tip of the hallux. It was first obtained at Charlotte Waters, Central Australia, during the Horn Expedition, and was described by Prof. Spencer, who unfortunately, working only from spirit-specimens, did not mention the dark facial line, which is, however, clearly marked in a metatype in the Museum collection. S. nitela Collett *, of which we have a co-type, would appear to be the same animal, Dr. Collett having been misled by the absence of all reference to the facial line in the original descrip- tion, and the metatype in the Museum having only been received * P. ZS. 1897, p. 334, 1906. | MAMMALS FROM NORTHERN AUSTRALIA. 543 after his description was published. Dr. Collett’s examples were from the Daly River, so that Alexandria is to a certain extent intermediate between the two localities. 16. SMINTHOPSIS STALKERI, Sp. Nn. 6. 174,175. S.W. of Alroy, 800’. A small species coloured like S. larapinia, but with more hairy soles and shorter tail. Size rather less than in S. larapinta, but neither of the two specimens is more than just adult. Fur soft and fine, about 6 mm. long on the back. General colour above more bufty than in S. larapinta, the light rings on the hairs dull cream-buff, their fine tips dark brown. Under surface creamy white, the extreme bases of the hairs slaty. Head like back, a dark line on the forehead between the eyes, not so distinct or so long as in S. larapinta. ars of medium length, quite unlike the long ears of S. hirtipes, pale grey throughout. Upper surface of hands and feet white. Palms and soles intermediate in their characters between those of the hairy-footed S. hirtipes and of the ordinary naked-footed species; the palms apparently with low granulated cushions, but these cannot be accurately described on dried speci- mens, even when re-damped; the soles with a compound cushion at the end of the metatarsus, as in S. hirtipes, but this is naked and granulated as in other species, and has three minute non- lineated pads upon it; the centre of the foot is finely hairy to beyond the tip of the hallux, a few hairs even extending to the back of the large compound pad. ‘Tail shorter than in S. larapinia, incrassated at base; finely hairy, greyish white above and below, the tip not darkened. Skull and teeth very much as in S. larapinta, the muzzle rather shorter; bullae much smaller than in S. hirtipes. Dimensions of the type, measured in the flesh :— Head and body 70 mm.; tail 65; hind foot 15; ear 17. Skull—ereatest length 23:2; basal length 21:4; zygomatic breadth 13; nasals 8; combined length of three anterior molari- form teeth 4:7. The other specimen has head and body 72 mm.; tail 70. Type. Subadult male. B.M. No. 6.3.9.91. Original number 175. Collected 1 August, 1905. This pretty species forms an interesting link between the hairy-soled S. hirtipes Thos., described from Charlotte Waters, and the ordinary naked-soled species of the genus. Its shorter tail and more buffy colour will also distinguish it from S. lara- inta. : Prof. Spencer’s S. psammophilus would appear to havea similar foot-structure, but 1s considerably larger. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVII. Fig. 1. Mus forresti, p. 538. 2. Phascogale ingrami, p. 541, Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. XX XVII. 37 544 PROF, W. B. BENHAM AND MR. W.J. DUNBAR oN [May 15, 3. On the Skull of a Young Specimen of the Ribbon-fish, Regalecus. By W. B. Bennam, D.Se., M.A, KAS Professor of Biology in the University of Otago, and W. J. DunBar. [Received April 2, 1906.] (Plates XXX VITT. & XXXIX.*) 1. INTRODUCTION. Whether the small Ribbon-fish described by me (1) as Regalecus parkert be a distinct species, or, as seems probable, merely a young stage of the Great Ribbon-fish, 2. glesne, it seemed desirable to have the skull described and figured for comparison with the detailed account of the latter fish published by Professor Parker in the ‘Transactions’ of the Society 7. The correct name for the Ribbon-fishes of the New Zealand as of other coasts is somewhat doubtful. Specimens have been described and named by Von Haast (2) as R. pacificus, and by Parker (3 & 4) as &. argenteus, while Forbes (5) inclined to the opinion that the specimen which came into his hands was identical with A. grillit of Lindroth. This matter of the synonymy was treated at some length by Parker, and after a comparison of the measurements and of other external features given by various naturalists for different specimens studied here and in the Northern hemisphere he came to the conclusion (3) that the specimens obtained in the neighbourhood of Dunedin belonged to a new species, &. argentews: and under this title he described the skeleton in the Society’s ‘ Transactions’ (9), but in an “Addendum” to his second article (4) (inserted at the commencement of the volume, immediately following the titlepage) he expressed a doubt as to whether, after all, he was justified in this step. He wrote: ‘“« Hiverything seems to lead to the conclusion that most of the supposed species of Regalecus are identical, and that the more recent specific names (including argenteus) will have to give way probably in favour of Ascanius’ original name glesne.” To the same effect wrote Goode & Bean in 1895 in describing the Ribbon-fishes of the North Atlantic (6). On p. 481 of ‘Oceanic Ichthyology’ they write :—“ It is not certain that there is more than one species of Regalecus, although various names have been suggested in connection with the comparatively few individuals which, during the past century and a half, have been captured in the North Atlantic.” Consequently, they register these fishes under the name JL. glesne. If this be the case, we have an interesting instance of a practically cosmopolitan deep-water fish. * For explanation of the Plates, see p. 556. + For this purpose I handed the skull to my pupil W.J. Dunbar, who to my great regret was drowned just after the paper was completed in MS. I have retained his name as co-author, as he contributed the description and figures of this skull, and the notes comparing it with Parker’s account.—W. B. Benyam. JE) ZS IOC. TE OO | otte bones M P.Parker lith. Parker k West imp SKULL OF YOUNG RIBBON FISH (REGALECUS,) es Zens: LOG PX Ke Ae: --Lanethe. pas. -- MP. Parker ith. r Parker & West imp. SKULL OF YOUNG RIBBON FISH (REGALECUS) 1906. THE SKULL OF A YOUNG RIBBON-FISH. 549 Parker (3) dealt so fully with the various accounts of the Specimens captured on the coasts of New Zealand and Australia, that it is needless for me to repeat the record. But since he wrote his second article in 1888, additional specimens have been recorded and described by Forbes (5), by Drew (7), and by Clarke (8), the last being a quite perfect individual, with the pectoral fins still uninjured, and the article is illustrated by a good figure of the entire fish. Finally, a couple of years ago, a large specimen was reported to me as having been thrown on shore near the entrance to the Otago Harbour, but while my informant was engaged in telephoning to the Museum, to arrange for its despatch to me, the usual fate, in the form of boys and stones and sticks, awaited the rarity: so that by the time my informant returned to the shore the fish was so damaged as to be valueless. We thus have records of more than a dozen of these rare fishes having been obtained in these seas within the last 50 years; and the majority on the coast of the South Island. Of these all but one have been apparently nearly or quite full-grown, reaching a length of from 12 to 18 feet, Drew’s specimen being only 7 feet 4} inches. Judging, however, from his other measurements, it appears probable that a part of the posterior end was missing: he says, ‘‘ the fish ended abruptly with thick rounded end, and there were no spines at the caudal end.” He does not state the height of this truncated extremity, and we are left in doubt as to how much is missing. It is, however, to the markings on “ &. parkert” that I would draw attention. It will be remembered that one of the most striking differences in the external features of this specimen—apart from body-proportions—lies in its colour-markings. Parker, Von Haast, Clarke, and others have described (and figured) the peculiar, irregularly vertical streaks of black or very dark-blue, irregular in form, size, and arrangement, but limited to the anterior region of the body. Parker (4. p. 23) says:—‘‘In addition [to these marks] the whole body was covered with oval or circular grey spots, covered, and thus toned down, by the silvery coating” (of the skin). ‘“‘' These very obscure spots are hardly visible in certain lights.” Clarke (8. p. 262) says of his specimen :—“‘As the fish gratlually dried, numerous transverse markings developed themselves, more especially along the whole of the postanal division, and the round and greyish markings became more apparent.” Now, in “&. parkeri” the characteristic black, irregular streaks are entirely absent, but the silver ground-colour was traversed by “14 dark transverse bands set at fairly regular intervals from the back of the head to the end of thebody. Each band extends over the entire depth of the body and is separated from its neighbour by a space about equal to its own length.” “These colour-bands are not black, but extremely pale grey, and could only be recognised by reflection in certain lights, the grey 37* 546 PROF. W. B. BENHAM AND MR. W.J. DUNBAR ON [May 15, being due to minute pigment-cells below the silver ” (Benham, loc. cit.). After being in formol for a couple of years these marks are still present, and more distinct than in the recently dead fish. Another feature in which R. parkeri differs from the specimens of R. glesne is in proportions of parts and in the greater number of dorsal fin-rays: for whereas, in most of specimens of the full-grown fish, these number from 200-260, as given for different individuals, there are 400-500 in the specimens of R. parkeri; but Forbes gives 422 as the total number in the full-grown individual described by him. As the number of fin-rays in the dorsal fin has been utilised by ichthyologists as a specific character, this variation in the adults of what are regarded as one species is interesting. For convenience of a comparison of “ 2. parkeri” with the adult forms, I here tabulate the series of measurements adopted by Parker and followed by Forbes and Clarke :— he specimen A is the one described in the body of my article; B is that referred to in the footnote (1. p. 200), the skull of which is described below. A. B. Motalwlenothepecmcnsc mercer eave CCC ee) MOR UO Ue 6 ft. 3 in. Greatest sheishttotibody, Weeescceee see eeeeeeeeesee ese 0°75 inch 1°75 inch Length of head (jaws retracted) .............c.ccecse sere 2°12 inches} 3 inches Preanal length (snout to anus) .............. seen S25 22. ProportiomioL height tol enethyaeeea-ereeeesseeeeat seas 1:60 1:43 A length of head to total length ............... 1:21 1:25 a5 preanal region to total length ............... ikg SF3 1: 34 5 head-length to preanal length ............... 1: 6°36 ie ¢ 5 height to preanal length .................... 1:17 1:125 Total number of dorsal fin-rays (?) 397 450 to 500 : height 1 1 ; , Q t , ~ Ors ee a Bor. eet In the adult fish the proportion ieneth varies from 10 to 6G head-length & F 1 ep 4 a totallength ~” 2 14, “97:85 preanal length ile t falys 2 2 2 totallength ” ” 25 ° 336 feniclenet a Lo ot ff a ‘i preanal length ” Dee Se es height al t 1 Pt te ” preanal length ” » 43 °° 5 4 is remarkable that, in the case of the first three relations, the high numbers are found in the longest specimen, that described by Forbes, in which, too, the number of fin-rays is excessive. 1906. ] THE SKULL OF A YOUNG RIBBON-FISH. 547 Otherwise one might state that these denominators decrease as the fish increases in length. The really important differences in these relations occur in those cases in which the greatest height is a factor—which is very much less in proportion to the length in the young than in the adult. Tf, then, “ R. parkeri” be the young of &. glesne, we have not only a great change taking place during growth, in the proportions of all the parts, especially the height-length relation, but a diminution in the total number of fin-rays in the dorsal fin, and the breaking up of tiansverse coloured bands into oval and circular spots, and also the appearance in the fore part of the body of much darker irregular streaks. We know that somewhat similar changes do take place in fishes belonging to the family in which Regalecus is included. In Trachypterus, for example, such changes are illustrated in Giinther’s ‘Study of Fishes,’ p. 521, and apparently Liitken had already expressed the opinion that such growth-changes would oceur in Regalecus (8. p. 294). t was disappointed in finding so little about this subject in the recent volume on Fishes in the ‘Cambridge Natural History’ ; but im the systematic portion Boulenger (p. 714) remarks: “ ‘The life-histories (of Tzeniosomi) are still very imperfectly known, and great changes of form take place during growth;” but nothing further is said about the matter. I have been unable, owing to the poverty of our libraries in New Zealand, to ascertain whether any, and if so what, work has been done on changes in the detailed structure of the skull during growth. The references to be found in Wiedersheim, or in Ziegler’s ‘ Vergleich. Entwick. d. nieder. Wirbelthiere,’ refer only to embryonic changes, so far as I have been able to ascertain from abstracts in the ‘ Zoolog. Jahresbericht.’ The present contribution, together with my previous article on the external form of 2. parkert, is a step in this direction, if this fish be, in fact, the young of F. glesne. Il. DESCRIPTION OF THE SKULL. (By W. J. Dunzar.) A. The Bones of the Upper and Lower Jaw. The Premazilla consists of two regions, namely, a thin plate lying at the side of the oral aperture (pmz.), the “alveolar portion” of Prof. Parker, and a long dorsally situated “nasal process” (pma.'), which is connected with its fellow of the other side by a laterally compressed plate of cartilage (pma.”, Pl. XX XVIII. fig. land Pl. XX XIX. fig. 3). This process extends back over the cranium on the dorsal surface, lying in a cartilage-lined “anterior dorsal” groove in which it can slide to and fro. In R. glesne the bone has relatively a much shorter nasal process, the two regions 548 PROF. W. B. BENHAM AND MR. W.J. DUNBAR ON [May 15, being almost equal in length ; whereas in the present species the nasal process is more than twice the length of the alveolar plate. Again, the longer axis of this plate is, in &. glesne, vertical and perpendicular to the nasal process, while in &. parkeri the longer axis of the plate is almost horizontal and parallel to the nasal process (Pl. XX XVIII. fig. 1). The Mazilla, instead of being, as in a typical teleostean skull, a narrow rod of bone, is broad and subquadrate, marked on its outer surface by ridges—as in other dermal bones of Regalecus— which rise from a point near the dorsal posterior border (fig. 1). The maxilla overlaps the hinder part of the alveolar plate of the premaxilla, and can be distinctly seen through the silvery epidermis. On its inner side is a pronounced ridge, which is continued beyond the posterior margin of the bone as a peg-like process (ma.') lying alongside the nasal process of the premaxilla (Pl. XXXVIIT. fig. 1 and Pl. XXXIX.. fig. 3). The antero- posterior length is somewhat greater than the vertical height, whereas in &. glesne the bone is long and narrow, and is at least twice as high dorso-ventrally as it is wide: in fact its relation to mouth is more like that commonly met with in Teleosteans. The lowerjaw(Pl. XXX VIIT. figs. 1, 2) consists of the usual three bones, the Dentary, the Articulare, and the Angulare, enclosing Meckel’s cartilage, which is distinctly visible through them. The region above Meckel’s cartilage may be termed the supra-meckelian, and the part below that line the infra-meckelian region. In &. glesne, Prof. Parker describes the supra-meckelian part of the lower jaw as having “ something the form of an equilateral triangle and the infra-meckelian of a right-angled triangle with altitude about one-fourth of its base, so that the whole jaw comes to be rather higher than long.” In the present species the height of the lower jaw is very much greater than the length, and the proportions of the two regions are different from &. glesne. The supra-meckelian portion has the form of an isosceles right triangle with one limb of the dentary as hypotenuse. The infra-meckelian portion is an irregular four-sided figure whose height is one half its length ; it is thus just twice as high proportionately as that of Regalecus glesne (Pl. XX XVIII. fig. 2). The Articulare (ar.) is athin plate of bone somewhat triangular in form. The posterior side is vertical and extends upwards as far as the peg of the maxilla. This posterior margin is much thickened. The lower margin is also slightly thickened, and extends horizontally below Meckel’s cartilage, overlapping and concealing the angulare externally. The third side slopes down- wards and forwards and meets the dentary along the edge. The Dentary (d.) is a V-shaped bone placed with the angle forwards and bearing at the extremity one tooth which is not present in &. glesne. The two limbs meet one ancther at anangle of 90°, one being directed backwards and upwards to meet the articulare above, the other passing below Meckel’s cartilage to meet the lower border of the articulare. 1906. ] THE SKULL OF A YOUNG RIBBON-FISH. 549 The Angulare (ang.) is a very small bone on the inner surface of the infra-meckelian part of the articulare. It does not meet the dentary as the angulare of 2. glesne does. B. The Suspensorium and Hyoid Arch. The Quadrate has the usual triangular shape with a curved base directed backwards; the apex, which is directed forwards, not downwards as in ordinary fish-skulls, articulates with the articulare at the level of Meckel’s cartilage. The Lctopterygoid (Pl. XX XVIII. figs. 1 & 2) is a-small trian- gular bone lying in a nearly vertical plane. At its lower end the bone is pointed and gradually widens to its upper border, where it meets the palatine. The posterior margin fits on to the anterior upper margin of the quadrate, and the dorsal border continues the curve of that bone (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 7). Relatively it is a short bone compared with that of &. glesne, in which it projects for a considerable distance—almost half its total length—beyond the quadrate. Behind the Hctopterygoid lie the Ento- and the Metapterygoid, extending below the orbit and curving in towards the middle line. The entopterygoid stretches from the posterior border of the palatine, pterygoid, and quadrate anteriorly to the hyoman- dibular posteriorly ; only the upper margin is ossified, a consider- able amount of cartilage still existing along the lower border. The metapterygoid is a very small ossification of oblong shape lying below the hinder end of the entopterygoid. In R&. glesne the latter is a somewhat quadrate bone about as high as it is long. In the present species the great length and relatively small vertical height of this bone form a marked contrast, as 1t extends beyond the metapterygoid nearly to the hyomandibular, whereas in &. glesne the bone does not reach the hinder end of the meta- pterygoid. The metapterygoid, too, is longer and narrower, relatively, than in &. glesne, and wholly underlies the ento- pterygoid. Above the pterygoid lies the Palatine, a V-shaped bone with the sharp apex directed forwards. The two limbs embrace the end of the mesopterygoid. Although this bone in #. glesne is very irregular, there is little indication of this deep notch. The Hyomandibular articulates with the cranium just behind the orbit and below the pterotic. At this end it is broad and thick, but narrows to a point as it passes downwards and forwards. This narrow portion lies on the inside of the pterygoid plate. The articular end is capped by cartilage, and under this is a convex articulation for the opercular bone. At its anterior, poimted, end the hyomandibular is connected with the Symplectic, which extends to the quadrate, thus con- necting it with the hyomandibular. In shape the symplectic is a long rod-like bone, slightly curved and much more elongated than that of R. glesne. 550 PROF. W. B. BENHAM AND MR. W.J. DUNBAR ON | May 15, The Znterhyal, connecting the hyomandibular with the rest of the hyoid arch, articulates with it almost at the same point as the symplectic does. It is a small bone tipped at both ends with cartilage. The rest of the hyoid arch is much compressed laterally so as to form the “ hyoidean cornu” of Prof. Parker, and is made up of four bones, the epi- cerato- and two hypo-hyals. Of these the Epihyal, a flat semicircular bone, articulates with the interhyal, forming the upper rounded end of the cornu. It lies posteriorly to the ceratohyal as in 2. glesne. The Ceratohyal, like that of FR. glesne, is the largest of these bones, but relatively much longer and narrower than in that species. It intervenes between the epihyal and the two hypohyals, forming the posterior lower margin and but a small part of the dorsal margin of the arch. The Hypohyals, of which there are two, take a greater share in the formation of the “ hyoidean cornu” than in RA. glesne, being together almost equal to the ceratohyal. The larger and upper one forms most of the anterior margin of the cornu, while the smaller and lower one (h.hy.') forms the rest of the anterior and the whole of the mesial margin where the hyoidean cornu is attached to the glossohyal. This lower one seems forked on the inner side, but this is due to the lower corner of the ceratohyal overlapping and concealing part of it. In fig. 2 the concealed part of the margin is indicated by a dotted line. C. The Opercular Bones. Of these there are four, and all are visible through the skin of uninjured fish. The Opercular itself is a subcircular bone having a concave facet for articulation with the hyomandibular. It has three borders, all curved, one of which faces anteriorly, one dorsally, and the other postero-ventrally. Below the opercular is the Subopercular, a narrow plate of very delicate bone. In neither of these bones is there a marked difference from the corresponding bones in #. glesne (Pl. XX XIX. figs. 6 & 7). The Preopercular is one of the largest bones in the skull, extending from the anterior border of the opercular to the anterior end of the quadrate, making a total length of one and three-quarter inches. Thus it forms a considerable part of the suborbital region of the face. Instead of the greatest length being in a vertical direction as is usual, it is here in a horizontal direction. The difference between the preopercular in the two species is very marked. In the present species the greater part of the bone is horizontal and suborbital, whereas in 72. glesne the greater part is vertical and postorbital. Again, in the latter species the anterior and posterior margins are gently and regularly eurved, but in #. parkeri the lower margin is straight for some distance and then curves suddenly upwards (Pl. XXX VIIL. fig. 1). 1906. ] THE SKULL OF A YOUNG RIBBON-FISH. 551 The Jnteropercular is as much elongated as the preopercular ; but is not so broad and also presents considerable difference from that of &. glesne. In the latter the posterior margin is curved sharply upwards and the dorsal edge is straight; but in 2. parkeri the posterior end of the bone is scarcely turned up and the upper margin is excavated. The markings on this bone originate almost exactly in the centre, whereas in &. glesne they are described as originating “at the junction of the anterior and middle thirds.” D. The Cranium. After the removal of the jaws and suspensorium, the form of the cranium, as seen from the side (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 6), is some- what like that of a bird’s skull. This appearance is due to its length, to the large orbit, and to the beak-like prenasal rostrum. On the dorsal surface are two median grooves, lying end to end, meeting above the centre of the orbit (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 4). The anterior dorsal groove has as its floor a plate of cartilage named the “tegmen cranii” by Parker, while its sides are formed by the frontals. In this groove the nasal process (pmm.') of the pre- maxilla lies (Pl. XX XIX. fig.3). The posterior groove has as its floor the supracccipital and as its sides the epiotics and parietals : it is scarcely existent in Ff. glesne. Hf the cranium of R. parkeri be compared with that of &. glesne, the most striking difference is the greater length and less vertical height in the present species. This excess of length is mainly due to the greater development of the preorbital region or “ beak,” which is nearly as long as the orbital region, whereas in 7. glesne (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 7) it is less than half this proportion. The length of the cranium in the latter species is 14 times the greatest height, but the proportion of length to height in the present fish is 2:1. This difference in relative length is due partly to the greater development of the preorbital region, and in a small degree to the absence of the ‘“‘subcranial crest” described by Parker, formed by parasphenoid, basi-occipital, and opisthotic. The Occipital Region (Pl. XX XIX. figs. 4, 5, 6, 8). The Basi-occipital forms the greater part of the occipital condyle (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 8), and is produced forwards and downwards as a median ridge which extends anteriorly to meet the end of the parasphenoid. In contrast to the condition in &. glesne, we may note that it is the most posteriorly placed bone in the skull (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 6). Dorsally and anteriorly it is bounded by the exoccipital and opisthothic, ventrally and anteriorly by the parasphenoid. The Hxoccipitals entirely bound the foramen magnum (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 8), each meeting its fellow below it, so that each takes a small share in the occipital condyle. The greater part of the exoccipital is a posterior vertical plate which extends upwards to meet the epiotic and outwards to meet the pterotic, while it sends 552 PROF, W, B. BENHAM AND MR.W. J. DUNBAR ON [May 15, a process forwards to meet the great opisthotic (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 6), The Spraoccipital is feebly ossified. Lying in the posterior dorsal groove and forming its floor, it is separated from the exoccipitals, however, by the epiotics—a very unusual condition (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 4). Anteriorly it reaches the meeting-place of the two dorsal grooves. Otic Bones (Pl. XX XTX. figs. 4, 5, 6, 8). Above the exoccipital lies the Hpiotic, which is partly covered by the post-temporal. The position of the post-temporal is shown in Pl. XXX VIII. fig. ] and Pl. XX XIX. fig. 8, but in the other figures 1t has been removed. The two epiotics nearly meet one another in the middle dorsal line, thereby excluding the occipital from the supraoccipital, which, as Prof. Parker pointed out, is a most unusual condition. The epiotic is a squarish bone as seen from above, raised into a prominent ridge along the dorsal surface, which forms the margin of the dorsal groove. The Péerotic is a large well-ossified bone extending from the exoccipital to the posterior margin of the orbit. Dorsally it is bounded successively by the frontal, the parietal, and the epiotic bones, and ventrally it touches the sphenotic and prootic. The outer edge forms a prominent ridge under which the hyoman- dibular articulates. The pterotic is much grooved on its outer surface, the ridges being very delicate while the grooves are deep. The Sphenotic is a more or less vertical bar at the posterior region of the orbit, forming the post-orbital process. The lower end slopes inwards and forwards to meet the upwardly-projecting process of the parasphenoid, and thus to form the post-orbital bar. Above, it touches the under surface of the pterotic and anteriorly the alisphenoid, while by a forward process it just reaches the frontal. The Prootic lies below the ridge formed by the pterotic. It is bounded anteriorly by the sphenotic, ventrally by the opisthotic, and posteriorly by the exoccipital. The Opisihotic, as seen in side view, is a large bone forming a plate above the parasphenoid and meets its fellow in the middle ventral line. Relatively it is a larger bone than that of R. glesne, and instead of the suture between it and the basioccipital being vertical, the opisthotic passes backward over the forward plate of the basioccipital to meet the exoccipital on the external surface of the skull (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 6). This external plate corresponds to Parker’s “oph.”’—the descending process. The other three processes which exist on the inner surface of the cranial wall ave not figured. If the side view of the skull of Regalecus be compared with that of the Salmon, it will be seen that the opisthotic occupies the place of the prootic of the Salmon in its relation to the exoccipital and basioccipital; but Parker’s dissection shows the true interpretation of the bone. 1906. ] THE SKULL OF A YOUNG RIBBON-FISH, 553 Bones in the Orbit. In front of the sphenotic are two pairs of bones contributing to the roof of the orbit—the alisphenoids and orbito-sphenoids (Pl. XXXIX. figs. 5, 6). The Alisphenoid is a flat bone not quite reaching to the outer edge of the orbit. Between and somewhat behind the two alisphenoids is a large triangular foramen which Parker discusses at length. He mentions that the only difficulty in the way of the interpretation that these bones are alisphenoids is, that there is no foramen for the fifth nerve behind them; but he points out that in many mammals the first division of the fifth nerve passes out altogether in front of the alisphenoid. In the Rabbit, too, the first two divisions of the fifth nerve pass out of the skull by the sphenotic fissure, which lies between the ali- sphenoid and the basisphenoid. This is relatively in the same position as the foramen in the skull of 2. parkeri. In front of the alisphenoid is a large bone extending as far forward as the mesethmoid. This Parker identified as the orbito-sphenoid. There is no suture in the middle line, so that the two bones must be here fused. The orbito-sphenoid is not perforated by the second nerve, which must pass out through the foramen between the alisphenoids. Cranial Roof. The roof of the cranial cavity is formed by the frontal and the parietal bones along with the median plate of cartilage, the ““tegmen cranii” (Pl. XX XIX. figs. 4, 6). The Frontal is a large bone, relatively much larger than in R. glesne, extending as far forwards as the ectethmoid and backwards nearly to the posterior end of the supraoccipital. Thus they form the greater part of the upper surface of the skull and the lateral margin of the anterior dorsal groove for almost its whole extent. Further, each sends back a small process on the mesial side of the parietal, which thus only just reaches the margin of the posterior dorsal groove by a corner. The frontals do not, as is usual in Teleosts, meet in the middle line, as Parker pointed out for &. glesne, but are separated by the ‘“tegmen eranii.” Posteriorly, the frontal meets the parietal and pterotic, and sends a process back under the parietals which nearly meets the epiotic. On the under surface of the skull the frontal is seen to form a supraorbital plate (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 5). The Parietal is a small bone, very different in form and size from that of 2. glesne ; it is long and narrow, extending forwards between the frontal and the ‘“tegmen cranii,” and forming a rounded prominence at the side of the supraoccipital. In the present species, although the boundaries of the bone were very difficult to determine owing to its thinness and friability, it seems to have a very different form. The internal backward process of the frontal almost cuts off the parietal from participation in forming the side of the dorsal groove, and far from forming a 554 PROF. W. B. BENHAM AND MR. W. J. DUNBAR ON | May 15, prominence as it does in &. glesne, it barely reaches the groove (Pl. XX XIX. fig. 4). Preorbiial Region. In front of the orbit is the prenasal “beak,” a solid structure composed partly of bone and partly of cartilage. It is compressed from side to side, with a sharp dorsal and ventral edge. The greater part of the beak is formed by the mesethmoid, which is mainly cartilaginous, and by the ectethmoid cartilage. The Mesethmoid is, as its names implies, a median sheet extending from the orbit half way to the anterior extremity of the “beak,” where it meets another vertical plate, a part of the vomer. Its posterior end is laterally broadened and appears on the roof of the orbit, of which it forms the anterior median wall. The Hetethmoid cartilage is a thick mass of cartilage (without any ossification, such as occurs in A. glesne) extending outwards at right angles to and continuous with the mesethmoid, forming a rounded prominence, the anterior boundary of the orbit. The lower margin of the prenasal rostrum is formed by the vomer. This bone tapers from its middle to each end; the anterior end curves sharply down to form a median tooth, and on each side of this are two smaller lateral teeth*. Of this there is no mention in the description of 2. glesne. The posterior end of the bone meets the parasphenoid. As mentioned above, the vomer sends a vertical plate upwards to meet the mesethmoid by its posterior margin. Above this vertical sheet is a strip of cartilage—the prenasal cartilage—extending back over the mesethmoid to the “‘tegmen cranii” and forming the dorsal edge of the “beak.” Behind the vomer, the Parasphenoid forms at least two-thirds of the ventral margin of the skull. It is sword-shaped, the pos- terior region or “handle” having two lateral projections—the “ouards”—near this end. These slope outwards and very slightly backwards and sharply upwards to meet the sphenotics. In R. glesne the parasphenoid is greatly extended backwards and upwards as a vertical plate underlying and extending behind the basioccipital. In the present species there is, however, no trace of such a plate, and the posterior end of the bone tapers to a point which les well in front of the hinder end of the basi- occipital. Lying in front of the orbit, close under the skin, are the nasals and preorbitals (Pl. XXX VIII. fig. 1). The Vasal is a small rod-like bone which articulates with the anterior end of the frontal and, passing forwards and inwards, abuts loosely against the sides of the premaxilla. Under the nasal lie the Preorbitals, two on each side. These three bones readily separate from the skull and are shown only in figure 1. * The fact that this young specimen is provided with teeth in both the upper and lower jaw is suggestive; for in some of the specimens of R. glesne that have been described they are present (vide Giinther), in others absent (vide Parker). 1906.] THE SKULL OF A YOUNG RIBBON-FISH. 555 Summary. From these notes, it will be evident that nearly every bone in the skull of this small Ribbon-fish differs, to a greater or less extent, either in form or proportions, from the corresponding bone of the Great Ribbon-fish. The specimen was undoubtedly a young one—a fact which is shown not only by the amount of cartilage in the skull, but also by the condition of the ovary, in which all the eggs were small. There are, therefore, two possible explanations of the differences: (1) that the fish was the young of a known species, probably h. glesne, which is the common species; or (2) that the fish belongs to a different species. If the specimen is the young of R. glesne, the changes which it must undergo before becoming adult must be far-reaching, especially in the skull. For example, the posterior part of the parasphenoid must grow backwards with great rapidity, while the rest of the bone continues its ordinary growth. In order’ that the parietal could assume the position occupied by that bone in &. glesne, it would have to grow enormousiy antero-posteriorly ; but, before it could do so, the backwardly directed process of the frontal, which lies between the parietal and the posterior dorsal groove, would have to disappear. The maxilla, too, would have to change its shape entirely. Now the maxilla is a particularly well-ossified bone— one of the best ossified in the skull—and so least likely to undergo further developmental change. Such great changes as are here indicated would hardly have been expected after the animal had attained more than its half adult length. Conclusion. Taking all the facts into consideration, it seems more than probable that the so-called 2. parkeri is but the young stage of h. glesne. BIBLioGRAPHyY. . Benuam.—‘ An apparently new Species of Regalecus (R. par- kert).” Trans. N.Z. Inst. xxxvi. p. 198. . Von Haasr.— Notes on the Regalecus pacificus.” Trans, N.Z. Inst. x. p. 246. Parker.—“ On a Specimen of the Great Ribbon-fish (R. argen- teus).” Trans: N.Z. Inst. xvi. p. 284. . Parker.—“ On a Specimen of Kegalecus recently Stranded in Otago Harbour.” Trans. N.Z. Inst. xx. p. 20. . Forpes.—‘* On a species of Kegalecus caught in Okain’s Bay.” Trans. N.Z. Inst. xxiv. p. 192. Goove & Bean.—‘ Oceanic Ichthyology,’ p. 480. Drew.—‘ Notes on fegalecus sp.” Trans. N.Z. Inst. xxx. p. 253. . CiuarKEe.—‘ Notes on the Occurrence of &, argenteus on the Taranaki Coast.” Trans. N.Z,. Inst. xxx. p. 254. . Parker.—* On the Skeleton of 2. argenteus.” Trans. Zool, Soc. xii. p. 5. © OND oO PB © WD 556 DR. VON LINSTOW ON WORMS FROM KOREA. [May 15, EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. List or ABBREVIATIONS. als., alisphenoid. mtp., metapterygoid. ang., angulare. na., nasal. ar., articulare. os., orbito-sphenoid. 6.0., basi-occipital. op., opercular. br.y., branchiostegal rays. op.o., opisthotic. ¢., occipital condyle. pa., parietal. c.hy., ceratohyal. pl., palatine. d., dentary. pas., parasphenoid. ec.p., ectopterygoid. p.mex., premaxilla. ect.eth., ectethmoid cartilage. p.mz.’, post-nasal process of pre- en.p., endopterygoid, maxilla. ep.o., epiotic. i pmea.’’, post-nasal cartilage of pre- €.0., exoccipital, maxilla. e.hy., epihyal. pn., prenasal cartilage. j-m., foramen magnum. pr.or., preorbital. fr. frontal. p-op., preopercular. Jfor., foramen between alisphenoids. pr.o., prootic. g-hy., glosso-hyal. p.tm., post-temporal. hy.c., hyoidean cornu. pt.o., pterotic. hhy. & h.hy.', hypohyals. qu., quadrate. hy.m., hyomandibular. sy., symplectic. t.hy., voterhyal. S.op., Subopercular. z.0p., 1nteropercular. S.0., Supraoccipital. m., Membrane connecting some of sp.o., sphenotic. the bones of the upper jaw. t., tooth on dentary. mck., Meckel’s cartilage. t.cr., tezmen cranil. mex., maxilla. w.hy., urohyal. mx.’, process of maxilla. v0., Vomer. m.eth., mesethmoid. vo.’, vomerine tooth. Pratt XXXVIII. The figures are drawn #th their natural size. Big. 1. The complete skull of Regalecus, with the jaws protruded. (The outlines of the otic bones are not indicated in this figure.) 2. The suspensorium of the left side, seen from within. Pratt XXXIX. - Dorsal view of the complete skull of Regalecus. . Dorsal view of cranium, after removal of the upper jaw. . Ventral view of cranium. . Side view of cranium. . Front view of cranium. . Hind view of cranium. DIANA op 4, On Worms of the Family Gordiide trom Corea. By Dr. von Liystow *. [Received May 1, 1906.] (Text-figure 95.) These worms were obtained by Mr. Malcolm P. Anderson, who has been sent out to the Far East by H.G. the Duke of Bedford to make collections of the Fauna. They consist of specimens of two new species. * Communicated by F. Jerrrey Bett, F.Z.S. 1906. ] DR. VON LINSTOW ON WORMS FROM KOREA. 557 GoRDIUS PALLIDUS, sp. n. (Text-fig. 95 A.) Locality. Freshwater pond in Korea. Three males. Length, respectively, 265, 292, and 305 mm. Breadth: at the anterior end, 0°59 mm.; in the middle, 0-75 mm. Colour yellowish white. A broad, crescentic, cuticular fold on the ventral side at the posterior extremity, the inner sides of the posterior lappets and a ring around the cloacal opening yellow- brown. Text-fig. 95. Ct Nt; — NIT ay A. Gordius pallidus. Posterior extremity of the male from the ventral aspect. B. Parachordades coreanus. Cuticle. The posterior end of the body is produced into two rounded lappets. The cuticle is traversed, at an angle of from 50° or 130°, by two bands separated by an interval of from 0-031 to 0-039 mm. ; between these bands are two systems of fine lines, running in the same direction as the bands but too minute to measure. PARACHORDADES COREANUS, sp. n. (Text-fig. 95 B.) Locality. A freshwater stream, Korea. One female. Length 322 mm. Breadth: at the anterior end, 0°28 mm.; in the middle, 1:18 mm.; at the posterior end, 0:71 mm. Colour dark brown; anterior end whitish, without a cervical band. The rounded posterior extremity is sharply truncated. The cuticle exhibits five- to six-sided patches of from 0-026 to 0-031 mm. in size; between the patches there are glistening knobs each surrounded by a light-coloured ring, from which two lines pass outwards at a definite angle. The cuticle also exhibits two extremely delicate systems of lines parallel with those just described, and a third system running longitudinally. 558 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE BREEDING [May 15, 5. Notes upon Menstruation, Gestation, and Parturition of some Monkeys that have lived in the Society’s Gardens. By Reema I. Pocock, F.L.S., Superintendent of the Gardens. [ Received May 15, 1906. ] The matter contained in the following pages is an amplification of notes upon the reproductive phenomena of certain Cercopithecoid Monkeys and Baboons that recently lived, or are still living, in the Society's Gardens, and upon the offspring of some species of MMacacus (Macaques) that bred in the Menagerie in the early months of the present year (1906). Through the kindness of Dr. H. Steegmann I am able to supplement and confirm my own observations on these questions by some new and interesting items of information concerning some of the Apes and Monkeys he has had of late years in his hands. Dr. Steegmann has most generously placed his notes at my disposal; and since they are extracted from a letter and form a connected whole, I have decided not to incorporate them with my own notes but to print them in full at the end of this paper. MeEnstTRUATION In MonkKEYS AND BaBoons. Menstrual Inflammation. It is well known that the females of many Monkeys and Baboons when “ on heat” exhibit extreme inflammation of the naked area surrounding the genital and anal orifices. The swelling, however, does not take place in all species of Cerco- pithecide. I have never detected it in any of the Guenons (Cercopithecus) nor in Macaques (Macacus) of the Common (fascicularis = cynomolgus), Bonnet (siicus), Rhesus (rhesus), and Japanese (fuscatus) species. On the other hand, it is very conspicuous in Mangabeys (Cercocebus) of the Sooty ( fuligi- nosus), White-crowned (lunulatus), and White-collared (ethiopicus) species; in all the Baboons (Papio) of which I have seen adult female examples, namely, the Chacma (porcarius), Guinea (sphinz), Green (olivaceus), Yellow (cynocephalus), and Hamadryas (hama- dryas), and in the Pig-tailed Macaque (Wacacus nemestrinus). The present state of my knowledge on the subject may be summarised as follows :— a. A conspicuous subcaudal inflammatory swelling in the adult female when “on heat.” Cercocebus fuliginosus, ethiopicus, lunulatus. Macacus nemestrinus and MM. sp. ? Papio porcarius, cynocephalus, sphinx, olivaceus, hama- dryas. a’. No such swelling in the female. ° Cercopithecus—all the common menagerie species. Macacus sinicus, fascicularis, rhesus, fuscatus, 1906. | OF MONKEYS IN THE MENAGERIE. 5d9 Needless to add, this is hardly the classification to be expected on @ priori grounds from the usually accepted views of the aftinities of the species concerned. It seems to me to be probable that the swelling will be found to be characteristic of all the species of Mangabeys and Baboons; but in the case of the Macaques no generalisations can be drawn until further observations have been made. In 1904 I recollect seeing in the Berlin Gardens a female Macaque of a species whose name I have now forgotton, with the swelling like that of M. nemestrinus. Thus at least two species of this genus fall under section @ of the above-given table. On the other hand, it is by no means certain that all the forms related to rhesus and fuscatus can be ranged with these species under section w'. For example, P. L. Sclater (P.Z.S. 1864, p. 710) says that a female of the Formosan Macaque (J. cyclopis) upon reaching maturity “acquired a most extraordinary development of the parts surrounding the organs of generation.” The figure that accompanies this description, however, shows a long lobate swelling extending on each side down the back of the thigh and along the proximal third of the tail—a development quite unlike anything known to me in other species. It is significant, too, that Sclater speaks of this swellmg as if it were permanent and not periodic. If permanent the development must probably be of a different kind from that now under discussion. If periodic and connected with menstruation it must indicate an important physiological difference between MW. cyclopis and M. rhesus, two species structurally somewhat nearly related. The swelling may be nothing but a useless correlative or accompaniment of the physiological processes incidental to men- struation. But, in my opinion, the development of a highly vascular, sensitive, and thin-skinned outgrowth of this nature— an obvious inconvenience to the monkey, since it involves special precautions to prevent injury, impairs activity, and is liable to laceration when quarrels arise—probably, rather than otherwise, carries with it some compensating advantage to the species. What may this be? Possibly the following considerations may throw some light on the subject. The similarity in form and colour between male and female Monkeys leaves no clue to the sex of a particular individual when seen at a distance. The males, moreover, are not apprised by the sense of smell of the condition of the females when “on heat” as are the males of Carnivora, Ungulata, Rodentia, and of other orders of Mammals. Hence it may be that the function of the swelling in question is to serve as a source of information to the males on the two points mentioned above. I think it may be claimed that such information is of use for the maintenance of the species. But whether the usefulness in these particulars of the swelling be or be not the factor that has guided its evolution, it is difficult to see how such a coloured excrescence can fail to convey the said information in the case of animals so intelligent and keen-sighted as Monkeys. For, as is fully attested by flowers like scarlet geraniums and by Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1906, No. XXX VIII. 38 560 MR. R. I. POCCCK ON THE BREEDING | May 15, fruits like ripe tomatoes or cherries—which are conspicuous, be it noted, for the purpose of attracting attention,—no colour is more conspicuous in green foliage by daylight than bright red. Red is also in an eminent degree visible at a great distance in the open, as a scarlet uniform proves. The crimson swelling, therefore, must, it appears, reveal to the males the sex and condition of adult non- pregnant females alike in the case of Mangabeys which live in the forests and of Baboons which frequent open rocky country. Again, preferential mating cannot perhaps be altogether elimi- nated as a factor in the question. It may be that the colour and inflammation appeal to the esthetic sense and sexual emotions of the males and act as an aphrodisiac impelling them to pair with females in which the characters ave pronounced rather than with those in which they are poorly developed or absent. Preferential mating on the part of females was regarded by Darwin and others as the principal agent in fostering and fixing (not causing ab initio) ornamental colours and crests characteristic of males. If females are thus influenced, why not males? Whether or not the theory can be logically and confidently applied to animals probably remote from Man in mental processes, it seems illogical to exclude it as a probable factor in determining the development of female sexual ornamentation in the case of animals with so many human attributes as Baboons and Monkeys. Menstrual Hemorrhage. In females of two species of Baboons, namely, a Chacma (Papio porcarius) and a Yellow (P. cynocephalus), | have noticed that the period of “heat” is heralded by inflammation of the genito-anal area and is followed after a day or two by a show of blood which continues for four or five days, during which time the inflammatory swelling gradually increases in size. The quantity of blood emitted varies greatly in the two specimens. In the Chacma it is relatively small, sufficient only to stain with small patches the floor of the cage; in the Yellow Baboon, a younger animal, the amount is at least ten times as great, so that the cage becomes quite unsightly. It is probable, I think, that the variation in the quantity given out by the two animals is merely an individual characteristic and is not connected with their specific distinctness. After the hemorrhage stops, the swelling continues to grow and extends laterally so as to conceal com- pletely the ischial callosities and the naked skin adjacent*. It reaches its maximum in about two weeks’ time and remains at that stage for about one week. It then begins to shrink and in * The swelling involves the whole of the circumanal area, so that the anal and the vaginal orifices are thrust considerably behind their normal position. Pairing between the sexes takes place after the haemorrhage has ceased. The correlation between the swelling in the female and the extreme length of the intromittent organ in the male of Baboons is obvious. 1906. j OF MONKEYS IN THE MENAGERIE. 561 about another two weeks has disappeared, so that the female at a distance is indistinguishable from the male. After a few days’ rest inflammation again sets in and is alinost at once followed by the appearance of hemorrhage. In the case of the female Chacma, the data upon which the foregoing epitome is, in the main, based are as follows :— April 11-12... Hemorrhage. Inflammation very per- ceptible. i 14... a Swelling still larger. a 16... No hemorrhage. An - ep) 20 eae 43 7 2 ” ag OAS - Swelling full-sized. ” 26-30 ... ” ” ” May 1-4 ... Swelling gradually shrinking. as Ao Ls Swelling disappeared. ab 18... Hemorrhage started. Inflammation slight. ss BOX occ ss continued. Swelling increasing. 5 1 apha o- 3 25... No hemorrhage. ss » 0) oe - ma full-sized. June Omer a - sunk to half size, Ms WO eee Rs Swelling nearly dis- appeared. 9) 14 ate 29 Pe) 3 99 9? 2 OS RSA: s No swelling. ee O20 a Very slight swelling and imflammation. 21... -Heemorrhage started. Thus between four and five weeks—or, to be more accurate, thirty-two days—elapsed between the cessation of the hemorrhage in April and its recommencement in May, and nearly four weeks— that is to say, twenty-seven days—between its cessation in May and its recommencement in June. The period of “ heat” in this Baboon may therefore be described with perfect accuracy as ‘‘ menstrual,” 7.e. of monthly occurrence. Hemorrhage does not, however, take place in all female Baboons. ‘There is, for example, a young female W.-African Baboon (Papio sphinx), now living in the Gardens, in which there is no show of blood; and although the swelling indicative of ‘“‘ heat” arises, 1t does not reach the enormous size characteristic of the Chacma, but involves merely the median subcaudal area of the rump without extending laterally over the ischial callosities. I do not know whether this.is an individual peculiarity, or whether it is typical of the species, or whether it is merely assignable to the youth of the Baboon in question. So far as my experience goes, hemorrhage does not, as a rule, oceur—or only occurs in a negligible quantity—in females of the 38* 562 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE BREEDING —s*([ May 15, genus Cercopithecus and also in the Rhesus, Common, and Japanese Macaques; but I learn from Dr. Hamish Nicol that a Bonnet Macaque (Jf. sinicus) he had for some years in captivity always showed a bloody discharge at menstruation, so much so as to redden the places where she sat and compel her confinement to the cage for the two or three days that it lasted *. Reviewing the above-mentioned facts it seems to me to be impossible to draw any satisfactory conclusions with regard to the incidence of menstrual hemorrhage in Cercopithecidee. In Baboons it may or may not take place and may be great or little inamount. It has been noticed to occur in some profusion in a female Macacus sinicus, and not to occur appreciably in a female of the closely allied species I. fascicularis. Obviously, therefore, it cannot be associated with the inflammatory swelling of the genito-anal region; and it is hardly likely to have a specific value in taxonomy. Perhaps the nearest guess at the truth that can at present be made is the surmise that it is dependent on the con- stitution or health of the individual. PREGNANCY AND PARTURITION IN MACAQUES. In the first half of the current year three Monkeys were born in the Gardens, namely : a Japanese Macaque (Macacus fuscatus = speciosus) on Jan. 10th; a hybrid between a male Common Macaque (Macacus fascicularis=cynomolgus) and a female Pig- tailed (M. nemestrinus) on March Ist; and a hybrid between the same male Common Macaque and a female Rhesus (JZ. rhesus) on April 27th. Congress between the parents of the Japanese Macaque was not seen, and the young was born at night. No observations, therefore, were made upon the period of gestation and parturition in this species. The same remarks apply to the young born from the specimens of M. fascicularis and M. rhesus, except that the devouring of the placenta by the mother was noticed by the keeper in charge. In the case of the hybrid J. cynomolgus and MW. nemestrinus practically all the stages of parturition were watched. Unfortu- nately the young was born dead, or died soon after birth 7. Pregnancy. Neither the Pig-tailed nor Japanese Macaque was known to be pregnant, in spite of the large size of the young. In the case of the Japanese Macaque this was due to the long and thick hairy winter coat of the mother; and in the case of the Pigtail to the * This Monkey, I hear on the same authority, was addicted to masturbation—a habit by no means uncommon in males of some Baboons and Anthropoid Apes (Chimpanzee, Orang), but of very rare occurrence, I believe, in females. + I was not myself present on the occasion. For the information given above I am indebted to the two keepers, Harrod and Rodwell, whom I cross-examined independently without finding any important discrepancies in their accounts. 1906. ] OF MONKEYS IN THE MENAGERIE. 563 inactivity of the Monkey, which was out of health and habitually sat with her knees pressed against her abdomen and her arms folded across them. The Rhesus, however, who was very active, showed decided signs in the enlargement of the nipples and the swelling of the abdomen, more particularly in its anterior portion behind the thorax. As compared with the human species the alteration in appearance due to pregnancy was small, although the feetus was comparatively larger in the Monkey. A week or two before the birth of the young, the Rhesus in one night lost all the hair off her cheeks. The skin was perfectly healthy, and looked as if it had been shaved clean. The bareness gradually spread on to the front of the shoulders and chest, extending ultimately to and round the nipples. It persisted until the young was about six weeks old; but within two months of birth the “naked areas were covered with a coating of short hair. Period of Gestation. A small and not fully grown specimen of the Pig-tailed Macaque (Macacus nemestrinus) was observed to be in season in the latter part of August, 1905 *, and to be covered more than once by a male of the so-called Common Macaque (IZ. fascicularis). There was no subsequent menstruation.. Hence it may be inferred that conception took place some time between the middle of August and the beginning of September. Soon afterwards the Monkey was removed from that cage and placed, together with another female of the same species, in a cage with an adult male hybrid between a Pig-tailed and Common Macaque bred in Singapore by Mr. H. N. Ridley. The behaviour of this male towards the two females was markedly different. Beyond tyrannising over the female in question and keeping her in a state of nervous subjection, he treated her with complete indifference. The other female, on the contrary, was regarded with decided favour. Possibly his disregard for the pregnant female was due to her condition. This may have brought about some subtle change in her, a difference or deprivation of odour may be, which perhaps robbed her of an attractiveness she might otherwise have held for him. In the winter she was placed in another cage and was not in company with a male Monkey of any kind until the young was born on March Ist. Judging by analogy of the human species, the foetus was very nearly, but not quite, at full term. The nails were completely formed; but the testicles had not descended into the scrotum. They had passed out of the abdominal cavity and were lying in the pelvic rim, the left a little lower than the right. Inguinal * T am able to fix this date within a few weeks from the testimony of one of the keepers, Rodwell, who being a newly appointed and imexperienced hand was pro- foundly impressed by the excessive inflammation of the genito-anal area exhibited by the Monkey at the time. This man came on duty on Aug. 7th, and assures me that he noticed the phenomenon within the following week or two. 564 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE BREEDING [May 15, position of the testicles in the human fetus suggests a month’s prematurity ; but in the Monkey, where development is more rapid, it probably denotes a shorter period, perhaps about two or three weeks. Hence assuming that the young Monkey under discussion may have been premature by about that length of time on March Ist*, and that conception occurred at some date in the latter half of August, it may be concluded with some confidence that the period of gestation in the Pig-tailed Macaque is not more than seven and not less than six months. It does not appear to me that the data furnished by the present case justify a more exact estimate of its duration. The probability of the correctness of this calculation is supported by R. B. Sanyal’s? statement that a female Cercopithecus cynosurus, in the Calcutta Gardens, carried her young seven months. Parturition. The Pig-tailed Macaque in which parturition was observed refused food during the day, and seemed to be generally low- spirited and out of health. The precise time at which labour began is unknown. The first indication that 1t was in progress was the utterance of a scream by the mother late in the after- noon. The birth, a case of foot-presentation, took place about one hour afterwards. The Monkey remained seated on the perch during this time, aiding the extrusion of the young with her hands when a labour-pain supervened, and cleansing her offspring with her hands and licking them afterwards in the intervals. Towards the end of the time, the contractions of the uterus took place at intervals of about five minutes, the screams and moans of the mother attesting the suffermg she endured. The concluding stages and the severance of the umbilical cord could not be seen on account of darkness; but the placenta was found on the floor of the cage next morning detached from the young, which was dead, with its head partially crushed, as if by a fall or by being stepped upon. Whether the crushing of the head by either of these means was the cause of death, or whether the mother let the dead body fall on its head from the perch to the floor, is not known. If this had been the only case to supply data regarding par- turition in Monkeys, the following inferences might have been dvawn: (1) that the process is painful; (2) that it lasts for about one hour; (3) that the placenta is not devoured by the mother. But, so far as the suffering is concerned, there is no evidence * IT am not sure of the accuracy of this inference, because in the young male hybrid between I. rhesus and M. fascicularis, now living in the Gardens, the scrotum, which is of large size, appeared to be empty at birth and the testicles inguinal in position. The same appearance is presented by these organs now that the animal is five weeks old. + Quoted by W. L. Sclater, Mammals of S. Africa, p. 9. Blanford also says that the period js about seven months in Indian Macaques (Faun. Brit. India, Mamm, p. 13). 1906. ] OF MONKEYS IN THE MENAGERIE. 565 that it is considerable in normal cases, and Dr. Steegmann’s observations prove that the actual birth may be accomplished in not more than fifteen minutes. Both the suffering and the duration of the birth in the Pigtail must be attributed, I think, at all events in part, to its being a case of foot-presentation, which I assume, from the analogy supplied by other animals, to be abnormal *, Abnormality was further attested, as I afterwards learnt, by the leaving of the placenta by the mother, for Dr. Steeg- mann’s evidence on this point was fully confirmed by the behaviour of the female Rhesus, who was actually seen by the keeper, Heffer, to devour the placenta entire. Devouring the placenta by the mother seems to be the invariable rule in all species of Mammalia, with the exception of Man ft. The habit has no relation to the natural food of the species, being common to purely herbivorous ruminants, to herbivorous or omnivorous rodents, to Monkeys, and to Carnivora. The catho- licity of the habit suggests that it must have some significance from the point of view of utility to the species practising it. In the case of animals lke Rabbits, Rats, and Carnivora, where the mothers le up with helpless young, a certain measure of utility may lie in the necessity for keeping the spot clean and sweet- smelling. That this is not a complete explanation, however, is suggested by the reflection that in the case of Ungulata the young are active and soon after birth wander away with the mother. The same argument applies to Monkeys, where the young are born in trees and are carried away by the mother directly afterwards. Again, some animals, as is shown by the female N.-American Wolf (Canis occidentalis), now in the Zoological Gardens, stay for a couple of days with their young without feeding. In instances of this kind it is conceivable that the eating of the placente has a nutritive as well as a hygienic significance. But this view of the matter does not meet the case of Antelopes and their allies, which will start grazing as soon as the young is born. That the habit has some deeper meaning than those discussed above seems there- fore to be probable. Perhaps, as has been suggested to me by Dr. J. Rose Bradford, the hastening of milk-secretion is its underlying physiological cause. In this hypothesis may possibly be found the explanation of the delay that commonly occurs in the human female between parturition and lactation, since prac- tical synchronism between the two phenomena is met with in placentivorous mammals. The amount of hemorrhage that took place after birth differed greatly im the Japanese and Rhesus Macaques. In the Rhesus scarcely any was noticed, but in the Japanese it continued for two days and was quite considerable in quantity. * Dr. F. G. Parsons, F.Z.S., suggested at the Meeting when this paper was read that the length of time occupied by the birth might have been due to the young being the first to which the mother had given birth. + I have been unable to discover if the instinct has been retained by any savages, 566 "MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE BREEDING [May 15, ConDITION AND BEHAVIOUR OF THE YOUNG AT AND AFTER BIRTH. At birth, Monkeys of the genera Macacus and Cercopithecus are clothed with hair not differing materially in thickness, length, and distribution from that of their parents. In this respect they differ markedly from newly born Chimpanzees, which, as I am told by Dr. Steegmann, are nearly naked at birth. The smallest Chimpanzees that have come under my notice were thickly coated like the adults, with the exception of one young female, perhaps from twelve to eighteen months old, in which the head was bald, but became covered subsequently. Dr. Steegmann, on the contrary, has had in his hands newly imported specimens, believed to be about six months old, which were almost destitute of hair. ‘Thus, in the nakedness of the young, Chimpanzees are more like Man than they are like Cercopithecine Monkeys. They show, indeed, the commencement of the postponement in the growth of the body-hair characteristic of Man, where, apart from its local development at puberty in both sexes, it only appears with any degree of luxuriance upon the appendages, ventral surface, and to a lesser degree upon the back in some, mostly middle-aged or old males *. In the young of the Japanese Macaque and in the hybrid M. rhesus x M. fascicularis the colour differs considerably from that of the adults of these species. The hairs are uniformly tinted throughout, being in the first-mentioned form olive-grey, and in the second blackish grey, without gloss and without any subapical pale area. As recorded by Dr. H. O. Forbes, this was previously known to be the case in the Japanese Macaque, as also was the absence of the red hue in the face. It was not, however, previously known, so far as I am aware, that the infant coat is moulted during the fifth month and gradually replaced by a coat resembling in colour that of the parents. The little Japanese Macaque was born on Jan. 10th, and the moulting which set in near the beginning of May was finished by the end of that month, with the exception of a dark tuft of hair on each cheek, which was unchanged by the end of September. ; Newly born Macaques differ extraordinarily in the matter of activity and independence from human babies, which remain prac- tically helpless for at least a year. The Monkeys are able soon after birth to maintain a secure hold of their mother by clutching the hair of her sides with hands and feet, and within a week can crawl feebly about unaided. This was particularly noticeable in the case of the young Rhesus x Common Macaque, which I saw trying to creep over the straw of her cage when only four days old. When between four and five weeks old it could climb up the bars and about the perches of the cage with considerable activity and skill. The young Japanese Macaque appeared to be less pre- * This remark applies particularly to the xanthochroic and melanochroic Euro- peans, and still more so to the Tcdas of Hindostan and to the Ainos of N. Japan. 1906. ] OF MONKEYS IN THE MENAGERIE. 567 cocious, but to what extent this was due to the greater solicitude of the mother in keeping the baby with her, either to protect it from the cold * or from the Monkeys in the adjoining cages, it is impossible to say. Certain it is, however, that long after the baby was able to crawl the mother habitually frustrated its efforts at Independence by pulling it to her side before it could get out of arm’s reach. The male took no share in nursing or tending to the young. He treated it with complete indifference, and with good-humoured tolerance allowed it to take the liberty later on of climbing over his back and pulling his hair. When sleeping, the parents usually sat front to front with the little one between them, completely concealed by their long and thick coats of hair. In addition to nursing and suekling the baby in the usual way, the mother kept it clean, as dogs and cats clean their puppies and kittens, namely by licking up the excrement and urine while being passed. It was amusing to see her every now and again seize the baby by the tail and inspect its hind-quarters for indications of excretion. I have never seen the young Macaques suck more than one teat at a time. In this they differ from the baby Vervet (Cerco- pithecus lalandii) born in the Gardens in 1893, which is alleged to have held both nipples in its mouth at once (P. Z. 8. 1893, p- 615). They soon began to feed on their own account. When four weeks old the baby Rhesus x Common Macaque helped himself to his mother’s bread and milk and at two months was trying, albeit ineffectually, to crack nuts. I did not see the young Japanese Macaque eat anything until six weeks old. At five months he was still being suckled. He was weaned when he was between seven and eight months old. AGE OF MONKEYS. I am not aware of any statistics as to longevity in Monkeys. It is interesting therefore to put on record the fact that Col. S. M. Benson kept, he informs me, a Rhesus Macaque alive for twenty-eight years. The animal ultimately died of heart disease, and was probably about twenty-nine years old at the time. Supplement by Dr. HK. J. StEEGMANN 7. My experience of birth amongst Monkeys is limited to one kind, the common Indian Rhesus, and the cases are few in number. All the females that gave birth to young ones were already pregnant when I bought them, and I have absolutely failed to * This Monkey, be it remembered, was born on Jan. 10 in an unwarmed open-air cage separated by wire partitions from cages to the right and left, containing Baboons and Monkeys of diverse species. The baby of the Rhesus, on the contrary, was born on April 27th in a warmed house, and two days afterwards was transferred with its mother to a cage boarded off from adjoining cages. + These notes were kindly compiled by Dr. Steegmann in reply to certain definite questions on matters about which my knowledge. was SBD G or my observations wanted confirming. 568 MR. R. I. POCOCK ON THE BREEDING [May 15, breed from the commencement. I have therefore no facts what- ever that can throw any light on the question of the length of gestation. Altogether, I have had five Rhesus Monkeys born in captivity, four of them apparently at full time and the fifth prematurely. I have also had several other mothers which gave birth to young within six days of arrival. The following facts are only ones on which I can speak with certainty from my own observations. The signs of pregnancy in the female are not easy to recognise. I have purchased several under the impression that they were with young, and on subsequent post-mortem examination found no sign. Those females that were really pregnant showed con- siderable enlargement and prominence of the abdomen. The breasts were swollen, but in only one case could I detect any areola round the nipple, and this may of course have been normal. The pregnant animals appeared to be just as active as the others. There was in all cases a very large amount of hquor amnii. Unfortunately, I never saw the actual delivery of the young. In one case I could fix the time within 15 minutes, in the other I did not see the young ones till from two to three hours after birth. I do not know how the mother separates the umbilical cord, but I suppose it is by biting. Examination of the abdominal end of the cord showed a condition that would have been caused by a clean bite rather than a tear. I have no doubt that the mother eats the placenta. I could never find a trace of it, even in the ease that I saw within a quarter of an hour of delivery. In the one case where the young was born apparently before full time, the mother had been ill some days previously. She was very wild and nervous, and resented any interference. The sign of ill-health was the one to which I generally attach a good deal of importance in Monkeys, namely, loss of appetite. I also noticed once or twice a slight discharge of what looked like blood-stained mucus from the vulva. This discharge may have been normal, though I never noticed it in any other Monkey before the birth of the young one. I have frequently seen a bloody discharge from the rectum in Monkeys, both male and female. In this particular case I found the young one dead in a corner of the cage. It had evidently been dead some hours, but had been born alive. There was no sign of the mother having killed it, at least there were no wounds or injuries to be seen, but she had tried to push it out of the cage, and was sitting as far away from it as she could when I first saw her. The placenta was still attached to the young by the umbilical cord, and no attempt seemed to have been made to separate it. No reliable data can be drawn from this placenta, as 1t was obviously not normal nor healthy. The young animal was fully developed, except for the teeth, which had not appeared. All the others that were born here had teeth. 1906. ] OF MONKEYS IN THE MENAGERIE. 569 The mother of this one died a few days after its birth, but the uterus was in too septic a condition for any satisfactory examination. In all cases where the young were born alive the thing that struck me most was the extraordinary strength and activity they displayed practically immediately after birth. The one I saw when it was certainly not more than twenty minutes old could already cling by itself to its mother whilst she climbed about the cage. They hold on to the mother’s fur by both hands and feet, and frequently also hold the nipple in their teeth. I am not able to form any opinion as to how long the young suckle; they can certainly eat solid food within less than a month of birth. One young Rhesus I had was born not more than a week before arrival. The mother died when it was between three weeks and a month old, and I had no difficulty in rearing it by hand, as it could drink and eat soft food. One Monkey born here I kept with its mother for six months, and another for about seven. Both these young animals suckled all the time, although they also, during the greater part of it, shared the ordinary food given to the mothers. The last point that is at all useful is the fact that young Rhesus Monkeys are born completely covered with hair, in all respects resembling the hair of the adult animal. I think that probably this is a feature in which they differ from Anthropoids. I have reason to believe that Chimpanzees are born entirely or nearly naked. I have had eight young Chimpanzees imported. They were not less than six months old, though one of them was certainly more. Seven of these animals had very little hair indeed , most of them were practically naked on the ventral surface, but had scanty fur on the head and back. I have had a large number of other young Chimpanzees, but all of them had good coats. Unfortunately, all the seven uncovered young ones died of broncho-pneumonia soon after arrival, so I had no chance of observing when the coat appeared. I tried an experiment to see if Rhesus would breed in captivity. One of the mothers whose baby had actually been born here was very tame and not easily frightened. I kept her with the young one, suckling all the time, for six months. J then put her in another large cage with an adult male Rhesus, and kept them together for another six months. During the whole of the time they were together they copulated frequently. Both my man and I witnessed this on many occasions. I then kept the female alone for three months. She had the appearance of being pregnant (enlarged abdomen and swollen breasts). At the end of three months she became ill and died. On post-mortem examination there was no sign of pregnancy. The uterus was no larger than that of an ordinary adult Rhesus, and the ovaries, &c., were normal. The post-mortem did not reveal the cause of death. IT cannot say anything about menstruation in the Rhesus during pregnancy or suckling, as I have not been able to make reliable 570 MR. G. A. BOULENGER—ADDITIONS TO THE [ May 15, observations on this point even in the non-pregnant adult female. There is certainly no swelling of the vulva and perineum such as occurs in the Baboon, and I have never noticed any discharge. As I have already said, the Rhesus often suffers from some inflammatory condition of the large intestine causing a discharge of bloody mucus from the rectum, and this may have been mistaken in some cases for menstrual blood *. 6. Additions to the Herpetology of British East Africa. By G. A. BouLencsr, F.R.S., F.Z.S. [Received May 10, 1906. ] (Text-figures 96-98.) Seven years ago I described and figured in these Proceedings? a species of the genus Lacerta, belonging to the group of L. muralis, discovered by Mr. F. J. Jackson in the Mau Ravine, Uganda. This was a very unexpected discovery, considering the range of the genus; it is now paralleled by Mr. Degen’s find, also in Uganda, of a Lizard of the genus Algiroides, the known distribu- tion of which was believed to be restricted to Sardinia, Corsica, the Kast Coast of the Adriatic, and Greece. The collection made in Uganda by Mr. Degen, which has been productive of so many new fishes, has also yielded a new Snake and a new Toad, which are here described. ALGIROIDES AFRICANUS, sp. n. (Text-fig. 96.) Head strongly depressed ; snout rather long, obtusely pointed. Rostral not entering the nostril; a single postnasal; four or five upper labials anterior to the subocular; a series of granules between the supraoculars and the supraciliaries ; occipital shorter and a little broader than the interparietal; temple covered with uniform small keeled scales. No gular fold; 19 scales in a line between the third chin-shields and the collar, those in front of the latter enlarged and faintly keeled; collar with serrated edge, composed of 6 plates. Dorsal scales more than twice as large as the laterals, diagonally keeled, obtusely pointed, the strong keels converging towards the median line; 24 scales across the middle of the body; two or three lateral scales correspond to the length of * [Evacuation of apparently blood-stained feces appears to be not an uncommon phenomenon in Monkeys. Dr. Mary Gordon, F.Z.S., tells me she has noticed it in a Diana (Cercopithecus diana) and a Mozambique Vervet (C. pygerythrus), but is not sure that the staining was caused by blood. I have myself been completely deceived by the feces of a Chimpanzee, which, while in perfect health, passed a stool suggestive of serious intestinal ulceration. I subsequently learnt that she had been fed the previous day upon blood oranges! In any case, whether the staining is sometimes due to blood, as Dr. Steegmann says, and sometimes not, it appears to occur in Monkeys in other respects perfectly healthy and passing normal feces. This conclusion may be useful to those who keep Monkeys, since it shows that the occurrence of such staining does not necessarily indicate treatment for colitis or enteritis.—R. I. P.] + 1899, p. 96, pl. x. 1906. | HERPETOLOGY OF BRITISH EAST AFRICA. 571 aventral. Ventrals in 6 longitudinal series, median and outer series considerably narrower than the others, and 18 transverse series. Preanal plate with two small azygous plates in front of it and small scales on the sides. The hind limb reaches between the Text-fig. 96. a Cpe LF Ou: Oo ite wa a PMG ‘i NAVAN i VT NA STUATIARNN wae Aa i Ax a Re lols SDE Algiroides africanus. a, side view of head; 6, upperside, and c, underside of body. collar and the ear; foot once and one-fourth the length of the head. Femoral pores 13-15. Coppery brown above, with a well- defined dark brown lateral band and small dark brown spots on 572 MR. G. A. BOULENGER—ADDITIONS TO THE [May 15, the back; a light streak from the upper lip to the shoulder, interrupted by the lower border of the tympanum, and continued as a series of round spots on the body ; upper surface of tail with dark and light bars; lower parts orange (green in spirit), the throat yellowish. A single male specimen from Entebbe. [NRSV STOUT WO) WEIN co sccesancsonnobe 51 millim. 1 & orc UEP rS aero odcnHanodaceene i: ae Wridith of head ereseeeseeeeeere eee 9D act From end of snout to fore limb... 20 ,, Bore limi! ccohece soe setae oer eras 22 ew Hind limilbeiayetest eee meee 30 gg This lizard resembles strikingly A. nigropunctatus D. & B., from the Kast Coast of the Adriatic and the Ionian Islands, differing principally in the scaling of the temple and in the single postnasal shield. LEPTODIRA DEGENI, sp. n. (Text-fig. 97.) Rostral small, a little broader than deep, just visible from above; internasals not or but slightly broader than long, much shorter than the prefrontals ; frontal once and a half as long as broad, a little longer than its distance from the end of the snout, shorter than the parietals; loreal much longer than deep; one pree- and two postoculars; temporals 1+2; eight upper labials, fourth and fifth or third, fourth, and fifth entering the eye; three Text-fig. 97. UN Gt evs Leptodira degeni. a, rostral, 6, upper, and e, side views of head. pairs of chin-shields, the anterior longer than broad and in con- tact with five lower labials. * Scales smooth, in 19 rows. Ventrals 170-175; anal entire; subcaudals 32-33. Dark brown above, the outer rows of scales lighter, or whitish in the centre ; upper lip and lower parts yellowish white, with a brown line along the middle of the tail. Total length 450 millim. ; tail 50. Two specimens from Entebbe. Distinguished from LZ. hotambeia Laur. by the narrower rostral, the longer loreal, and the absence of black or the temple. ~I eo) 1906. ] HERPETOLOGY OF BRITISH EAST AFRICA. 5 Buro virratus, sp. n. (Text-fig. 98.) Crown without bony ridges; snout. short, rounded, with dis- tinct canthus; interorbital space concave, narrower than the upper eyelid ; tympanum very distinct, nearly as large as the eye and close to it. Fingers rather pointed, first not extending beyond second ; toes one-third webbed, with simple subarticular tubercles; two moderate metatarsal tubercles; no tarsal fold. The tarso-metatarsal articulation reaches the tympanum. Upper Bufo vittatus. parts with round or oval warts of unequal size, which are conical on the sides; parotoids narrow, feebly prominent, broken up into warts. Reddish brown above, with six interrupted black longi- tudinal bands on the back and cross-bands on the limbs; pale brick-red beneath, with large greyish spots. From snout to vent 37 millim. A single female specimen from Entebbe. Near Bb. funereus Bocage. Distinguished by the shorter inner finger and the much larger tympanum. 574 MR. R. E. HOLDING ON THE WILD IRISH GOAT, ETC. [May 29, May 29, 1906. FREDERICK GILLETT, Esq., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. H. Burne, F.Z.S., exhibited, on behalf of Prof. Stewart, some dissections prepared for the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons from material derived from the Society’s Gardens. The specimens included the head of a Ki-wi (A pteryx mantell2) in sagittal section, showing the relatively large size of the olfactory parts of the brain and the complexity of the olfactory chamber; the head of a Crowned Crane (alearica regulorwm), showing the dilatable pharynx, which by its inflation when the bird crows causes a sudden distension of the gular wattle, and apparently acts as a resonating-chamber ; preparations of the cheek-pouches of a Spotted Cavy (Celogenys paca) and the stomach of a fetal Giraffe (Giraffe camelopardalis antiquorum g X G. ¢. wardi 2). Dr. L. W. Sambon exhibited a series of diagrams illustrating the transmission of diseases by Insects and Ticks. Prof. Robert T. Jackson exhibited a photograph of the Champley collection of eggs of the Great Auk taken before the collection was dispersed, and made remarks on specimens of the bird that had lately come under his notice. He also exhibited a long-focus lens for museum work and dissections. The Secretary exhibited the skull of a Wild Boar that had lately been dug up during building operations in James Street, Oxford Street, W. Mr. R. E. Holding exhibited and made remarks upon the skull and horns of a fine male so-called Wild Irish Goat. He stated that these animals existed in considerable numbers in the moun- tainous district of the West of Ireland, and were undoubtedly domesticated Goats which had taken to a wild life and had so become to all intents and purposes feral; that they were of wary disposition and sure-footed, and difficult to get a shot at. At times, however, during the breeding-season the males came into the lowlands to the she-goats and so were occasionally shot. The age of the specimen exhibited was probably 7 or 8 years. Mr. Holding also exhibited the skull of a male domestic Cat, in which the posterior border of the orbit was complete. In the majority of the existing Felide this portion of the orbit remained open throughout life. There were, however, about four or five exist- ing species, viz. Felis viverrina, F’. subrugosa, F. planiceps, in which the orbit was complete; there was also a figure in de Blainville’s ‘Ostéographie’ called /. longicaudata in which this condition wasalso 1906. | ON MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. 57a characteristic. Whether the specimen was a reversion to those existing species which had a complete orbit, or whether it was simply a case of individual variation, it was difficult to ascertain. Mr. Holding also exhibited a large calculus weighing 5 lh. 6 0z., taken from the descending colon of a Horse, and remarked that calculi were fairly common amongst older horses bred and reared in towns, where there was a preponderance of dry and impure food, and where, as in London, the water was largely impregnated with impurities ; the composition of these calculi being usually 50 p. c. ammonio-phos. of magnesium, 20 p. ce. of calcie phosphates, ie soluble salts and fatty material—as shown in the. concentric rings. The following papers were read :— 1. The Rudd Exploration of South Africa.—V. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in N.. Transvaal. By Oxuprizip Thomas, F.R.S., and Harotp Scuwann, EVZ.S. [Received May 11, 1906. ] After completing the uous at Knysna, of which we gave an account in our last paper*, Mr. Grant journeyed by way of Delagoa Bay and Pretoria to the Zoutpansberg District of the Transvaal, a vegion hitherto practically untouched, so far as the collections in the National Museum are concerned. Indeed, the whole drainage-area of the Limpopo had been remarkably little worked, such few collections as had been sent from within it having been from its northern part in Matabililand or the western in Bechuanaland, the Limpopo part of the Transvaal having been quite neglected. In this interesting region Mr. Grant has worked with his usual energy and success, and his collection includes 250 specimens be- longing to 51 species. This fine series, by Mr. Rudd’s generosity, is, aS before, added to the treasures of our National Museum. The localities at which the collection was made were two— Klein Letaba on the low veldt, and Woodbush on the high veldt; and these localities are so distinct from each other both geo- graphically and zoologically, that we have thought it advisable to separate altogether the collections received from them and to write two distinct lists as follows :— I. Kier Lerasa. Klein Letaba is situated in about 23° 21’8. and 30° 40’ E., on a branch of the Letaba River, which runs south-eastwards to join the Olifants River, uniting again still further eastwards with the main stream of the Lower Limpopo, It is at an altitude of about 1000 feet to the east of and below the high range of the Drakensberg. * P.Z.S. 1908, p. 159. Proc, Zoou. Soc.—1906, No, XX XIX, 39 516 MESSRS. 0. THOMAS AND H. SCHWANN ON [ May 29, its mammal fauna proves to be more like that of the high veldt than one would have expected from the difference in altitude, so that we are disappointed to find fewer of the coast and tropical forms than we had hoped, and it is evident that to get the true coast fauna a still lower level must be visited. Hven here, however, several interesting northern forms have been added to the South African list, the most notable being a representative of the Nyasan Raphicerus sharpei, an Antelope so strikingly different from any South African species that the tardiness of its discovery is somewhat surprising. Other inter- esting forms are a new Helogale and two new Genets. Mr. Grant’s notes on the Klein Letaba district are as follows :— “The low veldt, that is the country under the Berg, is mainly undulating grass country with long stony rises and some few kopjes and mountains. “Tt is thickly timbered, principally with Mopani (Shinatsi of the Tchangaan); a large, fine-growing tree called Ntuma, which bears a small green fruit; the Marula, on the berries of which Funisciurus cepapt feeds and from which the natives make beer ; ‘ wait-a-bit’ thorns (“ [kaya”); and wild fig and cream-of-tartar trees. ““ Water is scarce in the dry season and only to be found in the main rivers that intersect the country, except for some few pools left in the rocks in some of the spruits. The soil is sandy and very fertile in good rainy seasons. The climate is not healthy, and the weather generally very warm. The thermometer fre- quently records 106° and seldom less than 90° in the shade. “The natives are a tribe called the Tchangaan, and are an offshoot of the Zulu nation. They have a language of their own, but all understand Zulu and speak it readily. Though very keen on hunting big game, they gave but little assistance in securing small mammals.” 1. MrnioPprTERUS NATALENSIS Smith. @. 1275, 1299, 1300. As already noted in our Knysna paper, the Miniopterus of South Africa generally, apart from the extreme southern coast region, is a brown species, very uniformly coloured, its head quite like its body. The forearms of these examples measure 44, 44°5, and 45 mm. To this species, of which the type is still in the British Museum, we refer Sundevall’s Vesperugo scotinus, kept separate by Dobson because of its much smaller size. But in so distinguishing it he only took account of the Madagascar specimens he referred to it, with forearm 38-39 mm., and ignored the fact that Sundeyall himself gave the forearm measurement as 44 mm.,a size quite similar to that of other examples of J/. natalensis. One of Sundevall’s typical specimens, collected by Wahlberg, is also in the Museum collection. Of the Minioptert previously sent home by Mr. Grant, those 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. BY? from Klipfontein, Namaqualand, and Negoye Hills, Zululand, referred by us on Dobson’s authority to IL schreibersi, now both prove to be referable to the present species. ‘This species, which is not very common, does net appear until it is quite dark.”—C, H. B. G. 2. SCOTOPHILUS NIGRITA Schr. 6. 1272, 1285, 1289, 1311. @. 1271, 1293. These specimens are rather paler than a Zululand skin which may be taken as representing S. n. dingani Smith, described from the country “between Natal and Delagoa Bay.” Perhaps they will prove to be similar to S. x. planirostris Peters, the Zambesi form, of which we have as yet no good specimens available. “Fairly common, but apparently confined to the low country. Makes its appearance soon after sundown, and is strong and rapid on the wing.”—C. H. B.G. 3. NASILIO BRACHYRHYNCHUS Smith. 6.13815. @Q. 1224, 1247, 1280, 1309, 1318. Two of the females were pregnant, with one fetus each. One of Mr. Darling’s specimens from Mazoe, however, “ gave birth to two very large young after capture,” so that these animals do not always have only one young. With regard to the generic position of this animal, we are of opinion that it is fully time that the three very distinct groups contained in “‘ Macroscelides”” should be recognised as genera. These may be briefly distinguished as follows :-— 1, MACROSCELIDES. Type. Macroscelides Smith, Zool. Journ. iv. p. 435 (SYA) oa Sasa ee Ronan ei SSG bon GBORACH iar eeeeee M. proboscideus. Rhinomys Licht. Darst. Stiug., text to Dieexxavdily (LOSE) essaseones asec sete 5. M. proboscideus. A. a. of W. Sclater’s synopsis of Macroscelides *. Lower molars two. Bulle much enlarged. Macroscelides, as thus restricted, would contain only two species, M. proboscideus and M. melanotis. II. ELEPHANTULUS. Llephantulus Thos. & Schw. Abst. P. Z.8. INoNS3)) py Os June! a NOOG ee ee: Lf. rupestris. A. 6. of Sclater’s synopsis. Lower molars two. Bulle normal, not specially enlarged. This genus would contain the great mass of the Elephant- Shrews, and its range extend from Algeria (H. rozeti) to the Cape. Type. %* Mamm. S$. Afr. ii. p. 146 (1901). 39% 578 MESSRS. O. THOMAS AND H. SCHWANN ON [May 29, IIl. Nastriio. Nasilio Thos. & Schw. Abstr. P. Z.8. Nord3, pa kOyrerumetan LOOGI i str ances. NV. brachyrhynchus. B. of Sclater’s synopsis. Lower molars three in number, a small cylindrical m, being present behind the large m, and m,. Bulle normal. To this genus there belong the forms described as brachyrhyn- chus, fuscus, schinzi, and malose, but the specific or subspecific standing of each of them is as yet by no means settled. “ Tchangaan name ‘ Madauri.’ “ Common and inhabiting all stony places on the flats, hillsides, or mountains. When pursued they take cover under any avail- able object, even the old piping lying on the veldt. They are diurnal only and were not observed in pairs.” —C. H. B.G. Type. 4. FELIs ocREATA CAFRA Desm. Ba IA, “‘'Tchangaan name ‘ Goye.’ “The specimen sent was the only Wild Cat seen at Klein Letaba and was shot while sunning itself in the daytime on the open veldt. It is considered a great delicacy by the natives.”— C. H. B.G. 5. GENETTA LETABA, sp. n. 3. 1242. A Genet of the G. tigrina group, but with the tail longer than the head and body, and the skull much constricted and heavily ridged. Size rather greater than in Cape specimens of tigrina, hind feet considerably longer. Fur comparatively short, rather finer in texture than in G. ludia (infra), rather coarser than in G. tigrina; long hairs about 20 mm. in length, underfur about 15. General ground-colour of upper surface including flanks rather greyer than ‘“‘cream-buff”; dorsal crest not so marked as in G. ludia, extending from the anterior point of the lumbar region to the root of the tail; spots edged with black, centres varying from dark tawny to chestnut, mostly of oblong shape, about one inch in length, smaller, darker, and rounder on the flanks. Underfur slate-grey. Long hairs of the light ground-colour grey for the basal third, middle third white, distal third black. Under surface of body light buffy, the sternal region marked with a few faint brownish spots, bases of the hair slate-grey. Head considerably darker than ground-colour of body, cheeks smoke-grey ; forehead rather darker, tips of hairs tawny. ars of medium length rounded, darker than in G. ludia. Inter- ramia, throat, and chest light yellowish grey, the last speckled with a few light reddish spots; fore limbs coloured like ground- colour of back, not black as in G. figrina or G. ludia; posterior surface of hind limbs blackish owing to the dark underfur, remainder of hind limbs and feet coloured like back. Tail 1906.] MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. 579 ‘longer than head and body, covered with long fine hair; about ten black rings, alternating with narrower ones, yellowish above, creamy white below, the last two not complete above, leaving a black streak on the upper surface. Skull of the same general size as in Cape specimens of G. tigrina, but more delicately built, more constricted over the frontals, and more heavily crested. Nasals narrow and running to a point posteriorly, their lateral edges not roughly parallel as in tagrina ; ascending processes of the maxillaries produced considerably behind the posterior limit of the nasals, postorbital constriction elongated ; sagittal crest unusually developed, commencing imme- diately behind the postorbital processes and running the whole length of the brain-case. Teeth as in G. tigrina, the third upper premolar with no internal cusp. Dimensions of the type (measured in the flesh) :—Head and body 487 mm.; tail 519; hind foot 90; ear 48. Skull—greatest length 90 mm.; basal length 83; zygomatic breadth 44; nasals 205; interorbital breadth 10°5; brain-case breadth 31:8; palatal length 40°5; length of bulle (including paraoccipital process) 17:1; greatest diameter of p* 3-4; outer diameter of p' 8; transverse diameter of m' 7:5; length of p, 6°3, Ob meio: Hab. Klein Letaba. Type. Male. B.M. no. 5.12.9.15. Original number 1242. Collected 24 July, 1905. This very interesting species appears to be the Zoutpansberg representative of G. tigrina, and is, as might be expected, rather more thickly and coarsely haired. It may be distinguished from that animal by the rufous centres to the spots, by the absence of black on the under surface of the body and on the fore and hind limbs, and by the tail being longer than the head and body. The skull is chiefly remarkable for the very conspicuous constriction of the postorbital region and the greatly developed sagittal crest. It might have been supposed that these skull-characters, varying during life and only present in an advanced state in extreme age, / as is certainly the case in most genera, are worthless as specific / characters. But it is to be noted that in the British Museum’y large series of skulls of G. tigrina no other specimen shows these peculiarities to anything like the same extent, although many are obviously older than the type of G. letabw, which has /ts basilar suture still unclosed. / «“Tchangaan names ‘Ngauny’ (for the large brown-spotted species) and ‘Tisimba’ (for the smaller dark-spotted species. Both species are apparently uncommon. They frequent the kloofs, river-banks, and open bush veldt, are nocturnal in their habits, and feed principally on beetles.”—C.H.B.G, — / / / 6. GENETTA LUDIA, sp. n. / go. 1276, 1297. / A Genet of the G. dongolana type, with black dorsal stripe and smail rusty-red spots. 7, 580 MESSRS. 0, THOMAS AND H. SCHWANN ON [May 29, Size considerably larger than in Cape specimens of G. tigrina, ’ tail longer than head and body. Fur of medium length, stiff and rather coarse, about 50 mm. long on the median erest, about 30 mm. on flanks. Ground-colour on back and flanks pale sandy, whiter than cream; dorsal crest strongly marked, jet-black, extending from neck to base of tail; spots tawny, becoming darker on flanks, small, numerous, arranged in five or six rows. Underfur grey basally, pale sandy yellow terminally. Light ground-colour hairs white for their proximal two-thirds, distal third black, occasionally with a faint intermediate tawny ring. Under surface of body rather lighter than cream-buff. Underfur fine, thick, grey (no. 7) basally, sandy terminally. Head sandy grey lighter than body, the long hairs with white tips; infraorbital spot, not defined posteriorly, merging into the grey of the cheeks; ears rounded, covered with short whitish-grey hairs; lips and interramia dark brownish black ; throat and chest white with faintyellow suffusion. Upper surface of forearm rather yellower than back, speckled with small black spots; feet yellowish white or buffy; under surface of upper arm smoky grey suffused with creamy white, forearm brownish black, sharply contrasting with it. Hind limbs below the knee jet-black, with the exception of a line of the ordinary ground-colour passing down the front of the limb to the ankle- joint; feet dirty white with a few black hairs mterspersed. Tail longer than head and body, thickly covered with long coarse hair, having about ten black rings, broadest towards the tip and narrowest at the base; upper surface of the white rings con- spicuously yellow owing to the presence of tawny hairs. Skull decidedly larger than in G. tigrina, more heavily built, the anterior wing of the squamosal more widely curved, postorbital breadth greater, bullee more noticeably constricted in the middle ; third upper premolar with a very well-marked internal cusp. Dimensions of the type (measured in the flesh) :— Head and body 486 mm.; tail 496; hind foot 99; ear 59. The corresponding measurements of a G. tigrina (B.M. no. 5.5.7.41.) from Knysna are as follows :— Head and body 443; tail 397; hind foot 81; ear 49. Skull—greatest length 93 mm.; basal length 85:5; zygomatic breadth 46-4; nasals 18°8 x 7; interorbital breadth 16; brain- case breadth 31:6; palatal length 44; length of bulle 19-5; greatest diameter of p* 9-1; outer diameter of p* 8; transverse diameter of m’ 7:5; length of p, 6-5; of m, 7-2. Fab. Klein Letaba. MOG WIT Soo. HIPAA, Original number 1276. Collected 5 Aug., 1905. This species may be distinguished from G. tigrina by its very different external proportions and by the whole of the under surface of the body and fore limbs being dark brown or black in éigrina avd only the forearm black in G. ludia. The close resemblance this species bears to G. dongolana, 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. dsl H. & E., is very remarkable, though it may be easily dis- tinguished by its larger size. 7. HERPESTES GRACILIS PUNCTULATUS Gray. oo LO Oe 1288) ““Tchangaan name ‘ Mungauba.’ “This species is not common. It frequents the open bush veldt and lives in holes or in hollow trees and feeds chiefly on insects,” —C. H. B. G. 8. HELOGALE BRUNNULA®™ Thos. & Schw. Abstr. P. Z. 8. No. 33, p. 10, June 5, 1906. 3. 1218, 1219, 1262, 1263, 1264. 9. 1229, 1265, 1274. A brown species, not so black on head and limbs as . parvula. Colour above uniform brown finely ticked with buffy whitish, the general effect between “bistre” and ‘‘ vandyke brown,” with a certain warmth in the tone not present in 7. parvula, which more approaches ‘seal-brown.’ This warmth is due to the under- fur being broadly dull buffy or clay-colour for its terminal half, while in A. parvula it is smoky grey. Under surface not conspicuously different from upper. Head greyer than back, with a slightly olive tone; in H. parvula, on the other hand, the head is if anything more blackish than the back. Limbs like body, grizzled and ticked, not darkening terminally to black as in HT. parvula. Tail of the same general colour, evenly tapering, the terminal pencil inconspicuously blacker. Skull much asin H. parvula, except that the bull are decidedly larger and more evenly inflated, the increase being particularly noticeable in their posterior, mastoid portion. Dimensions of the type (measured in the fiesh):— Head and body 207 mm.; tail 165; hind foot 42; ear 21. Skull—basal length 44 mm.; greatest breadth 29:3; inter- orbital breadth 8°2; breadth of brain-case 22; palatal length 24; breadth between outer corners of p' 16°8; greatest horizontal diameter of p* 5-6; of m? 3°5. flab. Klem Letaba, Zoutpansberg District. Alt. 1050’. Type. Male. B.M. no. 5.12.9.22. Original number 1263. Collected 30 July, 1905. The eight specimens of this Helogale are all precisely similar in colour, and all equally different from a co-type of A. parvula in the Museum Collection. Unfortunately the locality of 7. parvula is not known, though from the general account of Wahlberg’s localities given by Sundevall in his paper on the birds, the present region might have been the “ Caffraria superior, juxta tropicum.” However, since the Letaba Helogale does not agree ** [The complete account of this new species appears here; but since the name and preliminary diagnosis were published in the ‘ Abstract,’ it is distinguished by the name being underlined.—Eprror. | 582 MESSRS. 0. THOMAS AND H. SCHWANN ON [ May 29, with 4. parvula, the latter must have been obtained further south, perhaps on the Crocodile River. H. brunnula may readily be distinguished from H. parvula by its head being paler instead of darker than the body, by its buffy- tipped underfur, and by its head and feet not darkening terminally. ““Tchangaan name ‘ Mashli.’ “ Fairly common in the low country. They were observed in parties of from four to eight, and live and take refuge in the deserted ant-heaps. They become commoner towards the Portuguese frontier.”—C. H. B.G. 9. FuUNISCIURUS CEPAPI Smith. 6. 1223, 1228, 1237, 1261, 1281, 1283, 1286, 1287, 1291, 1293, 1302, 13803, 1317. 9. 1227, 1232, 1244, 1268, 1277, 1282, 1292. ‘Shot in tree” is on most of the specimens, so the species is evidently an arboreal one. “'Tchangaan name ‘ Mashinyane.’ “Very common on the low veldt, to which it is confined. These Squirrels breed and sleep in a hollow tree, in which they take refuge when pursued. They are easily captured, and form an article of food with the natives.” —C. H. B. G. 10. GRAPHIURUS MURINUS Desm. 3. 1269. This example shows strongly the peculiar staining of the chest- hairs, on which Smith’s name of erythrobronchus was based. “ Tchangaan name ‘ Ndabidabi.’ “The specimen sent was found asleep in the woodwork of an outbuilding and was very fat. This species is not easy to obtain as it hibernates during the winter.”—C. H. B. G. 1]. Tarera Brantstt Smith. 3 2. 1305. ““Tchangaan name ‘ Masingaan.’ “Common and gregarious in habits. Forms burrows in sandy places but never of any great size.”—C. H. B. G. 12. TATERA MILIARIA SALSA Wrought. 6.1255. ©. 1233, 1301. 13. ARVICANTHIS DORSALIS Smith. 3. 1260, 1284, 1312. 9. 1241, 1290, 1316. “ Tchangaan name ‘ Matsutsa.’ “This species is fairly common on the low veldt, where it appar- ently replaces A. pumilio, to which its habits are similar. It frequents the grassy flats and thick undergrowth in the kloofs. Diurnal only and a vegetarian.”—C. H. B. G. 1906.] MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. 583 14, Sreatomys PRATENSIS Peters. 3. 1217, 12388, 1254,1270. 9. 1221, 1222, 1230, 1239, 1248, 1252. Specimen 1270,a male, is immensely larger than any of the other individuals of the series, but it is very old, its teeth being quite worn down. Its skull is 26°5 mm. in total length, thus equalling the typical skull of S. bocagei, but the latter belonged to a much younger individual. The two equally old female skulls measure 25 mm. in length. “'Tchangaan name ‘ Ntenyane.’ “Common and confined to the low country. ~They sleep throughout the winter, roughly from April to October, in a grass nest at the end of their burrow. All the specimens were dug out and were excessively fat and unable to move fast. The natives, who consider them a great delicacy, say they cannot find them in the summer, and firmly believe they turn into bats.”—C. H. B. G. 15. Mus curysopHiuus de Wint. 6. 1245, 1267, 1304. 2. 1256. “Tchangaan name ‘ Magundane.’ “‘Common everywhere, especially so in the undergrowth in kloofs and in outbuildings. Nocturnal only.”—C. H. B. G. 16. Mus coucHa Smith. oo L220) 1225, 1226, 1237, 1250, 1306. 9. £234. “ Tchangaan names ‘ Mkundlo’ or ‘ Magundane’ (a rat). Very common.’—C. H. B. G. 17. Lepus zuLuensis Thos. & Schw. Op eabow i204, 1313; In our paper dealing with the mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in Zululand a Hare, belonging to the saxatilis-group, was described as a new subspecies under the name of Lepus saxatilis zuluensis*. On the receipt of the material with which the present paper deals a careful examination of the whole group was undertaken, and we are led to the conclusion that no intergrading takes place between the large-eared Hare, Lepus sawxatilis, and its eastern representative. We therefore consider the small-eared one to be worthy of specific rank. “ Tchangaan name ‘ Nfundla.’ “This species is fairly common in stony places and on the sandy flats, especially round old mealie-patches. They move about only at night and spend the day under a bush or in the long grass.” — CoB iG. 18. RAPHICERUS SHARPEI COLONICUS, Subp. n. g. 1278, 1279. Similar in all essential characters to the true sharpei of Nyasa, * P. Z. 8. 1905, 1. p: 270: 584 MESSRS. 0. THOMAS AND H, SCHWANN ON | May 29, but the feet decidedly longer, though both the specimens are imma- ture. In three fully adult specimens of sharpei the hind feet, including hoofs, measure 196-198 mm., while in the two Letaba individuals, which still retain their milk-dentition, this dimension is 208 and 215 mm. General colour slightly richer and more purplish than in true sharpet, the intermixed white hairs more numerous. Throat, chest, and belly purplish buff, the line of demarcation on sides of belly little marked ; in sharpei the under surface is white or whitish with but little tinge of buffy. Skull much as in sharpei, but the bulle appear to be slightly larger. Dimensions of the type, taken in flesh :— Head and body 722 mm.; tail 76; hind foot, without hoof 195; ear 89. Skull—greatest length 126 mm.; basal length 112; greatest breadth 64; nasals 35 and 15; muzzle to orbit 59; muzzle to front of mp” 30. Horns, length 38 mm.; diameter at base 12. Type. Immature male. B.M. no. 5.12.9.81. Original number 1279. Collected 10 August, 1905. ““Shot on grass-covered hillside, dotted with trees.”—C. H. B. G. The discovery of the peculiar Nyasan Steinbuck Raphicerus sharper south of the Zambezi makes an important addition to the known fauna of S. Africa. Possibly it has been obtained before, but sportsmen might easily have confounded it with the Grysbok, which it resembles by its hoary-mixed coat, though its short horns, even when adult, and the absence of supplementary hoofs, show that it is really quite distinct from that animal. The British Museum owes to the kindness of Col. Manning several specimens of 4. sharpet from Mpimbi, Nyasa, and these, though fully adult, are so uniformly smaller than the two obtained by Mr. Grant, that we think it advisable to give a subspecific name to the Transvaal form. 19. RAPHICERUS NEUMANNI CAPRICORNIS, subsp. n. 3. 1258. 9. 1314. Similar to the Hast African Steinbuck in all respects, except that the bullz are very markedly larger, and the nasals are rather smaller and narrower. Dimensions of the type, measured in the flesh :— Head and body 814 mm.; tail 65; hind foot 236; ear 102. Fore-hoofs, length anteriorly 26:5, transverse breadth 19. Skull—greatest length 147 mm.; basal length 128; zygomatic breadth 72°5; nasals 48x17; muzzle to orbit 71; muzzle to anterior premolar 36; palatal length 74; length of upper molar series (alveoli) 45; bulle, greatest diameter on inflated part 24:5, height below level of glenoid surface 20, greatest breadth between inflated parts of opposite sides 49-5. 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL, 585 Horns, length 92 mm.; diameter at base 13°5. Type. Adult male. B.M. no. 5.12.9.78. Original number 1250. Collected 27 July, 1905. On a comparison of the numerous beautiful specimens of Raphicerus obtained during the Rudd exploration with such Kast African examples as are available, we find that the latter are readily distinguishable from the Cape forms by their paler general colour and by the greater extent of their white facial markings. Their eyes are completely ringed with white, their lips are white, the edges of the ears are more broadly whitened, and there is a considerable increase in the extent and brightness of the white chin, throat, and lmb-markings. Their skulls are rather larger. In all these respects the Letaba Steinbucks absolutely agree with the Hast African specimens, and differ from the Cape ones, not being in any way intermediate; and we therefore think we should recognize newmanni as a distinct species, and consider the Transvaal form of it—characterized by its very large bulle—as a special subspecies. The dark coronal horseshoe-mark is absent in the male, slight in the female. 20. CEPHALOPHUS GRimmiI LL) @ . 1259, 1300. “'Tchangaan name ‘ Munti.’ “Very common everywhere, especially in long grass and patches of bush. They vary a great deal in colour and size.”— C. H. B.G. 21. CERVICAPRA ARUNDINUM Bodd. Oo WHOS, WS. “ Tchangaan name ‘ Mhlangu.’ “Fairly common, observed singly or in pairs, occasionally even three together. This species feeds during the night and drinks at sundown and between dawn and sunrise.”—C. H. B. G. If. Woopsusa. Woodbush lies on the siopes of the Drakensberg Range, about 30 miles to the north-east of Pietersburg, at an altitude of about 4500 feet. Its fauna is therefore that of the high veldt in general, and the collection gives us valuable information as to the north-eastern range of the high-veldt animals. New forms are less numerous than in the Letaba collection, but we have found occasion to describe a new Hlephant-Shrew and a new Crocidura, while several rarities, notably Myosorexw tenuis and Cynictis selousi, are added to our series. Mr. Grant has sent us the following notes on the Woodbush District and the High Veldé :— “The high open veldt which extends round Pietersburg for 586 MESSRS. 0. THOMAS AND H. SCHWANN ON [May 29, many miles consists of grass-covered flats and undulating country dotted with kopjes and long stony ridges, with here and there patches of cactus and thorn trees. Huphorbias (Naboom) and milk-bush are common in the kopjes, though water is by no means plentiful. When the country is dry and grass is scarce, the country is very ‘ karoo ’-like and most monotonous to travel over. “The Woodbush Hills are part of the northern spurs of the Drakensberg, and very similar to the high veldt of Zululand both in vegetation and climate. “‘ Woodbush village lies in the hills of the same name, but at a rather lower elevation than the hills proper. It is surrounded by rocky country fairly well timbered, but not nearly so thickly as the ‘ bush-veldt.’ The vegetation consists chiefly of mimosa- thorn (Acacia), large specimens of Huphorbias, fig-trees (Moga) along the streams, and Ntuma trees on the warmer sides of the large kloofs. “The natives throughout the high veldt are Basuto, and, except in a few instances, gave no assistance in collecting specimens.” 22. CERCOPITHECUS ALBIGULARIS Sykes. @. 1340. This is the second record of this Kast African species in South Africa proper. Sclater* mentions the capture of the first specimen at Umtali in Mashonaland. “* Basuto name ‘ Duru.’ “Common, but difficult to obtain on account of its wariness. This species inhabits the deep kloofs in the depths of the forests, seldom visiting the open parts.”—C. H. B.G. 23, HKLEPHANTULUS RUPESTRIS MYURUS, subsp. n. OP Sh: Similar to the typical repestris from Namaqualand in general colour and proportions, but with a much more closely-haired and untufted tail. Fur soft and silky, about 10 mm. in length on middle of back. General colour of upper surface between drab and fawn-colour, passing into yellowish drab on flanks; under surface pure white, bases of hairs blackish slate. Eyes not so conspicuously ringed with white as in the typical subspecies, the white line partially interrupted posteriorly. Hars of medium length, light drab externally, not rufous-brown as in rupestris, and with no rufous hairs internally, only white. Nuchal region light rufous in colour, not so markedly so as in the typical Namaqualand race. Upper surface of hands and feet pure white. Tail long, closely covered with minute hairs, reddish brown above, white below, not tufted at the tip. Dimensions of the type (measured in the flesh) :— Head and body 127 mm.; tail 154; hind foot 34; ear 26. * Mammals of South Africa; vol. i. p. 12 (1900). 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. 587 Skull (damaged)—-nasals, length 15; length of upper tooth-row 20-2, of lower tooth-row 18°8. Hab. Woodbush, North-eastern Transvaal. Type. Female. B.M. no. 6.4.3.2. Original number 1137. Collected 17 May, 1905. This subspecies can be easily distinguished from the typical one by its much lighter-coloured tail and by the absence of a tuft. “‘ Basuto name ‘ Umsiti.’ “This species is undoubtedly very rare on the high veldt.”— Cry G? 24. CROCIDURA ARGENTATA Sund. 3. 1186. ‘“‘Basuto name ‘ Mezitri.’ “This species was not observed in the low country, and the specimen sent home was the only one seen.”—C. H. B.G. 25. CROCIDURA SYLVIA, sp. Nn. 3. 1114, 1134, 11438, 1148, 1153, 1156, 1199, 1200, 1210. @. 1203, 1352. A dark-coloured Shrew, probably allied to C. fumosa Thos., but with a less hairy tail and narrower skull. Fur long and velvety, about 6 mm. in length on the middle of back. General colour of upper surface between “ seal-brown” and “clove-brown,” darker on the rump. Under surface paler and browner. Hands and feet brown. Tail more than half the length of head and body, not incrassated; bristle-hairs present only at the base, much fewer than in fwmosa; dark brown, almost black, above and below. Skull finer, narrower, and more slenderly built than in fwmosa, but 1' stronger and larger. Dimensions of the type (measured in the fiesh) :— Head and body 81 mm.; tail 43; hind foot 15; ear 8:5. Skull—condylo-incisive length 21-5 mm.; basal length 19:5; ereatest breadth 9:0; length of upper tooth-row 9:0; i’ to * 4:8, " Hab. Woodbush, Zoutpansberg District. Alt. 4500 ft. Type. Male. B.M. no. 6.4.3.10. Original number 1200. Collected 14 June, 1905. This species may be distinguished from any other South- African Crocidura by its very dark colour and the scarcity of the bristle-hairs on the tail—characters that might lead to its con- fusion with Myosorex sclatert unless a comparison of the skulls were made. ‘¢ Very common on the high veldt, not observed in the low country. Inhabits vleis and thick grass by the river-banks.” —C. H.B.G. 26. CROCIDURA sp. 3. 1147. 588 MESSRS. 0. THOMAS AND H. SCHWANN ON [May 29, 97. Myosorex tenuis Thos. & Schw. Ge LOO IS 2 IG aA Oe Oe (ee elton. 1160, 1209, 1327, 1329, 1330, 1336. ©. 1110, 1325, 1326. The present series was obtained in the Woodbush Hills at a height of 4900 feet, and the single specimen on which the species was founded was caught by Mr. Grant at Zuurbron in the Wakkerstroom District of the Transvaal at an altitude of 4600 feet. It is therefore probable that éenwis is the high-veldt representative of WZ. varius, to which it is certainly more allied than to WW. sclateri, the latter differing from it very considerably in external measurements and skull-characters. Its only poimt of agreement with sclateri is in its general colour, and not, as we stated in the second account of Mr. Rudd’s exploration of South Africa*, in the length of its tail. Although the difference between the types of sclatert and tenwis in this measurement is only 8 mm., extreme specimens show a difference of nearly twice this, and the average may be considered as about 12 mm. “« Very common on the kopjes, cultivated lands, and the vege- tation on the banks of streams.”—C. H. B. G. 28. Grenerra LETABZ Thos. & Schw. Gs USO, When These specimens are practically identical with the type of this species described in the first part of the paper. No. 1177 is young and naturally proportionately smaller, and both specimens have slightly redder spots, but the difference is so slight as to be negligible. “ Basuto name ‘ Chipa.’ “Rather uncommon. Inhabits the kopjes and bush-covered hillsides. Nocturnal only.”—C. H. B. G. 29, HERPESTES GALERA Erxl. ©. 1139, 1142, 1155. “ Basuto name ‘ Muliza.’ “Uncommon. Inhabiting vleis and thick reed-beds by the rivers. pe feeds on tadpoles, frogs, crabs, &e. Nocturnal only.” —C. H. B. G. 30. HERPESTES GRACILIS PUNCTULATUS Gray. 6. 1173, 1198, 1212, 1356, 1357. 2. 1125, 1130, 1138, 1346. “ Basuto name ‘ Kanu.’ ““'This species was observed in the forest on the Woodbush hills, though it is common everywhere, especially by the rivers. Its food consists principally of insects.”—-C. H. B 31. Cynicris sELouSsI de Wint. Go Wek SNS The only specimens of this remarkable species hitherto received * P.Z.S. 1905, i. p. 132. 1906. | MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. 589 are the skull obtained by Mr. Selous, on which the species was founded, and an example collected by Mr. P. C. Reid at Linyati, and figured in our ‘ Proceedings’*. “ Basuto name ‘ Manhauta.’ “ Rare everywhere. Nocturnal only.”—C. H. B. G. 32. CANIS MESOMELAS Hhrenb. ©. 1348. “‘ Basuto name ‘ Pugure.’ “Not uncommon, but seldom seen and very difficult to trap. A considerable source of annoyance to the farmers, who persecute them at all times and seasons.”—C. H. B. G. 33. Icronyx CAPENSIS Kaup. Go Wise ‘‘ Basuto name ‘ Kopani.’ “ Not uncommon, frequenting the kopjes and open country at night in search of food.”—C. H. B. G. 34, TATERA BRANTSII Smith. OF a laleslpo lal Ge ‘¢ Basuto name ‘ Leboka’.”—C. H. B. G. 35. TATERA MILIARIA SALSA Wrought. $. 1172, 1175, 1176, 1187, 1188, 1211. 92. 1164, This is the series on which Mr. Wroughton founded the subspecies 7. 36. OTOMYS IRRORATUS Bits. Gio Wisi, Wla, Juste te lass Ieee iaysy, These specimens approximate in colour to the Otomys laminatus described by us in an earlier paper on Mr. Rudd’s mammals, though their laminal formula shows them to be true irroratus. ““ Basuto names ‘ Beba’ and ‘ Ibuka.’ “In the Woodbush hills they were found on the steep grass-covered hillsides some considerable distance from water.”— C. H. B. G. 37. DENDROMUS MESOMELAS Bts. 3. 1338. This specimen has the black dorsal stripe less prominent than appears to be usual. 38. Mus CHRYSOPHILUS de Wint. G- 1181, 1191. Q. 1124, 1128, 1154, 1165, 1169, 1205, 1208, 1339. “ Basuto name ‘ Lohauto’ (a rat). ““Common everywhere, especially in the cultivated lands.’”— CEB Gr: CS 121, Vio Sip USIOIL, Tig joo A, iol te ~ Ann. Mag. N. H. (7) xvii. p. 485 (1906). 590 ON MAMMALS FROM NORTH-EAST TRANSVAAL. | May 29, 39. Mus coucHA Smith. ee LENG, CRLST 1204 UST Oe LI ALT a7 eels 1179, 1207, 1323, 1349, 1350. Specimens nos. 1204, 1111, and 1127 are slightly lighter in colour than the remainder of the series, which is otherwise very uniform. No. 1127 shows the multimammate character very clearly, which is the only character that in many cases serves to distinguish the members of this very difficult group from Mus colonus Bts. 40. Mus poLticuurus Smuts. ©. No number. 41, ARVICANTHIS PUMILIO DILECTUS de Wint. Gg WAL, WI TS WIN) ee ITS ET ea, IE sh TLaiGy, “‘ Basuto name ‘ Dari.’ “Common on the high veldt, but not observed in the low country. Diurnal only.”—C. H. B. G. 42. DasyMys Incomtus Sund. @. 1353. « Basuto names ‘ Beba’ and ‘ Ibuka.’ “« Apparently very rare, as the specimen sent was the only one seen.’ —O. H. 43. SaccosTOMUS CAMPESTRIS Pet. Sa UBT, «« Basuto name ‘ Lohauto.’ “‘ Rather rare and apparently confined to the high veldt. The pouches contained seeds of various plants.”—C. H. B. G. 44, GHORYCHUS sp. 3S. 1163, 1170, 1185, 1189, 1201, 1202, 1321, 1324. 9. 1161, 1322. Until this group has been monographed we are not prepared to commit ourselves to an exact specific determination. “ Basuto name ‘ Puga.’ “¢ ommon, especially in cultivated lands, where it forms runs. In the low country the scarcity of rain during my stay prevented their working, and so none were trapped.”—C. H. B. G. 45, PEpErEs CAFER Pall. 6. 1847. @. 1845, 1360. “ Basuto name ‘Sidula.’ Tchangaan name ‘ Jengwy.’ “Fairly common on the high veldt. The natives reported them to be in the low country, and though I found some of their holes at Klein Letaba, none were recent. They do great damage to the mealies.” —C. H. B. G. P45. 1906) Sie M P.Parker lth. R.Broom del. Parker & West imp. HOWESIA BROWNI. je aS: ISIS, Jen ui. M P.Parker lith. Parker & West imp. R.Broom del. HOWEHESIA BROWNI. 1906. ] ON A SOUTH AFRICAN DIAPTOSAURIAN REPTILE. 591 46. Lepus zuLuEnsis Thos. & Schw. . S. 1151, 1166, 1174, 1855. ©. 1152, 1180, 1206, 1213. ““ Basuto name ‘ Muda.’ “Very common in all stony places. It is not found on the flat open country round Pietersburg, where it is replaced by Lepus ochropus.”—C. H. B. G. 47. Lepus ocuropus Wagn. ©. 1215, Pietersburg. “Common, but confined to the high veldt round Pietersburg.’”— C. H. B. G. 48. PRONOLAGUS CRASSICAUDATUS Geoff. S$ juv. 1328. “Curiously uncommon, considering the great stretches of country suited to its habits. I only observed two of these Hares during my stay here.”—C, H. B. G. 49, PROCAVIA CAPENSIS Pall. 3. 1182. 2. 1194, 1344. “ Basuto name ‘ Imbile.’ “Not nearly so common as P. brucei, with which it inhabits the same kopjes and krantzes. Diurnal only.”—C. H. B. G. 50. PRocAVIA BRUCEI Gray. 3. 1133, 1342. 9. 1184, 1193, 1354, 1359. “ Basuto name ‘ Imbile.’ ‘This species is much commoner than P. capensis, but is much more difficult to secure, being more wary.”—C. H. B. G. 51. CEPHALOPHUS GRimMII L. Go L244 Oe G7, 1341. 1351. ‘“‘Basuto name ‘ Imputi.’ **Common at Woodbush, but scarcer on the flats round Pieters- burg. It feeds during the night and spends the day lying on the . kopjes”.—C. H. B. G. 2. On the South African Diaptosaurian Reptile Howesia. By R. Broom, M.D., D.Sc., C.M.Z.S., Victoria College, Stellenbosch. [Received May 15, 1906.] (Plates XL. & XLI.*) About a year ago I published in the Records of the Albany Museum? a preliminary notice of a very interesting small * For explanation of the Plates, see p. 600. + “ Preliminary Notice of some new Fossil Reptiles collected by Mr. Alfred Brown at Aliwal North, S. Africa.” Rec. Alb. Mus. Grahamstown, vol. i. pt. iv. p. 269 (1905). Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1906, No. XL. 40 592 DR. R. BROOM ON A SOUTH AFRICAN [May 29, fossil reptile, remains of which had been discovered by Mr. Alfred Brown near Aliwal North. As the animal somewhat resembles Sphenodon in size and general appearance and is evidently a Rhynchocephaloid reptile, I thought it befitting to name the genus Howesia, in honour of the late Prof. G. B. Howes, who has done such brilliant work on the osteology of Sphenodon, and whose early death has left such a serious gap in the ranks of morphologists. In Mr. Brown’s collection there are three specimens which T regard as belonging to Howesia. Specimen A, which I take as the type, is a very badly crushed and imperfect skull. The middle parts of both mandibles are preserved, including portions of both dentaries, the right jugal, much of both maxillaries, a large part of both pterygoids, parts of the hyoid, and a few other crushed and fragmentary bones. Specimen B, which there is little doubt belongs to the same genus and species, consists of a number of bones of the skull, crushed and much displaced, parts of most of the cervical vertebrae, the left shoulder-girdle and the left humerus. Among the cranial bones the following can be identified with some degree of certainty—tfrontals, parietals, postfrontal, postorbital, squamosal, jugal, maxillary, and pterygoid. Specimen C consists of the pelvis, most of the bones of the hind limbs including the tarsus, and a considerable number of caudal vertebrae of a Rhynchocephaloid reptile which may provisionally be regarded as belonging to the same genus and species as specimens A and B. In the absence of head there is of course an element of doubt, but as all the specimens are from the same horizon, and as the pelvis in specimen C is such as we should expect to find in Howesia from the sizeand characters of the skull and shoulder-girdle, I shall assume that it belongs to the same species as the others. Skull. Though both specimens of the skull are in a very unsatisfactory condition, it is nevertheless possible to make out most of the principal points in the cranial anatomy. In the main the skull resembles fairly closely that of Sphenodon, though there is a marked difference in the dentition. At the time the preliminary note was written I was unable to determine with certainty whether the rows of Hyperodapedon-like teeth were borne by the maxilla or by the palatine or by both. As the result of the further develop- ment of specimen A, it would appear that the teeth are on the maxilla, and on the maxilla only. The maxilla is shaped as in the better known Diaptosaurian reptiles Procolophon and Paleohatteria. The facial portion is flat and triangular, and probably about 25 mm. in length and 12 mm. in depth. The inferior or tooth-bearing portion is thick and rounded. In specimen A one of the maxillee measures 5 mm. in thickness; in specimen B a maxillary fragment is 5°> mm. in thickness. In front the tooth-bearing portion is considerably thinner—at least as thin as 8mm. In the middle portion of the maxilla there are three rows of obtusely pointed teeth, but 1906. ] DIAPTOSAURIAN REPTILE. 593 perhaps in front there may be only one or two rows. Behind, there are four rows of similar-sized obtusely pointed teeth, and on the inner side of the bone three additional rows of more minute teeth, which apparently do not meet the dentary and are unworn. The teeth seem to have a thin layer of enamel and to be implanted in the bone rather than anchylosed to it. When the jaw is worn, the teeth and bone together form a grinding-surface. The exact relations of the teeth to the jaw could be certainly determined only by sectioning one of the fragments, and this I do not feel at liberty to do. A large part of the jugal is preserved in specimen B, and in specimen A the cast of almost the whole bone. Tt forms practically the whole of the lower border of the orbit. In its relations to the maxilla, to the postorbital, and to the quadrato- jugal it is almost identical with that in Paleohatteria. There is clear evidence of a lower temporal fossa bounded below by the posterior process of the jugal. Pl. XL. fig. 3 represents the cast of the jugal in specimen A and fig. 4 part of the jugal in specimen B. The postorbital bone is preserved in perfect condition in specimen B. It is triangular, and strikingly like the corre- sponding bone in Sphenodon. It divides the upper from the lower temporal fossa and, in part, both from the orbit. It is represented in fig. 4. The postfrontal is preserved in specimen B. It is a small triangular bone not unlike that of Sphenodon. It articulates by a long suture with the frontal and by a short one with the parietal. It is shown in fig. 5. The frontals are broad and rather flat. They form only a short part of the supraorbital margins between the prefrontals and the postfrontals. The whole of the supraorbital ridge is slightly elevated, owing to there being a depression along the frontal bone and on to the postfrontal. On the whole of the upper surface of these bones, but chiefly in the depression, are a number of shallow pits, which suggest the possibility of their having lodged glands in connection with the skin. The narrowest part of the interorbital region measures 10°5 mm., and the greatest measurement across the frontals is 14 mm. The parietals are well preserved in specimen B. They are anchylosed, and like those of Sphenodon form, in their posterior two-thirds, a low median ridge. In the anterior third this median ridge divides intot wo feeble ridges, which pass forwards and outwards and end at the suture between the parietal and the frontal. To the naked eye there appears to be no parietal foramen, but when the bone is examined microscopically there is seen to be a small median foramen about as large asa pin-point. I think there can be little doubt that this is a rudimentary parietal foramen. I+ measures about -5 mm. in greatest length. Posteriorly the parietals pass outwards to meet the squamosals as in Sphenodoan. Though portions of the squamosal and probably quadrato-jugal, exoccipitals, and a few other bones are present, they are either too 40* 594 DR. R. BROOM ON A SOUTH AFRICAN [May 29, imperfect or insufficiently displayed, or the determination too uncertain to warrant description. A portion of the nasal preserved shows that the bone was of considerable size, as in Palewohatieria. In specimen A anumber of bones of the palate are preserved. Though these are imperfect, yet as the pterygoids are fairly com plete it is possible to make an approximate restoration of the alate. . The pterygoids are of the triradiate type found in most early reptiles, such as Dimetrodon, Proterosuchus, Procolophon, &e., and, as in these genera, are dentigerous. The anterior process is long and narrow, and along apparently its whole length is a single row of small teeth, which must he almost parallel with the corresponding row on the pterygoid of the opposite side. The posterior half of the anterior process is about twice as broad as the anterior, and on it is a second dental ridge with at least two rows of fairly well-developed teeth passing forwards and slightly outwards from near the back end of the inner dental ridge. The anterior ridge articulates by much of its outer side with the palatine. From the posterior part of the toothed portion of the hone the median process passes outwards and slightly forwards. It appears to be devoid of teeth. From about the same point the posterior process is sent backwards and outwards, doubtless to meet the quadrate. This process is broad, fan-shaped, and concave, and recalls rather forcibly the posterior process of the pterygoid in Procolophon and Dimetroden. The palatine is very imperfect, but it appears to be moderately flat and devoid of teeth. A considerable portion of each mandible is preserved, but not in a very satisfactory condition. The dentary carries four rows of small obtusely pointed teeth almost exactly similar to those of the maxilla. Unfortunately, only the back part of one dentary is preserved, and the cast of the back part of the other. The preserved portion is 4 mm. wide. The post-dentary portion of the jaw has a swollen appearance, recalling that of Procolophon, but it is much larger in Howesia. The bone which forms the greater part of the outer side I believe to be the surangular. In situation it quite agrees with the supposed surangular in Proco- lophon, but in the latter genus it is much smaller. In Protero- suchus the surangular is also of very large size. There appears to be a small but distinct coronoid bone. The angular seems to form nearly the whole of the lower border of the posterior two-thirds of the jaw. In the middle of the jaw there is a very large cavity as in Procolophon. Lying on the pterygoids were two long, rounded, slightly curved rods of bone at least 22 mm. in length. ‘These are probably hyoid bones. Vertebre. Though portions of many cervical and caudal vertebree are pre- served as well as parts of a few others, they are for the most part not 1906. | DIAPTOSAURIAN REPTILE. 595 sufficiently well displayed or preserved to permit of a satisfactory examination. The cervical vertebre are about seven in number, and from the position of the shoulder-girdle we may infer that Howesia had a neck of about the same length as the skull. The axis has a large spine almost of mammalian type. Of the other cervical vertebra, only the zygapophyses are displayed. There are no dorsal or lumbar vertebre preserved. There appear to have been two sacral vertebre, as in Hrythrosuchus. ‘Twelve caudal vertebre are preserved, but not well displayed. The first of these is probably the 3rd caudal. It has well-developed transverse processes and spine. Across the transverse processes it measures 26 mm., and the total height of the vertebra as preserved is 24mm. There is probably not much of the spine missing. The body is much constricted, as in Phytosaurs, Pelyco- saurs, and most primitive reptiles, and appears to be amphiplatyan or amphicelian. It is certainly not distinctly notochordal. A well-developed intercentrum lies between this vertebra and the next. The second preserved vertebra (probably 4th) has a small chevron, and the succeeding vertebre have very long double- headed chevrons. In the case of the supposed 5th caudal, the chevron as preserved is 24 mm. long, and in the 6th it is probably even longer. Except in being slightiy smaller, the posterior caudals are very similar to the anterior; they have the same slender transverse processes and similar long chevrons. Shoulder-girdle. Though the shoulder-girdle is rather badly preserved, sufficient remains to show all the principal features. The scapula is com- paratively short and moderately flat. Its greatest length is 29 mm. ‘The upper end is 16 mm. wide, and has evidently supported a large cartilaginous suprascapula. The posterior border curves gently and uniformly to the glenoid cavity. The anterior border is badly preserved, there being only indications of the cast. In fig. 10 (Pl. XL.) a view is given of the shoulder- girdle as preserved, and in fig. 11 a restoration of the whole girdle. The lower end of the scapula is probably 14 mm. wide, and there is no evidence of any notch. The coracoid is very imperfect, but the whole of the anterior half and the glenoid portion are preserved. It has evidently been a large flat rounded bone. There is no coracoid foramen seen in the specimen so far as preserved. Perhaps the foramen was in the cartilage at the anterior and upper corner of the bone. There is no precoracoid. The interclavicle is a slender T-shaped bone, but only a part of the upper end is preserved. The clavicles are long, fairly straight bones which meet each other above the interclavicle. The length of the one which is fully preserved is 23 mm. Humerus. The humerus is in bad preservation, the upper half being represented only by a much weathered impression. The length 596 DR. R. BROOM ON A SOUTH AFRICAN [May 29, of the bone is about 34 mm. Both the upper and lower ends are broad, and they make with each other an angle of about 60°. The delto-pectoral ridge is fairly well developed, but the imperfect impression does not show very clearly its relations to the shaft. There is apparently no epicondylar foramen. The lower end of the bone measures about 10 mm. It has evidently been capped by a large pad of cartilage. Pelvis. The remains in specimen C are much better preserved than in either A or B. All the pelvic bones are preserved and in almost true apposition. The under and outer sides of both pubes and ischia have been displayed, and the inner side of the right ilium. The pelvis is a slightly modified variety of the well-known plate-like type found in all primitive Diaptosaurian reptiles. The ilium is broad and flat, and its axis is directed upwards and backwards from the acetabulum. It is presumed that the aceta- bulum is of large size from the shape of the lower part of the ilium, and probably it had a thick coating of cartilage. The acetabular portion of the ilium measures 19 mm. across. Above the acetabulum the bone becomes constricted and measures only 12 mm. across. From this point the upper part forms a fan-like expansion, which measures 25°5 mm. from front to back. The greatest length of the ilium is 34 mm., and the least, measuring from the surface for articulation with the ischium to the anterior part of the crest, 22mm. On the inner side of the ilium is a hollow depression just above the constricted portion, with a second slight depression behind it and separated from it by a low ridge. These depressions are for articulation with the two sacral ribs. The ischium is a flat semicircular bone not unlike the flat bone in Procolophon or Stereosternum. Though the acetabular portion is not displayed in Howesia, it is probably of much larger size than in these other genera. It seems probable that the ischium sloped downwards and inwards at an angle of about 45°. The whole margin of the bone has manifestly been bordered by cartilage except the margin which is directed upwards. The lower margin for about 17 mm. is fairly straight, and forms, with the bone of the opposite side, a symphysis with probably compara- tively little cartilage between. Anteriorly there is another fairly straight margin of 10 mm., which served as an articulation with the pubis, probably again with but little cartilage between the bones. Between the two ischia and the two pubes there is left a lozenge-shaped gap, like the anterior fontanelle in the head of a babe. This may have formed an obturator foramen, but I am of opinion that it was completely covered by cartilage. The pubis, though of the plate-like type, dces not resemble at all closely the flat pubes of Procolophon, Stereosternum, or Paleo- hatteria. This is owing to the fact of the anterior third of the bone being bent rather abruptly down so as to form an angle of about 75° with the posterior part. The deflected portion has its outer and inferior end terminated by a thick margin, which seems 1906. ] DIAPLOSAURIAN REPTILE. 597 to have been covered by cartilage. Whether this cartilage has only been a narrow border round the front of the bone, or a well- developed prepubie cartilage, the evidence does not conclusively show. About the middle of the outer side of the pubis is a well- marked bony process. There is a large pubic foramen in the bone near its posterior and upper corner. ‘The greatest length of the pubis is 25 mm., and the greatest breadth 19 mm. In fig. 15 (Pl. XLI.) is shown a side view of the pelvis slightly restored as regards the acetabulum. All the bones are shown in what is believed to be true side view. In fig. 16 there is given for comparison a view of the pelvis of the large South- African Phytosaur Hrythrosuchus. Here the pubis and ischium are also of the plate-like type, but the modification is carried further than in Howesia. The pubis is bent down still further and the lower part stouter. The symphysial portions of both pubis and ischium are directed more inwards. Fig. 18 shows the left pubis as viewed from below and slightly from behind and the outer side. Femur. Portions of both femora are preserved, and both the upper and lower ends of the left are in good condition. The bone is slightly curved downwards towards its lower end, as is the case in the femur of the Crocodile. Both ends have been largely cartilaginous. Pl. XLI. fig. 20 represents the appearance of the proximal end. There is a large trochanter which has probably been devoid of cartilage, anda large, flat, semicircular surface which has supported the cartilaginous head. The lower end of the bone is broad and powerful, and has doubtless had large cartilaginous condyles. Tibia and Fibula. The left tibia is practically complete, but the lower third is slightly displaced, owing to a fracture which occurred during the animal’s life and united with the fragments in a slightly false position. The bone is much expanded at the proximal end, which has a rounded upper surface and had probably little cartilage on it. Its greatest width is 16 mm. The bone is much constricted in the middle, measuring only 5 mm. across. The lower end is not much expanded, and probably had a well-developed pad of cartilage. The total length of the bone is 50 mm. The fibula is slender in the middle and considerably expanded at both ends. It has a slight double curve. Itis probably a little shorter than the tibia. In fig. 21 a view is given of the front of the tibia restored so far as the correction of the slight displacement of the lower fragment. Vig. 22 shows the tibia and fibula as preserved in the specimen. JOS A considerable portion of the right foot is preserved, and though some of the bones are displaced it is possible to make a fairly satisfactory restoration of both the tarsus and metatarsus. 598 DR. R. BROOM ON A SOUTH AFRICAN [May 29, Figs. 23 and 24 show two views of the tarsus as preserved. There are seen to be three large bones in the proximal part of the tarsus, and the tibia seems to be in connection with the inner and the fibula with the middle one. These three bones we may fairly confidently regard as tibiale, intermedium, and fibulare. On the outer side of the foot is a large curved bone which is manifestly the 5th metatarsal. This is supported by a large tarsale which we may regard as the 4th. The other tarsal elements are small. If these determinations are correct, then it would appear that the foot has been folded on the leg and the sides crushed together. Making allowance for the crushing the foot may be restored as in fig. 25. The tibiale is an irregularly oval-shaped boneand is the smallest of the elements of the proximal row. The intermedium is a large rectangular bone. On its under or posterior surface there is a large groove. The fibulare forms a well-marked heel process. There is no centrale displayed, but it is probable that one existed though it may have been cartilaginous. Of the distal tarsal bones the Ist, 2nd, and 3rd are of small size, each supporting a single © metatarsal. The 4th tarsale is about as large as the tibiale and supports both the 4th and 5th metatarsals. The Ist metatarsal is rather short and stout. The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th are all imperfect at their distal ends, but the 2nd is considerably longer than the 1st, and the 3rd and 4th much longer than the 2nd. It is not certain whether the 3rd or 4th is the longer, but the little evidence available points to the 4th being the longest of the metatarsals. Affinities of Howesia. The only animals with which it seems necessary to compare Howesia are Sphenodon, the Gnathodonts Hyperodapedon, Steno- metopon, and Lhynchosaurus, the Phytosaurs, and the Protero- saurians such as Paleohatteria. The jugal, postorbital, and post frontal bones bear considerable resemblance to the corresponding bones in Sphenodon, but almost quite as much to those of the much more primitive Diaptosaurians, the Pelycosaurs, and of Paleo- hatteria. There isalso considerable resemblance to the facial bones of Rhynchosaurus. In the other Gnathodonts the resemblances are obscured by the specialisations. The frontals and parietals are more like those of Rhynchosaurus and even of Stenometopon than of Sphenodon, and the resemblance is increased by the fact of the parietal foramen being practically absent in Howesia. The maxillary and dentary dentition is unlike that of any other reptile hitherto known except Hyperodapedon; and though this latter genus is extremely specialised, the mode of implantation of the teeth in the bone is so essentially similar to that in Howesia, as to suggest a relationship between the genera. The palate is more primitive than in either Sphenodon or Hyperodapedon, and resembles more that of the Pelycosaurs. It also bears some resemblance to the palate of the Rhynchocephaloid reptile, Proterosuchus. The shoulder-girdle differs from the earlier types in having no precoracoid. In many respects the girdle resembles that of 1906. ] DIAPTOSAURIAN REPTILE. 599 Sphenodon, but the imperforate condition of the coracoid is a feature found in a few Diaptosaurians. The pelvis is not much modified from the type found in most Diaptosaurians. The plate-like pubis and ischium are found in Rhynchosaurus. In the Phytosaur Hrythrosuchus the pelvis is very similar in structure; in Sphenodon the pelvic structure is very different. It is impossible to compare the tarsus with that of most allied forms, as little is known of the tarsus in the Gnathodonts or Phytosaurs. There is, however, an undoubted resemblance between the tarsus of Howesia and that of Sphenodon, and this is more marked when that of the embryo is considered. The sunilarity is so close, that itis difficult to doubt that it indicates a relationship. In Procolophon we also see some affinity. It is interesting to note the similarity of the mode of articulation of the 5th metatarsal, Taking the various points into consideration, I conclude that Howesia is a very slightly specialised Gnathodont. It seems to show, moreover, that the Gnathodonts are not true Rhynchocephalians, but are probably more nearly related to the Phytosaurs. I incline to agree with Osborn in placing them in a distinct order, no doubt showing some points of resemblance to the Rhynchocephalians, but not so nearly related to them as is generally held. In the following table an attempt is made to indicate the phylogenetic relationships of the Diaptosaurian orders :— (CoryLosaAuRIAN ANCESTOR) (R, P, Pl, Permian). yi ai Oech ee PROGANOSAURIA PROcoLOPHONTA (Mesosauria) (R, P, Pl, Permian). (?, P, Pl, Permian). PELYCOSAURIA Prororosaurra (, P, Pl, Permian). (F, A, Pl, Permian). ste Ag ware ae 1 aoa Ruyncwocrrmania GNATHODONTIA PHYTOSAURIA (Ff, A, T, ? Triassic). (F, A, Pl, Triassic). (F, A, Pl, Triassic). PROTEROSUCHIA (F, ?, ?, Triassic). In the above table the first letter of the formula, R or F, indi- 600 ON A SOUTH AFRICAN DIAPTOSAURIAN REPTILE. [May 29, cates that the skull has the temporal region roofed or fenestrated ; the second letter, P or A, indicates that a precoracoid is present or absent ; and the third, Pl or T, that the pelvis is plate-like or triradiating. It will be observed that all the orders occurring in the Permian have the pelvis plate-like, all have notochordal vertebre, and most have retained the precoracoid, while all those that first appear in the Trias show no trace of a precoracoid. I have included among the Diaptosaurians a new suborder, or possibly order, Proterosuchia, of which Proterosuchuws may be taken as the type. Boulenger is inclined to place it near to Ornithosuchus, but the palate is very different in the two genera, and the presence of rows of teeth on the pterygoids of the African genus seems of suflicient importance to remove it from the Phytosauria. It seems to me worthy of being placed in at least a distinct suborder. The Phytosauria might, I think, be included among the Diaptosaurians. Further research in the Permian and Triassic rocks is pretty certain to reveal a large number of new groups—groups which are ancestral to the Plesiosaurs, the Chelonians, the Lizards, and the Ichthyosaurs at least. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Ang., Angulare; c., centrale; Cl., clavicle ; Co., coracoid; D., dentary; F., fibula; Ff. fibulare; F'r.,frontal; Hy., hyoid; ¢.,imtermedium ; T.cl.,interclavicle; I7.,ilium; Is., ischium; Jw., jugal; £., lachrymal; Me., maxilla; Na., nasal; Orbd., orbit; Pa., parietal; Pal., palatine; Pmx., premaxilla; Po.f., postfrontal ; Po.o., postorbital ; Pt., pterygoid; P.Vo., prevomer; Pw., pubis; S.Ang., surangular; Se., scapula; Sq., squamosal; S.Sec., suprascapular; Z., tibia; ¢., tibiale; 7.P., transpalatime; 1, 2, 3, 4, tarsalia; I, II, 111, 1V, V, metatarsalia. PratEe XL. Fig. 1. Restoration of skull of Howesia browni. Nat. size. 2. Restoration of palate of Howesia browni. Nat. size. 3. eae A showing portion of mandible and cast of jugal and other bones. at. size. 4. Jugal and postorbital bones of _Howesia browni (specimen B). Nat. size. 5. Portion of upper surface of skull of: Howesia browni (specimen B). Nat. size. 6. Remains of palate as shown in specimen A. Nat. size. 7. Portion of left dentary showing teeth (specimen A). X 3. 8. Middle portion of left maxilla showing teeth (specimen A). X 3. 9. Posterior part of left maxilla showing teeth (specimen 8). X 3. 10. Shoulder-girdle as preserved (specimen B). Nat. size. 11. Restoration of shoulder-girdle of Howesia browni. Nat. size. 12. Shoulder-girdle of young Sphenodon, after Howes & Swinnerton. 13. Humerus of Howesia browni. Nat. size. Prate XLI. Fig. 14. Anterior caudal vertebra of Howesia browni. Nat. size. 15. Side view of pelvis of Howesia browni. Nat. size. 16. Side view of pelvis of Hrythrosuchus africanus. X 7. 17. Inner view of right ilium of Howesia browni. Nat. size. 18. Under view of left pubis of os i . 19. Front view of left femur of A . a 20. Proximal end of left femur of _,, nn ts 21. Front view of left tibia of - bb) bb) 22. Side view of left tibia and fibula of Howesia browni. Nat. size. 23. View of the foot as preserved. Nat. size. 24. A second view of the foot as preserved. Nat. size. 25. Restoration of the tarsus and metatarsus ot Howesia. Nat. size. 26. Foot of Sphenodon punctatus. Stage R. Magnitied. 27. . A 5 Stage Q. Magnified, after Howes & Swinnerton. 28. Foot of Procolophon trigoniceps. Nat. size. 1906.] ON THE VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE HELODERM. 601 3. On the Vascular System of Heloderma, with Notes on that of the Monitors and Crocodiles. By Frank H. Brepparp, M.A., F.R.S., &e., Prosector to the Society. [Received May 11, 1906. ] (Text-figures 99-106.) Although much work has been done upon the blood-system of the Lacertilia, especially by Rathke and Hochstetter*, there remain a number of important genera of which we have at present either no knowledge whatever, or the very slightest only. Among these is the genus Heloderma, with the general anatomy of which the recent investigations of Boulenger, Stewart, and particularly Shufeldt + have made us well acquainted. In the present com- munication I bring before the Society some facts concerning the blood-vessels of this Lizard in continuation of former contributions to the anatomy of this Order of Reptiles t. Having had the opportunity, during the last year or two, of dis- secting several examples, comprising several species, of Varanus, I incorporate these notes into the present communication for the reason that Heloderma is in some respects not very remote from Varanus§, and indeed shows certain apparent resemblances to that genus in the arrangement of the blood-vessels, as will be pointed out in the course of the following pages. Since both in Heloderma and Varanus there is a departure in many directions from the arrangement of the blood-vessels found in other Lacertilia (e. g. Jgwana, Skinks, Geckos, Ophisaurus, Amphisbena, Anguis), and on the whole in the direction of greater complication, it seemed to me important to compare the ascer- tained facts with those relating to the Crocodilia, since the vascular system of the Crocodilia is perhaps the most advanced among the Reptilia. In this department I am able to add some details to the classical treatise of Rathke, in addition to the facts accumulated by Jacquart and Hochstetter, whose contributions will be referred to on a later page. Of the Crocodilia I have been able to dissect several species belonging to more than one genus. (1) On some Veins and Arteries in Heloderma suspectum. In a specimen of Heloderma suspectwm which died in the Society’s Gardens in January of the present year, the veins were turgid with blood, and therefore in an excellent state for anatomical observation. JI had the arterial system injected, and am therefore able to give, as I trust, some reliable notices of various * Morph. Jahrb. xix. 1893, were earlier papers are referred to. + Boulenger, P. Z.S. 1891, p. 109; Stewart, ibid. 1891, p. 119; Shuteldt, ibid. 1890, p. 148. ft In P. ZS. 1904 and 1905. § This is not a prevalent view though adopted by Baur. See Boulenger (P. Z. 8. 1891, p. 116) for discussion of the subject. 602 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, ad arteries and veins in this genus, of which we have at present no knowledge save a few notes by Dr. Shufeldt *. Umbilical Vein.—It is extremely interesting to find in Helo- derma very considerable vestiges of the umbilical vein of the Text-fig. 99. Vet. Ep. --Uinb, Y ) Ventral surface of liver and related veins in Heloderma suspectum. Ep. Epigastric vein; Z. Liver; Umb. Umbilical vein; V.c.i. Postcaval fetus. This vein ends off somewhat obscurely posteriorly, gradu- ally fading away without being connected, so far as I could * “Contributions to the Study of Heloderma suspectum,” P. Z. S. 1890, p. 148. This paper concludes with a full bibliography. 1906. ] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE HELODERM. 603 ascertain, with any veins in the posterior region of the abdomen. Tt runs, of course, upon the ventral side of the abdominal cavity lying to the left of the anterior abdominal vein. This position at first led me to think that the vein in question was a left anterior abdominal vein, such as is met with im addition to a right in the Crocodilia invariably and in the Chelonia generally. I think, however, that the facts which I have to state about this vein disprove the idea that it is a second anterior abdominal vein and prove it to be a persistent umbilical. This vein is by no means a ligamentous rudiment such as Hochstetter has described and figured * the umbilical to be in Angwis fragilis. It contains plenty of blood; but it looks rather like an artery owing to its pink colour—due, I imagine, to thickish walls. It is, however, not an artery; for anteriorly it could be followed between the lobes of the liver ventrally, and perhaps about halfway along the length of the liver was traced into communication with the vena cava posterior, which latter, on separating the lobes of the liver, can be seen lying between them. It could be distinctly observed at the same time that various branches of the epigastric vein (see p. 609) which enter the liver near the entry of the umbilical did not communicate with the vena caya but entered the liver- substance. There can be no confusion therefore of this presumed persistent umbilical vein with a branch of the epigastic system of veins. It is further to be noted that the umbilical vein is in its relations to adjoining viscera more like that of birds than of the Boide, where alone among existing Sauropsida—so far as we know at present—this vein persists in the adult. That is to say, the vein is lost to sight until the two lobes are separated at about the middle of the liver as in the Class Aves, instead of extending beyond the liver as in the Python f for example, and joining the vena cava in front of that organ. On another paget I call attention to the possible persistence of the umbilical vein in the Monitor lizards, which vein, however, shows certain differences from that which I describe in Heloderma as an umbilical. There is no doubt, however, that the vein in Heloderma corresponds to what is clearly the persistent umbilical in the Anaconda, &c. in bearing no part in the circulation, 2. e. in not being furnished with branches. Anterior Abdominal Vein.—This vein is, as is universal among the Lacertilia §, a single median vein, and was very full of blood in the specimen which I dissected. The origin of the vein in the pelvic region seems to me to be more like that of Varanws than of such other Lizards as have been examined. Of Varanws arenarius (= V. griseus) Hochstetiter || has written :—“ Kin zweiter wichtiger Differenzpunkt betrifft die Lage der Wurzel der Abdominalvene, * Morph. Jahrb. xix. + Beddard, “Contributions to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,” P. Z. S. 1906, vol. i. 28. { Below, p. 611. § Excepting possibly Varanus (see below, p. 611). || Morph. Jahrb. xix. p. 467. p. 604 ~ MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, die sich bei Varanus als unmittelbare Forsetzung der V. ischiadica priisentirt.” The accompanying figure given by Hochstetter* shows this point clearly, the vein in question merely giving off a branch in passing to the afferent renal behind the kidney. In Lacerta, &e., on the other hand, it is rather that the ischiadic vein joins the afferent renal and gives off the anterior abdominal as a branch before doing so, and that this junction takes place at or near the middle of the kidney. Jgwanat and some other lizards agree with Lacerta in these points; but hitherto Varanws has stood alone among the Lacertilia, though showing resem- blances, in the arrangement of the vein under discussion, to the Crocodiles. Text-fig. 100. Ant.Abd. Origin of anterior abdominal vein in Heloderma suspectum. Ant.Abd. Two roots of anterior abdominal vein; K. Kidneys; R.a. Renal afferent veins; O. Fat-body artery (this and others, 7.e. femoral and sciatic arteries, indicated in black). In Heloderma, however, there is a distinct likeness to the Varanide which cannot be overlooked. In the accompanying illustration the roots of the anterior abdominal are shown upon both sides of the body (text-fig. 100), and it will be observed that * Loc. cit. Taf. xvi. fig. 17. .} Beddard, P. Z. S. 1904, vol. i. p. 442. 1906. | VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE HELODERM. 605 they are somewhat asymmetrical ; a fact which does not disguise the resemblance which they bear in details to the corresponding veins of Varanus. On the right side, the two veins which issue from the leg are connected below the pelvic region by an anasto- mosis whose calibre is as great or nearly so as that of the two veins which it joins. The junction lies to the dorsal side of the femoral artery which crosses it below. The more anterior of the two veins, which I presume to be the sciatic, then bends upon itself, but passes directly into the anterior abdominal vein, of which it forms the right root. The other vein, the femoral, receives the usual lateral caudal vein and joins the right branch of the caudal, forming with it the renal afferent vein of the right kidney. This junction takes place behind the kidney. The ischiadic artery lies dorsal of this vein, and is crossed ventrally by the conjomed femoral and lateral caudal. It appears from Hoch- stetter’s figure that the relative positions of these blood-vessels is exactly the reverse in Varanus, that the artery is ventral of the vein. On the left side of the body, the likeness to Varanus is exhibited in a more striking way, since the junction of the veins in the leg is more normal. The two veins of the leg unite with each other, and shortly thereafter divide into the left root of the anterior abdominal vein and a branch joining the left renal afferent vein behind its point of contact with the corresponding kidney. Just before this division the common trunk from the leg receives the lateral caudal. The arrangement of these various veins is therefore exactly as in Varanus, and thus differs equally from that prevalent ameng the Lacertilia. The anterior abdominal is chiefly concerned with the blood returned from the fat-body, from which it receives a considerable number of affluents. I noticed only one branch from the fat-body to join the right root of the anterior abdominal, the vest poured their contents into the common trunk. The hepatic portal system of this Lizard is more complex than that of many otber Lizards. In addition to the usual veins, derived from the parietes and viscera, common to the Lacertilia as a whole, there are, as will be seen from the following account, certain veins which are not represented, or are rarely represented, in other genera of the Lacertilia. System of Vertebral Veins and branches to Liver.—It is the rule among the Lacertilia for the azygos and the vertebral veins and their branches to the liver to be mainly developed upon the right side of the body, and for the separate gastro-hepatic affluents of the portal system to be independent not only of the main portal vein, but also of the dorsal parieto-hepatic veins running from the body-wall to the liver-substance. In these various particulars the venous system of Heloderma is rather different from that of other Lizards. The Azygos Vein in Heloderma is short and to be found only 606 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, upon the right side of the body, its usual position not so much in the Lacertilia as in the Ophidia generally. It is of very limited extent in the present lizard, and after reaching the neighbourhood of the vertebral column plunges at once into the thickness of the parietes. It appears on the surface for a brief interval between the two following intercostal arteries. Five intercostal arteries then intervene before the next appearance superficially of the vertebral vein, which is here developed upon both sides of the vertebral column. ‘The longitudinally running vein of the left side is the more important of the two and draws blood from six intercostal spaces; the right-hand vein is shorter but developed in the same region of the vertebral column as the left. The two vessels join and enter the liver near to its anterior end together by a common trunk, This trunk receives before it reaches the liver a branch from the stomach, the gastro-hepatic, which is in its turn composed of two vessels, one of which runs along the stomach forwards and the other passes along the stomach towards its posterior end. This posterior gastro-hepatic vein has other rather unusual relations with the portal system. It gives off a small branch which goes at once to the liver. Posteriorly it does not communicate with the general portal system of the alimentary tract as in other Lizards, but ends by joining the anterior abdominal vein behind the point where the latter receives the intestinal portal. The somewhat complicated relations of these several veins will perhaps be rendered clearer by an inspection of the accompanying diagram of their course (text-fig. 101). In possessing that anterior system of parieto-hepatic veins which are connected with the gastro-hepatic veins, Heloderma does not merely differ from the more typical Lacertilia, but agrees with the Boine snakes, the snake-like Lizard Ophisaurus*, with Hat- teria, and, as will be seen presently 7, with the Varanide, though to a less extent with these also aberrant Lizards. The entire separation of the gastric from the intestinal portal system is also noteworthy ; and it will be obvious that, in spite of the points of resemblance with other Squamata insisted upon, the details of this part of the venous system are peculiar to Heloderma and distinguish it from other Lacertilia. Heloderma possesses, as do all other Lacertilia which have been examined, a series of veins entering the right lobe of the liver close to its posterior extremity, the posterior dorsal parieto-hepatic veins. These vessels originate by several roots, which unite to form one trunk as in Varanus. There are four separate roots, which arise from the parietes on the right side of the body and lie between three intercostal arteries. The single trunk formed by their union enters the right lobe of the liver close to the postcaval vein, and by the aid of a fold of membrane which, as in so many * Beddard, P. Z. S. 1905, vol. ii. p. 474, + Infra, p. 616. 1906. ] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE HELODERM. 607 Lacertilia including Varanus, attaches the extremity of the liver to the lateral parietes. ‘Two of the four roots lie between two intercostal arteries, each close to an artery. These do not join Text-fig. 101. Certain hepatic veins of Heloderma suspectum. Ant.Abd. Anterior abdominal ven; g. Gastro-hepatic vein ; h. Hepatic vein joining postcaval (V.c.i.) ; L. Liver (viewed laterally); ». Parieto-hepatic veins from right and left of mid-dorsal line; S¢. Stomach. for some distance from their point of origin from the parietes. The second pair of roots lie between the second of the two inter- Proc. Zoo, Soc.—1906, No. XLI. Al 608 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, costal arteries just referred to and the next ; they join immediately to form one stem. The conjoint stem receives branches from the fat-body. The following intercostal is embraced by the two reots of a vein belonging to the same series, which, however, belongs to the suprarenal portal system. Oviducal Vein.—The oviduct is borne by a membrane which is attached to the lateral parietes and anteriorly passes over the lung, becoming attached to its proximal section in its passage, and is inserted on to the liver. Anteriorly, therefore, this mem- brane is transversely disposed to the longitudinal axis of the body Text-fig. 102. Oviducal membrane in Heloderma suspectum showing attachment to liver. ZL, Liver (pushed over to left and viewed laterally); Lw. Right lung; Ov. Oviducal membrane bearing vein. and arches over the distal part of the lung. This membrane bears a vein which follows its edge. Anteriorly, the oviducal vein gives off a branch just at the funnel of the oviduct, and another where the oviducal membrane arches over the lung, which runs towards the line along which the oviducal membrane is attached to the lung. It ends by entering the liver-substance, 1906. ] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE HELODERM. 699 and thus forms a part of the hepatic portal system. On the right side of the liver, a little process of liver-substance juts out to meet the vein. This does not occur in the case of the left-hand vein. The arrangement of oviducal membrane and the vein which it bears appears to me to be exactly the same as a corre- sponding series of structures which I described some time ago in the Chameeleon * LE pigastric Veins. —These veins in Heloderma (text-fig. 99, p. 602) form a median unpaired system unlike the corresponding veins of Varanus. The principal vein of the system enters the liver very anteriorly quite close to the end of that organ. The epigastric generally, it is to be observed, is connected with the liver well in front of the entrance of the umbilical vein. The main stem of the epigastric was broken off, and a corresponding break on the largest branch of the abdominal vein may perhaps indicate the junction of the two. The main stem, whose actual course [am thus unable to map, gives off a backwardly running branch which extends beyond the liver. This latter stem is also connected directly with the liver itself by two branches which it gives off just before ending in the main stem of the epigastric. These form an anastomosis with each other, and there are altogether formed three exits into the liver, in addition, of course, to the main epigastric stem. Arterial System.—Dr. Shufeldt, in his memoir already referred tot, has made a few comments upon the arteries arising from the aorta behind the heart. He has not, however, dealt in any way with the arteries at their point of origin from the heart. The general arrangement of the exits of the arteries does not seem to me to differ from what is found in the Lacertilia generally. The heart also is bound to the pericardium by the tag which is so general in the group. On the right side, the systemic trunk and the carotid run side by side for a long distance after their emergence from the common trunk by which they originate from the ventricle. The systemic trunk then doubles upon itself to pass back towards its point of junction with the aorta of the opposite side of the body, the carotid continuing its forward course. There is not the least trace, that I could discover, of the ductus Botalli joining the systemic and carotid arches, which is so prevalent among the Lacertilia. The contact between the two trunks concerned is so close and exists for so long a space, that there is, so to speak, every opportunity for the connection to have been preserved. Yet it is absent. In this feature Heloderma obviously agrees with Varanus and Amphisbena, in which genera there is no such ductus Botalli to be found. The left aortic arch gives off no branches. The right aorta gives off several pairs of intercostals as well as the subclavians, which, as in many Lizards, arise the one behind the other. As is the rule elsewhere, the left subclavian arises behind the right. pe shortly after the junction of the two aorte arises a slender “Contributions to the Anatomy of the Lacertilia,” P.Z.S. 1904, vol. ii. p. 9. é Pp. Z. 8. 1390. 41* 610 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, cesophageal artery; there is then a considerable gap until, on a level with the anterior extremity of the liver, an artery arises which closely accompanies the branches of the vertebral vein already described, and supplies the liver and the stomach. There is then a considerable gap until the origin of the three usual arteries which supply the greater part of the alimentary tract. The first of these is that supplying the stomach, spleen, and commencement of the intestine; the two which follow are so close together that they may almost be said to arise in common. Of these the czcal artery is the anterior. § Summary of more important facts in the Vascular System of Heloderma. As compared with other Lacertilia, the following facts in the anatomy of the vascular system of Heloderma are particularly noteworthy :— (1) The absence of any ductus Botalls between the carotid and systemic arches. Varanus (as well as some other Lizards) agrees with Heloderma. (2) The origin of the anterior abdominal vein as a direct continuation of the ischiadic veins as in Varanus and the Crocodilia. (3) The persistence of the fcetal umbilical vein as an affluent of the postcaval vein, not in front of the liver as in Snakes, but in the region of the liver as in Birds. It is possible that Varanus agrees in this*. (4) The existence of anterior parieto- hepatic veins as in Snakes and certain snake-like Lizards, in addition to the usual posteriorly developed veins opening, as in other lizards, into the extremity of the right lobe of the liver. Here also Varanus agrees with Heloderma. (5) The independence of the gastric portal system from the intestinal portal system. The veins of the stomach either open directly into the liver, or by way of the anterior abdominal vein; they do not join the portal vein. (2) On the Venous System in the Genus Varanus. The only notes hitherto published upon the venous system o tie genus Varanus relate exclusively to the species V. griseus <. Having made a careful dissection of this § as well as of two other species, and having accumulated some notes upon a few facts in _* Below, p. 611. + The connection of the gastric veins with the anterior abdominal vein is of course also to be seen in the Crocodilia. ~ Corti: De Systemate Vasorum Psammosauri grisei, 1847. —Hochstetter : “ Beitrage z. Entwicklungsgeschichte des Venensystems, &c.,” Morph. Jahrb. xiv. p. 464. “The species is called V. arenarius, a synonym.—Beddard: “On the Venous System in Certain Lizards,’ P. Z. S. 1905, vol. i. p. 447. § Not the same individual described in the paper above quoted. 1906.] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF VARANUS. 611 other species again, I am able to add something to the recorded knowledge of the venous trunks of this—as I consider it—aberrant genus of Lacertilia. Hepatic Portal System—The Lacertilia generally differ from the Chelonia and the Crocodilia in possessing but one anterior abdominal vein, while the latter, with the exception of Dermo- chelys, possess two*. The Ophidia and Hatteria agree with the Lacertilia with some slight exception. Thus in certain Boidee + the anterior abdominal divides after the union of the two pelvic roots to reunite again before entering the liver. It is therefore noteworthy that Varanus niloticus (only this species among those which I have examined ad hoc) has, like these Ophidians, an anterior abdominal which is double for a part of its length. In one specimen the arrangement was as follows :—the right root of the anterior abdominal vein before joining the left root gives off two branches; the first of these is the right anterior abdominal, the second is a vein which brings blood from the ventral surface of the pelvis. The right anterior abdominal is of less calibre than the left or main anterior abdominal trunk; the two unite not far behind the junction of the portal vein with the conjoined anterior abdominal vessels. In a second specimen of the same species the anterior abdominal was also double; but I am unable to give exact details. So also with a third individual which was dissected by me a good many years ago, but of whose anatomy I possess notes. it will be noted from the above description, that the double character of the anterior abdominal vein in Varanus niloticus may be rather different from that of the Python and nearer to that of the Crocodilia. For in the serpent the double vein occurs after the fusion of the two pelvic roots, while in Varanus the second, smaller, anterior abdominal vein is a direct offshoot of the corresponding pelvic root. It is, that is to say, separate from the very first. Varanus does not show, so far as I have observed, any signs of a doubling of the anterior abdominal vein at the liver end. If thecomparison between Varanus and the Crocodilia be justified so far as concerns these features, it is clear that the posterior junction between the right and left anterior abdominals in Varanus niloticus is to be compared with the junction in Crocodilus cataphracius = between the two anterior abdominals, though the situation of this connecting vessel is not precisely the same in both reptiles. Umbilical Vein.—Besides the two epigastric veins already described, there is a median vein which is connected posteriorly with the anterior abdominal and anteriorly opens into the post- caval vein between the two liver-lobes. Its course was ascertained * Burne: “Notes on the Muscular and Visceral Anatomy of the Leathery Turtle,’ P. Z.S. 1905, vol. i. p. 320. + Beddard: “ Notes upon the Anatomy of Certain Snakes of the Family Boide,’’ P. Z.S. 1904, vol. ii. p. 116. t Infra, p. 620. 612 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [| May 29, accurately. It does not form part of the liver circulation, but is definitely connected with the general circulation by means of the posteaval. It seems to me to be possible, although I am unable to offer any embryological evidence, that this vein is a persistent umbilical. It has very much the same relations as has the vein in Heloderma*, which is, as I think, to be referred to a persistent umbilical, except for the fact that it communicates in Varanus with other veins; this is not the case with the umbilical of Heloderma, or of snakes, in which it occurs with one exception. That exception is Bitis nasicornis t, where I found that the un- doubted umbilical vein was connected with the epigastric system. There is thus a precedent for a persistent umbilical connected in the adult with other veins among the Squamata. The same is the case with the persistent umbilical of Birds and of Hchidnat. Thus the connection with the parietal and other veins is not at the least evidence against regarding this vein in Varanus as the persistent umbilical. Moreover, the connection does not occur in both of the species, in which I have detected what I believe to be a persistent umbilical. In Varanus niloticus the umbilical is connected just at its entrance into the postcaval with a forwardly running branch. On the other hand, in Varanus exanthematicus the vein had no such branch and appeared to end posteriorly without making any connection with the epigastric system or being elsewhere connected with the parietes. I have not any notes or sketches showing this vein in Varanus griseus, and its occurrence is not mentioned by either Corti§ or Hoch- stetter ||. It is particularly difficult to prove a negative in the case of veins; and accordingly I prefer rather to dwell upon the presence of the vein that has just been described in two species of Varanus. Azygos and Lateral Parietal Veins.—On the right side of the body is a vein which seems to correspond to the azygos of other reptiles, but to be of more limited extent than is often the case. The vein, in fact, plunges into the thickness of the parietes directly it reaches the side of the vertebral column. In another specimen the azygos consisted of two branches, which also disappear into the parietes at once. The vein of course arises from the right vena cava superior. I am inclined to think that Hochstetter is in error when he speaks of a vessel obviously corresponding in the following words :—“ Hine dritte sehr michtige [ Intervertebralvene | findet sich rechts als die vorderste im Brustraum und geht in weitem Bogen in die V. cava superior sivistra 4 ein.” From this azygos, before it reaches the side of the vertebral column, arises the posteriorly running lateral abdominal or, better, lateral parietal vein, as I propose to call it. The vessels have already been to some * Supra, p. 602. + “Contributions to the Anatomy of the Ophidia,”’ P. Z. S. 1906, vol. i. p. 41. { Cf. Beddard : “ Anterior Abdominal Vein in Echidna,” P. Z.S. 1884, p. 553 ; and Hochstetter in Semon, “ Zoologische Forschungen,” &c., Jen. Denkschr. 1895. § Loc. cit. (on p. 610). || Zoe. cit. (on p. 610). § Italics mine. 1906. ] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF VARANUS. 613 extent described by myself in the present species*. They are hardly referred to by Hochstetter. Text-fig. 103. pl Ant Abd. Liver and certain adjacent veins in Varanus griseus. AZ, Azygos; Ant.Abd. Anterior abdominal; g.h.p. Gastro-hepatic; D. Liver; L.p.v. Lateral parietal vein; P. Portal; p. Anterior parieto-hepatic vein ; pi. Posterior parieto-hepatic vein; V.C.S. Precaval veins (vena cave superiores). On the right side of the body in the example of Varanus griseus * P. Z. 8. 1904, vol. i. p. 448. 614 MR. F, E, BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, upon which I report here, the lateral parietal vein was defective here and there between its origin with the azygos stem from the right superior vena cava and the origin from it of the anterior hepatic branch. After this point it was present as a continuous vessel to some way beyond the origin from it of the suprarenal portal stem. On the left side of the body, the vein originates from the left anterior vena cava ata point nearer to the head than does the right. Thence it is traceable as a continuous vessel to a point just short of the origin from the parietes of the left supra- renal portal, Neither in this individual nor in those previously described by me* is there any connection with the pelvic veins. In other respects there is a fairly close agreement between all three specimens. In Varanus exanthematicus I found rather different features in the azygos and lateral parietal veins. Both anterior vene cave gave off a backwardly running vein. This vein on the right side arose in front of the subclavian and had a very short course upon the parietes. The vein of the left side arose behind the orifice of the subclavian vein and divided into two short branches. Neither of these veins was connected with the posteriorly situated lateral parietal veins. Posteriorly these veins were obvious on both sides of the body. On the right side they could be traced from opposite the testis into direct communication with the root of the anterior abdominal vein. In this connection therefore with the pelvic veins, the lateral parietal vein of Varanus exanthematicus appears to differ from that of Varanus griseus. On the left side, the connection with the left root of the anterior abdominal vein was also quite obvious, but there was a slight gap along the course of the vein. The connection of the lateral parietal veins with those of the hind limbs obviously brings Varanus more into line with other Lacertilia, where these veins are general and where such a connection occurs. Remains of Posterior Cardinals.—Hochstetter has mentioned in the case of Varanus griseus a vein which runs along the vas deferens and which he termed the vena deferentialis, describing at the same time its connection with the suprarenal portal veins. The commencement of this vein from the afferent is also figured by him. I have elsewhere? compared this vein to a similar vein in the Boide and suggested its equivalence to the posterior cardinal. This view was obviously uncertain as long as the conditions obtain- ing in the female Varanus were unknown. For a vein supplying the vas deferens might be merely regarded as the necessary physio- logical equivalent of a vein supplying the oviduct and developed ad hoc, without any morphological meaning at all. The same vein, however, exists in the female. I found ina female V. niloticus that the afferent renal vein was prolonged headward of the kidney and ran alongside of the efferent renal vein over the suprarenal body, receiving the suprarenal portal vein, which will be described * Loc. cit. (on p. 610). + P. Z.S. 1906, vol. i. p, 21. 1906. ] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF VARANUS. 615 immediately. This vein also was found in a male JV. exanthe- maticus. Its existence is probably therefore a characteristic of the Varanidee. Text-fig. 104. eS — one . Veins of suprarenal body and adjoining regions in Varanus exanthematicus (left-hand figure) and V. niloticus (right-hand figure). A. Aorta; Ant.Abd. One root of anterior abdominal; Ca. Posterior cardinal ; E. Kidney; O. Vein from omentum; S.R. Suprarenal body ; p. Parietal veins; Z. Testis; v.d. Vas deferens; V.c.i. Postcaval. Suprarenal Portal Veins—These have heen already recognised by Corti, Hochstetter, and myself in V. griseus. They vary somewhat in numbers and in arrangement in the several in- dividuals which I have dissected. These suprarenal veins, as is the case in other Lizards—it is not mentioned by Hochstetter for Varanws,—arise in two ways. 616 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, Some originate from the more lateral parietes, either actually from the lateral parietal vein when that is present in this region of the body, or from the area usually occupied by it. Others arise from the parietes near to the dorsal line, and are therefore con- nected with the posterior vertebral vein. In Varanus niloticus (text-fig. 104, p. 615) I found on the right side two suprarenal portal veins. The anterior of the two was formed by the union of three vessels springing from the lateral parietes. A small vein from the “omentum” joined this vessel. The posterior of the two suprarenals arose from the parietes close to the dorsal line. Both opened into the posterior cardinal vein where it traversed the suprarenal body. On the left side of the body, the anterior of three suprarenal portals arose from the body-wall close to the dorsal line, and thus corresponds exactly to the dorsal parieto- hepatic vein opposite to it. In aspecimen of Varanus exanthematicus the arrangement of these portal veins was a little different and is represented in text-fig. 104. The lateral parietal vessel, after leaving the root of the anterior abdominal on the right side of the body, ends in the suprarenal portal in the way illustrated in the figure referred to. The vein thus emerging from the lateral parietal arches over the suprarenal body and divides into two branches, one anterior and one posterior. Each of these again divides into two to supply the suprarenal body, and is also connected with the posterior cardinal vein. A second suprarenal portal arises in front of that just described by a number of branches from the body-wall and joins the con- tinuously running cardinal vein. It also receives a branch arising by many twigs from the “ omentum” in the liver region. A third suprarenal portal is anterior to this again and enters the front of the suprarenal gland. On the left side of the body the arrangement was, save for minute details, the same as that which has been described upon the right side of the body. The fewness of the suprarenal portals is thus a characteristic of Varanus as contrasted, for example, with Jguana*. Dorsal Parieto-hepatic Vein.— Inthe chapter entitled ‘“Systematis venosi fragmenta” T Corti speaks of “ Vena intervertebralis quae a posteriori pulmonis dextri extremitate obtecta, atque a foramine quodam intervertebrali scaturiens, se in accessorio hepatis lobulo prope venam renalem communem abdit.” The vein is figured by Corti, and is also described by Hochstetter tin the same species of Varanus. Ihave already confirmed the statement of the two anatomists for Varanus griseus§, and I find now precisely the same arrangement in another example of the same species, of which this single vein is doubtless characteristic. It may be observed that in this species, as well as in V. exanthematicus and V. niloticus, V. bengalensis, and V. ocellatus, the vein in question is * P. Z. 8. 1904, vol. i. p. 443. + Loc. cit. p. 48. t Loe. cit. p. 466. § P. Z. S. 1904, vol. i. p. 448. 1906. ] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF VARANUS. 617 supported by a fold of membrane which attaches the ‘‘ Hohlvenen- fortsatz” of the liver to the parietes and forms a pocket as in fguana and some other Lizards, including Heloderma. The single vein is not, however, a generic character of Varanus. It is single in V. exanthematicus and in V. ocellatus; but in two out of four examples of Varanus niloticus which I have dissected the conditions were different. In two small specimens there was only a single vein as in other species; in one large individual there were distinctly two veins, which reached and penetrated the liver separately ; in the fourth specimen, also large, and a female like the last, there were also two veins, which, however, joined soon after their emergence from the parietes to form a single trunk entering the liver as such. In the two small individuals which were males (and not very well preserved in spirit) it seemed to me that there was a junction between two veins quite close to the body-wall. The more prevalent arrangement among the Lacertilia is that there are several of these veins * running a parallel course to the liver. In addition to this vein (or, rarely, veins) the liver also receives blood from the dorsal or dorso-lateral parietes in its anterior region. In Varanus griseus Hochstetter has mentioned a vein— “eine Zweite Leibeswandvene dringt direkt in die kopfwarts gerichtete Spitze des rechten Leberlappens, diese wurzelt in der entsprechenden Partie der dorsalen Leibeswand” +. There is no further description of the vein. The vein in question is accurately described by Hochstetter as entering the very tip of the right lobe of the liver. It corresponds exactly in position to a vein from the stomach which enters the tip of the left lobe =. The origin of the vein from the parietes is of some interest. It originates in fact from a longitudinal vein, the lateral abdominal, whose relations to other veins has been already described. The same vein occurs in Varanus niloticus, where { found it fuller than in the example of V. griseus. The same vein plainly exists in V. exanthematicus, with the same connections with the vein of the dorso-lateral parietes. The existence of these venous afiluents of the portal system is of interest in comparing Varanus with other Reptiles. In the presence of vessels from the dorsal parietes joining the liver- circulation anteriorly as well as posteriorly, Varanus differs from Lacerta, Iguana, and some other Lacertilia. It agrees, however, in this with Heloderma, as has been already set forth in the present communication$, The connection, however, in this latter instance is with the vertebral vein, while in Veranus the hepatic affluent in question is only indirectly connected with the vertebral vein system, and arises directly from the lateral abdominal vein, which * T may take this opportunity of referring to another character which I have found only in one species, and not in a considerable number of others. In V. gouldi the apex of the heart has a gubernaculum tying it to the pericardium. This is generally stated to be absent, and I have not found it in VY. bengalensis, V. griseus, V. niloticus, and V. exanthematicus. + Loc. cit. p. 466. L V. infra, p. 618. § V. supra, p. 606. 618 MR. F, E, BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, is a particularly prominent vein in the Varanide as contrasted with other families of Lacertilia. In the connection of the lateral vein system with the hepatic circulation, Varanus shows a point of resemblance to the Crocodilia, where such a connection also occurs, and with which I deal in a subsequent page of the present communication*. I do not, however, lay so much stress upon this comparison as upon the difference which Varanus shows in this part of its circulatory system from other Lacertilia. Gastro-hepatic Vein.—lt is important to note that Varanus differs from many other Lacertiliay.in the limitation of the gastro-hepatic veins to a single vein. Hochstetter has already correctly noted that there is but one vein of this series which enters the extreme anterior tip of the left liver-lobe. I have found exactly the same state of affairs in an example of Varanus griseus recently dissected. I find also exactly the same vein occupying the same position in V. exanthematicus. In Varanus niloticus the same gastro-hepatic vein was present and appeared to be particularly large. It is a point worthy of note that the position of this vein, that is of its place of entrance, is exactly the same in the left lobe as the anterior parieto-hepatic vein in the right lobe. It is possible that the great width of the liver in Varanus is responsible for the separation of two veins which in Heloderma £ enter conjointly, the liver being in that Lizard narrow anteriorly. (3) On some Veins in the Crocodilia. Although the main features of the vascular system generally, including the veins, in the Crocodilia are fairly well known §, there are a few details which have not received attention ; and, more- over, there yet remains, as it seems, a good deal to be ascertained before the variations of the venous system from genus to genus is at all understood. I shall show in the following pages that the veins with which I deal are by no means uniformly disposed in all Crocodiles. 'The observations which I place before the Society were almost entirely conducted upon well-injected specimens, and are therefore, as I hope, trustworthy as records of positive fact. It is obviously less possible to insist upon the absolute reliability of negative facts. § Azygos Ves or Vene Veriebrales, Rathke’s description of the azygos veins would not give rise to the impression that they show differences among different * V. infra, p. 622. + Not, however, from Pihelsuma madagascariensis and Tarentola annularis, where there is also but one gastro-hepatic vein. t Above, p. 607. § See especially: Rathke, “ Untersuchungen tiber die Entwickelung und den Korperbau der Krokodile,” Braunschweig, 1866; Jacquart im Ann. Sci. Nat. (4) ix. 1858, p.129; Hochstetter in Morph. Jahrb. xix. 1898, p.476; Jourdain in Ann. Sci. Nat. (4) xii., 1859; Beddard in P. Z. 8. 1905, vol. ii. p. 466. 1906. } VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE CROCODILIA. 619 kinds of Crocodiles. This vein (the vena vertebralis communis) *, is stated to arise from the anterior cava as a single trunk and to have a very short course superficially along the vertebral column, disappearing from sight—‘“‘ nach dem er die vierte V. intercostalis absesendet hat in den Kanal des Riickgrats um sich mit den Venz spinales zu verbinden.” It has thus, as he remarks, only a short course, which terminates Immediately behind the fourth rib. There is no indication given as to what species or which species this description refers to. The general account of the venous system is stated merely to refer to ‘ altere Krokodilen,” though definite species are now and again referred to in footnotes appended to the description; not so, however, in the case of the veins which concern us here. There is no evidence that I can extract which points to any particular species. I find, however, that there are variations, and that the three species which I have examined do not agree. In Crocodilus cataphractus the azygos veins answer pretty well to the descriptions given by Rathke; though there are certain differences, and also some other matters not touched upon by Rathke, to which I desire to direct attention. The number of ribs in this species is not mentioned by himy. TI find that there are only 12 pairs, 2.e. 2 false anterior ribs, 7 true ribs, 3 posterior false ribs. The azygos veins are of exactly the same size on both sides of the body. They arise from the anterior cava on each side behind the origin of the subclavian. On the right side of the body the origin was by two distinct affluents, forming with each other and the vena cava a triangle~. I did not find any such double origin on the left side. The vein runs in a directly transverse direction (7. e. transverse to the longitudinal axis of the body), and close to the vertebral column on each side plunges at once into the parietes. Thence it never reappears upon the surface of the musculature as a longitudinally running vessel, but remains completely buried and hidden below it. The azygos vein is closely accompanied by the corresponding artery (arteria vertebralis communis), which also rises below the surface of the musculature, but is visible at intervals below the peritoneal membrane. At a point about halfway between the origin from the vena cava and the disappearance into the parietes, both artery and vein give off a longitudinally and posteriorly running branch along the lateral body-wall which has its counter- part (in the case of the vein) in Varanus §. In Osteolemus tetraspis the azygos veins show features of differ- ence which obviously aid in establishing the justice of the generic separation of this Crocodile. As the following statement of fact is based upon the examination of two individuals, I imagine that it can be taken as a description of the normal conditions obtaining in this species. The azygos arises from the vena cava, at least * Loc. cit. p. 255. ' + Loe. cit. p. 55. i Of. p. 620, where the same state of affairs is described in Osteolemus tetraspis. § See p. 616. 620 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE | May 29, on the right side, in common with the internal mammary *, from which it soon diverges and runs the usual course to near the dorsal middle line. It is remarkable that on the left side (only, not on the right) the azygos arises by two origins—a thicker anterior trunk, and a much more slender posterior vessel. This is quite analogous to what has already been deseribed in Crocodilus cataphra fi, including the asymmetry, which is still more remarkable. The azygos also gives off, precisely as in Crocodilus cataphractus, a vein running along the lateral thoracic parietes. Arrived at the side of the vertebral coloumn some little way in front of the origin of the longus colli muscle (also as in Crocodilus cataphractws), the azygos does not plunge into the thickness of the parietes as in the last-mentioned Crocodile, but runs back quite superficially as in a Mammal. It is thus display ed for the whole of its course to as far back as where the dorsal parieto-hepatic trunks communicate with it. This course corresponded (at any rate in one of the two specimens dissected) to 6 ribs. The chief difference, therefore, which this species shows from Cvocodilus cataphractus is in the possession of superficially running azygos veins. in Caiman sclerops the two azygos veins arise symmetrically with regard to each other from their respective jugulars, right and left. In both cases they arise behind and not very near to the subclavians and separately from the jugular, z.e. not in common with any other vein. Hach is closely accompanied by the corre- sponding artery which is a branch of the carotid. I could detect no lateral parietal branch of each vein; but as the specimen was quite a small one, they may have remained undetected. Hach azygos reaches the dorsal line far forwards at the level of the fourth rib in front of that whose vertebra bears the origin of the longus colli muscle. Then the vein disappears and does not run superficially on each side of the body; but some way in front of the liver it reappears and passes in a slightly sinuous course to the end of the liver, where it gives rise in the usual way to the hepatic branches, which will be described later. Thus the present genus agrees to some extent with Osteolemus in the superficial course of the two azygos or posterior vertebral veins, there being the difference that in Caiman the vein runs superficially only posteriorly. The artery is superficial throughout. Anterior Abdominal Veins.—These veins, which, as is well known, are completely double in the Crocodilia, show certain differences in different species. Rathke has called attention T to the fact that the two veins often differ in calibre. He does not mention certain points to which I shall now refer. In Crocodilus cataphracius, as in Crocodilus acutus, a slender vessel leaves the left anterior abdominal vein some way behind the liver, and running obliquely forwards joins the right anterior * Whether this is also the case with OC. cataphractus I am not able to say. According to Rathke they are separate in origin. + Loc. cit. p. 257 footnote. 1906. ] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE CROCODILIA. 621 abdominal vein not very far from the edge of the liver. In the smaller example of Osteolenvus tetraspis which I have dissected I could detect no such connection at all; the two veins were quite independent throughout their course, In a larger specimen of this species, a vein ran from the left anterior abdominal and was observed to pass obliquely forwards; I lost it in the neighbourhood of the gall-bladder, and so am inclined to suspect that it did not join the right anterior abdominal but entered the liver separately, Its point of origin, moreover, was further forward than the connection in Crocodilus catauphractus. Text-fig. 105, Portal veins of liver in Osteolemus tetraspis (left-hand figure) and Crocodilus cataphractus (right-hand figure), A. Aorta; Az. Azygos of left side; Z. Liver; B. Entrance into liver of veins connected with azygos, Though I am uncertain as to the destination of the branch of the left anterior abdominal vein in Osteoleemus, I have noted and been able to follow the course of an apparently identical vein in Caiman sclerops. The left vein in this Crocodilian is smaller than the right, and a little way behind the liver it divides into two branches, of which the right is rather the thicker. The latter enters the liver in the furrow between the two lobes and receives a branch from the stomach before so entering, The left branch enters the portal system of the left lobe. The division of the left 622 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [| May 29, anterior abdominal takes place almost exactly on the middle of the stomach, as also in an example of Alligator niississippiensis with which I have been able to compare this Caiman. Moreover, in both Alligators the right branch received a twig from the stomach which underlay (when the reptiles were examined in the usual position of dissection) the left division of the left anterior abdominal. The same branching is described by Jacquart in the ‘“ Caiman a museau de brochet,” but the details seem a little different. The material does not at present exist for a comparison of the different genera of the Crocodilia, and for a classification based upon the entire structure of these reptiles. It is in the meantime interesting to note—though it is obviously premature to found any generalisation upon the facts—that the West African Osteo- lemus does show certain points of likeness to the American Crocodilia in respect of some of the veins that have been dealt with in the foregoing pages. In Alligator, as shown by Jacquart’s figure of Alligator luctus *, and by my own observations, which I take the opportunity of recording in the present communication, upon A. mssissippiensis, the two anterior abdominal veins are not connected by an obliquely running commissure +. The same vein is also absent or at least modified in Caiman sclerops. On the other hand, as I have shown, certain species of the genus Crocodilus possess it. Now this connecting vein is absent or at least modified in Osteolemus. Again, the latter genus has the two azygos veins exposed superficially along their course, while in Crocodilus the same veins are for the most part entirely buried under the musculature. In this particular also Osteolemus agrees with the species of Alligator which I have referred to in the foregoing pages, viz. Alligator mississippiensis. Dorsal and Lateral Parieto-hepatic Veins.—These veins, termed by Rathke venze vertebralis postreme, really consist, as was not noted by him, of veins arising from two sources. There are veins connected with the vena vertebralis posterior or azygos, on each side, or, if the latter be not visible superficially, emerging from the parietes close to the vertebral column, and there are trunks of more lateral origin from the parietes. Save for the Varanidet, this double origin of the dorsal parietal affluents of the hepatic portal system is not found among the Lacertilia, or at least has not been as yet recorded, and certainly does not exist in manyforms. The presence of the lateral parieto-hepatic affluent is accompanied in both the Crocodilia and the Varanide by the development of a longitudinally running lateral parietal vein, which, though re- presented in the Lacertilia, is not so important in them. I have already given some account of these veins in Crocodilus acutus §. T am now able to give further details of this. system in the Crocodilia from the examination of other species. * Ann. Sci. Nat. loc. cit. pl. 3. fig. 1. + It is noteworthy that in both AJZ. mississippiensis and Caiman sclerops the left vein is nearer to the middle line than the right vein. t Supra, p. 616. ‘ § P.Z.S. 1905, vol. it. p. 466. 1906.] VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE CROCODILIA. 623 In Crocodilus catuphractus the arrangement of these vessels on the right side of the body was as is shown in the accompanying figure (text-fig. 105, p. 621). Two branches arise from the parietes close to the vertebre, of which the anterior is the more slender ; Text-fig. 106. I: Veins connecting azygos with liver in Caiman sclerops. Upper figure the left side, lower figure the right side. Lettering as in text-fig. 105. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. X LIT. 49 624 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 29, these unite some little way before they reach the liver. Shortly after reaching the liver, but before burying itself in the substance of the same, the vein receives another which is made up of three tributaries, of which two are from intercostal spaces immediately following those which give rise to the first two of these dorsal parieto-hepatic branches. The third vessel arises from the parietes laterally. The vein formed by the union of the five venous twigs which have been just enumerated enters the substance of the liver considerably to the right of the entrance of the right anterior abdominal vein. Between the two enters a vein which conducts only blood from the lateral parietes. As is also shown in the figure referred to, the posterior vertebral artery arises. from the aorta and reaches the parietes between the two anterior intercostal veins. This is the same on both sides of the body. These branches from the azygos to the liver are also arranged with perfect symmetry in relation to each series on the two sides of the body. They commence in each case opposite to the same vertebra. The actual sizes, however, of the several branches differ, though the total volume appears to me to be much the same. On the left side there are two thick trunks which are not far short of the azygos itself in calibre. These join before reaching the edge of the left lobe of the liver. After joining, the common trunk bifurcates into a wider and a narrower branch. The wider branch enters the liver at the apex of the left lobe immediately. The narrower branch receives almost at once a thinnish parietal branch, and passes downwards along the free posterior edge of the left liver- lobe to some way along that margin, though considerably short of the middle line. Here it enters the liver-substance independently of not only the anterior abdominal vein, but also of the lateral parietal and considerably to the left of both these veins. The wide calibre of these various veins contrasts with the very narrow corresponding intercostal arteries and their branches. This contrast is much more marked than in other regions of the vascular system, where the arteries and veins are more equisized. ~ I have examined only one individual of Crocodilus cataphractus, and it might therefore be supposed that the conditions observed being subject to variation were hardly distinctive of the species. Whether this be so or not I do not, know; but in any case there is so considerable an agreement between two individuals of Osteolemus tetraspis of which I have dissected the veins under consideration, that-I describe the following conditions with some confidence as distinctive of that species. On the left side of the body there are four vessels belonging to the system of veins which is at present dealt with. The three anterior of these belong entirely and only to the vena vertebralis posterior, and they arise from it. The actual way in which these vessels join and rejoin with each other before reaching the liver is illustrated in the sub- joined figure (text-fig. 105, p. 621), and is rather more complicated than the arrangement found in Crocodilus cataphractus and C. acutus; that is to say, there are anastomoses between the trunks 1906. } VASCULAR SYSTEM OF THE CROCODILIA. 625 in question before they finally join to enter the liver. An inspection of the figure will do away with the necessity of a detailed description. In addition to these three stouter vessels a more slender trunk arises (behind them) and is connected above with the veins running directly from the stomach to the liver. This vessel (in both specimens, I believe, but certainly in one) is also derived from the lateral parietes, and thus exactly corresponds to a similar vessel in Crocodilus cataphractus, which is also in the same way the last of the series. In Caiman sclerops there are again differences of detail. ‘The right and left sides are shown in the accompanying figures (text- fie. 106, p. 623). In both cases there is a branch from the lateral parietes, which, as in other Crocodilia, is the last of the series of the parieto-hepatic veins. On the right side only two trunks arise from the azygos, but the posterior immediately divides to shortly reunite with both of the primary branches. On the left side there are only two vessels arising from the corresponding azygos. These are fused immediately after their origin, but divide again at once. Further details will be obvious from an inspection of the illustrations. In comparing the course of these vessels in the several Crocodilia which I have had the opportunity of examining, it is possible to arrive at certain differences and agreements between the four species dealt with. In the Crocodiles (C. acutus* and C. cataphractus) the number of trunks forming the dorsal parieto-hepatic affluent of the portal system is greater by one or two than in either Osteolemus or Caiman. On the other hand, in the two last-named genera the interconnections between the several trunks before they unite to open into the liver are to be remarked, and are not seen in the two species of Crocodilus. Furthermore—but as this depends upon negative evidence, less stress is laid upon it—the vein in question in Osteolemus and Caiman is connected before its entrance into the liver with the stomach plexus of veins. It is interesting to observe that in this system of veins as well as in others Osteolemus and Caiman show likenesses to each other and corresponding differences from Crocodilus. In addition to the constantly present laterally arising trunk which in all the Crocodilia examined joins the dorsal parieto- hepatic vein, there are other vessels also lateral in origin which have a separate entry into the liver. In Osteolemus tetraspis three slender veins arise from the parietes laterally more ventrally than the lateral affluent of the dorsal parieto-hepatic already described; each enters the liver separately. On the left side I could find only one corresponding vein. In Crocodilus cataphractus each lobe of the liver has also a corresponding vein originating from the lateral parietes. It enters the liver between the anterior abdominal and the dorsal parieto-hepatic veins. I have not observed this vein in other Crocodiles. * P.Z.S. 1905, vol. ii. p. 466. 626 MR. F, E. BEDDARD ON A [May 29, 4. Description of the External Characters of an unborn Foetus of a Giraffe (Giraffa camelopardalis wardi). By FRANK BE. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., Prosector to the Society. [Received May 29, 1906. } (Text-figures 107-109.) On May 5th (Saturday) of the present year the female Transvaal Giraffe purchased by the Society in 1895 * died, and was examined on the Monday following at the Prosectorium. The animal was found to be pregnant, and the foetus was female. Tnasmuch as the foetus was not of full-time, it became a matter of importance to determine its age and to compare its appearance with that of the newly born Giraffe. The newly born Giraffe has been described by the late Sir Richard Owen *, and the time of gestation varies from 431 to 444 days, according to his state- ments. The age of the foetus upon which I report here is a matter of inference. Mr. Pocock has been so good as to furnish me with the following facts bearing upon this question. It appears that the mother was “on heat” from May 1905 to the end of August or beginning of September. This condition then ceased. The reason for this cessation must have been either conception cr the end of the period of heat. The latter view was the one taken until the death of the animal revealed the fetus. Thus the foetus was about 8 calendar months old. A nearer estimate than this cannot be formed. The foetus may be said therefore to have passed about two-thirds of the normal period of gestation. The most striking feature exhibited by the feetus is undoubtedly the total absence of the least trace of the characteristic markings of the Giraffe. The colour was nearly uniform, and I give later a fuller description of the hues of the coat in various regions of the body. The horns are very prominent with long hairs, and a cartilaginous (?) horn-core could be felt within each. The early development of these as compared with some ruminants is note- worthy. The proportions of the body are shown in the accompanying figure (text-fig. 107) and the lengths of different regions of the body and limbs are indicated by the table of measurements which follows. The most striking difference from the adult Giraffe is, as it appears to me, the comparative shortness of the neck, which is quite visible in the figure (text-fig. 107). The general appear- ance of the head and neck is, apart, of course, from the horns, not unlike that of a. Lama; there is no particular suggestion of the * See P. Z.S. 1895, p. 161. + Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. iii. p. 21, and Comp. Anat. & Phys. Vertebrates, London, 1868, vol. iii. p. 739. 1906. | FQIUS OF THE GIRAFFE. 627 Okapi aboyt this or any other region of the body. It will he noticed in the figure that the neck is much creased, more so than the skin of the body, which is perhaps indicative of a rapid growth in this region. The very soft hoofs terminate in quite poimted extremities, Text-fig. 107. Fetus of Giraffe, illustr iting the general proportions of the body. The following are some of the principal measurements, many of which correspond with those tabulated by Owen for the newly born Giraffe. 628 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A [May 29 Feet. inches. From the muzzle to the root of the tail following” thedime of thesbaek oe arate ade fy ate deaee cies 3 9) From the muzzle to the interspace of the horns... 9 From the horns to the termination of the mane ab the ‘shoulder oy. cccuse ecemee ote meen eeren 1 oF Length of the back, from the mane to the root of hie stall as asece subleuss need eas iil eengete el tanec oncurtes 103 From the base of scapula to the end of the fore- hoot Gn straight lime) Ayana. ssasenad acess 2 De From the base of scapula to olecranon ............ 10 From the olecranon to the carpus .................. 93 From the carpus to the end of the hoof............ 1 3 Length of neck from occipital to anterior edge of ~ scapula placed! vertical livay sm... ssete tata 1 3 Length of back from anterior edge of scapula to TOOLTOE bail kaj e. msane t-mtsesuias se dase se Sa ee tts eal iL 13 Length of hind limb from superior border of ilium to end of hoof, measured in a straight line ... 2 63 From border of ilium to fabella ...................5. 9 From! patella to caleameumy fesse seated tee ar- 11 From caleaneum to end of hoof ........001.020..005- 1 4 Tn comparing these measurements, we may note first of all that the foetus described here is exactly half the length of the newly born Giraffe measured by Owen in the year 1839. It is remarkable to find, from a further comparison of these measurements, that there is a serious discrepancy between the relative lengths cf the neck and body in the fetus examined by myself and in the newly born animal measured by Owen “a few minutes after its birth.” According to the latter, the length of the back from the end of the mane to the root of the tail is considerably more than the length of the neck. According to my own measurement (with which, as will be seen, the drawing made independently of my own measurements agrees) the back is shorter than the neck. I feel convinced that, though I may have erred in failing to arrive at an extreme accuracy of measure- ment, so great an error cannot have crept in. The hairy covering of the feetus was in more than one respect interesting. At first sight it appeared to be for the greater part without hair at all. Examination with a lens, however, showed fine, very pale-coloured hairs everywhere in those tracts which a superficial study would pronounce to be naked. This very delicate hairy covering was, however, manifest upon the neck and legs as a whitish bloom when the skin was comparatively dry, not, how- ever, upon the trunk and flanks. In those regions where the hair was thus evident without the use of a lens the hairs were naturally longer; still they had the same whitish colour, and the suggestion given is as if the neck and feet, and especially the feet, had been powdered. 1906. | FETUS OF THE GIRAFFE, 629 The head was completely furry with longish close-set hairs, definitely brown in colour though palish, and showing distinct whorls. There was one whorl above each eye, another between the eye and the ear, and a median unpaired whorl in the occipital region. I saw nothing of the kind in the nasal region. The eyelashes were quite conspicuous (see text-fig, 108). Text-fig. 108. Head of feetus of Giraffe. A, commencement of mane; B, C, D, whorls of hair. Besides this general hairy covering, most pronounced upon the head, there were other tracts covered with much stouter hairs. Each fore limb had (see text-fig. 109) a strongly marked tract, . extending over a part of the carpus and a portion of the meta- 630 MR, F, E. BEDDARD ON A [May 29, carpus for 5} inches, which was densely covered with strong hairs of a whity-brown colour. This tract was wider above and ended below in a fine point. It would touch the ground if the animal Text-fig. 109. Front view of fore foot of foetus of Giraffe. A, patch of strong hair on the carpus and metacarpus. were placed in a kneeling posture, as it was quite anterior in position. The posterior surface of each “hock” (caleaneum) had 1906. | ‘FQ@TUS OF THE GIRAFFE. 631 a much less extensive, more feebly developed, and less sharply marked patch of hairs. On the head each horn consisted of a fold of skin in which the separate and movable horn-core could be felt as of gristly con- sistency. This fold of skin was capped by long hairs, which were black at the extremity as in the newly born and adult Giraffe. The mane was quite visible as a distinctly marked tract of close-set longish hairs definitely fawn-coloured ; it ended just below the shoulder. At the root of the tail and for a little way down it there was a continuation of this crest, but not nearly so well- marked or so circumscribed. The tuft of black hairs at the end of the tail was quite obvious. A smaller tuft of shorter whity- brown hairs also existed at the extremity of the tail below the black patch. On the ventral median line in the abdominal region and upon the sternum was also a band of hair, not so pronounced as the mane, but still very conspicuous; this was not found between the legs, either hind or front. Finally, the vulva was encircled with longish white hairs. These are, I believe, the chief facts concerning the distribution of the hairy covering of the young Giraffe. The material does not exist for much comparison with the mode of hair-growth in other Ungulates, and it is therefore all the more important to record the facts with a view to future comparisons. In the meantime I have been able to compare this foetus with one of evidently not very different age of Ovis vignet. I propose, however, to accumulate more facts with regard to the distribution of the hair and other external characters in the fetus of Mammals as opportunity serves me, and do not therefore give any detailed description of this foetus, the characters of which, moreover, are probably well enough known. I desire, however, to call attention to a patch of strongish hairs upon the wrist, exactly in the same position as the tuft of hair in the Giraffe illustrated in text-fig. 109. In the foetus of Ovis the patch was of very much less extent, not reaching nearly so far down the metacarpus. It was, furthermore, not nearly so sharply marked off from the surrounding integument as in the Giraffe, though composed of hairs of exactly the same whity-brown colour. 632 ON AFRICAN FOREST-PIGS. [June 19, June 19, 1906. Sir Epmunp Loner, Bt., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following report on the additions that had been made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of May 1906 :— The number of registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of May was 391. Of these 169 were acquired by presentation, 25 by birth, 14 by purchase, 179 were received on deposit and 4 in exchange. The number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 229. Among the additions special attention may be called to :— Two Black-footed Cats (Felis nigripes) from the Zambesi, new to the Collection, presented by Mr. A. W. Guthrie on May 26th. A male Eland (Taurotragus oryx) presented by the Duke of Bedford, K.G., President, on May 16th. Three Thr ush-like Bulbuls (Jxocincla crassirostris) from the Seychelles, a Black Hang-nest (Cassidia oryzivora) from Brazil, new to the Collection, and three Red-crowned Pigeons ( Alectrenas pulcherrima) from the Seychelles, presented ‘by the Earl of Crawford, K.T., F.R.S., F.Z.S., on May 14th. The Hon. Walter Rothschild, Ph.D., F.Z.S., exhibited specimens of the Forest-Pigs Hylocherus meinertzhagent, Potomocherus cheropotamus demonis, and Potomocherus johnstoni, and made the following remarks :— The adult male of Hylocherus meinertzhagent Thomas is distinguished at a glance from Phacocherus by the absence of the second pair of “ warts” behind the tusks and the presence of gigantic warty excrescences below the eyes, some three times the size of those in Phacocherus. It is also covered with much longer and thicker hair than Phacocherus. The specimen exhibited is from the Nandi Forest. Potamocherus cheropotamus demonis Major is distinguished at once by its intense black colour. The specimen exhibited is from Kilima-njavo. The male of Potamocherus johnstoni Major has the pelage dirty red mixed with a few black hairs, and it is generally inter- mediate in colour between that of Potomocherus cheropotamus of S. Africa and P. porcus of W. Africa. The skull shows the same distinctive features pointed out by Dr. Forsyth Major in P. Z. 8. 1897, pp. 367-368. The supra- occipital is exactly as in the @ type, har dly incised at all, but the malar and squamosal are enormously thickened and shortened, more as in P. larvatus. The portion of the maxillary containing the tusk, however, is very attenuated, and though an old beast the tusk- -stump 18 small, The specimen was obtained at Fort Jameson, N.E. Rhodesia. 1906. } ON A LOBSTER WITH SYMMETRICAL CLAWS. 633 Mr. W. Savile Kent, F.Z.S., exhibited a series of lantern-slides, taken from photographs in natural colours, illustrating the Fish and associated fauna of the Polynesian Coral Reefs. Dr. W. T. Calman, F.Z.S., exhibited a photograph of a Lobster Text-fig. 110. Lobster (Homarus gammarus) with similar chele. 634 ON ANEURYSMS IN A TIGER. [June 19, (Homarus gammarus Linn.) with symmetrically developed chelz (text-fig. 110, p. 633), recently presented to the Natural History Museum by the Directors of Harrod’s Stores, Ltd. In the Lobster, asin many other Decapod Crustacea, the large chele are normally unsymmetrical on the two sides of the body, one being armed with blunt crushing-tubercles and being larger than the other, which has sharp, serrated cutting-edges. Occasionally, however, speci- mens are found, more frequently in the European* than in the American f species, in which both chele are of similar size and shape. In all such cases hitherto recorded, with the exception of one mentioned by Herrick on the authority of a fisherman, but doubted by Stahr, both chele were of the serrated, cutting type. It has been supposed that this might be due to regeneration after injury, since it is known that, in Brachyura, on removal of the crushing-claw, a cutting-claw is regenerated. Przibram ¢, however, failed to obtain such “ heteromorphic” regeneration in the Lobster, and the present specimen throws still further doubt on the regeneration theory, since it posesses well-developed and quite typical crushing-chelz on both sides of the body. In all other respects it is a perfectly normal male and weighed, when alive, four pounds ten ounces. It was caught near Stromness, Orkney, and its peculiar character was noticed by Mr. Thompson, manager of the Fish department in Harrod’s Stores, by whom it was brought under Dr Calman’s notice. Dr. Calman also exhibited, on behalf of Dr. A. Dugés, C.M.ZS., a specimen of the Crustacean Palemon jamaicensis Herbst, from the Atoyac River, Vera Cruz, Mexico. - Dr. C. G. Seligmann, F.Z.8., the Society’s Pathologist, exhibited the aorta of a Tiger showing many aneurysms, and made the following remarks :— The specimen shown to-night was derived from a tigress which had been for thirteen years an inmate of the Society’s Gardens. The aorta shows advanced arterial disease, most pronounced in the descending aorta, where there is marked atheroma and where, in a length of about 180 mm., there are fourteen aneurysmal swellings varying in size from that of a pea to that of a fair-sized plum. The two largest swellings, the walls of which are of stony ' hardness, occur close together on opposite sides of the artery. The tricuspid valves were perhaps thickened, and there may have been some tricuspid incompetence, but-there was little or no change in the aortic valves, and, except in the neighbourhood of the aneurysms, there is no appreciable calcification of the vessels. The kidneys showed changes of a chronic tubal character, without any marked excess of fibrous tissue. * Stahr, Jena. Zeitschr. xxxii. p. 464 (1898). + Herrick, “ The American Lobster,” Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. 1895, p. 143. { Przibram, Zool. Anz. xxv. p. 12 (1902), and Arch. Entwickmech. xix. p. 191 (1905). 1906. | ON ABNORMAL TAIL-FEATHERS OF A PHEASANT. 635 The liver was tough and showed evidence of passive congestion. The suprarenal glands also seemed tougher than they should have been, but no excess of fibrous tissue existed, and the relation of cortex and medulla seemed normal. Osteoarthritis existed in the large joints of both fore and hind limbs. Considerable interest attaches to this case, since when Dr. R. N. Salaman read a note before this Society two years * ago on the death of the Polar Bear from the bursting of a false aneurysm, he was able to quote Professor McFadyean to the effect that he knew of no case of aneurysm in wild animals, and that this condition is extremely rare in the domestic carnivora. Dr. Seligmann also exhibited some tail-feathers from a Common Pheasant (Phasianus colchicus), showing the markings peculiar to both sexes, and madethe following remarks :—The feathers exhibited are derived from the tail of a cock of the Common Pheasant which is still alive, and which during the greater part of 1905 was deposited for observation in the Society’s Gardens. The feathers were removed in July 1903 from the bird, then said to be between two and three years old. All of them show the same change; that is to say, the distal portion of each feather is male in pattern and colouring, while the proximal portion of the web shows the female character of these qualities. The bird from which these feathers were derived has shown no changes in any other part of its plumage, nor have its sexual habits been otherwise than normally male, and during the spring of the present year it fertilised a number of eggs. At the present time its appearance is fully male, and this has been the case ever since the summer of 1903, when the feathers shown, and others similarly marked, constituted the bird’s tail. The history of this bird is that about Christmas, 1902, the base of the feathers of the tail, which were then predominantly male, began to show the female colouring and patterning at their bases, and that this spread as the feathers grew till in July 1903 the present condition was present. Unluckily there is no information as to its behaviour during the breeding-season of 1903, but probably its behaviour was normally male. The specimens shown have been deposited in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, and one of them has been figured by Mr. 8. G. Shattock and myself in the ‘ Transactions of the Pathological Society of London’ for the current year. The following papers were read :— * Redclitte N. Salaman: “On the Cause of Death of a Polar Bear recently living in the Society’s Gardens,” Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1903, ii. p. 348. 636 SIR C. ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCES [June 19 1 On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with special reference to the Drawings by Kelaart and the Collections belonging to Alder and Hancock preserved in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne. By Sir Cuarues HEnror, K.C.M.G., F.Z.8., Vice-Chancellor of the University of Sheffield. [Received May 19, 1906. ] (Plates XLIT—XLVIL*) The present paper is mainly an attempt to settle the synonymy of various Nudibranchiata of the Indo-Pacific with the help of material preserved in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on- Tyne. The genus Doriopsilla is discussed, and some new inform- ation as to the anatomy of several species (particularly Platydoris formosa, Pl. papillata, Doriopsilla miniata, Kalinga ornata, and several Pleurophyllidiidz) is also given. The material preserved at Newcastle, and kindly placed at my disposal by the authorities of the Museum, is of two kinds, collections and drawings. The oriental collections of Alder and Hancock appear to consist of three separate consignments sent from India. They are not kept separately, but can be distinguished. (a) The collection made by Walter Elliot near Vizagapatam in 1853-4, and described by Alder and Hancock in the ‘Transactions’ of the Zoological Society for 1864, pp. 113-147. This collection contains an almost complete series of Alder and Hancock’s types, all duly labelled; but, most unfortunately, many of them have been allowed to dry up entirely, and nothing whatever can be said of either their anatomy or their external appearance. In some cages it has been possible to extract the buccal parts from these dried morsels, but when there were only one or two specimens it was found that they had been already dissected by Alder and Hancock. The collection of “ Diphyllidiade, Pleurobranchide, Bullide, and Aplysiade,” mentioned by Alder and Hancock in the first paragraph of their paper, is also preserved, and the Pleurophyllidiide: (= Diphylliadz) are noticed below. The hard- ness of the animals and the distinctness of the buccal characters make it possible to identify them. They were not named by Alder and Hancock. Kyen the specimens which have not become dry are in poor condition, which is hardly surprising since they are more than fifty years old. But many of them have preserved their external appearance fairly well, and the hard parts, such as the teeth, arma- ture of the genitalia and of the labial cuticle, &c., are uninjured. The ribbon of the radula, however, is generally decayed, so that the arrangement of the teeth is disturbed. (b) A few specimens collected by Kelaart are svfficiently well preserved to repay examination, but, as in the previous collection, * For explanation of the Plates, see p. 690. In is), IYOKS JEM: Huth. ith. London (@) = Pe cee Se ae NUDIBRANCHS OF S.INDIA AND CEYLON. le al a +t SA Wied IPB IS LIS sth. London Huth, |: RANCHS = NUDIB Huth, lith. London. 2 3 2 O PZ.S.1906. PL. XLV. Huth Lith London NUDIBRANCHS OF S. INDIA AND CEYLON. yA oS) MIOG JEN aL, Huth lith. London. NUDIBRANCHS OF S. INDIA AND CEYLON. P Z_S. 1906. PLXIVIL NUDIBRANCHS OF S.INDIA AND CEYLON. 1906. | OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 637 many are useless. Kelaart’s specimens are marked as such, apparently in Hancock’s writing, and generic and specific names are usually but not invariably appended. (c) A collection designated by the label “‘ Madras (or India) 1867. Sir Walter Elliot.” This collection does not appear to have been sorted or named by Alder and Hancock. Besides Nudibranchs, it contains Tectibranchs, Pulmonates, Lamellariide, and Echinoderms. The drawings consist of figures of about 55 species of Nudi- branchs made from life by Kelaart in Ceylon. Thirty-five of these figures are now reproduced. The rest have been left aside, in most cases because other figures of the animals which they represent have been published, but in a few cases because they add nothing to the printed description. The poorly executed figure of Doris cerisa, for example, adds nothing to Kelaart’s state- ment that it is a small Doris of a cherry-red colour. It may be asked whether it is worth while to publish these old drawings. Bergh seems inclined to think that it would be better to leave aside all inadequate descriptions of Nudibranchs and pay no attention to them. This would be convenient if it were practically possible, and little would be lost. But is it practically possible 2. Bergh’s own lists contain a selection of Kelaart’s names, and yet I think he has sometimes redescribed Kelaart’s species under other names, which he would hardly have done if he had seen the drawings. Further, there is a great practical advantage in giving animals old names, because they are less liable to alteration. Ifa nudibranch bears a name given by Kelaait, it need not be rebaptized if it is found to be identical with species imperfectly described by Pease, Angas, Abraham, and others. Apart from this, Kelaart is by no means an authority to be despised, though he has not found favour with many of his critics. He totally ignored anatomy, and his descriptions of external characters have not that wealth and precision of detail which might be desired. But he is exact in recording localities and seasons, and he adds many notes on the habits of the animals, particularly on their spawn. His papers are of little service to the student of preserved specimens, but, taken together with his drawings, they will probably enable a naturalist in Ceylon to identify most of his species. They appear to have been published three times :— (a) Asapamphlet (pp. 1-64), dated “‘ Trincomalie. 1st Novem- ber, 1857.” I have a copy of this pamphlet, which I have used in preparing the present paper. (6) In the Journal of the Ceylon Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society in 1858. (c) In the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 1859, in three separate papers :— I. Ann. & Mag. 1859, vol. ili. pp. 291-304. td Bae i » Vol. ill. pp. 388-496. 0B a are " » vol. iv. pp. 267-270. 638 SIR C. ELIOL ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, The references in the present paper are made to the ‘ Annals & Magazine’ as being more accessible than the other publications, and the three papers are cited as Kelaart, |.c. I., II., and IIT. Similar abbreviated references are :— A. & H. 1l.c. = Alder and Hancock, ‘‘ Notice of a Collection of Nudibranchiate Mollusca made in India by Walter Elliot, Esq.,” in Trans. Zool. Soc. 1864, Farran, |. c. = Report on the Pearl-Oyster Fisheries of the Gulf of Manaar: Royal Society, 1905. Supplementary Report, xxi., “On the Opisthobranchiate Mollusca,” by G. P. Farran. Bergh, Siboga = Siboga-Expeditie. L. Opisthobranchia, R. Bergh. 1905. The three editions of Kelaart’s paper do not appear to contain any differences of importance, but the pamphlet opens with a preface which gives little scientific information, but emphasises the fact mentioned from time to time in his descriptions, that he studied Nudibranchs by keeping them “in a glass vivarium,” often for considerable periods. He also quotes a long passage from the ‘English Cyclopedia’ respecting the structure of Nudibranchs. Besides these papers, Kelaart published a description and figure of Zrevelyana ceylonica under the title ‘‘ Description of a new Ceylonese Nudibranch,” in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1858, vol. 1. p. 257. My examination of these collections and drawings (supple- mented in a few eases by other material) results in notes on 64 species. Of the identifications suggested, I think the following may be regarded as more or less certain :— 1. Hevabranchus marginatus Q. & G, 1832 = Doris gloriosa Kelaart. 2. Chromodoris diardii (Kelaart) = Chr. semperi Bergh, of which Chr. nigrostriata Eliot and Chr. tenwilinearis Farran are varieties. 3. Casella maccarthyi (Kelaart) =C. cincta Bergh. 4, Kentrodoris maculosa (Cuv.)=4. annuligera Bergh = Doris Sunebris Kelaart. 5. Discodoris concinna (A. & H.)=Dise. concinniformis Bergh. 6. Archidoris violacea Bergh= Arch. africana Hliot. 7. Thordisa villosa (A. & H.)=Th. maculigera Bergh. 8. Trippa luteota (Kelaart) = Thordisa ? caudata Farran. 9. Trevelyana ceylonica Kelaart=7". rubromaculata Bergh. 10. Bornella digitata Ad. & Reeve= Bornella hancockana Kelaart. ll. Samla bicolor (Kelaart)=Samla annuligera Bergh. 12. Hlysia cerulea Kelaart=Hlysia lineolata Bergh. 13. Llysia punctata Kelaart=Llysia nigropunctata (Pease). 1906.] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 639 The following identifications are probable, but cannot be regarded as certain until further specimens are examined :— 1. Chromodoris fidelis (Kelaart)= Chr. flammulata Bergh. 2. Hoplodoris desmoparypha Bergh = Platydoris papillata Eliot. 3. Asteronotus hemprichi Ehrenberg = Doris exanthemata Kelaart. 4, Thordisa crosslandi Eliot 1904 = Diaulula (2) gigantea Bergh 1905. 5. Doris intecta Kelaart= Trippa ornata Bergh. 6. Doris leoparda Kelaart=T'r. monsoni Eliot. 7. Doridopsis tuberculosa (Q. & G.) var.=Doris carbunculosa Kelaart. 8. Diphyllidia marmorata Kelaart=Linguella cinerea Farvan. 9. Phyllobranchus orientalis (Kelaart) _ f§ Ph. prasinus Bergh. { Ph, rubicundus Bergh. In both these lists the first name has priority if the identity is established. The following references to genera are certain or probable :— . Chromodoris glenici (Kelaart). Chr.? wmabilis (Kelaart). . Chr. tennentana (Kelaart). . Platydoris edlioti (A. & H.); not Discodoris elliot. . Halgerda? upiculata (A. & H.). . Staurodoris rusticata (A. & H.). . Doriopsilla miniata (A. & H.). . Stiliger ? viridis (Kelaart). A specimen marked “ Doris osseosa, Ceylon, Dr. Kelaart,” appears to be the animal described by me as Sclerodoris osseosa (Kelaart) in Proc. Zool. Soe. 1903, ii. p. 380. ONAN wNh No one who attempts to determine the species of tropical Nudibranchs can fail to be struck with the great variability of their external characters. Probably no group of animals offers more striking illustrations of how species arise out of varieties. Even land-slugs show how susceptible the soft molluscan skin is to changes of colour when it is not protected by a shell; and in the Nudibranchiata, the watery habitat of which favours the growth of processes and appendages, variations of form also are frequent. Again, form, as well as colour, is liable to be distorted by the ordinary methods of preservation, and it may happen that two descriptions of the same animal—one treating of the external characters during life, and the other chiefly congerned with the anatomy of a dead specimen have nothing in common and are not recognised as referring to the same species. The principal types of structure in the group are now fairly well known; but it Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. XLITI. 43 640 SIR C, ELIOL ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, is much to be desired that some naturalist in the tropics may follow the example of Kelaart with his vivarium, and by observing the living animals throw more light on their development, variation, and habits. My best thanks are due to the Council of the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne for the loan of drawings and collections, and to Mr. T. J. Evans, Lecturer in the University of Sheffield, for assistance, especially in the preparation and examination of sections. ; HEXABRANCHUS MARGINATUS Q. & G. =D. gloriosa Kelaart. (Kelaart, 1. ¢. I. p. 291.) Whatever limits be assigned to species and varieties within this genus, Kelaart’s plate leaves little doubt that his D. gloriosa is the form called D. marginata by Quoy & Gaimard. Curomoporis A. & H. (Eliot, Journal of Malacology, 1905, Oct., p. 36; and Proc. Zool. Soc. 1904, i. pp. 382-6.) Bergh in his ‘System’ (p. 1104) gives a list of 105 species. Of these, Chr. elizabethina is probably the Doris guadricolor of Riippell and Leuckart, and, as shown below, Chr. semperi is probably the Doris diardii of Kelaart. Chr. nigrostriata Eliot and Chr. tenwilincaris Farran are both varieties of Chr. semperi (v. Eliot, Z.¢.), and therefore should be classed under Chr. diardit. Chr. petechialis (Gould) is probably the same as Chr. twmulifera Collingwood. Chr. maccarthyi is certainly a Casella and should be omitted from the list, to which the following species may be added :— 105. Chr. agassizi Bergh. 106. Chr. porterce Cockerell. 107. Chr. mactarlandi Cockerell. 108. Chr. epicurea Basedow & Hedley. 109. Chr. sykest Eliot. 110. Chr. annulata Eliot. 111. Chr. splendens Eliot. 112. Chr. vicina Hliot. 113. Chr. inconspicua Kliot. 114. Chr. ? flava Eliot. 115. Chr. tasmaniensis Bergh. 116. Chr. figurata Bergh. 117. Chr. egialia Bergh. 118. Chr. atopa Bergh. 119. Chr. tennentana (Kelaart). 120. Chr. gleniei (Kelaart). 121. Chr.? amabilis (Kelaart). 122. Chr. flammulata Bergh. ¢= Chr. fidelis (Kelaart). 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON, 641 123. Chr. marpessa Bergh. 124. Chr. venusta Bergh. 125. Chr. ophthalmica Bergh. | 126. Chr. nodulosa Bergh. 127. Chr. pantherina Bergh. au FE tg 128. Chr. papulosa Bergh, A ay we Siboga 129. Chr. siboge Bergh. nave bia? 130. Chr. inopinata Bergh. | 131. Chr. lactea Bergh. 132. Chr. bimaensis Bergh. 133. Chr. virgata Bergh. a) Basedow and Hedley have described Chr. epicurea under the name of Hypselodoris (Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia, vol. xxix. 1905, pp. 141 & 153), and wish to substitute this generic name (Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vii. 1855, p. 388) for Chromodoris. It would be a pity to drop an accepted and widely used name like Chromodoris in favour of one which has never been in use and which was only tentatively proposed for an imperfectly described animal. But in any case Stimpson’s name (1855) cannot claim priority, for Ehrenberg’s Glossodoris, Pterodoris, and Actinodoris (1831) are admittedly Chromodorids, though for the sake of convenience the names have not been revived (see Bergh, “ Kritische Untersuchung der Khrenberg’schen Doriden,” Jahrb. d.d. malakozool. Ges. iv. 1877, pp. 45-76). The list of 183 Chromodorids will no doubt be found to contain many synonyms. Many of the tropical species are known only by their external coloration, and when it is possible to examine many specimens the coloration generally proves to be variable. Very often different colours become predominant in different individuals. Chr. diardii var. nigrostriata is generally bluish grey with faint blotches of pale yellow, but sometimes the yellow is developed at the expense of the blue and the whole animal appears to be lemon-colour. Chr. quadricolor sometimes looks as if it were light-coloured with black bands, and sometimes as if it were black with light bands. A difference of intensity oftens produces a difference of colour: thus, red becoming paler may fade into orange, deep yellow, light yellow, and yellowish white, or becoming darker it may be intensified into reddish brown or lake, purple, purplish black, and black. In pale specimens markings, especially borders, have a tendency to disappear; in full-coloured specimens they tend to multiply, and scattered dots may collect and fuse so as to form blotches. Lines sometimes break up into a row of dots, but on the whole the distinction between the spotted and striped forms seems more persistent than others. Though these variations of tint and pattern show that we must not expect uniformity in a species, it is also clear that unless the resemblance in colour is striking and detailed, it is by no means safe to conclude that similar forms are specifically 43% 642 SIR C. ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, identical, for, though the variations may be within specific limits, it is equally possible that two dissimilar forms, both varying, may roughly coincide. For the determination of species the most important internal characters are the radula and labial armature, the other organs not varying much in the genus. Good external characters are often furnished by the greater or less development of the dorsal margin, which in several species bears small knobs underneath. In a few species the back bears tubercles or even papille (Chr. papulosa B., Chr.? roseopicta Verrill). The precise number of branchiz is not a character of importance, but the species seem divisible into those where the plumes are few (3-7), moderately numerous (8-12), and many (12-20 or more). In some species the plumes have a strong tendency to develop accessory branches and become bipinnate. Curomoporis (?) AMABILIS (Kelaart), (Plate XLII. fig. 1.) (Kelaart, 1. c. I. pp. 294-5.) This form is perhaps a Chromodoris, though the bipinnate branchis create some doubt. It may even be Chr. porcata (Bergh in Semper’s Reisen, xvi. 2, pp. 831-3), which is white or yellowish with purple spots on the back, yellow rhinophores, white foot and branchie. The gills are 8 and two of them subdivided. It is recorded from Mauritius. CHROMODORIS FIDELIS (Kelaart). (Plate XLIT. fig. 2.) (Kelaart, 1. c. I. p. 295. Bergh, System, p. 1106. Of. Bergh, Chr. lammulata & Chr. lactea in Siboga-Expeditie: Opisthobranchia, pp. 151 & 159-160.) This form, which is said to be common at Trincomalee, will probably be recognised by its striking coloration. It is possibly identical with Chr. flammulata B., which has black gills and rhinophores, and is said to be red with a broad irregular white patch down the centre of the back. This is merely another way of regarding a pattern which Kelaart describes as a white surface, ‘the edge lined with red and irregular tooth-like transverse internal prolongations of the same colour.” In other details, such as shape, number of branchie, and the anterior expansion of the foot, the two forms agree. Chr. lactea B. appears to be a closely allied form. It is pure white with black branchie and rhinophores, and differs chiefly in not having the red border. The radula is much the same as that of Chr. flammulata, but there are some differences in the labial armature. CHROMODORIS PRECIOSA (Kelaart). (Plate XLII. fig. 3.) (Kelaart, 1. c. II. p. 295. Bergh, System, p. 1106.) This form appears to belong to the group of Chromodorids which are somewhat flat and have an ample mantle overhanging the foot all round. 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 643 The coloration is not uncommon, and it is quite possible that the species has been described again with a fresh name, but I cannot identify it with any other form. CHROMODORIS TENNENTANA (Kelaart). (Plate XLIIT. fig. 1.) (Kelaart, 1. c. IIT. p. 268.) This appears to be another Chromodoris with an ample mantle- margin. In colour it offers analogies to Chr. obsoleia (Riippell & Leuck.), Chr. imperialis (Pse.), and Chr. aureopurpurata Colling- wood, but does not agree completely with any of them. CHRomoporis DIARDII (Kelaart). (Plate XLIII. fig. 2.) (Kelaart, 1. c. III. p. 267. = Chr. semperi Bergh in Semper’s Reisen, Heft xi. pp. 482- 484.) The resemblance in coloration seems to me sufficiently strong to justify the identification of these two forms. Chr. runcinaia is nearly allied, but neither Kelaart’s description nor his figure gives a hint of the conspicuous spherical glands beneath the manile- edge. I regret to substitute Kelaart’s name for that given by Bergh, but follow the precedent of the latter authority, who has changed his Chromodoris elizabethina into Chr. quadricolor (Riippell & Leuckart). See Bergh in Semper’s Reisen, Theil vi. Lieferung 11. p- 68. CHROMODORIS GLENIEI (Kelaart). (Plate XLIV. fig. 1.) (Kelaart, 1. c. I. pp. 294-5.) This form appears to be clearly a Chromodoris in virtue of its general shape and simply pinnate branchie. It is said to be found “in the Inner Harbour (Trincomalee), as also at Cottiar opposite Fort Frederick,” and will probably be identified without difficulty on account of its striking coloration. Kelaart’s picture has probably faded, for he describes the back as bearing “a deep golden-coloured patch, bordered and spotted with purplish red,” whereas in the plate the patch is reddish brown with a margin of spots of the same colour but darker. The mantle appears to be ample; and the animal probably belongs to the same group as Chr. reticulata, Chr. sykesi, Chr. cave, &c., and may even be identical with the last of them, in which case the name gleniet has priority. Chr. alderi (Collingwood, Trans. Linn. Soc. ser. 2, Zool. vol. ii. 1878, p. 132) also presents resemblances. CHROMODORIS INOPINATA Bergh. (Bergh, Siboga-Expeditie, Opisthobranchia, 1905, pp. 157-9.) This species is allied to Chr. sykest Eliot (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1904, i. pp. 387-8). It has the same shape and a similar though not 644 SIR C. ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, identical gorgeous coloration. But there are differences of detail in the buccal parts, and the branchi of Chr. sykesi have not been observed to be subdivided like those of Chr. iropinata or to be so long. CASELLA. This genus, though offering hardly any structural differences from Chromodoris, is easily recognisable by its undulated dorsal margin, which is generally marked by a conspicuous border. Casella rubra Bergh, 1905, seems to be a distinct species, but it may be doubted whether the other specific names cover more than one species which appears in several colour varieties. CasELLA MACCARTHYI (Kelaart). Doris maccarihyt Kelaart. Chromodoris maccarthyi (Kelaart). Casella cincta Bergh. ? Casella atromarginata (Cuv.). (Kelaart, 1. c. I. p. 292. Bergh in Semper’s Reisen, x1. pp. 462-3; xvi. 2, pp. 831-37; xvii. pp. 941-4.) Two drawings are preserved and also a specimen from Ceylon. The drawings represent a pinkish-grey Casel/a with the character- istic strongly undulated margin. Thereare no spots or motthngs of any kind, but the mantle is bordered with bright blue, the upper part of the rhinophores is blue, and there are indications of blue on the stems of the branchie. The preserved specimen corresponds with the drawing. The colour is of a uniform greyish yellow without a trace of spots. The mantle-edge is marked by a purplish-brown border, with traces of an accompanying white border particularly on the under side. The length is about 28 mm. and the maximum breadth nearly 20 mm. The mantle- margin is strongly undulated, but narrow, particularly behind. The rhinophore-sheaths are distinctly raised, but the margins of the branchial pocket are not elevated. The branchie are retracted. The buccal mass has been removed. There can be but little doubt that this is the Casella cincta of Bergh. It has all the characters, except that the back is not spotted and the foot is not bordered with blue. The branchie are given as fewer (15 as against 22), but the difference is not important, and it is very likely that the smaller branchiz were not visible outside the pocket. The preserved specimen was not opened in order to preserve the appearance. I think that Casella cincta and Casella atromarginata are merely varieties of one species which shade into one another through various shades of blue, purple, and black. If this is so, the species must be called C. atromarginata (Cuv.) and the blue-bordered form var. maccarthyt. If thought advisable, the term var. cincia can be used for forms with a blue border and a spotted back. 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON, 645 HAucerDA Bergh. (See Eliot on Dictyodoris tessellata, in Proc. Malac. Soe. vol. vi. pt. 4, 1905, p. 229.) The Doris apiculata of Alder & Hancock probably belongs to this genus, which in my opinion is not separable from Dictyodoris. Several new species have been described lately, of which Halgerda graphica Basedow & Hedley is closely allied to H. willeyi Eliot if not asynonym. The genus may be tabulated as follows :— 1. H. formosa Bergh. 2. H.? apiculata (A. & H.). 3. H, (Dictyodoris) tesselata (Bergh). 4. H. wasinensis Eliot. 5. H. (Dictyodoris) maculata Eliot ; probably the young of H. wasinensis. 6. H. punctata Farran. 7. H. willeyi Eliot. { 8. H. graphica Basedow & Hedley. 9. H. elegans Bergh. 10. H. rubra Bergh. 11. A. inornata Bergh. HALGERDA ApicuLATA (A. & H.). (A. & H. 1. ¢. p. 122.) The type specimen is preserved at Newcastle, but the buccal parts have been extracted and the remains are so dry and hardened that nothing can be added to Alder and Hancock’s description. That description, however, which includes the radula, makes it eminently probable that the animal is referable to Halgerda, and the filaments which surmount the tubercles should render it easy of recognition. PLATYDORIS. To the list of 27 species belonging to this genus given by me in the ‘ Journal of Conchology,’ vol. i1. Oct. 1905, pp. 252-3, may be added two more from the ‘ Siboga’ Collection :— 28. Pl. fammulata Bergh. 29. Pl. sanguinea Bergh. Several of the species described are probably colour varieties. It is remarkable that the ‘Siboga’ obtained a form undistinguishable from the Mediterranean Pl. argo in the Malay Archipelago. The chief characters of the genus are the hard and leathery consistency, the flat shape, and the armature of the reproductive organs. The efferent ducts are very thick and strong. The lining is raised into lumps and folds, generally yellow in colour, and in the male branch these lumps are in most species further developed into hard scales bearing hooks. These hooks, however, have not been found in Pl. striata and Pl. flammulata. Through the kindness of Prof. Herdman I have been allowed 646 SIR C, ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, to examine the specimen from Ceylon described by Farran as Platydoris ? spinulosa, but doubt if it is referable to this genus. PuatyDoris Formosa (A. & H.). (Plate XLVII. fig. 3.) (Doris formosa A. & H.1.c¢. p. 116. Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1903, ii. p. 376.) Two specimens* are preserved, one about 60, the other about 40 mm. long. They agree with Alder and Hancock’s description and plate. The back is smooth, and the minute granulations are visible only with difficulty even under a lens. But scattered over the larger specimen quite irregularly are a number of hard white tubercles which look like parasitic growths or accretions. They are not detachable, and there are none on the smaller specimens. The lobes of the branchial and rhinophorial pockets are very distinct. The foot is grooved and deeply notched in front. The oral tentacles are rather large, and so distinctly grooved on the outer side as to be almost ear-shaped. The tissues of the radula have decayed, but the teeth are well preserved. They are hamate, with moderately stout bases and rather slender elegant shafts which often have a distinct ridge or wing at the side. They differ considerably in size and somewhat in shape, some being more strongly hooked than others, but it is not now possible to assign them to their respective places in the radula. Alder and Hancock say they decrease in size towards the centre. It is noticeable that no denticulate or degraded teeth are to be found, so that the hamate form is probably retained to the extreme end of the rows and does not degenerate, as so often happens in Platydoris. The genitalia are much hardened, but it is still plain that the large efferent ducts of both branches are extremely strong and muscular. One tube (probably the vas deferens) is thickly set with large round granulated scales, bearing short strong spines (Pl. XLVI. fig. 3). The other tube (probably the female branch) is lined with very conspicuous folds and lumps. This handsome species appears to be characterised by its coloration, its distinctly grooved tentacles, and the armature of the genitalia, particularly the granulated appearance of the discs. The Kast African form referred by me (J. c.) to this species with a query does not agree with the type specimen, and is more likely to be Pl. sanguinea Bergh (Siboga, p. 139). PLATYDORIS SCABRA (Cuv.). = Doris celestis Kelaart. (Quoy & Gaimard, Voyage de |’Astrolabe, Zoologie, tome ii. p. 258. Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1903, ii. p. 375. Kelaart, Ie. Es p.293.) The Doris celestis of Kelaart seems to be clearly the older * These and all the specimens described by A. & H. in Trans. Zool. Soc. 1864 are carefully labelled by Hancock, so that there is no doubt of their identity. 1906.] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 647 Doris scabra, referable to the genus Platydoris. The drawing, which is not reproduced, leaves but little doubt of this. PLATYDORIS sTRIATA (Kelaart). Kelaart, 1. c. I. p. 302. (ale We Jabs Jk ©, jop JULY) A single specimen is preserved in bad condition, having appa- rently been allowed to dry before being put in fresh spirits. As preserved, it suggests that the colour was lighter than in Alder and Hancock’s plates, and the fine brown lines, though distinct, much fewer. The buccal mass had apparently been extracted, but a few scattered teeth were found among the internal organs. They are hamate and rather slender. Little could be made out of the genitalia, which were small and hardened. A tube lined with the characteristic yellow folds and lumps was found, but no scales or hooks. It is very probable that they are really present, but Bergh (‘Siboga,’ p. 138) reports that in Pl. flammulata the male organs are provided with a “ Lingsfalten bildenden Cuticula mit spitzen und gerundeten Hockern versehen aber ohne die gewohnlichen Dorntragenden Scheiben.” It is therefore possible that they may be absent in this species too. Puatyporis ELLIoTI (A. & H.). (A. & H.1.c.p.116. Discodoris ellioti Bergh, Siboga, p. 102.) Three of Alder and Hancock’s type specimens are preserved. One is quite hard, and was probably dried before it was put into spirits. Nothing could be made of it. The other two are soft and somewhat decayed. The texture is not that usual in Platydoris, but the present flaccid condition may be due to decomposition. The buccal parts had been removed from one specimen but remained in the other. No labial armature was found, but a number of yellowish hamate rather slender teeth, set in no apparent order, the ribbon of the radula being decomposed. The armature of the genitalia is very distinct. The efferent duct is thickly covered with discs bearing spines of the form typical of the genus. The spines are mostly stout and straight ; some are a little inclined, but not bent. There is no doubt of the existence of this characteristic armature, but owing to bad preservation it is hard to say if it is on the vas deferens or the vagina, but probably the former. Bergh originally placed this species under Platydoris (Syst. d. Nud. Gast. p. 1102), but subsequently (/. c.) identified it with a Discodoris obtained by the ‘Siboga’ from Makassar. It would appear, however, that the earlier classification was correct, for the genitalia are armed as in Platydoris and there is no labial armature. The absence of the latter is confirmed by Alder and Hancock’s description, for under D. ellioti they say “‘ Tongue as in 648 SIR C. ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, D. tuberculata,” and under D. pardalis, the species described next, “Tongue as in the last species, with the addition of a prehensile collar.” The animal obtained by the ‘Siboga’ should perhaps be known as Disc. berghi. PLATYDORIS PAPILLATA Eliot. ?= Hoplodoris desmoparypha B. var. (Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1903, ii. pp. 379-3880. Bergh, in Semper’s Reisen, Suppl.-Heft i. p. 51; Siboga, p. 113.) In making an examination of further specimens of this animal, 1 have found a spine in the accessory gland attached to the female genitalia, The structure of the gland seems to be as described by Bergh for Hoplodoris, but the spine is straighter. I cannot help thinking that the species is Hoplodoris desmoparypha, or at least very closely allied to it ; but I have not been able to find a labial armature as described by Bergh. In one specimen there seemed to be something like a plate or girdle on the labial cuticle, but it was formed of fibres or filaments and not of the rods found in Discodoris and other genera. As a labial armature is generally unmistakable and easily found, I do not think its presence can have been overlooked. On the other hand, it is often developed in very different degrees in different individuals of the same species, and may perhaps disappear. In his first description (S. R. 1. c. p. 53, note) Bergh seems to imply that it was vestigial or imperfectly preserved. In my specimens the buccal cavity is black or brown. The teeth are as previously described by me (J. c.), but the outermost are sometimes slightly and irregularly serrulate*. The formula of the radula is about 40 x80.0.80. There is a large sausage- shaped prostate. The external characteristics correspond in most respects with the descriptions of Hop. desmoparypha, but the dorsal papille are far more developed and sometimes become branched processes 5 mm. long; but there is much variety in this respect, as also in colour. The spots and borders on the under side are particularly variable. The gill-pocket is sometimes distinctly stellate, and sometimes merely irregularly jagged or undulated. The tentacles are in all specimens large but flat. The anterior margin of the foot is deeply grooved and notched, and the upper lamina over- hangs the lower. The animal has been observed to bury itself in sand, and the dorsal papillae resemble bits of sand when it is alive. It may be doubted whether Hoplodoris is best regarded as a separate genus or a section of Platydoris. Most of the characters agree with that genus, and I do not think that the presence of either an accessory gland and spine or of a labial armature * Proc. Zool. Soc. 1903, ii. p. 879, fourth line from the bottom: “innermost” is a misprint for ‘‘ outermost.” 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 649° (even if proved to be the rule) can exclude it from the genus. Pl, variegata Bergh has a labial armature. On the other hand, the dorsal papille are a marked point of difference. In any case, the form seems to be intermediate between Platydoris and Asteronotus, and to have little affinity to Discodoris. Doris EXANTHEMATA Kelaart. (Kelaart, 1. ¢. I. p. 300.) ¢= Asteronotus hemprichi Whrenberg. Hancock has written on Kelaart’s drawing “ D. mauritiana Q. & G.?” This latter species is identified with Asteronotus cespitosus, and Kelaart’s drawing, more than his description, supports the idea that the animal is the common Asteronotus of the Indo-Pacific. Whether there is really more than one species is doubtful. If there is only one, the name A. hemprichi Khrenberg has priority. Kelaart’s statement that D. exanthemata is “‘semi-gelatinous and . . . when dead rapidly dissolves and cannot be preserved in spirits” is against this identification. Asteronotus may perhaps be compared to a stiff solid jelly, but it can be preserved without difficulty. The statement that the spawn is of a beautiful red colour is interesting. I have found this red spawn and on oo bo DoriDOPSIs TUBERCULOSA (Quoy & Gaim.) var. (Doris carbunculosa Kelaart, |. c. I. p. 301; Bergh in Semper’s Reisen, xvi. 2, p. 845.) Alder and Hancock (J. ¢. p. 128) pointed out that Kelaart’s D. carbunculosa is probably the same as Quoy and Gaimard’s D. tuberculosa, though it differs in not having white spots on the under side. These white spots are very conspicuous in the living animal and remain in alcoholic specimens. Bergh, however (/. ¢.), has described a variety from Mauritius in which the white spots are absent, and which agrees with D. carbunculosa in several details. It is very soft, and the under side of the mantle is “mit feinen Langsfurchen,” corresponding to Kelaart’s state- ment that it is veined. 662 SIR C. ELIOL ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, As Bergh observes, it is somewhat doubtful if this is merely a variety of Doridopsis tuberculosa or a new species. I have a specimen captured by Mr. Gardiner at Rotuma, which is of a uniform brownish yellow without a trace of spots, but in other respects apparently a typical Doridopsis tuberculosa. DoRIDoOPsIs DENISONI (Angas). (Dorisdenisont Angas, “ Descrip. d’espécesnouv. de Moll. nud.,” J. de Conchyl. 3 sér. iv. 1, 1864, p.45. Doridopsis denisone Bergh in Semper’s Reisen, xv. p. 694, ff Doridopsis gemmacea A.& H. 1. c. p. 126, and Hancock, “Anatomy of Doridopsis.”) According to Bergh, Angas’s name has a few months’ priority over Alder and Hancock’s D. gemmacea. The three specimens are not very well preserved, but appear to agree with Alder and Hancock’s two descriptions cited above both externally and internally. The mouth-gland is large and consists of many finely divided lobes. The liver is flattish, much lobed, and deeply cleft behind. No hooks or spines could be found in the male genitalia, although they are no doubt really present. The vas deferens is extremely long and elaborately coiled. Doripopsis ATRoMAcULATA A. & H. (A. & H. le. p. 129; and Hancock, “Anatomy of Doridopsis,” p. 193.) One specimen, rather well preserved. It is as described by Alder and Hancock, though the structure of the mouth-parts is obscured owing to this portion of the body having been opened. Superficially the back appears to be white with black tubercles, but on a closer examination it is seen that the whole surface is studded with groups of tubercles, or with compound tubercles, which are in some places white and in others black. Even in the black regions the tips of the tubercles are whitish. The structure of the branchia isremarkable. The plumes arise from a large common ring which, as preserved, projects con- siderably above the edge of the branchial pocket. Three of them are tripinnate, elongate, but not very ample; in position they are right, left, and posterior. The anterior part of the ring bears a number of small inconspicuous bipimnnate plumes, and there are a few more between the left and the posterior plumes. The right and posterior plumes are close together, the arrangement not being quite symmetrical. The large anal papilla lies some- what to the left of the centre of the ring. Doridopsis punctata has also only three branchie, but the arrangement is different, the plumes being tripinnate and fairly ample, without intermediate smaller tufts. Hancock’s statement that “the proboscis is quite slender and tapers imperceptibly into the crop” raises a doubt if the animal may not really be a Doriopsilla (see below). o 1906. | OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 663 Donrtbopsis cLAVULATA A. & H. (A.& H. lc. p. 127. Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1904, ii. p. 278.) Three specimens in a fair state of preservation. Though the animal has a general resemblance to Doridopsis denisoni, it would seem to be easily distinguishable from it externally. The margin of the branchial pocket is much more distinctly tuberculate, and the large dark green areas on the back are very plain. There also seem to be differences in the genitalia. They are much hardened, but it is clear that the vas deferens is much shorter than in D. denisoni and not so elaborately coiled. ‘The lower part of the vas deferens and the penis are thickly covered with small, slightly bent, yellowish spines. The arrangement of the alimentary canal, so far as it can be still ascertained, is as in D. denisonit. A large double mouth- gland lies beneath the buccal mass and opens into it by a single duct. There is a constriction after the proboscis, and another about halfway between the proboscis and liver. Doriopsis (?) GRrisEA (Kelaart). (Kelaart, 1. c. p. 297.) The statement that the “mouth is surrounded with a white veil” makes it probable that this species is a Doridopsis. Kelaart uses a similar expression concerning J. carbunculosa; and it is evidently an attempt to describe the two small tentacles cha- racteristic of the genus which are often attached for the greater part of their length and inclined towards one another above the poriform mouth. D. grisea is possibly the same as the animal figured by Bergh in the Opisthobranchia of the ‘ Siboga’ Expedition, plate v. fig. 19, s “ Doriopsis ?” Doriopsinua Bergh. (See Bergh, Jahrb. d. Deutsch. malak. Gesell. 1880, pp. 20-30 ; id., Zool. Jabrb., Abth. fiir Syst., Jena, 1896, Band ix. Heft ii. pp. 454-8 ; and Vayssicre on Doriopsilla areolata in ‘Talisman’ Opisthobranches, 1902, pp. 235-7, and Opist. de Marseille, iii. 1901, pp. 50-52.) In Doriopsilla the dorsal surface is granulate and harder than in Doridopsis; but the chief difference between the two genera is that whereas in Doriopsilla the buccal ganglia beneath the alimentary tube lie immediately behind the main body of the central nervous system, in Doridopsis they le at some distance behind it on a constriction of the alimentary tube, and are united to the nerve-collar by rather long connectives. The difference may seem slight, but is of considerable structural importance, as will perhaps be understood by an inspection of figs. 4-7, Pl. XLVII., which give comparative views taken from beneath and from the side of the central nervous system and 664 SIR CG. ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, alimentary tube in Doriopsilla miniata and Doridopsis nigra respectively. It should be remembered, however, that these forms may not be typical in all their details, and that other species may show minor variations. In Doriopsilla miniata the tube which issues from the proboscis describes a curve below the nerve-collar (cf. Vayssiére, U. c. 1901: “Tl (le tube] décrit un cercle complet en avant du collier nerveux, puis traverse celui-ci), and then passes through the collar and above the buccal ganglia which touch the collar to the liver. Its diameter is uniform, and its course behind the collar fairly straight. In Doridopsis nigra the nerve-collar lies immediately behind the proboscis. A straight narrow tube runs through it without making any curves until it has passed through the main body of the nervous system. It then makes two conspicuous bends to the right before entering the liver. In the angle between these two bends the tube is constricted, and here are situated two small salivary glands and the buccal ganglia, which latter are united to the nerve-collar by a pair of connectives which run straight and do not follow the bends of the tube. Behind the buccal ganglia the tube dilates and makes another bend to the right before it enters the liver. It looks as if the arrangement in Doriopsilla miniata were the more primitive. It is much the same as that found in an ordinary Dorid, except that the radula with its pouch and the whole buccal mass have disappeared, leaving in their place a curved suctorial tube. But in Doridopsis nigra this curved tube has been pulled backwards through the nerve-collar, and the buccal ganglia have moved with it, and if, as it is reasonable to suppose, the buccal ganglia mark the commencement of the cesophagus, that organ has very different dimensions in the two genera. Though nothing is known about the food of the Doridopside, it is clear that their alimentary organs form an exsertile proboscis and a powerful suctorial apparatus; and perhaps the arrangement found in Doridopsis nigra (which seems to be by far the most usual in the family) allows this apparatus, which probably expands and contracts when taking nutrition, to move more freely. Doridopsis nigra (P\. XLVII. figs. 5 & 7) has not only the two small salivary glands already mentioned, but also a large bilobed gland (Pl. XLVIL. figs. 5d & 7d) discharging by a single duct, which enters the wall of the proboscis rather far back, runs forward as a thin tube (Pl. XLVII. fig. 5¢) in the lower wall of the proboscis, and opens close to the mouth. It is generally known as the ptyaline gland, but, as Hancock suggests, 1t may supply a secretion which can pierce or benumb the animal’s prey. Neither salivary nor ptyaline glands could be found in my spe- cimens of Doriopsilla miniata, and if present at all they must be small. Bergh reports their presence in Doriopsilla areolata and D. pallida, but could not find them in D. levis (Siboga, p. 179), which offers many analogies to D. miniata. The large develop- ment of the ptyaline gland in Doridopsis would doubtless be 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 665 an additional reason for pulling the alimentary tube back to give more room. A further examination by sections of Doridopsis reticulata (Cockerell & Eliot, J. of Mal. xii. 1905, p. 41) indicates that this species also is a Doriopsilla. The real buccal ganglia are not, as stated, 4 mm. behind the central nervous system, but close to it and united by short connectives to the part that seems to correspond to the pleural ganglia. The alimentary tube differs somewhat from that of D. reticulata. The part in front of the nerve-collar is broad and pouch-like: just under the collar (as preserved) is a valvular apparatus separating this anterior dilated portion from the long narrow posterior portion. Before entering the liver the alimentary tube dilates again into a pouch divided by a constriction. Under the buccal parts is a large bilobed gland, probably, but not demonstrably, connected with the proboscis. Dorropsitia mintaTA (A. & H.). (Plate XLVII, figs. 4 & 6.) CASie Ec: p71 1303) Four specimens are preserved, hardened and in bad condition, but quite recognisable. The following notes are the result of examining recent specimens from Karachi, which I have no hesitation in identifying with this form. The animal was described by me in the ‘Journal of Conchology,’ vol. 11. no. 8, Oct. 1905, as Doridopsis miniata, and stated to have long buccal connectives. Subsequent examination by sections has shown that this is incorrect. The portion of the alimentary canal lying between the central nervous system and the liver is supported by several strong filaments, and some of these were mistaken for connectives running between the buccal ganglia and the central nervous system. The sections show clearly that the ganglia are arranged in the manner characteristic of Doriopsilla, The main mass (a) is of somewhat irregular shape and surrounds the cesophagus. Imme- diately behind it and touching it, but below the esophagus, are the two buccal ganglia close to one another. Not far from the buccal ganglia a short connective runs to the right and ter- minates in a small ganglion near the penis, which apparently innervates the genitalia. The anterior portion of the alimentary canal is a thin tube, which preserves a uniform diameter until it enters the liver. On issuing from the proboscis it describes a Z-shaped figure. The lower curve of this figure is free and lies below the nerve-collar, which surrounds the upper loop. On reaching the liver the tube runs for some distance just below the surface before descending into the interior. In spite of a careful examination, the presence of ptyaline or salivary glands could not be demonstrated. It seemed certain that the wall of the proboscis does not contain a long duct coming from the ptyaline gland as in Doridopsis nigra. 666 SIR C, ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, Hancock’s observations on D. miniata (“ Anatomy of Doridopsis,” p- 193) agree on the whole with mine. He says nothing about salivary or ptyaline glands. The following Dorids, described and figured by Kelaart, cannot be referred with certainty to any of the modern genera, but if rediscovered will perhaps be recognisable :— Doris elizabethina (Kelaart, l.c. II. p. 267) (Pl. XLII. fig. 3) has the appearance of a Chromodoris in most respects, but the fairly wide bipinnate branchiz would be abnormal in the genus. Doris papillosa (Kelaart, 1. c. I. p. 297) (Pl. XLV. fig. 3) is coriaceous and bears large papille. The back is covered with reddish spots and markings, but the rhinophores are green or blue. The three anterior branchie are white, the three posterior reddish. In the plate the anterior plumes are hardly visible. Doris corrugata (Kelaart, l.c. I. p. 303). The very poor drawing, which is not worth reproduction, represents a flat greenish-grey tuberculate dorid, with no spots. The erect, simply pinnate branchie are conspicuous. It may be either a Sphero- doris or a Staurodoris, and it will perhaps be possible to identify it by the greenish coloration of the upper surface and the black spots on the lower. Doris lockyerana (Kelaart, |. c. IL. p. 268) (Pl. XLVI. fig. 1). This ‘splendid species” looks as if it might be an Asteronotus, but has evidently no resemblance to the D. exanthemata which Kelaart disliked so much. It may be an Orodoris. Doris viperina.| _ These large handsome species are probably Doris picta, Platydorids or Discodorids. The drawings of Doris bellicosa. as under sides are not reproduced. D. wiperina (Kel, 1.c. I. p. 299) (Pl. XLVI. fig. 2) is “ coriaceous . covered with short spinous tubercles.” ‘The drawing of the under side represents the oral tentacles as very large. Both the foot and the under side of the mantle are white and spotted with reddish brown. D. picta (Kel. 1.c. I. p. 303) (Pl. XLIV. fig. 4) is said to be “coriaceous .... granular .... sheaths of rhinophores large, granular.” The drawing of the under side represents the oral tentacles as moderately large; the foot as white; the mantle-edge as white with a broad red border round the foot. D. bellicosa (Kel. 1. ¢. I. p. 308) (Pl. XLIV. fig. 3) is “ coriaceous . granular, and covered with small spines.” ‘The figure of the under surface represents the oral tentacles as white and mode- rately large; the foot of a deep brick-red; the mantle white, but largely covered with brick-red spots and blotches, especially near the foot. Doris variabilis (Kelaart, l.c. I. p. 300), The drawing is very 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 667 poor and adds nothing to Kelaart’s description, but the animal may perhaps be identified, as it is said to be “found in great abundance on rocks in Dutch Bay at low-water mark.” Kelaart associates ib with Doris atraiaw (=Doridopsis nigra); so 1b may perhaps be a Doridopsis. Allowing for variations, Doridopsis tristis B. and Doridopsis indaca Tapp.-Can. have a somewhat similar coloration. Doris rufopunctata (Kelaart, 1. c. I. p. 297) (Pl. XLIT. fig. 5). There are not sufficient data for assigning this form to any genus. It is expressly said that it is coriaceous and stiff; so it may prove to be a Platydoris. Doris constantia (Kelaart, l.c. I. p. 298) (Pl. XLIZ. figs. 8 & 9). Both the description and the drawing seem to characterise the animal sufficiently externally, but it is impossible to say to what genus it belongs. Doris castanea (Kelaart, l.c. I. p. 303) (Pl. XLII. figs. 6 & 7). This is possibly the animal described by me as Scelerodoris (=Peronodoris) tuberculata (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1903, ii. p. 381), but the identity cannot be proved from the materials supplied by Kelaart. Doris aripona (Kelaart, |. c. II. p. 269) (Pl. XLV. fig. 2). It is impossible even to guess to what genus this species should be referred, but it looks recognisable. Doris nivEA (Kelaart). (Kelaart, l.c. I. p. 296.) It may be doubted if Kelaart is right in suggesting that this is the Doris (Chromodoris) pallida of Riippell & Leuckart. His alternative suggestion that it is akin to Doris (Cadlina) repanda is more probable, but in Cadlina the oral tentacles are generally flat and grooved, not linea. It may belong to the Doridopside. Doridopsis baéaviensis and Doriopsilla pallida are whitish. No drawing of the species has been found. TREVELYANA. This genus was founded by Kelaart for 7. ceylonica in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, 1858, vol. i. p. 257. Perhaps the Gymnodoris of Stimpson (1855) is a synonym. If so, the name has priority, but Stimpson’s description is inadequate. Trevelyana and Nembrotha form a small group within the Polyceride, characterised by the entire absence of frontal and dorsal appendages. The dorsal margin and frontal veil are vestigial or entirely absent. ‘The rhinophores are retractile, the branchie non-retractile. There are no jaws. The penis is armed with spines. The oral tentacles are small. The foot is narrow and the general shape limaciform. Gretlada somewhat resembles this group in external characters, but has frontal appendages, and the buccal parts are as in Polycera. 668 SIR C. ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, The two genera are clearly distinguished. Externally the chief difference is that Z’revelyana has numerous small branchie and Nembrotha a few (3-5) large branchie. In Z’revelyana the radula is fairly wide; the rhachis bare; the teeth are awl-shaped or slightly hamate, and though the innermost is generally distin- guished from the rest, it is not of an essentially different shape. In Nembrotha, on the other hand, the radula is narrow; there is a rhachidian tooth; the first lateral is large and falciform, the rest are mere plates. Also, whereas in Vembrotha the hermaphro- dite gland is spread over the liver, as is usual in the Doridide, in Trevelyana it is quite separate from the liver and forms two globular masses in front of it. This arrangement is very rare in the Doridide and is charac- teristic of such forms as Scyllea, Bornella, &c. It might be supposed that it would not occur in a Doridiform animal without being accompanied by other profound structural modifications ; but it is found not only in Bathydoris, but also in Alloiodoris, which, but for this peculiarity, seems to be a perfectly ordinary Dorid. It will thus be clear that it is not easy to see how Zrevelyana can be derived from Membrotha or vice versa. Nembrotha may be regarded as an animal analogous to 7riopa which has lost its appendages, though the dentition is not exactly the same. But Trevelyana cannot be so explained. In its dentition, though not in other respects, it shows greater resemblance to Votodoris. About nine species of Z'revelyana seem fairly certain :— 1. 7. ceylonica Kelaart. =T. rubromaculata Bergh. =T'. picta Pse. ?= Doris impudica Rupp. & Leuck. . T. bicolor A. & H. . T. citrina B. . LT. alba B. T. inornata B. T. plebeia B. T. crocea B. . T. coccinea Eliot. . LT. rubropapulosa B. co CO NIG OUP 09 bd Bergh in his ‘System,’ p. 1144, includes in his list Zrev. ? rubra Pease, but in the Opisthobranchs of the ‘ Siboga’ has inadvertently registered a form under the same name as a new species. The specimen was, however, small, and its state of preservation rendered a full description impossible. It may be the same as T. rubra Pse., which is very incompletely described. 7’. concinna Abraham, of which nothing is known except the external fea- tures of an alcoholic specimen, does not seem to me sufliciently characterised. The remarkable 7Zr.? defensa described by Bergh (Siboga, pp. 192-3) must, I think, be regarded as a new genus if not a 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 669 monstrosity, and can bear the name Thimna, as suggested by Bergh. About thirteen species of Nembrotha are fairly well charac- terised. The dentition of V. rubro-ocellata B. (Siboga, pp. 201-2) is unknown, and it does not seem to me that the animal is sufficiently distinguished externally from other forms such as NV. rubropapulosa :-— 1. NV. nigerrima B. 2. WV. cristata B. (See Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1904, i. p. 90, and Bergh, Siboga, 1905, p. 195.) NV. kubaryana B. NV. cerulea Eliot. NV. lineolata B. NV. amitina B. . morosa B. NV. diaphana B. NV. gratiosa B. NV. affinis Eliot. LV. verconis Hedley & Basedow. (Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr. 1905, vol. xxix. p 158.) 12. N. gracilis B. | 13. WV. rubropapulosa B. pare NN. See, r A —S pt gS SSS - The brackets merely mean that the species are allied, and do not necessarily imply probable identity. It is possible, however, that some of the species are only colour varieties. Nos. 1 to 4 are dark, with a comparatively wide radula containing about 12 teeth on each side of the rhachis. J. lineolata is yellowish with fine brown lines and 8 teeth on either side of the rhachis. In the remaining species the radula is narrow and there are only 3 or 4 teeth on either side. Nos. 6 and 7 are dark; nos. 8 and 9 present a brilliant combination of colours in which bright yellow and dark blue are prominent. J. gracilis and NV. rubropapulosa both have a tricuspid rhachidian tooth and a similar coloration of black and red. TREVELYANA CEYLONICA Kelaart. (Kelaart, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. April 1858, vol. i. no. 4, p- 257, and pl. x. B. Eliot, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1904, 1. pp. 86-7. Cf. Trev. rubromaculata Bergh, Siboga, pp. 189-191.) There can be but little doubt that Bergh’s 7. rubromaculata is the same as the earlier 7’. ceylonica, for the agreement in characters, both externai and internal, is almost complete. The radula in Bergh’s specimen seems to have been somewhat larger than in mine (from East Africa), though it is not quite clear whether there were 16 or 32 teeth on each side of the rhachis. The species can be recognised externally by the colour and by 670 SIR C, ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, the large branchie. Pease’s 7. picta (Amer. Journ. of Conch. 1871, vol. vi. p. 301) is perhaps a synonym, since it has a similar coloration and the “branchial star large.... wider than the body.” Perhaps also Riippell & Leuckart’s Doris impudica (1828) is the same species. If this can be proved, the specific name has priority. The Neweastle collection contains a good coloured drawing by Kelaart, which is not reproduced here since it has already been published in black and white in the Ann. & Mag. of Nat. Hist. (Z.c.). See also the coloured edition of H. & A. Adams’s ‘Genera of Recent Mollusca,’ pl. exxxvii. fig. 14. Katinea A. & H. This remarkable genus was regarded by its discoverers, Alder and Hancock, as intermediate between Huplocamus and Plocamo- pherus, but it does not possess the characteristic conformation of the radula and prostate which distinguishes those genera, There can be no doubt, however, that it belongs to the Polyceride. Externally it differs from most members of the family in its somewhat doridiform shape, the absence of a tail, and in having its branchize entirely separate from one another, much as in Hexabranchus* and Bathydoris. In the Doridide phanero- branchiatz, where the gills are not retractile, the complete isolation of the separate plumes does not necessarily imply any considerable structural change, but it may be a survival of an arrangement which is more primitive than the symmetrical circuit of united branchiee. The genitalia, so far as they are known, seem to be of the type found in Polycer@ and its allies, but the shape of the glans penis is unusual and resembles that of Phialodoris. The radula differs from those of all known nudibranchs. It is very broad and com- posed of very numerous tricuspid teeth. The specimens here examined indicate that the buccal organs are of extraordinary size and strength, though it is hard to say what may be their natural position and modus operandt. Katinas onnata A. & H. (Plate XLVIL fig. 2.) (A. & H. lc. pp. 134-6. Bergh in Semper’s Reisen, xvii. pp. 959-962. Farran, l.c. p. 347.) The Newcastle collection contains three poorly preserved specimens, which are the types used by Alder and Hancock for their description published in 1864, and also a very large specimen, relatively well preserved, and labelled “Sir W. Elliot, Madras, * The descriptions of the gills of Hexabranchus are often most misleading, for they state that the organs are retractile into separate cavities or pockets, the natural meaning of which is that each branchia has a separate parmanent cavity into which it can be retracted. But in reality there are no such cavities. ‘The plumes are con- tractile separately, and when they contract, the skin, being soft, forms a temporary hollow at their bases. But they do not disappear into a pocket, and when they spread out again the hollow vanishes. od 1906.4 OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 671 1867.” It appears to be specifically the same as the smaller specimens. It is rather rectangular in outline and measures 106 mm. in length, 49 in breadth, and 41 in height. The coloration is brown of various shades; the dorsal surface and most of the branchize are dark brown; the sides of the body, the foot, the exserted proboscis, the rhinophores, all the dorsal processes and in places the tips of the branchiz are light yellowish brown. The back is flat; the margin does not project, but is clearly marked by a line of ramose processes extending at least as far back as the branchie. Of these processes, eight on each side are taller than the others, and the largest are about 6 mm. high and 5mm. broad. They are branched three or four times, but as preserved suggest not so much branches as aggregations of tubercles. There are ten similar but rather smaller processes on the oral veil, varying from 2 to 5 mm. in length. Besides these marginal appendages, both the back and the sides of the body are irregularly sprinkled with processes of all shapes and sizes, varying from a height of 2 mm. to microscopic dimensions, The larger are distinctly ramose, the smaller apparently simple. The rhinophore-pockets are not much raised and the margins are studded with small processes like the rest’ of the back. The rhinophores are completely retractile, smooth below, but bearing about 40 perfoliations on the top part, which is bent backwards. The large branchize cover the posterior third of the back. They are quadri- or even quinque-pinnate and consist of four groups :— (a) Left posterior. An enormous plume, 30 mm. long and 35 broad, arising from a single stem, but dividing close to the base into two large and two smaller branches. There is a pocket-like hollow round the base, but the plume is by no means retractile and extends beyond the dorsal margin. (6) In front of this large plume and a little nearer the median line is asmaller group (14 mm. x 16 mm.) with three main divisions. (c) Rather to the right of this and on the middle line of the back is another group of two plumes (about 20 mm.x12 mm.), which seem to rise from a common base. {d) On the right is another group, about the same size as the last, which seems to consist of two plumes arising from a common stalk, though it is hard to be certain of this as the back is much corrugated. There is no large plume on the right corresponding to (a), and the whole arrangement of branchie is asymmetrical. The anal papilla is on the median line just to the right of (a). Though the opening is very large, it is low and inconspicuous. In front of it lies another opening, probably the renal pore. On the right side of the body, about halfway down and 25 mm. from the frontal veil, is the genital opening—a large simple pit in the interior of which are the separate sexual orifices. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. XLV. 45 672 SIR C. ELIOT ON NUDIBRANCHS [June 19, Just below the oral veil on either side are two flat folded lobes (4 mm. long by 3 broad) which appear to represent tentacles. A huge proboscis, unlike anything which I have ever seen in the Nudibranchiata, is everted under the oral veil and folded under the body of the animal (Pl. XLVII. fig. 20). It is 98 mm. long, and 34 mm. broad at its base, but tapers towards the tip, where it is about 8 mm. broad. The radula, which was found at the point marked c on this proboscis, is torn into several longi- tudinal strips, and the rhachis and innermost teeth can no longer be distinguished. When perfect, the ribbon must have been very large, consisting of between 300 and 400 transverse rows, each containing at least 200 teeth on either side of the rhachis. All the teeth examined are as figured by Farran (/. ¢. plate ii. figs. 23, 24), tricuspid with long bases. From this strange buccal apparatus a strong muscular tube, about 30 mm. long, 12 mm. wide, and nearly straight, runs to the liver, enters it and re-emerges as the intestine. Within the liver is a small stomach which seems to receive only one hepatic duct. The walls of the stomach and intestine are quite distinct within the liver. The liver itself is about 57 mm. long and 38 broad, tapering posteriorly. It is elongate-ovate in shape and greyish in colour. Its relations to the hermaphrodite gland are not clear. The central nervous system is enclosed within a strong white capsule, but is itself rather dark grey. The general outline is as usual, suggesting the three pairs of ganglia, but no division into ganglia is traceable in its substance. It seems to be composed of a mass of large and small granules not set in groups. The genitalia are not well preserved, but owing to their large size the principal features can still be ascertained. The ampulla of the hermaphrodite gland is much convoluted. It is about 3 mm. broad and, as coiled, 30 mm. long. At its end comes the bifurcation of the male and female branches. The first part of the male branch is enveloped in a large lobed organ, which is apparently the mucus-gland, and enters the female branch close to the bifurcation. When free from this gland, the male branch appears as a broadish tube (5 mm.) with rather thin walls. It dilates into an elliptical expansion (presumably a prostate) about 15 mm. long and 10 mm. broad, with thickish walls and empty inside. After this dilation it becomes a thin-walled free tube, 35 mm. long and 5 mm. broad, running to the penial pouch. The vas deferens within the pouch is straight and not convoluted. The lower part of the vas deferens bears an armature of numerous, minute, brownish spines of very various shapes and sizes—long, short, straight, wavy or hooked, but mostly with narrow bases. The glans penis is formed, as Bergh says, somewhat as in Phialodoris. There seem to be two elongate lateral folds of skin, and in the middle another fold surrounding a rather irregular opening. After the bifurcation the female branch is thin and constricted. It receives the ducts of the above-mentioned mucus- gland (?) and of the large hard albumen-gland. Then comes the 1906. ] OF SOUTHERN INDIA AND CEYLON. 673 small pear-shaped spermatocyst (9 mm. x 3 mm.) full of brownish matter. Below this is the roughly spherical spermatotheca with a diameter of about 20 mm., sessile, or rather forming simply a dilatation of the tube. From the spermatotheca runs a tube about 45 mm. long to the vestibulum genitale, and at the point where it enters it there isa much laminated body of glandular appearance which is probably the Zlase of Bergh (f. c. p. 962). No other organs could be identified with certainty. 84. 8. Hjaculatory duct of male. X 100. 9, External copulatory organ of male. X 240, PratTE XLIX. Calamecia lucasi, p. 696. Hig.1, Female seen from right side. > 84. 2. Do. dorsally. X 84. 3. Anterior antenna of male, distal portion. « 240. 4. Posterior antenna. > 300. 5. Anterior foot-jaw. > 240. 6. Posterior foot-jaw. X 240. 7. One of the swimming-feet. > 240. 8. Foot of fifth pair of female. X 240. 9. Fifth pair of feet of male. X 240. 10. Furea. X 240. Prate L. Newnhamia fenestrata, p. 698. Fig. Outline of shell of male—from left side. XX 85. Do. do. from above. X 85. Shell of female seen from below. X 84. Posterior antenna of male. X 84, Apical joint of posterior antenna; female. > 240. Mandible and palp. x 240. Second foot-jaw of female. X 240, 8,9. Do. male, right and left. x 240. 10. Foot of first pair. 200. 11. Do. second pair. > 200. 12. Caudal ramus. X 200. 13. Eye. x 140. NES Oye wo pO PxuateE LI. Cyprinotus sarsi, p. 700, Fig.1. Outline of shell of female, from left side. 40. Do. do. from above. 40. Do. of male, from left side. 40. Posterior antenna. > 84. Mandible and palp. X 84. Second maxilla of right side (male). 200. Do. prehensile portion, left side. > 200. Foot of first pair. >< 84. Last joint of second foot. X 84. Caudal ramus. X 84. Ixternal copulatory organs. 84. SONS We wre me 702 PROF. C. CHILTON ON CRUSTACEA [June 19, 5. Note on some Crustacea from the Freshwater Lakes of New Zealand. By Cuarizes Cuitron, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, New Zealand. [Received May 18, 1906. | Dr. G. 8. Brady has been good enough to submit to me the few Amphipoda and other higher Crustacea collected by Messrs. Lucas and Hodgkin during their recent investigation of the principal lakes of New Zealand*. The first specimens reached me in November 1905 and were at once reported upon; a few additional specimens were received in March 1906, and an examina- tion of these has necessitated some alteration of the general remarks at first made. It will be seen from the following list that: the collections of the higher Crustacea were rather meagre and that all the specimens secured belong to species already known. For many years I have looked forward to making collections from the freshwater lakes of New Zealand in the hope of finding there Crustacea allied to the blind forms inhabiting the under- ground waters of the Canterbury Plains, just as forms closely allied to European subterranean species are found in the deep waters. of the Swiss Lakes. The Crustacea first sent me by Dr. Brady were, however, disappointing from this point of view, but among those lately received there are two specimens of the blind species Paraleptamphopus subterraneus (Chilton), one specimen from Lake Wakatipu (depth not stated) in the South Island, and the other from Lake Taupo in the North Island, taken at a depth of 700 feet. This species is widely distributed in the underground waters of the Canterbury Plains, and has also been found in surface streams at Castle Hill in Canterbury and in the Longwood Range in Southland, and its occurrence in the two lakes named still further widens its area of distribution. It is closely allied to Paraleptamphopus ceruleus (G. M. Thomson), first described from a small stream at the top of the Old Man Range in Otago, at a height of about 3000 feet, but since found to be, like its under- ground representative, more widely distributed. The next most interesting species is the little Isopod that I have identified as Paranthura nigro-punctata (Lucas). Though a surface form it is of particular interest, since it is the only known freshwater species of the Anthurid, and thus helps to throw some light on the origin of the subterranean species Cruregens fontanus, which belongs to the same family. Taken in connection with the recent discovery of a Caprellid in the Lake of Geneva, the occurrence of this Anthurid in freshwater leads us to hope that other unexpected finds may be looked for on a further examination of the lakes. Two other species, Zenagomysis novee-zealandice and Para- * “A Bathymetrical Survey of the Lakes of New Zealand,” by Keith Lucas. Geographical Journal, May & June 1904. 1906. ] OF THE NEW ZEALAND LAKES. 703 corophium excavatum, were previously known only from salt or brackish water on the sea-coast. The little crab Hymenosoma lacustris was previously known to occur in New Zealand only in a small freshwater lake near the coast, but it has also been recorded from streams in Victoria and in Norfolk Island. In the following list I have given only the most important references under each species. BRACHYURA. HyMENosoMA LACUSTRIS (Chilton). EHlamena (2) lacustris Chilton, Trans. N. Z. Inst. xiv. p. 172. Hymenosoma lacustris Chilton, J. c. xv. p. 69, pl. i. fig. 2. Hymenosoma lacustris Fulton & Grant, Proc. R. 8. Vict. xv, (new series) p. 60, pl. viii. One male and one female specimen from Lake Waikare, the male taken on the stony shore, the female in 5 feet of water. These resemble the typical specimens from Lake Pupuke Auckland, except that the posterior tooth of the carapace is quite absent and the anterior one forms a slight projection of the outline of the carapace rather than a definite tooth. This species has been found in freshwater streams in Norfolk Island and in Lake Colac in Victoria. A full account of the slight differences observed between the specimens from different localities will be found in the paper by Messrs. Fulton and Grant mentioned above. MACRURA. XIPHOCARIS CURVIROSTRIS (Heller). Caridina curvirostris Heller, Voy. Novara, Crust. p. 105. Xiphocaris fluviatilis G. M. Thomson, Trans. Linn. Soe. viii. p. 447, pl. xxix. figs. 2 to 13. Numerous specimens from Lake Waikare, from nettings among reeds *, This species is common in freshwater streams throughout the main islands of the Colony; I have specimens also from the Chatham Islands. SCHIZOPODA. TENAGOMYSIS NOVZ-ZEALANDIZ G. M. Thomson. Tenagomysis nove-zealandie G. M. Thomson, Journ, Linn, Soc. xxvii. p. 484, pl. xxxiii. figs. 6 to 8 & pl. xxxiv. figs. 9 to 17. Six specimens from Lake Waikare, in a netting from among reeds. This species has hitherto been known only from the sea-coast. Mr. Thomson records it from the Kaikorai lagoon (brackish water), estuary of Waikouaiti River, and rock-pools at Brighton—all * In the tube with this specimen was a single example of a terrestrial Isopod, Porcellio scaber MLatr.,an introduced species which must have got among the collections from the lakes by some accident. Proc, Zoou. Soc.—1906, No, XLVI, A7 704 ON CRUSTACEA OF THE NEW ZEALAND LAKES. [June 19, near Dunedin, and from the Bay of Islands, dredged in 8 fathoms. 1 have taken it near the mouth of a little stream at Brighton, in water which was at the time almost fresh to the taste, though close to the sea and affected by extra high tides. AMPHIPODA. PARACALLIOPE FLUVIATILIS (G. M. Thomson). Calliope fluviatilis G. M. Thomson, Trans. N. Z. Inst. xi. p. 240. Paracalliope fluviatilis Stebbing, Ann. & Mag. N. H. ser. 7, iv. p- 210. Numerous specimens from Lake Waikare. This species is very common in all freshwater streams in New Zealand ; I have also taken it in perfectly salt-water in Dunedin Harbour and elsewhere. PARALEPTAMPHOPUS SUBTERRANEUS (Chilton), ava Calliope subterranea Chilton, Trans. N. Z. Inst. xiv. p. 177. Calliopius subterraneus Chilton, Trans. Linn. Soe. ser. 2, Zool. vi. p. 234. Paraleptamphopus subterraneus Stebbing, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, iv. p. 210. One imperfect specimen from Lake Wakatipu (no depth mentioned), and one from Lake Tapu, taken at a depth of 700 feet. These are both blind, and do not differ appreciably from speci- mens from the underground waters of the Canterbury Plains. This same blind species has also been taken in surface streams at Castle Hill, Canterbury, at an elevation of 2000 feet above the sea; and morerecently Mr. R. M. Laing has brought me specimens from the Longwood Range in Southland. The extension of its distribution as shown by its occurrence in Lakes Tapu and Wakatipu is very interesting. PARACOROPHIUM EXCAVATUM (G. M. Thomson). Corophium excavatum G. M. Thomson, Trans. N. Z. Inst. xvi. p. 236. Paracorophium excavatum, Stebbing, Ann. & Mag. N. H. ser. 7, 11. pp. 241 & 350. Several specimens from Lake Rotoiti, 5 fathoms, and Lake Waikare (netting among reeds). This species was described by Mr. Thomson from specimens. obtained from ‘“‘ Brighton Creek (salt-water).” I subsequently took it in Brighton Creek along with Zenagomysis novee-zealandic when the water was almost fresh to the taste, and specimens lived in a small bottle of this water for some months. I have specimens. also from brackish water at Napier. It thus appears probable that the last three species are all capable of living in fresh or in salt water; and the occurrence of Paracorophium excavatum in freshwater lakes far from the sea. P28. 1oOG ale Eie Fig1.C.GHewitt,del. E. Wilson ,Cambridge. TURBELLARIA FROM CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. 1906.] PoLYCLAD TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. 705 is very interesting. I do not know of any other freshwater Corophiide. IsopoDa. PARANTHURA NIGRO-PUNCTATA (Lucas). Paranihura costana Thomson, Trans. N. Z. Inst. xiv. p. 230; Index Faune N. Z. p. 262. Paranthura nigro-punctata Stebbing & Norman, Trans. Zool. Bocwxiie p. LAI) pl: xxv. teenie A small specimen, about 6 mm. long, from Waikare Lake, taken at a depth of 5 feet, must, I think, be referred to the species found on the New Zealand coast, which was long ago identified with this Kuropean species by Mr. Thomson. The specimen is immature, the seventh segment of the pereion being small and lacking appendages. It possesses large distinct black eyes, the colour is pale yellow with markings of black on the back, and it is evidently a surface form. Another specimen from the same locality was dissected and drawn by Dr. Brady, who kindly sent me the drawings he had made. So far as I am aware, this is the only freshwater species of the Anthuride known, with the exception of the subterranean form Cruregens fontanus from the underground waters of the Canter- bury Plains, and it is of especial interest for this reason, though it is quite distinct from Cruregens fontanus. The species to which I have referred it, Paranthura nigro- punctata, was first taken by Mr. Thomson among some seaweed washed up on the beach near the mouth of the Taieri River; I have several specimens taken at different localities on the East Coast of Canterbury, which agree closely with the description and figures given by Stebbing and Norman. 6. On the Marine Fauna of the Cape Verde Islands, from Col- lections made in 1904 by Mr. C. Crossland.—The Polyclad Turbellaria. By F. F. Larptaw, M.A. Cantab. [Received June 8, 1906. ] (Plate LII.* and Text-figures 111-113.) CONTENTS. i. Introduction: p. 705. : ii. Notes on the Specimens in Mr. Crossland’s Collection: p. 706. ii. Literature: p. 718. i. INTRODUCTION. The collection of Polyclads made by Mr. Crossland is of interest not only onaccount of the hitherto undescribed species represented in it, but also because it is the first collection which makes it * Wor explanation of the’ Plate, see p. 719. AT# 706 MR. F. F, LAIDLAW ON THE POLYCLAD [June 19, possible to form any idea as to the characters of the Polyclad fauna of the warmer waters of the Eastern part of the Atlantic. Its close general resemblance to the Mediterranean fauna is obvious. Compared with that of the Western Atlantic, so far as this has been made known to us through the researches of Verrill [1888], it need only be said that the two areas, the Cape Verde Islands on the one hand and the New England Coast on the other, do not appear to have a single species in common. When con- trasted with the fauna of our own coasts, it is evident that there is a limit to the northward extension of many of the species characteristic of the Mediterranean and warmer parts of the Atlantic. Thus Prosthiostomum siphunculus occurs on the Jersey coast, but has never been recorded from the northern shores of the Channel. But at the same time our Polyclad fauna must not be regarded as being merely an impoverished ‘ Lusitanian’ type, there is some evidence that it includes also ‘ Boreal’ species which find in British seas the southern limit of their range. Yor example, Cryptocelides loveni has been taken in the Clyde area, but hag not been found further south than this (I am strongly inclined to believe that the locality given for a specimen in the British Museum, namely Port Phillip, is a mistake). So that it will, I believe, in the future be possible to recognise faunistic areas in the Atlantic for Turbellaria just as such areas have already been delimited for Mollusca. The absence of any species of Psewdoceros, and the presence of several members of the Euryleptide in a collection containing some sixteen species, at once marks a striking contrast with any series of specimens I have had the opportunity of examining from the Indian Ocean, though perhaps further collecting may serve to decrease the distinction. ii, NorEes ON THE SPECIMENS IN THE COLLECTION. Notes supplied to me by Mr. Crossland on his material are here printed between inverted commas. Numbers in square brackets give reference to literature. Numbers between curved brackets () refer to Mr, Crossland’s register of specimens. PLANCCERIDZ. PLANOCERA GRAFFII Lang. Planocera grafjii Lang, Naples Monograph xi., Polycladen, 1885, p. 434. Three specimens. (15-17.) “Translucent brown with sparse reticulum of darker, more opaque lines. Outline very wavy during the act of crawling; the animal uses muscular action in progression and extends and attaches a small part of the margin of the front of the body, then hauling itself along by this. It reminds one somewhat of an octopus when crawling.” ? 1906. ] TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. 707 Dredged 1 fathom, Boa Vista. (15.) This specimen is 25 mm. long and 18mm. broad; much smaller than the Mediterranean specimen described by Lang, which had a length of 65 mm. and a breadth of 40 mm. Except for the difference in size, however, I can find no character which will serve to distinguish Mr. Crossland’s specimen from the type. Two smaller specimens found at St. Vincent at low tide (17) are to be referred here. They are about 5-6 mm. long and, unlike the Boa Vista specimen, quite immature sexually. STYLOCHIDA, STYLOCHUS NEAPOLITANUS (Delle Chiaje) ? Stylochus neapolitanus Lang [1884] pp. 447-449, Taf. i. fig. 7. (9.) “ From the bottoms of lighters; in crevices of compound ascidians ; or in empty lamellibranch shells. Large and thick, and though soft, stiff when alive. The specimens differed in colour. Of two (dated 30—-7-04) the larger is uniformly of a dull brown, under a lens appearing as dull pink with small grey spots; the smaller specimen is brighter, light orange with large grey spots. Of three specimens found together (dated 17-8-04) one is bright orange in colour, the others brown. In all cases the tentacles are dark grey and the ventral surface white.” The largest specimen is about 35 mm. long. I have some doubts as to whether this species is really identical with the Mediterranean S. neapolitanus. The species of this genus are difficult to diagnose in a satisfactory manner, and their structure does not vary in such a way as to facilitate the description and ready recognition of species. Consequently I think it best to record these Cape Verde Is. specimens under this name. They certainly resemble the typical S. neapolitanus very closely and are nearly related to it. LEPTOPLANIDA. SryLOcHOPLANA (?) SARGASSICOLA von Graff. Stylochoplana sargassicola v. Graff [1892] pp. 207-213, Taf. ix. figs. 1-5. “Two specimens, Boa Vista. Dredged in 1 fathom of water.” (15: W... 4.) A widely distributed species, differing to a considerable extent from other forms referred to this genus. LepropLaNa ALCINor Schmidt. Leptoplana alcinoi Lang [1884 pp. 486-489, Taf. 1. figs. 2-5 Several specimens which appear to belong to this species ‘“ from amongst nodules of nullipore dredged in from 5-10 fathoms,” with Oligocladus sanguinolentus. (2. W. 2.) 708 . MR. F, F, LAIDLAW ON THE POLYCLAD [June 19, LEPTOPLANA PALLIDA (Quatrefages), Leptoplana pallida Lang [1884] pp. 459-492, Taf. iv. figs. 2-3. One specimen “ from a bucketful of the incrustations of rocks exposed to surf.” Port Sal Rei, Boa Vista Is. (W. 9.) The specimen is about 15 mm. long and has the uteri crowded with eggs, LEPTOPLANA GRAFFII, sp. n. (Text-fig. 111.) ‘Found amongst nodules of nullipores dredged in from 5-10 fathoms. Ribbon-likeand a strong swimmer. Light colour, only a broad sandy longitudinal mark centrally and ramifying lines. Contracted on killing.” (3.) Text-fig. 111. Leptoplana graffi. x 5. This species, represented by a single specimen, has a body relatively longer and narrower than is found in any other Lepitoplana. Length 25 mm. Breadth 3°) mm. Brain 3 mm. behind the anterior margin. Buccal opening 8 mm. behind the brain. 3 aperture 6 mm. behind the buccal opening. 1906. | TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. 709 The eye-spots have the arrangement which is typical for the genus. There are a pair of tentacle eye-groups, one on either side of the brain, each consisting of four or five large eye-spots. In front of these on either side are a very few (seven or eight) smaller eyes. The musculature of the dorsal body-wall is unusually well developed, especially the oblique inner layer. The dorsi-ventral fibres also are unusually abundant and of large size, The short blunt muscular penis projects downwards and a little backwards into the antrum masculinum. It has_no stylet. From it the muscular ductus ejaculatorius runs forward, rapidly widening to form a prostatic compartment whose walls are lined with a secretory epithelium, but are not chambered. From the anterior end of this chamber the duct runs forward again as a narrow muscular tube, again soon widening to form a vesicula seminalis, which receives at its anterior end the vasa deferentia. The prostate and vesicle are not so clearly segmented off from each other as in most species of Leptoplana; in fact with the conducting part they form a nearly straight tube whose walls, surrounded throughout their entire length by circular muscle- fibres, vary somewhat in thickness; being thickest in those parts of the tube where the lumen is greatest, that is to say in the prostate and in the vesicula seminalis. The antrum femininum, opening close behind the antrum masculinum, passes dorsally into a narrow duct which receives the secretions of the shell-glands, and then, turning backwards, opens after a short course into a large accessory vesicle lined with a vacuolated secretory epithelium. This vesicle contains in the present specimen a quantity of spermatozoa. Just before it opens into the accessory vesicle the vaginal duct is joined on its ventral side by the common termination of the uteri. The shell-glands are very large, disposed in a dorsal and ventral layer on either side of the middle line, converging on the sides of the vagina. They extend outward to the margins of the body. Leptoplana graffi way be defined as a Leptoplana with a very elongated body. Penis without a stylet; prostate unchambered, moderately distinct. Antrum femininum non-muscular ; a large spherical accessory vesicle present. ZYGANTROPLANA, gen. Nov. ZYGANTROPLANA VERRILLI, sp.n. (Plate LIT. figs. 1 & 2.) Two specimens. St. Vincent Harbour. (6.) “¢ Amongst weed collected by a diver in 1 or 2 fathoms. ‘Oval with a much waved margin. General colour brown, with broad, nearly colourless margin, the edge itself with a light red- brown tinge. Under side colourless.” Length 7 mm.; breadth 4 mm. The eye-spots are arranged in two rows convex inwards, lying at the sides and in front of the level of the brain. This organ is 710 MR. F. F, LAIDLAW ON THE POLYCLAD [June 19, situated at about a fifth of the total body-length from the anterior margin. ‘The pharyngeal opening is subcentral, and the pharynx is fairly large and similar to that of Leptoplana in appearance (see text-fig. 111, p. 708). ‘The gut-branches are numerous. The male and female genital ducts open together into a small antrum at the extreme hind end of the body. The epidermis contains no rhabdites, but many of the cells composing it resemble in appearance goblet-cells, and are no doubt concerned in the production and excretion of mucus or pseudo- rhabdites. The preservation of the epidermis is unfortunately not good. The basement membrane is readily distinguishable in the sections. Under it lie first a layer of longitudinal muscle-fibres, within these are circular and diagonal fibres not differentiated into separate strata, and lastly, on the ventral side only, an inner longitudinal layer. As is the case in many other Polyclads, the main gut is clearly marked off from the branches by the fact that in its walls are present large numbers of unicellular glands which are not present elsewhere in the alimentary tract. The main features of the anatomy of this species are shown diagrammatically in fig. 2 of Plate LIT. Male apparatus.—The vasa deferentia unite below about the hinder end of the large female accessory vesicle to form a single rather convoluted duct, which runs backwards through a special sheath or casing of tissue which appears to be prostatic in character. in this part of its course the ductus ejaculatorius has a very thin wall. Asit approaches the antrum the wall becomes thicker, and at the same time the tissue surrounding it takes on gradually a definite muscular character. Finally the duct opens at the apex of a small, conical, muscular penis which projects into the antrum immediately below the termination of the vagina (Pl. LIT. fig. 2, ¢). It will be most convenient to describe the female apparatus by following its course in the opposite direction, that is to say forwards. The vagina is a simple non-muscular tube which receives the secretion of the shell-glands near its termination and runs forwards, lying at first above the sheath of the ductus ejaculatorius. It passes beyond this for some distance, nearly as far as the hinder level of the pharynx, there turning first upwards and then backwards, it opens at once into a large accessory vesicle. Just before this it receives the common opening of the two uteri. Beyond the point where the shell-glands lie, the vagina is sur- rounded along its whole course by unicellular glands which form as it were a second outer layer of the wall of the duct. The accessory vesicle is large, non-muscular, with glandular walls. It extends backwards nearly as far as the antrum, and is distended with a granular secretion to such an extent that it presses on and nearly occludes the lumen of the vagina when that lies below it. 1906. | TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. 711 The uteri are crowded with eggs (Pl. LIT. fig. 1, wé.). The ovaries lie dorsally to the gut-branches and to some extent between them, whilst the testes are on the ventral side. The affinities of the genus are doubtful, but seem to me to be most probably with the Leptoplanide, though perhaps some affinity with Stylochocestus may be suggested. Zygantroplana may be defined as follows :— An Acotylean genus in which the body is of an elongate-oval shape, without tentacles. The terminal genital ducts open into & small common antrum situated at the extreme hinder end of the body. Penis small, without stylet, no definite prostate gland. Pharynx subcentral. No marginal eye-groups. The species bears some resemblance to Leptoplana angusta Verrill [1888] pp. 485-486, pl. xl. fig. 8, pl. xliv. figs. 2, 2a, 3, but the latter has, according to Verrill’s figure, more distinct traces of a tentacle eye-group. Z. angusta may perhaps prove to be congeneric with the present species. LATOCESTIDA, LATOCESTUS PLEHNI, sp. n. (Text-fig. 112.) Several specimens “‘ found in deep crevices of nullipore, or in shells, never in the open. The worm will crawl out of its hiding- place at night if kept in a basin of sea-water, and will even leave the water and reach out over the edge of the basin, holding the antericr half of its body horizontally in the air. Text-fig. 112. Latocestus plehni, anterior end. X 9. “¢ Uniformly opaque and rather dark brown in colour. Central line darker. The margins are kept applied to surface on which 712 MR. F. F, LAIDLAW ON THE POLYCLAD [June 19, the animal is crawling. It is about 2 inches long but narrow, and contracts considerably when killed. In appearance it reminds one of a horse-leech, but never swims. It is common everywhere where suitable crannies in the rocks occur.” The arrangement of the eye-spots at the anterior end of the body is shown in text-fig. 112 (p. 711.) The marginal spots form a continuous series round the body. This complete ring of eye-spots serves at once to distinguish the present species from the type of the genus, L. atlanticus Plehn [1896], which is recorded from the same neighbourhood. In fact LZ. plehni resembles much more closely L. argus from the Straits of Malacca. In respect to the structure and arrangement of the internal organs of the body, L. plehni shows no noteworthy departure from that found in the typical species of the genus. CESTOPLANIDA. CESTOPLANA RUBROCINCTA (Grube). Cestoplana rubrocincta Lang [1884] pp. 516-520, Taf. ii. fig. 5. ‘** Under stones at low tide, Boa Vesta. ‘Very contractile.” (3.) A small specimen 30 mm. long, 3 mm. broad. ANONYMIDA. ANONYMUS ViIRILIS Lang (?). (Plate LIT. fig. 3.) Anonymus virilis Lang [1884] pp. 522-523, Taf. il. fig. 4. Dredged amongst nullipores, 3 and 10 fathoms. St. Vincent Harbour. (8. W. 3.) “Pink or brownish pink with a white transparent border. Under a simple lens the central part of the body shows a network of broken light-brown lines, the main lines being radial. Marginal eyes extend half way down the sides of the body (at least). General texture thick and soft, shape broadly oval, margin wavy when crawling.” Unfortunately this interesting species is evidently a most difficult creature to preserve satisfactorily. All Mr. Crossland’s specimens are coated thickly with foreign particles felted together by the copious epidermal discharge. In the second place, they are all extremely contorted, and any attempt to flatten them for examination results in the breaking of the soft body. Two specimens are already broken into fragments in the bottle. Hence I give only an incomplete account of them here. The larger Specimens are about 12 mm. long and 7 mm. wide. In colour, distribution of the eye-spots, and arrangement of the penes (of which there are ten or eleven pairs) they resemble closely Lang’s type. Sections were cut of a specimen which has the body crowded with large eggs, and contains spermatozoa in the ‘ Samenblase ” of the penial structures, although the numerous testes have not reached a condition of maturity. 1906.] TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS, 713 The structure of the penes and other organs of the body, such as the musculature, shows a complete agreement with that found by Lang in his specimens. A difference is, however, to be met with in the case of the epidermal structures. Lang has described nematocysts or needle-like bodies of four types, grouped in batteries, occurring in the dorsal epithelium, In a young specimen which I have examined I could find no structures of this type. In sections of the more mature specimen referred to above are spindle-shaped bodies, each of which has discharged a thread from its outer end, lying in batteries on the dorsal surface (Pl. LIT. fig. 3, f). These are perhaps to be referred to Lang’s fourth type (‘‘ Freie nadeln, an welchen ein Faden spiralig aufgerollt ist”). Both the spindle and the thread discharged from it are deeply stained. A number of undischarged needle- or spindle- shaped bodies occur in the parenchyma, but | have not been able to see any spiral thread inside these. These are the only nematocyst- like organs that I have been able to find in my specimens. As, however, they agree very closely in all other respects with the type of A. virilis, I have not ventured to give them a distinct name. ° PSEUDOCERIDA. THYSANOZOON BROCCHII (Risso) var. CRUCIATUM ¢ Thysanozoon brocchii Lang [1884] pp. 525-536, Taf. vi. figs. 3, 45 von Stummer-Traunfels [1895] p. 161. Several specimens, ‘‘ from under stones at low tide at St. Vincent and at Porto Praya.” (1. W. 7.) ““Drab-yellow with dark grey markings. There may be very little yellow and the general colour becomes a dark grey. Generally, but not in all the specimens, there is a narrow longitudinal white stripe and a broader transverse one at about + of the length of the body from the anterior end.” The specimens vary in size from about 8 to 16 mm. EKURYLEPTIDA. CYCLOPORUS PAPILLOSUS Lang. Oycloporus papillosus Lang [1884] pp. 568-571, Taf. vi. figs. 1, 2, Taf, vii. fig. 5. Under stones at low tide, Porto Praya. (11.) Small, rather rectangular in shape; margin colourless, nearly transparent. The hinder edge of the body is carried folded into a bag dorsally. This specimen is without papille, and in all probability is to be referred to Lang’s var. levigatus. Hallez has described a second species of the genus. The examination of a large series of specimens referable to this genus from the various localities in which it occurs would in all probability reveal the existence of several recognisable races. 714 MR. F. F, LAIDLAW ON THE POLYCLAD [June 19, PROSTHECEREZUS RUBROPUNCTATUS Lang. Prosthecereus rubropunctatus Lang [1884] p. 562, Taf. vii. fig. 5 “From the bottoms of lighters, along with Séylochus.” (12.) “ A very beautiful species.” Four specimens, one of them very young. Length of larger individuals about 13-14 mm.; breadth 6-7 mm. OLIGOCLADUS SANGUINOLENTUS (Quatrefages). Oligocladus sanguinolentus Lang [1884] pp. 580-582, Taf. vii. Tig, “From amongst nodules of nullipores (Lithothamnion) dredged in St. Vincent Harbour, 5-10 fathoms.” A number of specimens. (2. W. 7.) PROSTHIOSTOMIDE. PROSsTHIOSTOMUM DOHRNIT Lang. Prosthiostomum dohrnii Lang [1884] pp. 601-603, Taf. v. fig. 2. Several specimens. (4.) “ Amongst nullipores at low tide, ine at 10 fathoms, St. Vincent.” Ribbon-like, of a translucent yellowish colour, with distinct round spots of a darker tint on the dorsal surface, most numerous medianly. About 2 inches long when fully expanded. PROSTHICSTOMUM sp. One specimen “from nullipore of Bird Rock, St. Vincent Harbour. It is remarkable that so delicate a creature should live in a place exposed to the whole force of the Atlantic rollers.” (W. 13.) The specimen is very small, only 7-5 mm. long. It has the terminal male apparatus developed and the vesicula seminalis full of spermatozoa. There is no appearance of ova, though the position of the female aperture is indicated by the clearly visible shell-glands. There are very few rather large eye-spots over the brain, and some smaller marginal ones arranged very much as in the young specimens of P. siphunculus figured by Lang. Perhaps this specimen should be referred to that species, but as T have neither seen any mature specimens of P. siphunculus from this locality, nor have any intermediate stages of P. dohrnt with which to compare it, I think it best to leave it without a definitive name. DipostuiID2. TRAUNFELSIA ELONGATA, sp.n. (Plate LIT. figs. 4-5 and Text- fig. 113.) “From sandy shore among weed. “ Vermiform, thin, anaien ad about 14 inches long by 54 inch broad, but can contrat to half this length. Riecenib lees to a worm enhanced by the presence of a pair of slender tentacles carried at right angles to the body. Ground-colour white, but, 1906. ] TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. 715 except at the margins, this is largely hidden by granular markings of a sandy colour.” (5.) Text-fig. 113. ph Sketch of anatomy of Traunfelsia elongata. X 12. br., brain; ¢, sucker; gi., glandular organs; ph., pharynx; pr., prostatic organ ; 6, male aperture; 2, female aperture. A very remarkable new species. The preserved specimens have a length of about 12 mm. and a breadth roughly of 1 mm. The anterior extremity is rounded and has lying along either margin for about a millimetre a row 716 MR. F. F. LAIDLAW ON THE POLYCLAD [June 19, of some 20 eye-spots (see text-fig. 113, p. 715). Almost at the extreme anterior extremity there projects outwards on either side a fine tentacle-like process devoid of eye-spots, and evidently very contractile, varying much in length in the different individuals reserved. The brain (b7.) lies about half a millimetre behind the anterior extremity, over it lie a few eye-spots. The pharynx opening is near the middle of the ventral surface; the pharynx is rather elongate and convoluted. The genital apertur es lie close together in the middle line, the female behind the male, about a millimetre and a half behind the pharyngeal aperture. At the extr eme hinder extremity of the ventral surface is a sucker-like organ (c). The cells forming the epidermis are rather flattened and show no rhabdites; some of them contain irregular thread-like secretions. The cells at the margin of the body are more columnar than those on the dorsal or ventral surfaces. The ventral cilia are three times as long as the dorsal. The museles of the body-wall consist of an outer, longitudinal layer, and of an inner, circular layer, both feebly developed: on the ventral side there is a second longitudinal layer internal to the circular fibres, well developed, and occupying nearly one- fourth of the total thickness of the body Gut.—The main-gut extends from just behind the brain to the hinder end of the body, and gives off numerous lateral branches; a branch also passes forward over the brain. Structurally the branches are distinguished from the main-gut by the fact that in them the large gland-cells, which, from their deep staining, are very conspicuous, are scarce or as a rule absent, whilst in the main-gut they are very abundant. Genital apparatus.—The testes and ovaries both lie dorsal to the gut-branches, though sometimes the ovaries extend down between them. In the specimen sectionised both testes and ovaries are mature, and, as in other Polyclads, very numerous. The contorted ends of the vasa deferentia run forwards and inwards to open together into the base of the penis. This is a conical organ which projects backwards into a small cavity, the antrum masculinum. ‘This organ is not muscular, but consists of a spongy mass of tissue through which the duct runs to open at its apex. The projecting part of the penis is lined with an epithelium continuous with the lining of theantrum. This latter opens into a small depression or cup on the ventral surface, and on either side of it is the opening of a very remarkable duct leading from a compound racemose gland of a type quite unlike anything I have met with in other Polyclads. These ducts are lined with columnar ciliated cells; they run upwards and outwards on either side of the penis in a transverse plane, and each terminates by branching into a number of small chambers. These are themselves lined with columnar epithelium of the same type as the ducts, but that forming the roof of each chamber projects more into the lumen of that chamber than does the epithelium of 1906. ] TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. 717 the walls. Consequently each chamber-cavity is in section rather erescentic, with the horns of the crescent directed upwards. Each is connected with the terminal duct by a well-defined stalk or ‘neck.’ On either side there are some fifteen or so of these chambers. Lying over every one of these is a deeply-staining glomerulus- like mass of cells, each glomerulus having an oval or nearly circular outline in section and consisting of a central mass of cells forming a core, and lying round these an irregular scanty layer serving as a capsule. The cells of the central core-mass in one or two cases are wedged at its lower end in amongst the cells of the root of the small chamber lying immediately below them ; in other cases there seems to be a very minute channel leading from the centre of the core into the chamber, but this if it exists is so small that I cannot consider it satisfactorily demonstrated. The cells which make up the core have abundant protoplasm, which stains rather deeply and is very finely granular. Some few of these cells are larger than the others, more deeply stained, and pyriform. Lastly, in the same transverse plane as the two ducts described above, but in the middle line, the lumen of another conical or pyriform organ opens into the ventral depression, behind the penis, directed forwards in this case and armed with a short cylindrical stylet. At the hinder end of this organ, which must be regarded as an intromittent prostate, its lumen ends blindly. The outer wall is muscular, the fibre being almost entirely circular ; and between the muscular wall and the lumen lies prostatic tissue crowded with rather large feebly staining granules. So that the complicated male terminal apparatus consists of (1) a penis into whose lumen the vasa deferentia open; (2) a pair of problematic compound ducts lying on either side of the penis; (3) an intromittent prostate lying behind the penis. Scarcely less elaborate are the terminal parts of the female organs. ‘The vagina opening in the middle line, close behind the depression in which the outlet of male organs lies, runs at first upwards and forwards surrounded by numerous shell-glands. In this part of its course it is widened transversely and has a muscu- lature but feebly developed. Soon the vagina turns backwards, at. the same time becoming narrow and cylindrical, so that the circular muscle coat is relatively, if not actually, thicker. At a level behind its opening to the exterior this part of the vagina receives the terminations of the two uteri, which run nearly transversely from without inwards to join it. Behind this it widens again immediately to form a spherical accessory vesicle whose non-muscular walls consist of a single layer of cubical non- ciliated epithelium. This vesicle contains spermatozoa. The uteri pass outwards and a little forwards from the vagina, until they reach a point on either side well to the outside of the main-gut and at a lower level, where each turns backwards and runs longitudinally. In this longitudinal part of their course 718 POLYCLAD TURBELLARIA OF THE CAPE VERDE ISLANDS. [June 19, each bears some five sessile spherical vesicles, which ‘are non- muscular. The cells lining the walls of these vesicles project inwards, so that the vesicle is almost entirely filled up with a reticulum of protoplasmic material which contains numerous well- defined vacuoles; in these coils of spermatozoa lie, and in two cases sperm-coils are seen passing between the uterus and a vesicle. Traunfelsia is altogether a remarkable form, but undoubtedly is most closely allied to Diposthus. Special features to which attention should be directed are, the presence of marginal tentacles combined with very elongated body; the remarkable pair of compound glands developed in connection with the terminal parts of the male ducts; and, thirdly, the coexistence of an accessory vesicle opening on the vagina with uterine glands along the course of the uteri. The genus shows affinities to Diposthus in the central position of the pharynx and in the structure of the genital glands, particularly in the possession of an intromittent muscular pro- static organ. It bears to Diposthus much the same relationship as Disparoplana does to Planocera, and should perhaps be made the type of a subfamily of the Diposthiide. The genus 7’rawnfelsia may be defined as follows :— A genus of the Diposthiide of a very elongated form. A pair of marginal tentacles present which bear no eye-spots. Hye-spots lie on the anterior margin and over the brain. Pharynx subcentral. Testes and ovaries dorsal. In addition to the penis and intronittent prostate which lies behind it, there is a pair of glandular structures opening on the ventral surface on either side of the penial aperture. Female apparatus provided both with accessory vesicle and with uterine vesicles, iii. LITERATURE. 1884, Lane, A.—Fauna und Fora des Golfes von Neapel. xi. Polycladen. Leipzig, 1884. 1888. Verrity, A. E.—“The Marine Planarians of New England.” Trans. Connect. Acad. vill. pp. 459-520, pls. 40-44. 1892, Grarr, L. von.— Pelagische Polycladen.” Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. vol. lv. pp. 189-220, pls. 7-10. 1892. 1893. GamBie, F. W.—“< British Marine Turbellaria.” Q.J.M.S. xxxiv. pp. 433-515, pls. 10-12. 1893. 1895. Srummer-TRAUNFELS, R. von.—‘“ Tropische Polycladen.” Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. lx. pp. 689-725, pls. 35-37. 1895. 1896. PumHn, M.—‘‘ Neue Polycladen.” Jena. Zeitschr. xxx. pp. 137-176, pls. 8-138. 1895-1896. 1902, Larpitaw, F. F.—‘‘ The Marine Turbellaria” in Gardiner’s ‘Fauna and Geography of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes,’ 1. 3, pp. 282-311], pls. 14, 15. 1902. “A Collection of Polyclad Turbellaria from the Straits of Malacca (Skeat Expedition).” P. Z. 8. 1903, i. pp- 801-318, pl. 23. 1903, 1906. ] ON AN UNKNOWN MARINE ANIMAL. 719 EXPLANATION OF PLATE LII. Fig. 1. Zygantroplana verrilli, sp. n.: p.'709. Appearance of a specimen cleared in cedar-wood oil. X c. 15. 2. Longitudinal section of the same (diagrammatic). 3. Group of nematocyst-like structures from the dorsal epidermis of a specimen of Anonymus virilis (?): p.712. > 500. 4, Transverse section across the body of Trawnfelsia elongata (p. 714) at the level of the penis and accessory male glands (diagrammatic). > 50. 5. One of the accessory male glands more highly magnified. > 450. Explanation of lettering of the Figures. acc.ves., accessory vesicle. | gl., accessory male gland. a@.m., antrum masculinum. | glom., glomerulus. ant., antrum. | nem., nematocysts. al., alveolus of gland. nuc., nucleus of epidermal cell. b.m., basement-membrane. | ov., Ovary. br., brain. | ph., pharynx. cap., capsular cells. | sec., secretion of glomerulus. d., duct. te., testis. d.’, duct epithelium. | ut., uterus. F., threads of nematocysts. | v.d. vas deferens. g-» main gut. | 6, penis. g-, gut-branches. | 9, external opening of vagina. 7. Description of an unknown Animal seen at Sea off the Coast of Brazil. By HE. G. B. Meapr-Wa po, F.ZS., and Micuareu J. Nicoxu, F.Z.8. [Received June 19, 1906.) (Text-figure 114.) The following are accounts of a large marine animal (text- fig. 114, p. 720) seen off the coast of Brazil, copied from the journals made by us during our cruise in the Earl of Crawford’s yacht ‘The Valhalla’ :— “On Dee. 7th, 1905, at 10.15 a.m., I was on the poop of the ‘Valhalla’ with Mr. Nicoll, when he drew my attention to an object in the sea about 100 yards from the yacht; he said: ‘Is that the fin of a great fish?’ I looked and immediately saw a large fin or frill sticking out of the water, dark seaweed-brown in colour, somewhat crinkled at the edge. It was apparently about 6 feet in length and projected from 18 inches to 2 feet from the water. I could see, under the water to the rear of the frill, the shade of a considerable body. I got my field-glasses on to it (a powerful pair of Goerz Triéder), and almost as soon as I had them on the frill, a great head and neck rose out of the water in front of the frill; the neck did not touch the frill in the water, but came out of the water in front of it, at a distance of certainly not less than 18 inches, probably more. The neck appeared about the thickness of a slight man’s body, and from 7 to 8 feet was out of the water ; head and neck were all about the same thick- ness. The head had a very turtle-like appearance, as had also the eye. I could see the line of the mouth, but we were sailing pretty Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. XLVITTI. 48 j June 19, MESSRS. MEADE-WALDO AND NICOLL ON 720 *]IZBAG JO 4S¥OI OY} HO [POON PUL Ope AA~opwayy SASSO] Aq Woos SB PLUTTUY OULIEUE JO TPPPAS PLL SY-4xe], 1906. } AN UNKNOWN MARINE ANIMAL. 721 fast, and quickly drew away from the object, which was going very slowly. It moved its neck from side to side in a peculiar manner : the colour of the head and neck was dark brown above, and whitish below—almost white, I think. When first seen it was about level with the poop of the yacht, and on the starboard side. I made it out by the chart to be in about S. lat. 7° 4’, long. 34° 20’, but I think this is not quite correct. Mr. Nicoll got the correct position from the captain. The depth of the water where we saw it was about 300 fathoms, but quickly went to as much as 1300 fathoms. Since I saw this creature I con- sider on reflection that it was probably considerably larger than it appeared at first, as I proved that objects, the size with which I was well acquainted, appear very much smaller than they really are when seen on the ocean at a similar distance with nothing to compare them with.” E. G. B. Meape-WAtxpo. “ At 10,15 a.m. on Thursday, December 7, 1905, when in lat. 7° 14'S., long. 34° 25’ W., in a depth of from 322 to 1340 fathoms, Meade-Waldo and I saw a most extraordinary creature about 100 yards from the ship and moving in the same direction, but very much slower than we were going. At first, all that we could see was a dorsal fin about four feet long sticking up about two feet from the water; this fin was of a brownish-black colour and much resembled a gigantic piece of ribbon seaweed. Below the water we could indistinctly see a very large brownish-black patch, but could not make out the shape of the creature. Every now and then the fin entirely disappeared below the water. Suddenly an eel-like neck about six feet long and of the thickness of a man’s thigh, having a head shaped like that of a turtle, appeared in front of the fin. This head and neck, which were of the same colour above as the fin, but of a silvery-white below, lashed up the water with a curious wriggling movement. After this it was so far astern of us that we could make out nothing else. “During the next fourteen hours we ‘ went about’ twice and at about 2 a.m. the following day (Dec. 8th), in lat. 7° 19’S., long. 34° 04’ W., the first and third mates, Mr. Simmonds and Mr. Harley, who were on the bridge at the time, saw a great commotion in the water. At first they thought it was a rock awash about 100-150 yards away on the port side, just aft of the bridge, but they soon made out that it was something moving and going slightly faster than the ship, which at that time was doing about 83 knots. Mr. Simmonds hailed the deck, and one of the crew who was on the ‘look-out’ saw it too. Although there was a bright moon at the time they could not make out any- thing of the creature itself, owing to the amount of wash it was making; but they say that from the commotion in the water it looked as if a submarine was going along just below the surface. They both say most emphatically that it was not a whale, and that it was not blowing, nor have they ever seen anything like it before. After they had watched it for several minutes it ‘sounded ’ off the port bow, and they saw no more of it.” Micwae. J. NIcou. 48* 722 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, 8. A Classification of the Selachian Fishes. By C. Tatz Ruean, B.A., F.Z.S. [Received May 29, 1906. ] (Text-figures 115-124.) The classification of the Selachians which I propose is as follows :— Subclass SELACHII.* Series I. TREMATOPNEA.* Order 1. PLEHUROPTERYGII. Family 1. Cladoselachide. Cladoselachus. Family 2. Cladodontide. Cladodus, Syimmorium. Order 2. ACANTHODII. Family 1. Acanthoesside. Acanthoessus, Chiracanthus, Family 2. Diplacanthide. Diplacanthus, Climatias, Ischnacanthus. Order 3. ICHTHYOTOMI. Family 1. Pleuracanthide. Pleuracanthus, Xenacanthus. Order 4. EHUSELACHII.+ Suborder 1. PLEUROTREMATA.$ Division 1. Normpanomet. Family 1. Chlamydoselachide. Chlamydoselachus. Family 2. Hexanchide. Hexanchus, Heptranchias, * Tuse the word Selachii in the same sense as did Miiller in 1846 and as the equivalent of the Sélaciens of Cuvier in 1817 (Régne Anim. ii. p. 121). + The names Trématopnés and Chismopnés, the latter an obvious misspelling, proposed in 1806 by C. Duméril with a wider significance, may be Latinised and applied to the two series of Selachians. i The Petalodontidie and Psammodontidé, comprising several genera from Permian and Carboniferous strat er a, appear to pertain to this Order, but cannot be assigned a definite position. § The Pleurotremata and Hypotremata 1 are equivalent to the Pleurotrémes and Hypotrémes of C. Duméril. 1906. ] SELACHIAN FISHES. (OR Division 2. GALEOIDEI. Family 1. Odontaspidide. Odontaspis, Scapanorhynchus. Family 2. Lande. Lamna, Carcharodon, Cetorhinus, Alopias. Family 3. Orectolobide. Parascyllium,Ginglymostoma,; Rhinodon, Orectolobus, Chiloscyllium, Stegostoma. Family 4. Scyliorhinide. Scyliorhinus, Pristiurus, Pseudotriacis. Family 5. Carcharude. Garcharias, Galeocerdo, Thalassorhinus, Galeus, Trienodon, Triacis, Mustelus, Sphyrna. Division 3. S@UALOIDEI. Family 1. Cochliodontide. Psephodus, Pleuroplax, Xystrodus, Deltodus, Peecilodus, Cochliodus. Family 2. Hybodontide. a. Hybodontine—Orodus, Campodus, Sphenacan- thus, Tristychius, Hybodus, Acrodus, Astera- canthus. b. Paleospinacine—Paleospinax, Synechodus. Family 3. Cestraciontide. Cestracion. Family 4. Squalide. a. Squaline—Centroscylium, Echinorhinus, Oxy- notus, Etmopterus, Squalus, Scymnodon, Centroseymnus, Centrophorus, Scymnorhinus, Somniosus, Isistius, Euprotomicrus. b. Pristiophorine—Pristiophorus, Pliotrema. Family 5. Squatinide. Squatina. Suborder 2. HYPOTREMATA. . Division 1. NARCOBATOIDET. Family 1. Yorpedinide. Torpedo, Narcine, Hypnos,Narce, Temera, Discopyge. 724 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, Division 2. BATOIDEI. Family 1. Rhinobatide. a. Pristinw—Sclerorhynchus, Propristis, Pristis. b. Rhinobatine—Rhynchobatus, Rhina, Rhino- batus, Discobatus, Trygonorhina, Astrodermus. Family 2. Raude. Raia, Psammobatis, Sympterygia, Cyclobatis. Family 3. Dasybatide. Xiphotrygon, Pteroplatea, Urolophus, Dasybatis, Urogymnus, Ptychodus, Mylio- batis, Aetobatis, Rhinoptera, Dicerobatis, Ceratoptera, Ceratobatis. Series I. CHASUATOPNEA., Order HOLOCEPHALI. Family 1. Pyctodontide. Pyctodus, Rhynchodus, Paleeomylus. Family 2. Squaloraude. Squaloraia. Family 3. Myriacanthide. Myriacanthus, Chimeeropsis. Family 4. Chimeride. Ganodus, Ischyodus, Edaphodon, Hlas- modus, Rhinochimera, Havrriotia, Callo- rhynchus, Chimeera. IT am of the opinion that any attempt to apply the rule of priority to the nomenclature of groups such as suborders, orders, &c., unless it is convenient to do so, cannot succeed. ‘To call the Notidanoidei either Paleeonotidani, Diplospondyli, or Opistharthri is to give a misleading idea of the characteristics of the division. Although the Selachians may quite well be regarded as a sub- class of the Pisces, it is not improbable that they will be generally accepted as constituting a class distinct from the true Pisces (Teleostomi) when their characteristic peculiarities are more widely known. The Selachii * may be thus defined :— Craniate vertebrates with jaws. Nasal organs paired blind * Tn the definition and classification of the Selachii I have left out of account the Heterostraci and their supposed allies, primitive fishes of Paleozoic times, as to whose position in the system no two authors seem to agree. 1906. | SELACHIAN FISHES. 725 sacs, each with a single external aperture*. Exoskeleton of dermal denticles which are structurally identical with the teeth ; no membrane-bones. Endoskeleton cartilaginous, the cartilage often calcified. Gills supported by visceral arches and functional throughout life; no lungs¢. Median and paired fins with horny dermal rays$ and with endoskeletal supports in the form of series of cartilaginous rods, the arrangement of which may be variously modified. Vertebral column comprising the notochord and its sheath, simple neural and hemal arches, and intermuscular elements, the so-called ribs; no supra-neural or imfra-hemal arches ||. In all the living forms, the males with intromittent organs, the mixopterygia, which are appendages of the pelvic fins. * The Teleostom: have two nostrils on each side, except in certain specialised Teleosts. It has been supposed that these are homologous with the external and internal nares of higher Vertebrates, the Dipneusti, in which the posterior nostril is included within the mouth, being cited as evidence of this, especially by those who consider them to be transitional between Fishes and Batrachians. The development of these parts in Reptilia, Aves, and Mammalia has also been considered to support this position, the internal nares being the remnants of open grooves originally connecting them with the olfactory pits. From this view I must dissent, regarding the external nares, whether single or divided into two, as homologous throughout the Fishes and the higher Vertebrates, and the internal nares as a new formation peculiar to the latter. In the Dipneusti the absence of preemaxillaries and maxillaries permits the extension of the nasal sacs to the palate; but it appears to me that the posterior extension of the nasal sacs external to functional premaxillaries and maxillaries, so as to carry the posterior nostril into the mouth, is quite impossible. In the Amphibia, the lowest group with true internal nares, their development supports the view that they are a new formation. For a general account, with opposite conclusions, see Balfour, ‘Comparative Embryology,’ ii. pp. 531-538. + The exoskeletal peculiarities of the Teleostomi may be summarised in the phrase “ dermal ossification.” On the body, where flexibility is a requirement, juxtaposed rhombic bony plates or “ eanoid scales,” arranged in parallel longitudinal and oblique series, are developed ; these are found in the more generalised forms, and in the more specialised ones may be variously modified or may disappear. Other parts of the fish become strengthened and protected by membrane- bones, and whether we examine the more primitive members of either the Chondrosteo-Teleostean or the Crossopterygio- Dipneust series, we find in each the same cranial roof-bones, paired parietals, frontals, nasals, post-frontals, and supratemporals, also the parasphenoid covering the basis cranii, the premaxillaries and maxillaries (probably originally overlying labial car- tilages like those of the Selachians), the dentary, angulare and splenial, sheathing the Meckelian cartilage, the circumorbitals, postorbitals and preoperculum, the opereular and subopercular bones, protecting the branchial chamber, and finally a series of bones overlying the pectoral arch and connecting it with the cranium, post-temporal, supra-cleithrum, cleithrum, and clavicle. * The Teleostomi have typically either a lung or its homologue, the air-bladder. § The dermal rays of the Teleostomi differ from those of the Selachii in being more or less ossified ; in order to retain their flexibility, they have become segmented. In the two subclasses the dermal rays occupy exactly the same position with regard to the muscles and the endoskeletal supports, and they appear to me to be unques- tionably homologous throughout both groups. For another view, see Goodrich, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. xlvii. (1904) p. 464. || In the Teleostomi, in addition to the neural arches which are present in the Selachii, we find a series of paired elements which are the dorsal equivalents of the ribs. In the living Chondroste1 and Dipneusti these supra-neurals are attached proximally to the neural plates (basi-dersals) on each side of the longitudinal ligament, and they meet above to form the neural spines. The ribs in the Teleostomes appear not to be homologous with those of the Selachians; in the former group they lie internal to the muscles and bound the abdominal cavity, whilst in the latter they lie between the dorsal and ventral muscles, corresponding rather to the intermuscular bones of many true Fishes. That the Teleostome ribs 726 MR, C, TATE REGAN ON [June 19, The relations of the principal groups may be diagrammatically expressed thus :— Narcobatoidei. Batoidei. ie : | (Hypotremata.) Galeoidei. / /. / / Squaloidei. / Notidanoidei. | Wf arte Yi f (Euselachii Pleurotremata.) 1 | Holocephali. Ichthyotomi. | As \ (Chasmatopnea.) NS 4 Acanthodii, | Ply Pleuropterygii. (Selachii Trematopnea.) The, diagnostic features of the two series may be compared as follows :— Trematopnea. Chasmatopnea. Gill-clefts opening directly to | Gill-cleftsopening into a chamber the exterior. witha single external aperture. Pterygo-quadrate distinct from | Pterygo-quadrate fused with the the cranium. cranium. or infrahemals are the ventral counterparts of the supraneurals is shown especially well in the Dipneusti, the ribs meeting in the caudal region to form hzmal spines, so that the ventral arches are exactly similar to the dorsal ones. In the Chondrostei infrahemal elements are wanting in the posterior abdominal and caudal regions. In fishes with a bony vertebral column the presence of centra and the co-ossification of the neural and supraneural and in the caudal region of the hemal and infrahemal elements usually obscure the structure. I would, then, define the Selachians as having neural and hemal arches only, and the Teleostomes as having not only neural and hemal arches, but also supraneural and intrahemal arches. 1906. ] SELACHIAN FISHES. | 727 Thus in their essential features the Chasmatopnea are the more specialised, but on the other hand they are in some respects more primitive than any other living Selachians. Of the Trematopnea, the Pleuropterygii, Acanthodi, and Ichthyotomi are exclusively Paleozoic, whilst the Euselachii include all the living Sharks and Rays. These orders rest solely on what is known as to the structure of the paired fins, and our views as to their relationships are determined by our conception of the evolution of those organs, which must therefore be discussed. The view which is here taken as to the origin and evolution of the paired fins in the Selachians is as follows :— The median and paired fins were originally continuous and were supported by series of parallel cartilaginous rods—pterygio- phores—set at right angles to the axis of the body. At the line of junction of fin and body each rod became segmented ; thus we get a differentiation into basals—the proximal segments within the body, and radials—the distal segments. The radials often became subdivided, a series of short ‘ marginal” segments being the most constant. Hypertrophy in certain regions and atrophy in others led to the establishment (at least in the Huselachii) of two dorsals, a caudal, an anal and paired pectoral and pelvic fins. In the pelvic fins concentration and fusion of the anterior basalia on each side led to the formation of a pelvis (except in the Pleuropterygii); in the Euselachii these united to form a single unpaired cartilage, and some or all of the remaining basalia fused to form a basipterygium. From their position of greater importance, evolution has proceeded further in the pectoral than in the pelvic fins; the cartilages formed by the fusion of the anterior basalia have grown out dorsally and ventrally to form the pectoral arch, and the normal course of evolution of the fin has been in the direction of shortening the base of attach- ment, thus permitting more varied movements in different planes. This shortening of the base has not been accomplished by a simple concentration and reduction of elements, as in the Teleostean Fishes, but by the outward rotation of the basipterygium, which has retained its anterior articulation to the pectoral arch, but posteriorly has separated from the body and has come to lie at the posterior (inner) edge rather than at the base of the fin. Evolution in this direction has proceeded furthest in the Ichthyotomi, in which the posterior radials have extended round on to the inner edge of the segmented basipterygium. It is now nearly thirty years since Thacher and Balfour * independently put forward the theory that the median and paired fins were of similar origin, both being the remnants of originally continuous fins. The former based his view on the similar structure of the median and paired fins in the Selachians and the Chondrostean Fishes, whilst the latter came to his conclusions * Tam not overlooking the fact that Mivart also put forward this theory ; but his memoir, although more elaborate than that of Thacher, islesscomplete. ‘The re- searches of Dohrn, Mayer, Dean, and others have developed and extended this theory. 728 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, from a study of the development of Selachians. The memoirs of both authors were so complete and so lucidly written that no one who carefully studies them can come to any conclusion other than that the writers had proved their case, and that the theory of Gegenbaur, that the paired fins and their girdles were derived from posterior branchial arches and their rays, had been absolutely and finally disposed of. However, this latter theory still continues to be put forward by the Gegenbaurian school, and most writers of text-books seem to consider it of equal importance with the Thacher-Balfour hypothesis. Some authors who accept the theory of the similar origin of the median and paired fins have shown themselves to be unacquainted with the facts of comparative anatomy and embryology on which it is based, and have consequently failed in the attempt to apply it to the elucidation of the relationships of the various groups of fishes, whilst the writer of a recent memoir (Kerr, No. 32) has so little understood Balfour’s observations as to offer an absolutely impossible explanation of them. Thacher examined the median and paired fins in a number of Selachian and Chondrostean Fishes. According to him, in the former group the dorsal and anal fins are supported by a series of cartilaginous rods, each usually composed of 3 segments [which may be called basals (within the body-wall), radials (in the muscular lobe of the fin), and marginals (the distal segments) |], sometimes of 2 only, sometimes of more. Concrescence of adjacent segments frequently occurs. Each cartilaginous rod has on each side a special muscle, separated from its fellows by the fibrous sheets which run from between the rods to the integument. Each muscle develeps a fiat tendon which les parallel to the surface of the fin and inserts itself in the fascia covering the exterior of the cartilaginous rods and the proximal ends of the horny fibres. Comparison of the dorsal and pelvic fins in J/ustelus canis showed Thacher that they were closely similar. He found that in the pelvic fin the horny fibres, the muscles and their tendons, and the cartilaginous supports were of the same structure and stood in the same relation to each other as in the case of the dorsal fin. The difference consisted only in that the series of basal segments of the supporting cartilages in the dorsal fin remained separate, but were represented in the pelvic fin by 2 basal cartilages—a shorter anterior piece, the pelvis, united to its fellow in the median line, and a longer posterior piece, the basipterygium. He considered that the resemblance of the pelvic fin to the dorsal was at least as close as to the pectoral, and that the formation of pelvis and basipterygium was due to concrescence of the basal segments of the cartilaginous supports, a process of common occurrence in the unpaired fins. In the more specialised pectoral fin the pectoral arch was compared to the pelvis, and the metapterygium to the basi- pterygium, whilst the propterygium and mesopterygium were 1906. ] SELACHIAN FISHES. 729 regarded as formed by conerescence of the proximal segments of the radials articulating with the pectoral arch. The innervation of the paired fins in Mustelus canis was studied by Thacher, who found that the pectoral fin was imner- vated by branches of the first fifteen myelonal nerves. The posterior four (12-15) ran direct to the metapterygium and then divided into dorsal and ventral branches; the next four (8-11) formed a plexus, from which they emerged and then behaved in a similar manner to the ones behind them; the first seven united with each other and with a minute branch of the vagus to form a cord which passed through the foramen of the pectoral arch and then divided to form a dorsal and a ventral branch. In the pelvic fin a considerable number of nerves anterior to the fin took part in forming a cord which passed through the foramen of the pelvis, and posterior nerves ran to the basipterygium and bifurcated in the same way as the posterior nerves of the pectoral fin *. Tn the Chondrostei the dermal fin-rays are more or less ossified and segmented; except for this, the median fins were found to be exactly similar to those of generalised Selachians, and the pelvic fins to be of a more primitive type than the Selachian pelvics, and to bear even a closer resemblance to the dorsal and anal fins, inasmuch as the posterior basals remained separate, and the pelvis, formed by the union of the anterior ones, did not meet its fellow of the other side. Thacher’s main results may be stated as follows:—In Selachii and Chondrostei both median and paired fins consist of dermal rays, muscles, and endoskeletal supports which are similar mm structure and in relative position. The pectoral and pelvic girdles must have been formed by fusion and subsequent out- growth of the anterior basalia. Both median and paired fins are to be regarded as derived from originally continuous fins, perhaps homologous with the median fin-folds and metapleural ridges of Amphioxus. The type of fin termed “ archipterygium ” by Gegenbaur must be secondary, and the suggested homology of limb-girdles with gill-arches cannot be seriously entertained. Thacher must be held to have proved his case from the facts of comparative anatomy alone; but, even if it be granted that the extraordinary resemblances between median and paired fins might possibly have arisen in organs of dissimilar origin, the proofs of so improbable a hypothesis must be substantial. If they wish to be taken seriously, supporters of the theory of the dissimilar origin of median and paired fins must bring forward evidence to show that this similar structure is secondary; and if that be the case we should expect to find signs of it in their * Whilst the Gegenbaurian school have explained the innervation of the pelvic fins as due to their migration, they have all ignored the similar innervation of the pectoral fin, which is absolutely inexplicable in terms of their hypothesis. Moreover, since forward migration of the pelvic fins in Teleostei has not led to their innervation by a number of spinal nerves belonging to the myotomes through which they have passed, why should such an effect have been produced by their backward migration ? 730 MR. 0. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, development. But here we are met with the fact that Balfour independently arrived at the theory of the similar origin of median and paired fins from their similar development in Selachian fishes. In the types which he studied, Balfour found that the median and paired fins first appeared as special developments of continuous ridges of columnar epiblast. In the case of the paired fins this ridge wasa very transitory structure, connecting the fin-rudiments only at their first development, and disappearing before they became at all prominent. In the case of the unpaired fins the connecting ridge attained a somewhat greater development before disappearing. Balfour considered that these facts could only bear one interpretation, viz., that the limbs were the remnants of continuous lateral fins. But Prof. Graham Kerr gathers from Balfour that this ridge connecting the paired fins does not occur in Segylliwm (Seylio- rhinus), and considers that we now know that it is confined to the Rays (Hypotremata), from which he infers that the continuity of the paired fins in the embryo may only be a foreshadowing of their extension along the sides of the body, which is so charac- teristic of this group. Even if this ridge were confined to the Hypotremata, it must be evident that a very transitory structure, connecting the fin- rudiments only at their first development, can have no relation to the secondary extension of the pectoral fins in these Selachians. But Balfour leaves no doubt as to what were the forms in which he observed these phenomena. In the ‘ Monograph of the Development of Elasmobranch Fishes,’ p. 97, a footnote says: “¢ Unless the contrary is stated, the facts recorded in this chapter [Chapter VI.] apply only to the genera Seyllwm and Pristiurus.” After describing the early development of the fins, without reference to special genera, he notes that the connection of the paired fins is especially well shown in Zorpedo. In his wonderful text-book of ‘Comparative Embryology,’ p. 610, we find: “For the remaining history it is necessary to confine ourselves to Scyllium as the only type which has been adequately studied. The direction of the original ridge which connects the two fins of each side is nearly, though not quite, longitudinal, ete., ete.” Tn Balfour's account of the subsequent development the chief interest attaches to the fin-skeleton. The principal points may be stated thus:—The supports of both median and paired fins are segmented from continuous lamine, the segmentation being to a great extent completed before the differentiation of the tissue as cartilage. In Seylliwm the fin-skeleton of both pectoral and pelvic fins in its earliest stages consists of a bar parallel to the long axis of the body, the outer side of which is continued into a plate which extends into the fin and very early becomes segmented into a series of parallel rays at right 1906. | SELACHIAN FISHES. 731 angles to the longitudinal bar, or basipterygium, which is continuous in front with the fin-girdie. Further changes in the pelvic fin consist chiefly in the segmentation of basipterygium from pelvis and of the radials from both. The pectoral ‘arch develops as a vertical bar of cartilage at the front border of the rudimentary fin, and externally to the muscle-plates*; the first part to be formed is that in the neighbourhood of the basi- pterygium, the dorsal and ventral prolongations being subsequent outgrowths. Changes similar to those described in the pelvic fin occur in the pectoral, but, in addition, the basipterygium (metapterygium) rotates outwards and comes to form the posterior border of the skeleton of the fin. Balfour’s conclusions are that the homology of the pectoral metapterygium with the pelvic basipterygium is established, and its primitive position is shown to be within the body- wall and parallel to the long axis of the body. The pelvic fin represents a stage in the evolution of the pectoral fin, and what Gegenbaur conceived to be the primitive axis of the biserial fin is demonstrated to be really the base, so that post-axial rays must be secondary. The mode of development of the fin-girdles is in favour of the hypothesis that they are outgrowths of the basi- pterygia, and the latter may well have been formed from the coalescence of the originally separate basal segments of the supporting cartilages, since in the median fins also these are segmented from continuous lamine. On the other hand, it is ditticult to see how a limb formed on the type of the embryonic limb of Elasmobranchs could be derived from a visceral arch with its branchial rays. The fact that the theory of the similar origin of the median and paired fins was put forward on the ground of their similar structure and development in the living Selachians and Chon- drostean Fishes cannot be too strongly emphasised. ‘To consider the Euselachii and Chondrostei as respectively derived from the Ichthyotomi and Crossopterygii, in which the paired fins are of a more specialised type, is to ignore the evidence on which the theory rests. The order Pleuropterygii includes the Devonian Cladoselachus, which had broad-based paired fins, the pelvics without fusion of the basalia, the pectorals scarcely more advanced in structure 7. Cladodus and Symmorium, of which only the pectoral fins are known, may be placed in this order provisionally, but are perhaps transitional to the Ichthyotomi and Euselachii. The anterior * Balfour has evidently italicised this phrase, because he has shown elsewhere that the branchial bars are developed in the deeper parts of the mesoblast which constitutes the primitive branchial arches, and on the inner side of the section of the body-cavity primitively present in the arches. + The strongly heterocercal caudal fin described by Dean shows that Clado- selachus was more or less pelagic, and lends no support to the view that the broad- based paired fins of this fish were a special adaptation to bottom living. 732 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, pectoral radials articulated to the pectoral arch are present, but there is no fusion of their proximal segments; the basipterygium is short and may be followed by a series of basalia *. The Acanthodii comprise Paleozoic Selachians apparently related to the Pleuropterygu, but with a strong spine at the anterior edge of each of the fins. As in Cladoselachws mixo- pterygia do not seem to have been developed, a feature which distinguishes these two orders from the other Selachians. The Ichthyotomi differ from the Pleuropterygii in that the anterior pelvic basalia on each side have fused to form a pelvis, whilst the pectoral fins are of a highly specialised type, the basalia forming the segmented axis of a biserial fin and the anterior radials articulated to the pectoral arch having been lost. In the EKuselachii the pelvis is a single unpaired piece; basipterygia are formed in both pectoral and pelvic fins, and in the fermer the proximal segments of the anterior radials have united to form two cartilages, the propterygium and mesopterygium. In the Holocephali the paired fins bear a considerable resemblance to those of the Euselachii, but the pelves remain separate, and the piece formed by the fusion of the anterior pectoral radials does not seem to be the homologue of either propterygium or mesopterygium. The order Euselachii meludes all the living Sharks and Rays and may be divided into two very natural and sharply defined suborders, which may be compared thus :— Plewrotremata. Hypotremata. Superior margins of eyes not free. Gill-openings ventral, all below the base of the pectoral fin, which extends forward above them. Anterior margin of pectoral fin joined to the side of the body or head,* the elongate pro- pterygium lying at the base | of the fin. Pectoral radials +» numerous, multisegmented, distally bi- furcated, all reaching the free edge of the fin. Hyes with free margins. Gill-openings lateral, the last in front of or above the base of the pectoral fin. Anterior (propterygial) margin of pectoral fin free. Pectoral radials typically simple and of few segments, usually only the anterior ones reach- ing the free edge of the fin.? Two halves of the pectoral arch well separated above (text- fig. 123, p. 754). Suprascapular cartilages either united to the vertebral column or else above it. * Some authors have placed Cladodus with the Ichthyotomi, a view not endorsed either by Cope or Boulenger. The structure of the pectoral is very similar to that of the pelvic fins of the Ichthyotomi or of Hybodus, as described by Campbell Brown. + See exception in definition of the Lamnide. 1906. } SELACHIAN FISHES. 733 Plewrotrvemata (con.). Hypotremata (con.). Cranium without cartilages at- | Paired preorbital cartilages, tached to the olfactory cap- | attached or articulated to the sules* (text-fig. 118, p. 742). | olfactory capsules, always | present and well-developed | (text-fig. 122, p. 753). Pterygo-quadrate with a process | Pterygo-quadvate without pala- (palato-basal process of Ge- | to-basal process, not attached genbaur) which is articulated | or articulated to the cranium. or attached by ligament to the cranium. Hyomandibular and ceratohyal | Hyomandibular purely suspen- both bearing cartilaginous sory, not bearing cartilaginous vays and supporting the | rays; first hemibranch sup- first hemibranch ; ceratohyal ported only by the ceratohyal, a single cartilage attached to | which is segmented into 2 or the lower end of the hyo- | 3 pieces and is either attached mandibular (text-fig. 115, high up on the posterior edge p- 734.) of the hyomandibular or else | 1s entirely separated from it. It would be difficult to imagine a group more natural or better defined by a number of anatomical peculiarities than the Hypo- tremata. The idea sometimes expressed that the ventral position of the gill-clefts is of little importance, and that Pristiophorus and Squatina would be almost as well placed among the Rays as with the Sharks, is founded on ignorance of the many and striking differences between the Sharks and the Rays. Dr. Smith Woodward divides the Euselachii into two groups, to which he applies Hasse’s terms Asterospondyli and Tectospondyli, the latter including the Rays and the Sharks without an anal fin. This is so far natural in that there can be no doubt that the loss of the anal fin in the Squalidze indicates affinity to the Hypotre- mata, but it does not take into account the resemblances between the Cestraciontide and the Squalidz or the differences between the latter and the Hypotremata. Dr. Woodward has been influenced by the resemblance of Pristiophorus to Pristis and by the Ray-like features of Squatina. The Tectospondyli are also said to be characterised by the presence of large spiracles, even in the most specialised forms; but this does not hold good for pelagic Sharks of this group (e. g. Sommiosus), and Ground-Sharks of the other (e.g. Orectolobus) have the spiracles as large as in the Rays. A supposed difference in the structure of the vertebral column is the remaining reason for the recogni- tion of the Asterospondyli and Tectospondyli, the latter being defined as having the vertebre, when fully developed, with the concentric calcified lamine predominating over the radiating lamine, and the former as having the radiating lamin predo- * Paired processes of the prorbital margin of the ethmoidal region may be present, and in Heptranchias segment off as separate cartilages. 734 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, Text-fig. 115. b. Mandibular and hyoid arches of a Pleurotreme (A) and a Hypotreme (B). A. Squatina angelus (after Gegenbaur). B. Raia clavata (after Parker). pt, pterygo-quadrate; », palato-basal process; m, meckelian cartilage; h, hyo- mandibular; ec, cerato-hyal; 6, basi-hyal; 7, cartilaginous branchiostegal rays. minant. These terms have no practical application ; both groups include types in which the secondary calcification of the vertebral centra has no laminar structure (e. g. Rhynchobatus, Oxyrhina), and others in which it is deposited as a series of concentric lamine (Squatina, Cetorhinus); also in both are forms in which the calcification presents a radiating pattern in cross section (e. g. Narcine, Orectolobus). In order to arrive at a natural arrangement of the Huselachii I have studied at any rate the more important of the numerous memoirs dealing with their anatomy, and wherever possible, and 1906.} SELACHIAN FISHES. 735 especially in the case of genera of doubtful position, I have endea- voured to confirm or to extend the observations which have been made by others. The endoskeleton of the Selachii may be conveni- ently considered under the heads: (1) the axial skeleton, or cranium and vertebral column; (2) the visceral skeleton, comprising the labial cartilages, jaws, and branchial arches; and (3) the pterygial skeleton, comprising the supports of the median and paired fins, including the pectoral and pelvic arches and the mixopterygia. Modifications in structure of these three systems are considered in the account which follows. In all living Selachians the vertebral column is made up of the notochord and its cartilaginous sheath and of dorsal and ventral series of paired cartilages attached to the latter. These paired cartilages consist of principal pieces, neural plates (basi- dorsals) and hemal plates (basi-ventrals), and of intercalary pieces alternating with these, the interneural and interhemal plates. Centra may be formed by the segmentation of the cartilaginous notochordal sheath. The neural plates are typically broad at the base and narrowed above and vertebral in position, whilst the interneurals are correspondingly narrowed below and intervertebral in position. Both neurals and interneurals may meet in the middle line and unite above the spinal cord; or if the interneurals of one side are juxtaposed above the apices of the intervening neurals, then only the interneurals may so unite. A median series of cartilages may sometimes apparently be segmented off from the united paired elements. The neurals and interneurals may not meet above, and in that case the roof of the neural canal may be completed by a longitudinal strip of cartilage, apparently of independent origin, usually, but not always, seg- mented*. Sometimes the incomplete union of neurals and inter- neurals leaves a series of interspaces, which are filled by a median series of cartilagest. The plates composing the neural and heemal arches may each become secondarily segmented into two or more pieces £. The hemal plates correspond to the neurals and are vertebral in position, whilst the interhzmals are intervertebral. The latter are often reduced or absent, especially in the caudal region. In the preecaudal region the hemals remain separate and may bear rib-like cartilages, which are intermuscular in position and probably not homologous with the ribs of Teleostomi. In the caudal region the hemals unite below to form a complete hemal arch, and a median series of cartilages may be segmented off. Primitively the neural and hemal plates are loosely attached to the chordal sheath, but sometimes they become more intimately united with it, and * Tn ayoung Carcharias melanopterus I find an unsegmented median longitudinal rod of cartilage completing the neural canal. + The median cartilages of Scyliorhinus are probably not derived from the neural arches. { Compare Hasse’s plates of various Hypotremata and also Helbing’s figures of Lemargus borealis and L. rostratus. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. XLIX. 49 136 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, they may even grow round it and meet laterally, each neural uniting with the corresponding heemal *. Text-fig. 116. Diagrammatic transverse sections of vertebra of Cetorhinus (A), Ginglymostoma (B), Galeocerdo (C), Narcine (D), Etmopterus (E), and Squatina (#). (All after Hasse.) n, neural arch; h, hemal arch; ¢, calcified double cone; s, secondary calcification ; a, principal uncalcified areas, radiating to the bases of the arches in A, B, and C. * This extension of the neural and hemal plates round the chordal sheath appears to be often inversely proportional to the secondary caleification of the centra. In nearly all the Galeoidei the calcifications extend throughout the centrum and the neural and hemal arches do not extend downwards or upwards, but im Pristiurus, where the secondary calcification has disappeared, they meet round the centra, 1906. ] SELACHIAN FISHES. 137 The notochord may be unconstricted and its sheath unseg- mented, as in the Holocephali and in the greater part of the ver- tebral column of Chlamydoselachus ; or it may be constricted by an annular thickening of the cartilaginous sheath below the middle of each neural’ plate, but without the formation of a calcified ring and with imperfect segmentation, as in Hexanchus; or calcified rings may be formed in the chordal sheath, which usually take the form of double cones, so that the notochord is constricted vertebrally and expanded intervertebrally, whilst the centra are better defined and more completely separated. This type of centrum, with a calcified nomule cone and ee further calcification, as in the Secondar y calcification 1 may be deposited round the El double cone either homogeneously or as a series of concentric lamelle, and may form a complete and continuous investment, or may be broken up by uncalcified areas so as to present a radiating pattern in cross section. ‘‘ Asterospondylic” centra (text-fig. 116, A, B & C) may be defined as those in which the secondary calcification leaves four principal uncalcified areas radiating from the central double cone to the bases of the neural and hemal arches, and are characteristic of the suborder Galeoidei, although in the Scyliorhinide a series of modifications set in which culminate in a complete reversion to the cyclospondylic type in the genera Pristiurus and Pseudotriacis. ‘““Tectospondylic” centra (text-fig. 116, D & F) are those with well-developed secondary calcifications not arranged on the astero- spondylic plan. Hasse ‘has applied this term to the various types of centra found in the Batoidei, and in Squatina and Pristiophorus, and it is impossible to give any definition which will include these and exclude Cestracion. Probably also the so-called asterospondylic centra of some Hybodonts would have to be included. In the precaudal region the vertebre are as numerous as the myotomes, and the neural plate is typically either perforated or notched posteriorly for the exit of the ventral root of a spinal nerve, whilst the interneural is perforated or notched posteriorly for the exit of the dorsal root. In the greater part of the caudal region of all Plagiostomi the vertebre are twice as numerous as the myotomes, and consequently every other pair of neurals and interneurals are not perforated or notched for nerve-exits. To this condition the name “ diplospondyly ” has been applied, and the condition which obtains in the caudal region of the Holocephali, where the vertebre, as ascertained by the number of neurals and interneurals, are more than twice as numerous as the eS as indicated ‘by the nerve-exits, has been turned “ polyspondyly ” by Hasse. The transition from monospondylic to diplospondylic myotomes may be abrupt, as in Squalus, or there may be an intermediate region. Thus in Heptranchias, as described by Mayer, the dupli- cation of the arches precedes that of the centra, a number of these bearing two pairs of neurals and hemals, so that ever y other pair of interneurals in this region corresponds to the middle of a AQ* 738 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, ‘centrum. In JMustelus, according to the same author, the centra become more and more elongated in the posterior praecaudal region, and we pass from normal vertebre to some in which the broader: neural plates bear an extra median cartilage, which are followed by others with two extra median cartilages corresponding to the still broader neural plates; then follow the “ half-vertebre.” In Scyliorhinus, as described by Ridewood, the transitional stages are (1) the broadening of the neural plate and introduction of an extra median cartilage, (2) the division of the centrum and of the neural and hemal plates, (3) the intercalation of an extra inter- neural between two contiguous neurals. Hasse considered polyspondyly to be the original condition, but. it seems more probable that monospondyly is primitive and that diplospondyly and polyspondyly are secondary. Ridewood has suggested that the diplospondyly of the caudal myotomes of the Euselachii may be due to the need for greater flexibility in this. region, and if we add to this the fact that the caudal myotomes are longer than those of the trunk *, we seem to have a basis for a possible explanation of this phenomenon. Some explanation of the structure of the mixopterygia (text- fig. 117) is necessary. These paired intromittent organs, which have been especially studied by Jungersen and Huber, are append- ages of the pelvic fins, and are supported by a cartilaginous skeleton. A groove extending for the whole length of each appendage is the duct of a glandular sac at its base, which may or may not contain a special glandular body. In the Euselachii the skeleton of the appendage consists principally of an aaial cartilage, either a pro- longation of the basipterygium, or more probably the last radial, enlarged and modified. Proximally one to four short segments. of the axial cartilage may be defined, and an accessory cartilage, which appears to be the displaced penultimate radial, is attached to these or to the axial cartilage proper. The groove of the appendage is bordered by a dorsal and a ventral marginal cartilage, which are united basally to the axial cartilage. Articulated to these distally are dorsal and ventral terminal cartilages, and a varying number of additional terminal pieces may be present, some of which may be spinous. Finally, one or more covering pveces,, sheathing the terminals, may be present. The contents of the glandular sac are driven by means of special muscles along the duct formed by the closing of the edges of the groove, and out through the aperture formed by the extension of the terminal pieces, which appear also to have the function, when extended, of retaining the organ in position.. From the structure of the mixopterygia alone Huber has arranged the Huselachii in three groups—the first corresponding to the * In a specimen of Squalus acanthias I find 4 anterior preecaudal vertebra have- the same length as 3 posterior precaudals, 5 posterior precaudals are equal in length to 8 anterior caudal “ half-vertebre,” which again are as long as 6 “ half-vertebra ”’ of the region behind the second dorsal fin; one of these last, in fact, is of the same- size as one of the anterior trunk vertebrae, showing that the myotome is twice as long: 1906. ] SELACHIAN FISHES. 739 Notidanoidei and Squaloidei (except Squwatina), the second to the Galeoidei, the third to the Hypotremata and Squatina. The last- named is admitted, however, to belong as much to the Squaloidei as to the Hypotremata. The Holocephali have mixopterygia which differ considerably from the Euselachian type. Text-fig. 117. Ai oT? yer A\ ees enee 7v 3 Lae 1S -----fi2 | a Wie piss - 35-0 € CL? Dorsal views of the skeleton of the mixopterygia of Somniosus (A), Lamna (B), and Rhinobatus (C). (All after Jungersen.) In C the covering piece has peen removed, and is shown in a ventral view of the terminal part. %, pelvic basipterygium; 7, radials; a, accessory cartilage; y, proximal segments of axial cartilage; ax, axial cartilage proper; g, terminal portion of axial cartilage; vd, dorsal marginal cartilage; rv, ventral marginal cartilage; td, dorsal terminal picce ; tv, ventral terminal piece; ¢ and ¢d,, terminal pieces ; c, covering piece. The Huselachii are the only group which call for a detailed systematic account. Order EUSELACHII. Suborder 1. PLEUROTREMATA. Division 1. NoTIDANOIDEL. Six or seven gill-cleftson each side; a single dorsal fin, not preceded by a spine, opposite to the anal. The Sharks of the two closely allied families which comprise this suborder show a combination of primitive and specialised 740 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19,. features, and form an isolated group without very close relation- ships to other Huselachii. The gill-clefts retain their primitive position, as in the Lam- nide and Squalide, the last being in front of the base of the pectorals. It is probable that their large number is a primitive feature, but the recent discovery of a Pristiophorus with six gill-clefts shows that the importance of this character has. been overestimated. In this case, however, it is accompanied by a very generalised arrangement of the branchial skeleton. The snout is supported by a simple anterior prolongation of the cranium, In Chlamydoselachus the notochord is unconstricted, except anteriorly, where there are a few calcified rings. In Hewanchus the notochord is constricted by annular thickenings of the carti- laginous sheath, there being no calcification. In Heptranchias the notochord is constricted vertebrally by a series of calcified rings, which assume more and more the form of a double cone towards the tail. In the caudal region, secondary calcification may give rise to four, six, or eight short rays, radiating from the central double cones. The dorsal and anal fins have numerous pterygiophores, which in Chlamydoselachus ave rather irregularly arranged and exhibit. some fusion, especially basally. In Hepiranchias the radials are regular and the basals of each fin are fused to form two large cartilages (text-fig. 120, B, p. 747). The pectoral fin has a rather peculiar and quite unique structure. The propterygium is rather small, but broad, and distally forms a convex surface for the articulation of the mesopterygium, which it partly excludes from the pectoral arch. The mesopterygium is. well-developed, and extends to the anterior edge of the fin distally to the propterygium. In Chlamydoselachus it is smaller than in Hexanchus and Heptranchias, and bears fewer radials than the metapterygium, which is composed of a long proximal and a short distal segment. In the Hexanchide the metapterygium consists of a very short proximal and a long distal segment; it bears about as many radials as the mesopterygium. The radials are simple and composed of from three to five segments (text-fig. 119, D, p. 743). The mixopterygia are of the Squaloid type, the axial cartilage being cylindrical and pointed, the ventral marginal cartilage short and distal in position. It is evident that this is a more primitive structure than that of the Galeoid Sharks. The Hexanchoidei resemble the Galeoidei in the absence of fin- spines. They resemble the Squaloidei in the structure of the cranium and of the mixopterygia. These features, which they have in common with the Sharks of the two other suborders, are undoubtedly primitive and indicate only the derivation of all three from. the same stock. Their peculiar characters may be either primitive, as in the case of the vertebral column and the gill- clefts, or specialised, 7. e. the absence of the first dorsal fin and the structure of the pectoral. 1906.) _ SELACHIAN FISHES. 741 Family 1, CaLtamyposELACHID. Body very elongate; mouth nearly terminal. Pterygo-quadrate not articulated to the cranium. Teeth with broad bases and with three slender erect subconical cusps. The only representative of this family is the widely distributed Chlamydoselachus anguineus, the anatomy of which has been described by Dr. 8. Garman. Family 2. Hexancnipa. Body moderately elongate; mouth inferior. Pterygo-quadrate with postorbital articulation to the cranium. Teeth with elongate bases and with a series of compressed oblique cusps. Teeth similar to those of the living Heaanchus and Heptranchias are found in Jurassic and Cretaceous strata. The cranium, visceral arches, and paired fins of the two genera of this family have been described by Gegenbaur, the vertebral column by Hasse and Mayer, the median fins by Mivart and Mayer. Division 2. GALEOIDET. Five gill-clefts on each side; two dorsal fins, neither preceded by a spine; anal fin present. The relationships of the five families which comprise this sub- order may be expressed thus :-— Scyliorhinide. Carchariide. Orectolobide. | Lamnide. | Odontaspidide. In the Odontaspidide and Lamnide the last gill-cleft is in front of or vertically above the origin of the pectoral fin, whilst in the other families it is above the base of that fin. The Carchariide are remarkable for the development of a nictitating membrane, and the Orectolobide for the presence of a pair of oro-nasal grooves. The pterygo-quadrate is not articulated to the cranium, which in the typical forms is easily distinguished from that of other Sharks by the structure and arrangement of the rostral cartilages. These are three rods, of which the lower median one, an anterior pro- longation of the basis cranii, is directed obliquely upwards, whilst the two upper ones, arising from the walls of the olfactory capsules, converge inwards, the three nearly or quite meeting anteriorly (text-fig. 118, B, p.742). This arrangement is constant throughout the Odontaspididee, Lamnide, Scyliorhinide, and Carchariide. In the Orectolobide, all of which have a very short and broad snout, 742 MR. C, TATE REGAN ON [June 19, the three rods may be present, but short and not convergent anteriorly, or they may be entirely absent (text-fig. 118, C). Text-fig. 118. Crania of Scymnorhinus (A), Carcharias (B), and Orectolobus (C), seen from above. (A and B after Gegenbaur, C after Haswell.) 7, rostrum; 7, nasal capsules. The calcification of the vertebral centra, although subject to considerable modifications within the group, is nevertheless of great importance in determining the relationships of the families. The primary calcifications take the form of a series of double cones which constrict the notochord vertebrally. Inthe Odontaspidide, Lamnide, and most Orectolobide, the secondary calcifications, usually deposited as concentric laminee, radiate from these to the periphery in such a way as to leave four principal uncalcified areas running from the central double cone to the bases of the neural and heemal arches (text-fig. 116, A, B & C, p. 736). In Chiloscyllium and in the Scyliorhinide and Carchariide, modifications of this arrangement result from a tendency for these calcifications to start, not from the central double cone, but from points nearer the periphery. In the Carchariide and Scyliorhinide, there may be developed four calcified rays, running from the central double cone into the four principal unealcified areas above mentioned (text-fig. 116, C). The extreme of specialisation is reached in the Scyliorhinid genera Pristiurws and Pseudotriacis, in which the secondary calcification is represented only by a thin peripheral layer. The dorsal and anal fins have their cartilaginous supports typically well-developed, numerous and regularly arranged, with little tendency to fusion (text-fig. 120, A, p. 747). The pectoral fin in the Odontaspidide, Lamnide, Scyliorhinide, and Carchariide has perhaps a more primitive structure than in 1906. } SELACHIAN FISHES. 743 any other Huselachii. The propterygium excludes the meso- pterygium from the margin of the fin. The mesopterygium is small and articulates directly with the pectoral arch, and most of the radials are attached to the metapterygium. In the Odontas- pidide the radials are simple, of moderate length and of com- paratively few segments. In the Lamnide (text-fig. 119, E) they Text-fig. 119. Skeleton of the pectoral fin of Mustelus (A), Pristiwrus (B), Orectolobus (C), Heptranchias (D), and Carcharodon (E). (A after Thacher, B and D after Gegenbaur, C and EH after Haswell). p, propterygium ; m, mesopterygium ; mt, metapterygium. are composed of several segments, and extend to the free edge of the fin; they show a tendency to bifurcate, whilst short distal intercalated cartilages are developed, recalling the structure of the pectoral fin in Cladoselachus. In the Scyliorhinide and Carcha- 744 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, riide each radial consists usually of three segments, the proximal being longer than the middle ones. In the former family (text- fig. 119, B, p. 748) the distal segments are short, in the latter (text-fig. 119, A) they are more or less elongate. The Orectolobide have a more specialised type of fin (text-fig. 119, C), which bears considerable resemblance to that of the Squalide. The pro- pterygium is usually small or absent, and the mesopterygium is enlarged and expanded distally ; it is more or less similar to the metapterygium, from which itis almost completely separated by an oval foramen, and bears about the same number of radials, each of which is simple and formed of three or more segments. The mixopterygia (text-fig. 117, B, p. 739) have a very uniform and special structure throughout thesuborder. The axial cartilage is dorso-ventrally flattened ; it is usually only partly separated from the basipterygium by a single small proximal segment ; the acces- sory cartilage is small, rounded, oval or oblong in shape. The dorsal and ventral marginal cartilages are elongate and extend to the proximal end of the axial cartilage; their free edges are approximated and, in the Scyliorhinide, may even coalesce. The terminal cartilages vary somewhat in number. ‘The glandular sac contains no special glandular body. Family 1. ODONTASPIDIDA. No nictitating membrane; no oro-nasal grooves; last gill-cleft. in front of the base of pectoral*. Rostral cartilages convergent anteriorly. Vertebral centra with secondary calcifications extending from the central double cones to the periphery, leaving four principal uncalcified areas radiating to the bases of the neural and heemal arches. Pectoral fin with small propterygium and meso- pterygium ; radials mostly attached to the metapterygium of moderate length. The genera Odontaspis and Scapanorhynchus, which comprise this family, date from the Cretaceous. They may be distinguished from the Lamnide by the subequal dorsal fins. I have examined a centrum of Odontaspis, which presents exactly the same appearance in transverse section as that of Orectolobus, described by Hasse. Family 2. LaMNIp&. Closely allied to the Odontaspidide, differing as follows :—Last gill-opening, if small, vertically above the origin of the pectoral fin, if wide extending downwards in front of the base of the pectoral. Pectoral radials long, extending to the free edge of the fin. Large pelagic Sharks, with spiracles minute or absent, pectoral fins faleate and caudal strongly heterocercal. The second dorsal fin much smaller than the first and opposite to the anal. Most of the existing genera appear to date from the Cretaceous. * In a stuffed specimen of Scapanorhynchus owstont the last gill-opening appears: to be anterior to the pectoral fin. 1906. ] SELACHIAN FISHES. 745, Family 3. ORECTOLOBID. Allied to the Odontaspidide, but distinguished by several features of specialisation. Oro-nasal grooves present; last two to four gill-openings above the base of the pectoral. Rostral carti- lages, if present, short and not convergent. Pectoral meso- pterygium enlarged and expanded distally, more or less similar to the metapterygium ; an oval foramen between the mesopterygium and metapterygium. Examination of a stuffed specimen of the large Rhinodon typicus leaves no doubt that it is closely related to Ginglymostoma, from which genus it differs only in those features in which it resembles the Basking Shark, Cetorhinus maxinws, 7. e. the small teeth, long gill-rakers, wide gill-clefts, &c., which are obviously of physiological rather than phylogenetic importance. Probably the Mesozoic Palcoscylliwm and Cantioscylliwm should be placed in this family, all the members of which have the dorsal fins placed posteriorly, the first not or scarcely in advance of the ventrals. Family 4. ScyLioRHINIDA. No nictitating membrane ; no oro-nasal grooves; last one or two gill-clefts above the base of the pectoral. Rostral cartilages convergent anteriorly. Vertebral centra with secondary calcifi- cations as in the preceding families or variously degenerated ; when complete, with four short calcified rays extending from the central double cones into each of the principal uncalcified areas. Pectoral fin with small propterygium and mesopterygium ; radials of moderate length, mostly attached to the metapterygium, of 3 segments. Mixopterygia with the edges of the marginal carti- lages united, forming a tube. Scyliorhinus and Pristiwrus comprise Dog-fishes of small or moderate size, either littoral or inhabitants of the deep-sea. The latter appears to date from the Jurassic, the former from the Cretaceous. The spiracles are well-developed, the first dorsal is above or behind the ventrals, and the caudal is very feebly heterocercal. ” I have examined a spirit-specimen of the rare Pseudotriacis microdon, which agrees with Pristiwrus in general form, in the shape and position of the mouth, structure and position of the nostrils and spiracles, in the presence of a fold of skin below the horizontally elongated eye, in the position of the last gill-cleft and the shape of the caudal and paired fins. I have examined one of the caudal vertebree, in which, as in Pristiwrus, the secondary calcifi- cation is reduced to a thin peripheral layer. From other Scyliorhinide, Pseudotriacis is distinguished by the longer and more anteriorly placed dorsal fin. The Cretaceous and Eocene Mesiteia may belong to this family. 746 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, Family 5. CARCHARIID. A nictitating membrane ; no oro-nasal grooves; last one or two gill-clefts above the base of the pectoral. Rostral cartilages convergent anteriorly. Vertebral centra with secondary calcifi- cations, starting near the central double cones and extending to the periphery, forming four principal calcified areas (in the shape of a Maltese cross), between which four uncalcified areas radiate to the bases of the neural and hemal arches; from the central double cones four calcified rays extend a greater or less distance into the uncalcified areas. Pectoral fin with small propterygium and mesopterygium, most of the radials being attached to the metapterygium; radials usually formed of three segments. Mixopterygia with the free edges of the marginal cartilages not coalescent. The first dorsal is usually in advance of the ventrals, rarely (Tricenodon) partly above them. ‘The spiracles are small or absent. The caudal fin is strongly heterocercal in the pelagic genera, but not in the others. The family appears to date from the Kocene and there are no extinct genera. The Hammer-headed Sharks (Sphyrna) perhaps deserve to rank as a subfamily (Sphyrnine). Division 3. SQUALOIDEI. Five or six gill-clefts on each side; two dorsal fins; in the living forms each dorsal fin preceded by a spine or the anal fin absent. The reasons which induce me to include the Cestraciontide and their extinct allies in the same suborder as the Squalide are especially derived from the structure of the median and paired fins and of the mixopterygia, which affords sufficient evidence of the close relationship of these Sharks. Hach of the families defined below possesses certain features of specialisation and, with the exception of the Squatinide, which are modified Squalide, must be regarded as having evolved along divergent lines from the same ancestral stock, which the Squalide, although the anal fin is absent, resemble perhaps more than the Cestraciontide. The rostrum is typically a simple prolongation of the anterior wall of the cranium (text-fig. 118, A, p. 742), and never has the form characteristic of the Galeoidei. The pterygo-quadrate is either not articulated to the cranium (Squalide, Squatinidze), or it may have acquired a preorbital (Cestraciontide) or postorbital (Hybodontidee) articulation. In the Squalide, Squatinide, and Cestraciontide, the primary calcifications of the vertebral column are in the form of double cones which constrict the notochord vertebrally. In the first family secondary calcification is absent, except in Pristiophorus, which has a calcified ring external to and separated from the central double cone. In Squatina a series of concentric calcified lamine surrounds the central double cone. In the Cestraciontide 1906. | SELACHIAN FISHES. 747 the secondary calcification forms a series of radiating ridges, which do not appear to reach the periphery and are directed without relation to the neural and hemal arches. The vertebral column seems to have been unecalcified in the Orodontide, Cochliodontide, and Hybodontine. According to Smith Wood- ward, the vertebre in Palcospinax were ‘ cyclospondylic, sometimes feebly asterospondylic,” and in Synechodus “ distinctly asterospondylic.” In the Hybodontide and Cestraciontide, most Squalide, and at any rate some Cochlodontide, each dorsal fin is preceded by a Text-fig. 120. i Miisecew ALAS TAR SW Maa ae ee oo Skeleton of the dorsal fin of Mustelus (A), Heptranchias (B), Cestracion (C), Squalus (D), Pristiophorus (H), and Squatina (F). (A after Thacher, B and F after Mayer, E after Mivart.) s, spine; 6, basals; 7, radials; m, marginals. spine. There can be no question as to the homology of the dorsal fin-spines in the Cestraciontide and Squalide, since they 748 MR. C, TATE REGAN ON [June 19, are exactly similar in structure and position, and pierce the skin in the same manner, LEach spine is pointed and more or less cylindrical, and is hollow and implanted on a process of a large basal cartilage which supports all or most of the series of radials. This cartilage is deep proximally and has the upper edge oblique ; it may be triangular or four-sided, but with the posterior edge much shorter than the anterior one. A precisely similar arrange- ment has been found in Hybodus. When the spine becomes rudimentary or is entirely lost, this characteristic arrangement of the cartilages may be slightly modified (text-fig. 120, C, D, H & F, . (47). : eee supports of the pectoral fin (text-fig. 121) have typically the following arrangement :—The propterygium bears a single radial and excludes the mesopterygium from the edge of the fin. The mesopterygium is well-developed; it is narrowed Text-fig. 121. Skeleton of the pectoral fin of Squatina (A), Squalus (B), and Pliotrema (C). (B after Gegenbaur.) p, propterygium ; m, mesopterygium; mt, metapterygium. proximally, where it articulates direct with the pectoral arch, and expanded distally, bearing a considerable number of radials. The metapterygium is usually similar to the mesopterygium and bears about as many radials. The radials are simple and mostly formed of 3 segments (Squalide) or 4 (Squatinide) or several (Cestraciontidee). 1906.] SELACHIAN FISHES. 749 This type of fin is found in Squalus, Pristiophorus, and Hybodus. Modifications arise from the fusion of pro- and meso-pterygia (Cestracion), or of meso- and meta-pterygia (Centrophorus), or of all three (Seymnorhinus), and also from fusion of the proximal segments of the mesopterygial radials (Cestracion). The pectoral fin in Sqguatina is very similar to that of Squalus, but the pro- pterygium is directed forward and bears several radials. The mixopterygia (text-fig. 117, A, p. 739) present certain con- stant characteristics. The axial cartilage is cylindrical and distally pointed ; it is separated from the basipterygium by one, two, or three proximal segments; the accessory cartilage, when present, retains the form of a radial with but little modification. Usually the ventral marginal cartilage is confined to the distal part of the appendage, but sometimes (e. g. in Seynmorhinus) it extends nearly to the proximal end of the axial cartilage. The glandular sac contains no special glandular body, except in Sqwatina, which is peculiar also in that a ventral covering piece is developed. Family 1. CocHLioDoNnTID#. Carboniferous Sharks in which “ at least one of the transverse series of teeth encircling each ramus of the jaw is fused into a continuous curved plate.” Dorsal fin-spines often present; vertebral column uncalcified and probably acentrous. Family 2. Hypopontipa. Body not depressed ; five gill-clefts on each side. Each dorsal fin preceded by a spine; anal fin present; pectorals normally shaped. Teeth all separate. Pterygo-quadrate with a well- developed postorbital articulation with the cranium. Paleozoic and Mesozoic Sharks which may be grouped into two subfamilies :— A. Hybodontine. Fin-spines with longitudinal ridges or series of tubercles; vertebral column uncalcified and probably acentrous. This subfamily perhaps includes two groups which cannot, at present, be properly defined. The Permian and Carboniferous Orodus, Cumpodus, ete. are, according to Hastman, characterised by the presence of a single enlarged series of symphysial teeth, presumably belonging to the lower jaw. The Mesozoic Hybodus, Acrodus, and Asteracanthus form a very natural group; the males have paired postorbital cephalic spines. The lateral teeth are elongateand the symphysial teeth few and large (in comparison with Cesiracion). From Hybodus, with conical or cuspidate teeth, we pass to Acrodus, with rounded non-cuspidate teeth, and thence to Asteracanthus, with flattened quadrate teeth. Hxtraordinarily well-preserved remainsof Hybodus have been described by Campbell Brown. They show the postorbital articulation of the pterygo- quadrate and the structure of the median and paired fins. The 750 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, cartilages of the dorsal fin are very similar to those of the existing Cestraciontide and Squalide. The pelvic fin is remarkable for its primitive structure, only 6 basalia being fused to form a basi- pterygium, the posterior 8 being distinct. If Campbell Brown’s interpretation of the pectoral fin be accepted, its structure is quite unlike that of any known Shark. Iam convinced, however, that he has mistaken the propterygium for the metapterygium and vice versa, and that the fin is in reality almost exactly similar to that of Squalus or Pristiophorus. B. Paleospinacine. Dorsal fin-spines smooth. No cephalic spines. Vertebral column with calcified centra. The Triassic and Cretaceous genera Palcospinax and Synechodus have a dentition not unlike that of Hybodus, to which they are evidently related. The postorbital articulation of the pterygo- quadrate has been described in Synechodus by Smith Woodward. Family 3. CestRAcIoNTIDs. Body not depressed; five gill-clefts on each side, the posterior ones above the base of the pectoral fin. Paired oro-nasal grooves. present. Each dorsal fin preceded by a spine; anal fin present ; pectorals normally shaped. Pterygo-quadrate with preorbital articulation to the cranium, the palato-basal process being broad and greatly developed. Vertebral centra calcified. The genus Cestracion, ranging from the Jurassic to the present day, may be regarded as allied to the Hybodontide in so far as both have been derived from a common ancestor with a generalised dentition and without articulation of the pterygo-quadrate to the cranium. The resemblance of the lateral teeth to those of Acrodus most certainly does not indicate any special relationship to that genus, which is clearly a modified Hybodus. Family 4. SquaLip&. Body not depressed. Five or six gill-clefts on each side, the last in front of the base of the pectoral, whichis normally shaped. No oro-nasal grooves. Each dorsal fin often preceded by a spine ;, no anal fin. Teeth small or moderate, sometimes conical or cuspidate, often compressed. Pterygo-quadrate not articulated to. the cranium. Vertebral centra calcified. Of the Squaline, Squalus and Centrophorus appear to date from the Cretaceous. Some authors would place the genera with normal snout and without apparent dorsal fin-spines in a distinct family, but it must be borne in mind that the recent researches of Helbing have shown that rudimentary spines are present. Moreover, in some species of Centroscymnus the spines are very small and do not. even pierce the skin. Jaekel has described the anatomy of Pristiophorus in detail and 1906. ] SELACHIAN FISHES. 751 has shown that it is closely related to Squalus. The anatomy of Pristis has been described by Gegenbaur and agrees in all essential features with that of Rhinobatus. In spite of these researches the writers of modern text-books still seem to believe in some special relationship between these two genera, which resemble each other to a certain extent in the appearance of the saw-like rostrum, but differ so widely in other respects. Family 5. SquaTrInip&. Body depressed. Five gill-clefts on each side, the last in front of the base of the pectoral, which is produced forward external to the gill-clefts, this anterior extension being free from the body. Dorsal fins without spines, situated on the tail; anal fin wanting. Teeth subconical, pointed. Pterygo-quadrate not articulated to the cranium. Vertebral centra calcified. The remarkable genus Squatina, dating from Jurassic and Cretaceous times, is unquestionably related to the Squalide. It has been regarded as a connecting-link between the Sharks and Rays, but in the strongly depressed form of the body and the backward shifting of the dorsal fins it has gone further than the more primitive of the true Batoids, yet without modification of pterygo-quadrate, hyomandibular, hyoid or pectoral arch from the Squaloid type. The gill-clefts are lateral in position and crowded together. The arrangement of the cartilages of the pectoral fin is far more similar to that found in the Squalide than to that of the Batoids. The cartilaginous supports of the dorsal fin are arranged as in the Squalide. The paired przorbital cartilages typical of the Batoidei are absent. In favour of Batoid relationships may be cited the calcification of the vertebral column, which is rather similar to that of the Rhinobatide, and the structure of the mixopterygia, which, although extremely similar to those of Squalus, present two features characteristic of the Batoids, viz. the development of a ventral covering piece and the presence of a special glandular body in the glandular sac. To sum up then :—In all essential characters, 7. e. position of the gill-clefts, structure of pterygo-quadrate, hyomandibular, hyoid and pectoral arch, arrangement of the cartilaginous supports of the pectoral fin, Sguatina is a typical Squaloid. In these and other features it shows specially close relationship to the Squalid. The depressed body, the extension forward of the pectoral fins, and the backward position of the dorsal fins are Ray-like features of specialisation which do not, however, appear to indicate Batoid relationships. Finally, the structure of the vertebral column and the mixopterygia point to real affinity to the Hypotremata, and we must infer that both they and Squatina have evolved from Sharks similar to the Squalide, but in which probably the vertebral column and the mixopterygia had already attained a structure somewhat similar to that found in Squatina. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. L. 50 752 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, Suborder 2. HYPOTREMATA. In addition to the features enumerated above which distinguish the members of this suborder from the Pleurotremata, we may note others which are common to all the members of the group. The body is depressed. There are 5 pairs of gill-openings. The dorsal fins, if present, are not preceded by spines and are placed more or less posteriorly, the first never in advance of the pelvies; the anal fin is wanting. The elongate propterygium is directed forwards and may be divided into several! segments ; it bears a considerable number of radials; the backwardly directed metapterygium is similar to the propterygium ; the comparatively small mesopterygium bears relatively few rays ; increase in length of the region of articulation may or may not be accompanied by a corresponding elongation of the mesopterygium. In the former case (Rhinobatide, Raiidze) one or more radials become distinctly attached to the pectoral arch between mesopterygium and meta- pterygium ; in the latter (Dasybatide) the mesopterygium may segment into two or three pieces*. The mixopterygia (text-fig. 117, C, p. 739) show the following peculiarities :—The axial cartilage ends in a rather broad, flat process with a rounded edge; it is separated from the basiptery- gium by from two to four proximal segments. ‘The accessory cartilage (wanting in Warcine) is radial-like, but more or less flattened ; proximally it is attached to the first axial segment and distally to the axial cartilage proper. One or more covering pieces are developed and there is a special glandular body in the glandular sac. Division 1. NARCOBATOIDEIL. Paired electric organs between the pectoral fins and the head. Rostral cartilages paired or branched. Preorbital cartilages greatly expanded, reticulated or branched, extending forwards to the anterior margin of the snout, articulated on each side proximally to a process of the upper or anterior wall of the nasal capsule and distally to the anterior end of the propterygium (text-fig. 122, B). Suprascapule united above the vertebral column (text-fig. 123, A, p. 754). Family ToRPEDINIDA. Dorsal fins two, one or none, if present situated on the tail ; caudal fin present; pelvics not notched. Basalia of the dorsal fin in small number (3); radials in moderate number (8), simple, of moderate length, not nearly extending to the free edge of the fin. None of the radials of the pectoral fin directly attached to the * Comparison of the pectoral cartilages in Dasybatis and Myliobatis convinces me that this is the true explanation of the structure of the latter. Gegenbaur considered that the posterior segments were formed by the fusion of proximal segments of radials which had become attached to the pectoral arch. 1906. | SELACHIAN FISHES. 753 pectoral arch. Mixopterygia with two proximal axial segments, with the marginal cartilages rather short and distal in position, with three terminal pieces and a large ventral covering piece, and with the glandular body extending nearly to the distal end of the appendage. Vertebral centra with secondary calcifications deposited either continuously or as concentric lamin, forming ridges which show various patterns in cross section*. Text-fig. 122. Anterior part of cranium of Rhynchobatus (A), Torpedo (B), and Dasybatis (C). (A and B seen from below, after Gegenbaur ; C seen from above, after Haswell.) r, rostrum ; 7, nasal capsules; p, preorbital cartilages. The head and trunk, with the pectoral fins, form a smooth subcircular disc, and the tail is rather short and stout, with a longitudinal fold on each side. Division 2. BATOIDETL. No electric organs between the pectoral fins and the head. Rostrum, if developed, simple, unpaired. Preorbital cartilages simple, short or of moderate length, not extending forwards, attached on each side to the lateral or posterior wall of the nasal capsule (text-fig. 122, A & C). Suprascapule united to the ver- tebral column f (text-fig. 123, C, p. 754). * The forms figured by Hasse in some cases bear a considerable resemblance to the Lamnidz, in others to the Cestraciontide. + According to Gegenbaur, who has been followed in this matter by other anatomists, there is no separate suprascapula in these fishes, but a cartilaginous expansion of the fused neural arches, to which the pectoral arch is on each side either simply attached (Rhinobatide, Raiide) or articulated by means of a ball-and-socket joint (Dasybatide). Dissection of several genera has convinced me that this view is erroneous. The neural arches in this region form a ridge to which the suprascapular cartilages are firmly united, the line of junction in all cases remaining quite visible. Although different enough from the Narcobatoid type, the distinction is not so marked as has been supposed. 754 MR. C, TATE REGAN ON [June 19, Family 1. RarNopatipa. Dorsal fins two; caudal fin present; pectorals of varying extent; pelvics not notched. Basgalia of the dorsal fin in small number (2 only supporting the radials of the fin); radials rather numerous, simple, short or of moderate length, not nearly extending to the free edge of the fin. One or more of the radials of the pec- toral fin often articulated directly to the pectoral arch between mesopterygium and metapterygium. Mixopterygia with 3 or 4 proximal axial segments, with the marginal cartilages long and extending to the proximal end of the axial cartilage (in Riinobatus), with three terminal pieces and a large ventral covering piece, and with the glandular body extending nearly to the distal end of the appendage. Vertebral column with the secondary calcification either homogeneous or lamellar in structure, complete or forming 8 rays—a dorsal, a ventral, 2 lateral, and the others between them. Text-fig. 123. B Diagrams illustrating the relations of pectoral arch and vertebral column in the Narcobatoidei (A), Pleurotremata (B), and Batoidei (C). v, vertebral column ; ¢, coraco-scapular cartilage; s, suprascapula. In the Pristine the produced rostrum is armed on each side with a series of teeth and the pectoral fins do not reach the pre- orbital cartilages. The extinct Sclerorhynchus occurs in the Cretaceous and Pristis dates from the Eocene. Inthe Rhinobatinz the snout is not armed with teeth and the preorbital cartilages arti- culate with the propterygia. Rhinobatus of the present day had several representatives in Jurassic and Cretaceous times. The remarkable Jurassic genus Asérodermus should apparently be placed here. 1906. } SELACHIAN FISHES. 759 In all the members of this family the teeth are small and obtuse. There is a more or less distinct longitudinal fold on each side of the tail. The differences in the shape of the body and the development of the pectoral fins are considerable, but from anatomical considerations there can be no question that we are here dealing with a very natural group. Dzscobatus, in which the pectoral fins extend as far forward as in Raia, resembles Rhinobatus in the arrangement of the cartilages of the dorsal fin and in the shape of the ventrals, and should not be placed in the Raiide. The number of radials directly attached to the pectoral arch varies from none in Sclerorhynchus and one in Pristis to eight in Trygonorhina. Family 2, Ramps. Preorbital cartilages articulated to the propterygia. Usually - two small dorsal fins near the extremity of the tail; caudal fin Text-fig. 124. Skeleton of the dorsal fin of Torpedo (A), Rhinobatus (B), Myliobatis (C), and Psammobatis (D). 6, basals; 7, radials. small or absent; pectorals extending to the snout, sometimes confluent anteriorly ; pelvics notched. Basalia of the dorsal fin directed obliquely upwards and backwards, anteriorly imbedded in the body, elsewhere connected by a membrane to the back of the tail; radialia nearly reaching the free edge of the fin, some 756 MR. C. TATE REGAN ON [June 19, of them branched. Some of the radials of the pectoral fin articu- lated directly to the pectoral arch between mesopterygium and metapterygium. Mixopterygia with 2 proximal axial segments, with the marginal cartilages long, the dorsal one extending nearly to the proximal end of the axial cartilage and the ventral one not quite so far, with 5 or 6 terminal pieces and 1 to 3 dorsal covering pieces, and with the glandular body restricted to the glandular sac proper. Vertebral column with the secondary calcification much as in the preceding family, but with dorsal and ventral rays most developed. Principal genera: Raia, Psammobatis, Sympterygia. The former dates from the Cretaceous; the Cretaceous genus Cyclobatis is allied to Sympterygia*. The Ratide are clearly modified from Rhinobatide of the type of Rhinobatus, to which they bear a considerable resemblance. In the dentition and in the presence of two longitudinal folds on the side of the tail similar to the preceding family, but in the greater development of the pectorals and the degeneration of the vertical fins of a more specialised type. Psammobatis is peculiar in lacking a rostral prolongation of the cranium. Family 3. DasyBavTipa. Preorbital cartilages articulated to the propterygia. Dorsal fin absent or else a single small fin situated near the root of the tail; caudal fin present or not; pectoral fins extending to the extremity of the snout; pelvics not notched. Often one or more strong serrated spines on the tail, behind the dorsal fin if this be present. Basalia of the dorsal fin more deeply imbedded anteriorly than posteriorly ; radials branched, extending to the free edge of the fin. Pectoral mesopterygium extending the whole of the distance between propterygium and metapterygium, sometimes segmented into 2 or 3 pieces. Mixopterygia with 2 proximal axial segments, with marginal cartilages of moderate length and distal in position, with 2 terminal pieces and 1 or 2 ventral covering pieces, and with the glandular body extending nearly to the distal end of the appendage. Vertebral column with secondary calcification much as in the Rhinobatide. Several of the recent genera as well as the extinct Xiphotrygon occur in the Hocene. The Cretaceous Piychodus appears to be intermediate between Dasybatis and Myliobaiis. The lateral tail-folds characteristic of the preceding families are usually absent, but vertical folds may be developed. A cartilaginous rostrum is absent. Dissection of a specimen of Myliobatis aquila shows that the generally accepted idea that the pectoral fins are interrupted, leaving the sides of the head free and reappearing at the extremity of the snout, is erroneous. The propterygia have exactly the same form and extent as in Dasybatis - * InSympterygia the pelvis has well-developed prepubic processes, as in Cyclobatis. In the latter the enlarged anterior pelvic radial has been mistaken for a lateral process of the pelvis. ; 1906 _ SELACHIAN FISHES. 157 and bear well-developed radialia throughout. For Myliobatis and the allied genera it may then be stated that the pectoral fins are continuous, but are very muscular and have the anterior edge emarginate. Gegenbaur’s dissection of the pectoral fin in this species shows a radial attached to the pectoral arch between the first and second segments of the mesopterygium ; this is not the case In my specimen, The mixopterygia of Dasybatis, Teniura and Myliobatis have been described by Huber, who has shown that they are extremely similar throughout. BIBLIOGRAPHY. The well-arranged bibliography at the end of Dean’s ‘ Fishes Living and Fossil’ (1895) will be found useful. The more important works dealing with Selachian classification are the following :— 1. Cuvier et Valenciennes, Histoire naturelle des Poissons, I. 1828). 2. cate u. Henle, Systematische Beschreibung der Plagio- stomen (1841). 3. A. Duméril, Histoire naturelle des Poissons, I. Elasmo- branches (1865). 4, Giinther, Catalogue of Fishes, VIII. (1870). 5. Giinther, An Introduction to the Study of Fishes (1880). 6. Haswell, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, ix. 1884, p. 71. 7. Smith Woodward, Catalogue of Fossil Fishes, I. (1889) & IT. (1891). 8. Jaekel, Die Kocainen Selachier von Monte Bolca (1894). 9. Jordan & Evermann, The Fishes of North and Middle America, I. (1896). 10. Smith Woodward, Vertebrate Paleontology (1898). 11. Jaekel, Sitzungsb. Ges. naturf. Fr. Berlin, 1898, p. 44. 12. Bridge, The Cambridge Natural History, Fishes (1904). Cuvier and Valenciennes (1), Duméril (3), and Smith Woodward (7) give general accounts of the changes in classification and nomenclature introduced by their predecessors. Gegenbaur has described the cranium and visceral arches (14), the pectoral arch and fin (13), and the pelvic fins (15) in a number of types. This work has been supplemented by Haswell (6) ; whilst other authors have described the skeleton of isolated genera—1. e., Chlamydoselachus (16), Pristiophorus (17), Scapanorhynchus or Mitsukurina (18), Somniosus (19). 13. Gegenbaur, Unters. vergl. Anat. Wirbelth. IT. (1865). 14. Gegenbaur, op. cit. IIT. (1872). 15. Gegenbaur, Jenaische Zeitschr. v. 1870, p. 448. 16. Garman, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. xii. 1885, p. 1. 17. Jaekel, Arch. f. Nat. Ivii. 1891, p. 15. 18. Jordan, Proc. Cal. Ac. (3) i. 1898, p. 199. 19. Helbing, Acta Ac. German. lxxxii. 1904, p. 335. 798 ON SELACHIAN FISHES. {June 19, _ The following deal with the vertebral column :— 20 21 22 23 . Hasse, Das natiirliche System der Elasmobrachier (1879-— 1885). . Mayer, Mittheil. Zool. Stat. Neapel, vi. 1885, p. 217. . Gadow and E. C. Abbott, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. clxxxvi. 1895, p. 163. . Ridewood, Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxvii. 1899, p. 46. Gadow gives a bibliography which may be consulted for further references. The literature of the paired fins up to 1892 is summarised by Wiedersheim (31), and from then to 1901 by Boulenger (33). The following may be mentioned here :— 24. 25. 26. 27. - 28. 29. - 30. 3l. 32. 33. Thacher, Trans. Connect. Ac. iii. 1877, p. 281. Thacher, op. cit. iv. 1877, p. 233. Balfour, A Monograph of the Development of Elasmo- branch Fishes (1877). Mivart, Trans. Zool. Soc. x. 1879, p. 458. Balfour, A Treatise on Comparative Embryology (1880-81). Dohrn, Mittheil. Zool. Stat. Neapel, v. 1884, p. 161. Mayer, Mittheil. Zool. Stat. Neapel, vi. 1885, p. 217. . Wiedersheim, Das Gliedmassenskelet der Wirbelthiere 1892). re Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. x. 1900, p. 227. Boulenger, Les Poissons du Bassin du Congo (1901). Important memoirs dealing with the mixopterygia are :— 34 35 . Jungersen, The Danish Ingolf Expedition, IT. 2 (1899). . Huber, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Leipzig, xx. 1901, p. 592. Smith Woodward’s Catalogue (7) and the bibliography at the end of his Text-book (10), as well as the references in Zittel’s book (43), should be consulted for the literature on fossil Sharks. In addition to Jaekel’s works already quoted (8 & 11) I may Chie = 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. Al, 42, 43. Traquair, Geol. Mag. 1888, p. 82. (Cladodus.) Fritsch, Faun. Gaskohle Permform. Bohm. i. p. 99 (1889), & iii. p. 3 (1890). Jaekel, Sitzungsb. Ges. naturf. Fr. Berlin, 1890, p. 119. (Finspines.) Dean, Journ. Morphol. ix. 1894, p. 102. (Cladoselachus.) Cope, Journ. Ac. Philad. ix. 1895, p. 427. (Symmorium.) Campbell Brown, Paleontogr. xlvi. 1900, p. 149. (ybodus.) Hay, Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. (2) xx. 1902, p. 63. (Chrono- logical distribution.) Zittel, Text-book of Paleontology (Eastman’s translation), TP. (1902): P. Z. S. 1906, pp. 179-462, were published on August 23rd, 1906. a CoNTENTS (continued). May 29, 1906 (continued). a: aud ‘ Page Prof. R. T. Jackson. Exhibition of a photograph of eggs of the Great Auk and of a long-_ focus lens ...... Pe epee taftts: sia c's ~ «cio ne veal aperepaeueincuiete oratsialel = ata csevelaeipiichank orator aise c 574 The Secretary. Exhibition of the skull of a Wild Boar......-.......-.0. ssc ee eee ee 5t4 ‘Mr. R. E. Holding, Exhibition of the skull and horns of a Wild Irish Goat, of an abnormal skull of the domestic Cat, and of a calculus from a Horse .............-. 54 1. The Rudd Exploration of South Africa.—V. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in N.E. Transvaal. By Oxpriruip Tuomas, F.R.S., and Haroip Scuwann, #.Z.8..... 575 ’ 2. On the South-African Diaptosaurian Reptile Howesia. By R. Broom, M.D., D.Sc., C.M.Z.S., Victoria College, Stellenbosch. (Plates XL. & XLI.) ......--....-+-... S9L 1 3. On the Vascular System of Heloderma, with Notes on that of the Monitors and Crocodiles, By Franx E. Bepparn, M.A., F.R.S., &e., Prosector to the Society .... 601 4. Description of the External Characters of an unborn Fetus of a Giraffe (Giraffa camelo- pardalis wardi), By Franx E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S., Prosector to the Society .... 626 ¥ June 19, 1906. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society's Menagerie during the month Oiled gO wees ci xcallos! «isi cleis’™ ace ate ce dodo ooonas NATE ceil tes iss Sainte Ie cana sak 632 The Hon, Walter Rothschild, Ph.D., F.Z.S. Exhibition of specimens of African Forest-Pigs. 632 Mr. W. Savile Kent, F.Z.S. Exhibition of lautern-slides of the fauna of the Polynesian (Cvaytiaill TRYST SSS Rao aoe RT we a a A 63: Dr. W.T. Calman, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a photograph of a Lobster with abnormal chele. 633 , c . a) fe! . t . . . ve Dr. A. Dugés, C.M.Z.S. Exhibition of a specimen of the Crustacean Palemon jamaicensis. 6: Dr. O. G. Seligmann, F.Z.8. Exhibition of the aorta of a Tiger showing aneurysms .... 634 Dr. C. G. Seligmann, F.Z.8. Exhibition of some tail-feathers from a Common Pheasant showing markings peculiar to both sexes ............eceeceees Vocus (epee) ned ve ctereaa tet « 03D 1. On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with special. reference to the Drawings by Kelaart and the Collections belonging to Alder and Hancock preserved in the Hancock Museum at Neweastle-on-T[yne. By Sir Cuarues Exror, K.C.M.G., F.Z.8., Vice-Chancellor of the University of Sheffield. (Plates XLII-XLVIL) .... 636 2. Description of a new Zebra. By the Hon. Waxrsr Roruscuixp, Ph.D., F.Z.8. ...... 691 3. Description of a new Bush-Buck. By the Hon. Warter Roruscuizp, Ph.D., F.Z.8... 691 4. On the Entomostracan Fauna of the New Zealand Lakes. By G. Srewarpson Brapy, M.D., LL.D., D.Sc. F.R.S., C.M.Z.S. (Plates XLVIIL-L1.) 62 | eC 5. Note on some Crustacea from the Freshwater Lakes of New Zealand. By Cuarurs Cuiiron, M.A., D.Sce., F.L.S., Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, New Zealand. 702 6. On the Marine Fauna of the Cape Verde Islands, from Collections made in 1904 by ; Mr. C. Crossland.—The Polyclad Turbellaria. By F. F. Larpuaw, M.A. Cantab. CHER ISTUL So SRS OSB cle chee acer eae ren an cee ie ose Nat ere eerie 705 4 ‘ 7. Description of an unknown Animal seen at Sea off the Coast of Brazil. By E. G. B. Meapr-Wapo, F.Z.S., and MicuAnn J, Nrcout, F.Z.8. .............. 719: _A Classification of the Selachian Fishes. Bv Ce Linn Rudin vee mr aie Deaieao one LIST OF PLATES, 1906, pp. 463-758. Plate Page AXXV. Cephalophus walherin. on oso. ca se kewl s conn ge + Cone 404 XXXVI. Lepidoptera collected by the Tibetan Expedition.......... 47S NXXXVIT.. 1. Mus forresti. 2. Phascogale ingrami .......+....02.. 586 geet Skull of young Ribbon-fish (Regalecus) 2... ces es ce eee 544 sour \ Howesia br awnt se Po ee Al eee eR Nine Cle Ce 591 XLII. \ XLII. } XLIV. XLV. ‘ Nudibranehs of S. India and Ceylon s..cs.00n eee 6e6 XLVI: | é NEVIT-! XLVILTI. \ ike E ar I \ Entomostraca from New Zealand Lakes ..........--.... 692 or | LI. } Lil. Turbellaria from Cape Verde Islands .................. 705 NOTICE. The ‘ Proceedings’ for the year are issued in four parts, forming two volumes, as follows:— Papers read in January and February; in June. = » March and April, in August. 4 » May and June, in October. « » November and December, in April. ‘ Proceedings,’ 1906, pp. 179-462, were published on August 25rd, 1906. The Abstracts of the papers read at the Scientific Meetings in May and June are contained in this Part. - PROCEEDINGS OF THE GENERAL MEETINGS FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS | OF THE ; ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1906. Paces 759-1052. CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN NOVEMBER ann DECEMBER. APRIL 1907. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT LHEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON: MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CoO., PATERNOSTER-EOW. : [Price Twelve Shiliings. | LIST oe CONTENTS. 1906, pp. 759-1052. November 13, 1906. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Societys Menagerie during the months of June, July, August, and September, 1906 ee ee ee Dr. P. L. Selater, F.R.S. Extracts from a letter of Capt. P. H. G. Powell-Cotton on the Okapi cece eee ete eee teen ee terete cette te ee eee cece ater ee es Mr. Arthur Dicksee. Exhibition of a variety of the Golden Pheasant (Zhawmalea picta).. Mr. Horace C. Beck, F.Z.S. Exhibition of a skull of a Capybara oye abnormal dentition AM eve ule eke: piss 0 ble» 60560) 0/ 0 000 6106 81010 epee ae 0.08 e'6'6 » soe) 'e\.e/ lee ‘n\e © (6 0s) oleh rina sieRaren eam Prof, E. A. Minchin, F.Z.8. Exhibition of diagrams of Trypanosomes from Tsetse-Hies -. 1. On the Embryo of the Okapi. By Prof. R. Burcxaarpr, C.M.Z.S 2. List of further Collections of Mammals from Western Australia, including a series from Bernier Island, obtained for Mr. W. E. Balston ; with Field-notes by the Collector, Mr. G. C. Shortridge. By Oxpvriip Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.8. 3. Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905. Report on the Lurbellaria. By F. F. Lampuaw Page er 759 4. The Rudd Exploration of S. Africa.—VI. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in | the Eastern Transvaal. By Ouprrerp Thomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S., and Haroip Scmwann, RIZAISIS eis Merete on olen siaie aarp a Me eat Sievehe neon eran atetlepione felabtnenenal ai seeeencaces Pere Bsa 5. The Mollusca of the Persian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and Arabian Sea, as evidenced mainly through the Collections of Mr. F. W. Townsend, 1893-1906 ; with Descriptions of new Species. By Jamzs Cosmo Me.viut, M.A., F.L.S., F.Z.S., and Roperr SranpDEn, Assist.-Keeper, Manchester Museum.—Part I]. Penucyropa. (Plates LIII—-LVL.) .. November 27, 1906. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of October sMOOGne se deerme lesicevies eam ibe wie cele stetere cbacaherstiole line Veter elle ete Mr, E. T. Newton, F.R.S. Exhibition of leg-bones of Foxes that had been caught in snares. 1. On some Habits of the Lesser Horseshoe Bat (Rhinolophus hipposiderus). By Tas Rc(Oloyrentiny Nes Runs ade diod Gago oo Goma et ud UmOOmO OD DUGG oH Aa Gr alo to Brinn yp ‘ eeeee » The Marine Fauna of Zanzibar and British East Africa, from Collections made by Cyril Crossland in the Years 1901 and 1902.—On some Species of Solenide, by Evear A. Sourn, 1.8.0., F.Z.8., and H. H. BLoommr oa piss. w) ev e;\ona volewe ele) akeja vere tela tel aie eieis 3. The Duke of Bedford’s Zoological Exploration in Eastern Asia.—II. List of Small. Mammals from Korea and Quelpart. By Oxprie.p Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S. ... 4. On the Anatomy of Centrophorus calceus (crepidalhus Bocage & Capello) Ginther. By W. Woopuanp, F.Z.8., Demonstrator of Zoology, King’s College, London. , (Plates TONS Up UR as Gola 3 sos cloacae roncar Oe Ue tole adie ean ole is Re aa : Sees e esas 5, A Suggestion concerning the Origin and Significance of the “ Renal-Portal System,” with an Appendix relating to the Production of Sub-abdominal Veins. By W. Woop- LAND, E Z.8., Demonstrator of Zoology, King’s College, London ~ CC eC aC ee iC ce ay eee » 886 Contents continued on page 3 of W. TEPER 1906.| THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 759 November 13, 1906. Howarp SAaunpers, Esq., Vice- President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following report on the additions that had been made to the Society's Menagerie in June, July, August, and September, 1906 :-— The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of June were 366 in number. Of these 125 were acquired by presentation and 36 by purchase, 161 were received on deposit, 24 by exchange, and 20 were born in the Gardens. The total number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 192. Amongst the additions special attention may be directed to :— A Collection of Indian Animals presented by H.R.H. The Prince of Wales, K.G., on June 9th, amongst which may be mentioned an Indian Elephant, an Indian Rhinoceros, 3 Tigers, 2 Leopards, 2 Himalayan Bears, 2 Nylghai, 5 Indian Antelopes, 2 Albino Barking-Deer, and 2 Swamp-Deer. A fine pair of Siberian Tigers from Vladivostock, presented by H.G. the Duke of Bedford, K.G., President of the Society, on June llth. This is the first occasion on which this fine race of Tiger has been exhibited in the Society’s Gardens. A young male Banteng (os sondaicus), received in exchange on June 9th. The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of July were 395 in number. Of these 249 were acquired by presentation and 22 by purchase, 66 were received on deposit, 2 by exchange, and 54 were born in the Gardens. The total number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 188. Amongst the additions special attention may be directed to :— A Collection of 81 South-American Birds, including three Violet-tailed Humming-birds (Lampornis violicauda), an Ginone Humming-bird (Chrysuronia anone), new to the Collection, a Sun-Bittern (Hurypyya helias), as well as representatives of many other interesting species, presented by Capt. Albert Pam, F.Z.S., on July 3rd. Twenty-four birds, including four Great Saltators (Saltator magnus) and two Red-breasted Guiana Marsh-birds (Leistes gui- anensis), from British Guiana, presented by Mr. EH. W. Harper, F.Z.S., on July 14th. A Japanese Bear (Ursus japonicus) and a White-whiskered Boar (Sus lewcomystax) from Japan, presented by Mr. Frederick Ringer on July 17th. Thirteen birds, including a Levaillant’s Parrot (Pwocephalus robustus), a White-necked Crow (Corvus scapulatus), a White- Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. LI. a1 760 DR. P. L. SCLATER ON THE OKAPI. [ Nov. 13, bellied Amethyst Starling (Pholidauges lewcogaster), from Sene- gambia, presented by Dr. E. Hopkinson, D.8.0., F.Z.8., on July 20th. An African Rhinoceros (Rhinoceros bicornis), and two Grant's Zebras (Hquus granti), deposited on July 24th. The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of August were 298 in number. Of these 104 were acquired by presentation and 11 by purchase, 96 were received on deposit, 66 by exchange, and 21 were born in the Gardens. The total number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 136, Among the additions special attention may be directed to :— A female Dusky Gelada (Vheropithecus obscurus) from Abyssinia, new to the Collection, presented by the Hon. George Savile on August 16th. A Collection of 53 South-African Birds, including many species new to the Menagerie, amongst which a 'Two-banded Courser (Rhinoptilus africanus), and a Lesser Red-shouldered Glossy Starling (Lamprocolius phenicopterus bispecularis) are of special interest, presented by Capt. Horsbrugh, F.Z.S., on August 7th. The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of September were 211 in number. Of these 92 were acquired by presentation and 9 by purchase, 74 were received on deposit, 6 by exchange, and 30 were born in the Gardens. The total number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 319. Among the additions special attention may be directed to :— A specimen of Hamlyn’s Mangabey (Cercocebus hamlyni) from the Upper Congo, new to the Collection, deposited on Sept. 18th. A specimen of Chapman’s Squirrel (Scvwrus chapmani) from Trinidad, new to the Collection, presented on Sept. 22nd by Mr. A. Giuseppi. A specimen of a new local race of the Serow (Capricornis sumatrensis) from Selangore, new to the Collection, presented on Sept. 13th by the Government of Selangore. A specimen of the Chilian Mocking-bird (JZimus thenca) from Chile, new to the Collection, deposited on Sept. 28th. Dr. P. L. Sclater, F.R.S., read some extracts from a letter of Capt. P. H. G. Powell-Cotton, F.Z.S., about the Okapi (Okapia johnstont), published in ‘The Times’ of Sept. 27th, 1906, and made the following remarks :— In his very interesting letter to ‘The Times’ on the Okapi, Capt. Powell-Cotton states that he fancies “there must be some misunderstanding as to Dr. David having himself hunted the Okapi in its native wilds.” To this I reply that Dr. David certainly claims to have performed this feat, as I have already eS 1906. | ON ABNORMAL DENTITION IN A CAPYBARA. 761 stated to this Society (see P.Z.8. 1904, vol. ii. p. 180). In his letter published in the ‘ Basler Nachrichten’ of May 22nd, 1904 (of which I produce a copy), Dr. David distinctly says—‘“ Also, Ende November schoss ich (als erster Weisser) eine Okapia.” Why the statement of Capt. Powell-Cotton’s native hunter (who alleges that he shot the specimens sent home by Dr. David) should be preferred to that of a European scientific man, I cannot under- stand. The stories of native Africans on such subjects are not always reliable. IT may add that I have examined most of the accessible speci- mens of the Okapi as yet received in Europe, including the very fine male example recently mounted by Mr. Rowland Ward, and am strongly of opinion that there are no sufficient grounds for considering that there is more than one species of Okapi (Okapia johnstoni). The O. liebrechtsi of Major* and O, erikssoni of Lankester f are, I believe, based upon individual variations. Mr. Arthur Dicksee exhibited a strange variety of the cock Golden Pheasant (Zhawmalea picta) that he himself had bred in 1905, the colouring of which was about half way between the normal colour of the first and second moults, with the exception of the fact that the back was a most brilliant scarlet. Mr. Dicksee considered this to be a case of arrested development and believed that the bird would come correctly to colour at the next moult, Mr. Horace C. Beck, F.Z.S., exhibited a skull of a Capybara (Hydrocherus capybara) 11 which the first premolar of the left side of the lower jaw had overgrown in such a way as to chamfer off the corresponding edge in the upper jaw, and also to cut away a considerable portion of the bone. The lower tooth was extremely loose in its socket, but this may have been caused by the pushing-out effect of the two chamfered edges of the teeth. The whole skull showed considerable signs of disease. Perfo- rations were present through the outer lamina of the ramus into the cavity of the last molar on each side, and several of the other teeth showed signs of decay. Prof. EK. A. Minchin, F.Z.8., exhibited some diagrams of Trypa- nosomes from T'setse-flies and made remarks on the dissemination of diseases by these insects. The following papers were read :— * P. Z.S. 1902, vol. 1. pp. 72, 343. + Trans. Z. S. vol. xvi. p. 279; Ann. & Mag. N. H. x. (ser. 7) p. 417; P. Z.S. 1903, vol. 11. p. 338. b1* 762 ON AN EMBRYO OF THE OKAPI. | Nov. 13, 1. On the Embryo of the Okapi. By Prof. R. Burcksarprt, C.M.ZS. [Received July 9, 1906. | (Text-figure 125.) Dr. I. David* on his last expedition shot two Okapis in the forests of Semliki. In one, which was a female, he examined the uterus, and was fortunate enough to find an embryo, which he removed and preserved in spirit. He brought this rare spe- cimen to me, his former teacher in embryology, with the wish that I should give a description of it. Unfortunately, the object is in an early stage and not in good enough preservation for sections to be made. I can therefore only give the accompanying sketch showing the outlines and some details of its external features. Embryo of Okapi, probably about one month old. xX 3. The embryo corresponds to that of the Pig, fig. 26 of Keibel’s ‘Normentafeln zur Entwicklungsgeschichte’ (i.), or of a Deer (Sakurai, ibidem, vi. fig. 31), or of a Sheep of about one month (R. Bonnet, Grundr. Entwicklungsgesch. Haussaugetiere, fig. 68). So it is likely that it is not less than one month old, but as we do not know if it may persist at the same stage for a certain time like that of the Sheep, we cannot determine whether it is some weeks older. It is a single one, as in the Giraffe, which also produces only one at a birth. The sketch gives the Okapi embryo from the right side enlarged 3 times, together with a part of the egg- membranes. The head, in comparison with that of a human embryo of the same stage, is rather small. In it may be distin- guished the eye with the pigmented choroid, the lens and the primitive eyelid-walls. Behind the head the ear is to be seen, * See Sclater, P. Z.S. 1904, vol. 11. p. 180. 1906.] ON MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. 763. which shows already a membranous and somewhat pointed; fold directed backwards, the future concha. Between the prominence produced by the liver and the abdomen in genera! on the one side and the snout on the other, appears the fore-leg bent downwards. On the surface of the abdomen slight traces of 8 or 9 ribs may be observed. The hind-leg is not very clear, as parts of the membranes have dried with it. The tail is rather long and disappears in the membranes. Three characters may be pointed out as especially ungulate:—1, the small size of the head; 2, the length of the fore- leg, which distinguishes also sheep and deer from pig embryos of the same stage; 3, the length of the tail. I am obliged not only to De I. David, but also to Prof. F. Keibel, who kindly verified my statements. 2. List of further Collections of Mammals from Western Australia, including a series from Bernier Island, obtained for Mr. W. E. Balston; with Field-notes by the Collector, Mr. G. C. Shortridge. By Onprizip Tuomas, F'.R.S. [Received August 18, 1906. | In the March number of the ‘ Proceedings’* I gave a list of a number of mammals obtained in 8.W. Acustmalia, by Mr. G. C. Shortridge, who had been commissioned for the purpose by Mr. W.E. Balston, by whom a complete series has been presented to our National Museum. In making his first collection Mi. Shortridge had been disappointed at the rarity or absence of many of the species supposed to be common and characteristic of Western Australia. Fortunately, however, in making the second collection he hit on a region where the fauna still persists in its original state, and he has therefore been able to send home a remarkably fine series of a number of species Bee only represented by faded old specimens of the Gould & Gilbert era, or by the one or two examples picked up as area rarities in regions where the native animals have been more nearly killed out. The places now visited were four in number — Stockpool, Dwaladine, and Woyaline, respectively some twenty to thirty miles to the east of Burnley, Brookton, and Pinjelly, stations south of York on the Perth-Albany railway-line, and Dale River, a similar distance to the west of the line. These localities are all in the upper part of the watershed of the River Avon, in the county of the same name, about 117° E. and between 30° and BIS Finally, Mr. Shortridge paid a visit to Bernier Island, off * P.Z.S. 1906, p. 460. 764 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [ Nov. 13, Shark’s Bay, a locality interesting for many reasons, and the specimens obtained there are included in an appendix to the present paper. The series of specimens amounts to about 400, a number indicative of a vast amount of energy and hard work on the part of Mr. Shortridge and of the friend who accompanied him, Mr. John W. Bell. Mr. Shortridge’s field-notes on the species occupy the greater part of the present paper, and are of much value as putting on record the status of each animal at the present time. Every species obtained in either the first or second collection is men- tioned, as the field-notes ‘apply to both; but the record of the specimens sent only refers to the second collection, a list of the first having been already published. One novelty only from the mainland now needs description, a Rat allied to Mus lineolatus of Eastern Australia. Two of the Bernier Island specimens also require new names. It may be noted that before Mr. Shortridge’s expedition only two Bats, Vyctophilus timoriensis and Vespertilio pumilus, were recognised as occurring in Western Australia. This number-.is now raised to ten by the capture there of Pipistrellus tasmaniensis, Chalinolobus gouldi and morio, and Nyctinomus australis and planiceps, by the discovery of Pipistrellus regulus and Scoteinus balstonit, and by the recognition of Vyctophilus geoffroyi as a valid species. 1. NycCTOPHILUS TIMORIENSIS Geoff. 2. NycrorpuHiILus GEOFFROYI Leach. 3. VESPERTILIO PUMILUS Gray. 7 specimens from Dwaladine, Woyaline, and Dale River. 4, PrPIstRELLUS REGULUS Thos. . PIPISTRELLUS TASMANIENSIS Gould. 3. 503. Dwaladine. On 6. CHALINOLOBUS GOULDI Gray. 1] specimens from Dwaladine and Dale River. “Very plentiful in the districts between Beverley and Kalgurlh, extending as far eastward as Laverton, where it is not quite so common. ‘“‘ Native name, ‘Tarding’ (applicable to all bats).”—G. C_S. 7. CHALINOLOBUS MoRIO Gray. go. 479. Dwaladine. 8. SCOTEINUS BALSTONT Thos. 9. NyYCTINOMUS AUSTRALIS Gray. 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. 765 10. NycTrnomus PLANICEPS Peters. Nyctinomus wileowt Kreftt; NV. petersi Leche. 12 from Dwaladine and Dale River. “The specimens obtained were always flying over water.” — GAGs: This Bat is an addition to the West Australian list, all previous examples having come from the south and east. It differs by its flattened head from V. norfolcensis Gray, to which Dobson assigned it. He stated at the same time that Gray’s species had six lower incisors, but this is not the case in any of these small Australasian Vyctinomi, as I have proved by the examination of a considerable number of specimens, including Gray’s type of norfolcensis, a typical example of wilcoxt, and a co-type of peters. 11. Cants prnco Blum. “ Apparently occurring throughout the South-west, but very much thinned out in the farming districts on account of their being very destructive to stock. ‘“‘ Native names, ‘ Yarging,’ ‘ Dwert.’ ”—G. CLS. 12. Hypromys FruLicinosus Gould. 3 from Dale River. “Very plentiful throughout the South-west, near rivers and swamps, not extending very far inland. It seems to feed to a large extent on freshwater crayfish and shell-fish, the former when used as a bait being very successful. ‘‘ Native name, ‘ Wamp wamp.’”—G. CS. The increase in the length of the hind feet with age is well exemplified by these Dale River specimens, No. 194 having the feet only 59 mm., while in No. 198, an old male, they are no less than 72 mm. in length. 13. Mus rarrus L. “ Plentiful around Albany, where it seems to be the common house-rat. I did not obtain any specimens of Jus norvegicus mn the district.” —G. C. S. 14. Mus Fruscrees Waterh. “A water-vat, frequenting the banks of rivers and reedy swamps; plentiful around Albany.”—G. C.S. 15. MUS SHORTRIDGEI, Sp. n. 3. 542. Woyaline, east of Pinjelly, 970’, 27 April, 1906. B.M. No. 6.8.1.73. Type. ‘“‘ Trapped near water.” —G. CS. Size rather smaller than in Mus lineolatus, about three-fourths that of Mus rattus. Fur long, soft and loose; ordinary hairs of -back about 17, longer hairs about 22 mm. in length General 766 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON | Nov. 13, colour above pale hair-brown with a tinge of buffy, the liming from the dark tips of the longer hairs well-marked. Individually the ordinary hairs are dark slaty for three-fourths their length, their ends dull clay-colour. Under surface similar to upper, but vather paler, without lines of demarcation. EHars of medium length, their proectote black, their metentote grizzled blackish, their edges with a well-defined white rim. Upper surface of hands and feet dull greyish white. Tail rather short, well- haired, the scales quite hidden; dark brown above, dull white below. Skull with many of the essential characters of that of J. lineo- latus, but smaller, the supraorbital margins more sharply angular, the front edge of the zygomatic plate less deeply concave, the palatal foramen much shorter, and the bulle smaller. The palatal foramina are narrowly pointed behind, and barely project between the front of the roots of m’. Mesopterygoid fossa broadly open, the palatal edge well in front of the anterior end of the parapterygoid fossz. Molars constructed as in JL. Kineolatus, but narrower, though broader than in J/, higginsi. Dimensions of the type, measured in the flesh :— Head and body 145 mm. ; tail 110; hind foot 27; ear 20. Skull—gyveatest length 32 mm. ; basilar length 26; greatest breadth 17-2; nasals 11-5 x 3°7; interorbital breadth 4-2; breadth of brain-case 14:4; palatilar length 14:6; palatal foramina 7 x 2 ; length of upper molar series 5-7; breadth of m° 2. Hab. & type as above. This Rat, which I have much pleasure in naming after its ‘aptor, belongs to the peculiar Australian group of which Jus lineolatus Gould, of New South Wales, and J. higginsi Trouessart (M1. leucopus Higg. & Pett.), of Tasmania, have hitherto been the only known members. Within the group the Tasmanian species is at once distinguished from both the Australian forms by its very long tail and narrow molars, while the new western species may be separated from its eastern ally by its rather smaller size, paler colour, and by the cranial characters above noted, of which the most tangible are the narrowness of the molars and the shorter palatal foramina. 16. Mus ALBocinerEeUS Gould. 22 from Stockpool and Dwaladine. “Frequenting sand plains; plentiful east of Beverley. Their burrows differ from those of Votomys geuldi by having sand thrown up around them; they also often seem to fill up the entrance of these burrows when inside—when they are very difficult to detect.” —G. C.S. 17. Mus muscutus L. 5 from various localities. “The common Hcuse-Mouse, besides swarming in all the 1906. | MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA, 767 inhabited districts, seems also to have adapted itself to an entirely out-door life here. I have come across it in every place that I have visited in the South-west, in some places at least cr twenty miles from any house.”—G. C.S. 18. Noromys GouLptr Gould. 20 from Stockpool, Dwaladine, and Woyaline. This fine series is of particular value, as these peculiar native Muride seem to be dying out everywhere in competition with the introduced forms, and the preservation of proper specimens is therefore of much importance. This is the Yapalotis mitchelli of Gould’s ‘ Mammals of Australia,’ but not the original Dipus mitchelli of Ogilby. Finding out the mistake when writing the Introduction, Gould said: “ H. gouldii of Gray will be the correct designation of the animal I have called H. mitchell.” But unfortunately H. gouldii was never described by Gray, its description having been accidentally omitted from the Appendix to Grey’s ‘Australia,’ where the name merely occurs as a nomen nudum. Consequently, on the above sentence, the species seems to stand as gouldii of Gould himself, and the specimen figured by him as H. mitchelli, recently received with the Tomes Collection (BM. No. 7.1.1.135), would be the type. I may here draw the attention of Australian zcologists to the fact that the genus I recently called Ammomys has been renamed Mesembriomys by Mr.T.S. Palmer, the former name haying been preoccupied. “The burrows of this species are very difficult to find, the entrances being very small and often hidden by tufts of grass. Each burrow has two or more outlets which descend perpen- dicularly for some distance and then wind about in all directions, sometimes nearly three feet below the surface. Each burrow contains one pair or family, the usual number of young being four, but occasionally as many as six. Frequenting heavily timbered country and seeming to prefer the neighbourhood of water. This species is said te be migratory, their movements probably being affected by dry seasons. “ Native name, ‘ Gunding.’”—G.C_S. [OrycToLAGus cuNIcuLUs Linn. “The Rabbit has so far been kept out of the agricultural districts of the South-west by a rabbit-proof fence that passes through Burracoppin on the Eastern railway, extending to Israelite Bay on the south. It seems to have spread everywhere east of the fence.”—G. C.S.} 19. MAcROPUS GIGANTEUS Zimm. 13 specimens from Stockpool, Dwaladine, and Woyaline. “The common or grey Kangaroo of the south-west. not 768 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [| Nov. 13, extending very far inland, and replaced in the interior by Macropus rufus. “‘ Native names, ‘ Yongure’ 3, ‘ Woyre’ 2 .”—G.C._S. 20. MAcRopUSs RUFUS Desm. “Occurring in the South-west—from the west of Southern Cross throughout the Interior, evidently not so dependent on water as J. gigantews. The females, which are normally blue, are not infrequently of the same sandy-red colour as the males. ‘“¢ Native name, ‘ Bigoder.’”—G. C_S. 21. MaAcropus trMA Jourd. 14 specimens from Stockpool, Dwaladine, Woyaline, and Dale River. “Generally distributed over the South-west. Not gregarious like the smaller wallabies ; more resembling the larger kangaroos in habits. When hunted with dogs they are very swift and can turn and double with great agility. ‘“ Brush Kangaroo of Colonists, ‘ Quoirer’ of natives.” —G. C.S. 22. MACROPUS EUGENEI Desm. 19 specimens from Stockpool, Dwaladine, Woyaline, and Dale River. “The most plentiful and widely-distributed wallaby in the South-west. Frequenting dense thickets, where they usually collect together in large numbers. ‘“‘ Native name, ‘Tammar.’ ”—G. C. S. 23. MAcRoPUS BRACHYURUS Quoy & Gaim. “Very plentiful around Albany, but not extending very far inland. It seems to be far more coastal in its range than any of the other wallabies, not appearing to occur anywhere at a great distance from the sea; gregarious. Resembling J/. ewgenei in habits. ‘‘ Native name, ‘ Bangcup.’”—G. C_S. 24, PETROGALE LATERALIS Gould. 9 specimens from Stockpool, east of Beverley. “Fairly plentiful among low rocky hills around York and Beverley. Seemingly local and patchy in its distribution ; according to the natives it does not occur among the Stirling Ranges. ‘“‘ Native name, ‘ Boggile.’”—G. (8. 25. ONYCHOGALE LUNATA Gould. 18 specimens from Woyaline, east of Pinjelly. “More local than MJacropus ewgenet and seeming to prefer lower and more serubby thickets than that animal. Very numerous in some localities; it rather resembles the Kangaroo- 1906. | MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. 769 Rats (Letiongia penicillata) in some of its habits, often running into hollow logs when ae “Native name, ‘ Wurrine’ or ‘ Wurrung.’ ”—G. C.S. 26. LAGORCHESTES HIRSUTUS Gould. “Occurring very sparingly on sand-plains to the east of York and Beverley. ono a nelle - the Whistler. ‘“‘ Native name, ‘ Wurrup.’’ OAS No specimens of this species were sent home by Mr. Shortridge, so that in working out the Bernier Island form J have had to trust to the old Gould & Gilbert material. 27. LAGOSTROPHUS FASCIATUS ALBIPILIS Gould. 17 from Woyaline. “Apparently local in the South-west, occurring very plentifully about twenty miles east .of Pinjelly, but only in certain districts, among thick low prickly scrub. Also said to be found east of Wagin and near the Salt nae “Native name, ‘ Munning’ or ‘ Munnine.’ ”—G. CS. For the nomenclature of this Pet see below in the Bernier Island Appendix (p. 774). 28. BErroNGIA PENICILLATA Gray. a from Dwaladine and Woyaline. ‘“ Ver vs plentiful. The Kangaroo-Rat of colonists. Nocturnal. This species simply swarms about twenty miles east of Pinjelly, as it probably does in many other places. Said to be rather destructive to crops. Both this animal and B. leswewri are great scavengers, and collect often in large numbers around camps at night in order to feed on any scraps that may be lying about. They become wonderfully fearless, often approaching within a foot or two of where people are sitting, when they might easily be knocked over with sticks. However, when startled they are marvellously quick, and can double and dodge about with such agility that it is almost impossible for a dog to catch them at night; when put up in the daytime they will generally make for the nearest hollow log or cover. Sleeping by day in a grass nest rather like those made by Bandicoots. I do not think that the Kangaroo-Rats can be said to have prehensile tails, although in the case of ‘ penicillata’ they seem inclined to curve downwards. But Zhalacomys lagotis has this peculiarity still more strongly developed, though not enough to be used for any prehensile purpose. “* Native name, ‘ Woylyer’ or ‘ Woyre.’”—G. C. S. 29, BETTONGIA LESUEURT GRAYI Gould. 17 from Dwaladine, Woyaline, and Dale River. “Very plentiful in most districts throughout the South-west. Making a rather smaller burrow than 7halacomys lagotis, a number 770 MR. OLDFIELD ‘'HOMAS ON [ Nov. 13, often getting together and forming warrens similar to those of rabbits. ‘This species does not seem to occur around Albany. “¢ Boodee’ of colonists and natives.” —G. C. 8, For nomenclature see below, p. 773. 30. TARSIPES SPENSER Gray y “Seeming to prefer damp localities in the vicinity of Ti trees (Melaleuca), among the branches of which they are said to build small round nests, “iilke Dormice.”—G. C_S. 31. Dromrcra concrnna Gould. “Said to be fairly plentiful near Parker’s Range.’—G. C. S. PSEUDOCHIRUS OCCIDENTALIS Thos. ‘“‘ Apparently local, frequenting well-watered districts. Plentiful in some localities. ‘“* Native name, ‘ Wormp.’”—G. C. S. 33. TRICHOSURUS VULPECULA Kerr. 20 from Stockpool, Dwaladine, Woyaline, and Dale River. “ Abundant and generally distributed throughout the South- west, although very much thinned out in the more settled districts ; not extending in any numbers far land. The red patch on the throat only appears in adult specimens, often becoming more suffused over the rest of the body in aged individuals. The black form seems to be local and more plentiful in the coastal districts. The common method of trapping ‘ Possums’ is by a snare set on a slanting stick fixed against the base of a tree. They will always come down a tree on the sloping side, however slight the slope is; and the stick being in a more sloping position still, they invariably run down it and get caught in the snare. “Native name, ‘ Coomul.’”—-G. C. S. 34, THALACOMYS LAGOTIS Reid. 15 from Woyaline. Mr. Shortridge has drawn my attention to the fact that this animal has a distinct horny spur at the tip of its tail, of a similar nature to that in Onychogale lunata. “With the exception of Bettongia lesueuri, this seems to be the only true burrowing marsupial in the South-west. Settongia pemcilata and the Bandicoots dig little holes in the ground in search of roots &c., but they do not live in burrows. It makes a larger and deeper burrow than B. leswewri, and, like a badger, it is difficult to dig for, as it will burrow almost as fast as a man can dig. Although more plentiful near the coast, it has a wide range inland, occurring sparingly as far as Laverton ; ; but for some reason it seems to have become scarcer in the interior than formerly, for while old burrows are plentiful, it seems to have almost left parts of the country where it was once well known— 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. Gal perhaps on account of the succession of droughts inland of late years. “Native name, ‘ Dalgyte.’ ”—G. C. 8. 3). PERAMELES BOUGAINVILLEI MYOSUROS Wagn. 3. 904. Woyaline. For the use of the name myosuros see below, p. 777. “One specimen only was obtained, about twenty miles east of Pinjelly, where it 1s evidently far from common. ‘“« Native name, ‘ Marl.’”—G. C. 8S. 36. IsocDON OBESULUS Shaw. 15 from Dwaladine and Woyaline. “The common Bandicoot of the South-west, not extending inland, or far from permanent water. Hiding by day in a nest on the ground, generally hidden either under a fallen tree or under a tuft of grass. Making for the neaxest hollow log or thick patch of scrub when disturbed. Insectivorous: the stomachs of all specimens examined contained numerous wing-cases and legs of beetles, and orthopterous insects. J believe they also feed to a certain extent on roots and vegetable matter. The native Pig of colonists. ‘““ Native name, ‘ Quaint.’ ”—G'’. C_S. The nomenclature of the Bandicoots is dealt with in my previous paper. DASYURUS GEOFFROYI FoRTIS Thos. 20 from Dwaladine and Woyaline. ‘“ Numerous in some localities, especially where there is rocky country, but killed off as much as possible in the more settled districts, as they are very destructive to poultry. Hiding by day in crevices among rocks, hollow logs, deserted burrows, &e. Arboreal to a great extent; resembling the pole-cats and viverrine animals very much in their habits. “ Native name, ‘Chudich.’”—G. C.S. 38. PHASCOGALE FLAVIPES LEUCOGASTER Gray. ‘“‘ Five specimens obtained around Albany, in thickly-timbered country. This species and the other smaller kinds of Phascogale seem to be more plentiful in the extreme South-west than further inland; the coastal districts, which are for the most part heavily wooded and not so subject to bush fires, probably bemg a better stronghold for the smaller marsupials than the grass country and fanemtitte districts, which are to a large extent annually burnt off between March and April.”—G. C. 8. 39. PHASCOGALE PENICILLATA Shaw. “« Reported from around Beverley and York, but not common ; said to become more plentiful further sonth. Known locally as the Squirrel. Described as being arboreal, and very active among Cte MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [| Nov. 13, the branches of trees. Occasionally found around farms, where they come, according to the natives, after mice. “Native name, ‘ Coming- -coming.’ ”—G. 0. S. 40. SurvrHorsts MuRINA Waterh. ‘‘ Not uncommon around Albany, seeming to be more plentiful in the coastal districts than further inland. Occasionally to be found in the hollow stumps of dead grass-trees (Yanthorrhaa).”— Gi. OS: 41. Myrmecospius Fasciatus Waterh. 10 from Dwaladine, Woyaline, and Dale River. “Diurnal. Fairly numerous throughout the South-west, espe- cially where the prevailing timbers are the white gum (Eucal yptus redunca) and the jam (Acacia acuminata), & getting less plentiful outside that area. It extends very sparingly as far inland as Laverton. When alarmed it will make for the nearest hollow log, but is unable to climb trees. It does not seem to use its teeth much, either in mastication or self-defence. The stomach of one example proved, on examination, to be full of white ants, most of which had evidently been swallowed whole. ‘‘ Native name, ‘ Numbat.’”—G@. O.S. 42, TACHYGLOSSUS ACULEATUS INEPTUS Thos. ‘“ Rare in the South-west, but seeming to become numerous towards the Interior and Nor th-west. Repor ted to frequent hills and rocky country. ‘Their claws are very powerful, and when disturbed they will cling to the ground so tightly that it is difficult to dislodge them. “¢ Native name, ‘ Ningan. ”—G. C. NS. APPENDIX ON A COLLECTION FROM BERNIER ISLAND. After making the fine collection above described, Mx. Shortridge travelled northward by steamer to Carnarvon, and from there paid a visit to Bernier Island, situated at the mouth of Shark’s Bay in 25° 8. latitude. My. Shortridge writes as follows about Bernier Island and its mammals :-—‘** The island is quite small—16 miles by 3— sandy, and covered for the most part rather thinly with low scrub, very like the mainland. J am sending you a jist of the mammals and birds. Lagorchestes, Lagostrophus, and Bettongia swarmed in the island. In the case of Lagostrophus I have never seen any animal, not even rabbits, in such numbers. It has been a particularly dry season, and they were very thin. Food was evidently insufficient for them all, and dead specimens were lying about in all directions. It would seem that they have no natural enemies on the island ; and they breed to such an extent that the island will carry no more, and in times of drought a number have to die. Lagorchestes was not so plentiful. I believe Bernier Island will be the most northern locality for all the three forms. The distribution of 1906. ] MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. ie mammals in this part of the country is very curious, as, with all these Rat-Kangaroos on the islands off the coast, they are entirely absent from the mainland about here (Carnarvon). [It remains to be seen, however, whether there are none on the coast to the south, which a study of the map would indicate as the natural way of entry for the animals of these islands.—0O. 7’.|_ In addition to the species sent, the island possesses Perameles bougainvillet, of which there is an example from ‘ Denham Sound’ in the Perth Museum; but I was unable to secure a specimen, though I picked up a dried skull, and I fear that, owing to the presence of cats, they may have been exterminated.” The specimens sent by Mr. Shortridge from Bernier Island prove to be most interesting ; for in every case they are definably different from the §8.W.-Australian torm to which he supposed them to belong, and from which they would appear to be widely separated geographically. And in this differentiation there 1s one interesting and noticeable point, namely, that all three of the Rat-Kangaroos differ from their respective allies in onecharacter—the comparative shortness of their ears and a correlated reduction of their auditory bulle. When we remember that the forms affected belong to three quite distinct genera, this instance of geographical isomorphism is well worthy of mention. As a cause it may be suggested that since, as Mr. Shortridge states, the animals have on the island no enemies to fear, the faculty of hearing would have lost that supreme importance for the preservation of life that it would have had in the presence of man, dingoes and dasyures. ‘The ears would have consequently tended to become reduced by the survival of individuals with duller hearing, who in other places would have been speedily eliminated by predatory enemies. 43. BErrONGIA LESUEURI Quoy & Gaim. Three males ; six females. These specimens represent the typical leswewri, which was dis- covered during the Voyage of the ‘ Uranie’ on the neighbouring island of Dirk ‘Hartog, and, as in the case of Lagostrophus fasciatus, prove, on comparison with the good series obtained by Mr. Short- ridge in Avon County, to be recognisably different. Their ground- colour is paler, their fur is less long, and their ears (just as in the case of the Lagostrophus) are very distinctly shorter. The fol- lowing are Mr. Shortridge’s measurements of a pair from each region :— BL. lesueuri leswewrt.— Bernier Island. Head and body. ‘Tail. Hind foot. Kar. mm. mm. mm. mm. Geeta 350 280 102 35 LOE Ss aS aN, 360 300 110 36 B, lesueurt grayi.—Avon District, (Es PE 390 310 112 AQ Olea easier 360 285 108 40 (74 MR. OLDFIELD THOMAS ON [ Nov. 13, In the skull, the bulle of lesweurt are decidedly smaller than in yrayi—a difference already noted in the ‘ Catalogue of Marsupials.’ Goull’s Hypsiprymnus grayi was described from the Swan River; and this name will therefore stand for the continental form. Its type is in the Museum, B.M. No. 41.1157. 44, Lacosrropuus rascratus Pér. & Les. Three males ; five females. In 1807 Péron and Lesueur deseribed the Banded Wallaby from specimens obtained on this very island; so that My. Shortridge’s examples are absolute topotypes, and as such of very great interest, no specimens having been again obtained from the islands until quite recently. In 1900, however, the British Museum received from the Perth Museum two alsin, from Dorre Island; but these were put away without any special comparison being made ot them with the mainland form. Indeed, at that date, ‘before the Balston Exploration, no specimens well- enough collected to form the basis of a comparison were available in ais country. Now, however, that the Balston series contains sets from both ilowalltatios, Tam albile to state that the two forms—the one from the islands about lat. 25° 8., and the other from the Perth and Avon regions of the eared about lat. 832° S.—are quite definably different. The latter w ould bear the name of L. fasciatus albipilis Gould, whose co-types are nos. 44.9.30.1 & 2 of the British Museum collection. As the present specimens show, true ZL. Jasciatus is a rather shorter-tailed animal than albipilis; the fur is shorter, the general colour is paler, the ears are both shorter and paler- coloured lhe | in the allied form, the long white-ringed piles of the coat are less prominent and numerous, ‘and the price: hairs of the toes only cover the base of the claws, while in albipilis they considerably SUIpass the latter; the claws are also longer in Sasciatus, sur- passing the tip of the toes by from 2 to 5 mim. more than is the vase In albipilis. The following are the measurements of a pair of each subspecies, taken in the flesh by Mi. Shortridge :— L. fasciatus fasciatus.— Bernier Island. Head and body. ‘Tail. Hind foot. Kar. mim. mm. mm, mm. G DNB" soonor 400 330 106 48 OM eee cance 400 355 110 51 L. fasciatus albipilis.—Avon District. Gece: 410 A05 112 62 ON CELE 400 390 110 60 T can find no tangible difference between the Dorre and Bernier Island examples of L. fasciatus. ~I ~I C1 1906. | MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. 45, LAGORCHESTES HIRSUTUS BERNIERI, subsp. n. Ten males; seven females. General characters as in the typical subspecies ; but the fur is not nearly so long (hairs of back in winter specimens about 18 mm., wool-hairs 12 mm., instead of 32 and 24 mm. respec- tively) ; the ears are slightly shorter; the long hairs on the feet are of a more glossy sandy colour, instead of brownish; and the tail, instead of being well-haired throughout and blackish on the upper side of the terminal half, is practically naked above, the few minute scattered hairs being sandy. The skulls are remarkably uniform in character ; but, no equally good material existing of the true LZ. hirsutus, it can now be stated only that the bull, in correlation with the shorter external ear, are very decidedly smaller than in the type. The interorbital is broad and parallel-sided. Dimensions of the type, measured in the flesh :-— Head and body 370 mm.; tail 270; hind foot s.u. 112, c.u. 125; ear 48. Skull—ereatest length 76 mm.; basal length 66; greatest breadth 41°5; nasals 80 x 11:8; interorbital breadth 12°9; palatal length 42; length of secator 4:7; combined length of three anterior molariform teeth 15-2. Hab. Bernier Island, Shark’s Bay. Type. Adult male. B.M, No. 6.10.5.18. Original number 571. Collected 16 June, 1906, by G. C. Shortridge and presented by Mr. W. E. Balston. This animal, which differs from its mainland relations in very much the same way as do the other two Rat Kangaroos of the island from theirs, is fortunately able to take its proper position in nomenclature as an insular subspecies of LZ. hirsutus, the mainland form having in this case been first described. No record exists as to how far north the true LZ. hirsutus occurs, the only specimen with an exact locality that I am aware of being the type, which was obtained by Mr, Gilbert at York, in the Avon district inland of Perth. But further, a careful comparison of two specimens obtained by Mr. J. T. Tunney on Dorre Island, just to the south, with the series from Bernier Island shows that a slight difference has already been developed between the two; and one that I think should be recognised by name. The Dorre Island form may therefore be called Lagorchestes hirsutus dorrea. Externally the differences are not essential, though it may be noted that the fur of dorrew is slightly softer, and in one example longer (specimens obtained in the southern summer, and compared with winter specimens of berniert), though not so long as in true hirsutus, and that the ground-colour is more rufous, the ordinary and wool hairs, and not only the long piles of the rump, having a tinge of sandy rufous. The skull may be at once distinguished from that of bernieri Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. LIT. 52 776 ON MAMMALS FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. [ Nov. 18, by the narrowness of the interorbital region, which is only 10 min. across as compared with over 13 mim. in bernieri, and m this respect the skulls of the latter are remarkably uniform. Dimensions of the type, measured im the skin :— Head and body 400 mm; tail 280; hind foot s.u. 109, eu. 124; ear 43. Skull—ereatest length 76 mm.; basal length 66; greatest breadth 44; nasals 19x 11:5; inter Lake breadth HOR ‘length of secator 5, Hab. Dorre Island, Shark’s Bay. Type. Old male. B.M. No. 0.6.1.18. Original number 93. Collected February 1899 by Mr. J. T. Tunney, and presented by the Western Australian Museum, Perth. From true Z. hirsutus the Dorre Island form differs in all the characters mentioned above as distinguishing Z. h. berniert, and is of course very closely allied to the latter. 46. Mus ALBOCINEREUS SQUALORUM, subsp. n. One male, four females. Quite like the true JZ. albocinereus of the Swan and Avon districts in all respects of proportions, colour, and structure of skull, but markedly smaller throughout, as evidenced by the following measurements, all taken by Mr. Shortridge in the flesh :— M, a. albocinerews.— Dwaladine, Avon District. Head and body. Tail. Hind foot. Kar. mm. mm. wm. mm. Ga) WhsSNeuis 105 115 23 18 stp uRan cence 105 105 22 18 Ou Be Do 98 97 22 18 MM. a. squalorum. Sythe Aunt 90 88 21 18 ON eer 83 82 21 16 Oise sue che 80 85 21 16 The following are the skull-dimensions of the type, followed in brackets by the corresponding dimensions of a rather younger skull of the true J/. albocinereus :— Greatest length 25 (27:5); basilar length 18°5 (21); greatest breadth 13 (13:7); length of nasals 9-2 (10°2); imterorbital breadth 4 (4); breadth of brain case 11-6 (12:4); palatilar length 10°6 (11:7): palatal foramina 4:7 (5:2); length of upper molar series 3°6 (3°9). The tails of all the specimens are entirely white, not darker above, but this is frequently the case with inland specimens of true albocinereus, although the co-types figured by Gould, from the coast near Perth, both have distinctly darker upper sides. Hab. Bernier Island, Shark’s Bay. Type. Old female. B.M. No. 6.10.5.6. Original number 622. 1906. ] TURBELLARIA OF THE THIRD TANGANYIKA EXPEDITION. 777 Collected 4 July, 1906, by G. C. Shortridge, and presented by Mr. W. E. Balston. The range of the beautiful grey JZ, albocinereus on the mainland of Western Australia is as yet quite unknown, all the recorded specimens being from one restricted area. 47. Mus muscuuus L. Male and female. 48, PERAMELES BOUGAINVILLEI Quoy & Gaim. An imperfect skull, picked up. Owing to the probable extermination of this species in Bernier Island, and the fact that we have no specimens at all from Shark’s Bay, whence the species was originally described, this skull, imperfect as it is, is of much value to us. Jt indicates, as in the case of the other Shark’s Bay animals, that this Bandicoot is different from the one found further south, to which Wagner’s name myosuros will be applicable. The chief difference observable is in the size of the teeth, the combined length of the three anterior molariform teeth of bougainvillec being only 9 mm., while in myosuros they measure 10-10°5 mim. . 3. Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition, conducted by Dr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-1905 Report on the Turbeilaria. By F. F. Larpiaw. [Received July 12, 1906. ] (Text-figure 126.) (The species of Turbellarian described below by Mr. Laidlaw was the only one observed during the Expedition. Specimens were collected at Niamkolo, at the south end of Tanganyika, and at Ndanvie, near the north end, but the species was observed at several other localities. The specimens were taken on the under side of stones in shallow water.—W. A. C.] PLANARIA TANGANYIK#, sp.n. (Text-fig. 126.) A small species. Length of the largest spirit-specimen about 8mm. Breadth 3 mm. Anterior end rather pointed; eyes (¢.e.) moderately distant, lying in front of the level of the pair of auricles (au.). Body (of spir it- specimen) rather oval, the hinder end pointed. Pharynx opening (ph.') a little in front of the commencement of the hinder fourth of the body, at the level of its greatest width. The colour is black in the larger specimens, grey-brown in the smaller. The ovaries lie at the hinder end of the first fourth of the body. The oviducts were not seen. The uterus (wé.) is symmetrical and lies 5% 778 URBELLARIA OF THE THIRD TANGANYIKA EXPEDITION, [| Noy. 13, close behind the free end of the pharynx. The epithelium of its walls is secretory. The uterine duct (wt.') is at first very small and lies immediately dorsal to the cavity of the base of the penis. Further back it is pushed aside by the penis, increases consider- ably in size as it approaches the antrum, and here its epithelium takes on a secretory character (ep.'), whilst around the duct he numerous gland-cells (g/.). There is no indication of any bursa copulatrix. Text-fig. 126. Planaria tanganyike, much enlarged. For explanation of the lettering, see text. The vasa deferentia (v.d.) open into a chamber at the base of the penis (pr.). This chamber is lined by an epithelium which, in front of the level of the openings of the vasa deferentia and dorsally behind them, is evidently concerned 1m the production of a granular secretion ; the epithelium of the rest of the chamber is of a different character, flattened, and apparently not secretory, but in parts this has been lost. The penis (p.) is conical and 1906. ] ON MAMMALS FROM EASTERN TRANSVAAL. 779 shows rather a three-sided outline in transverse section. The duct traversing it is very narrow. Beyond the level of the penis the walls of the antrum (a.) have an epithelium similar to that of the lower part of the uterine duct. Round the penis the walls have a flattened epithelium and are non-muscular. The vasa deferentia can be traced forward to a level about half- way along the pharynx. The testes are numerous and contain spermatozoa in all stages of development, the vasa deferentia are crowded with them. The cells of the gut are large and rounded, and many of them have broken away from the gut-wall. Planaria tanganyike differs from P, newmanini Neppi*, in its smaller size. Its penis is more regularly conical and the uterus also is more regular in shape. The body is perhaps, too, a little broader proportionately, and the hinder end not so produced, though it is impossible to rely on the shape of a preserved specimen. Two other Planarians have been described from fresh-water from East Africa—P. venusta Bohmig, and P. brachycephala Bohmig 7; but both these are known only from immature specimens, P. tanganyike is a very ordinary form, and certainly lends no support to the hypothesis of the marine affinities of the 'Tan- ganyikan fauna. 4, The Rudd Exploration of 8. Africa. —VI. List of Mammals obtained by Mr. Grant in the Hastern Transvaal. By OuLDFIELD THomas, F.R.S., and Haro~p ScHWANN, HEZESs | Received October 4, 1906. ] During April and May, before gomg down into the hotter coast-belt, Mr. Grant made a stay at Legogot, a village in the northern part of the Barberton district, at an altitude of about 3000 feet. There he obtained the Mammals recorded in the following list. One species, a Shrew, is new, while the most valuable of the other animals are the additional specimens of Pronolagus ruddi, the large ally of the Rooi-haas, the description of which was based on a specimen collected in Zululand at an earlier stage of the Rudd Exploration. Before going to Legogot Mr. Grant made a small collection at a place called Turfloop, between Pietersburg and Woodbush, in * Neppi, Valeria. “ Ueber einige exotische Turbellarien.” Zool. Jahrb., Syste- matik, xxi. 1904-1905, pp. 309-316, Taf. 9. figs. 7-8, Taf. 10. figs. 13-14. 7 Bohmig, L. “ Die Turbellarien Ost-Atrikas,’ in Deutsch-Ost-Afrika, iv. (14) pp. 12-18, figs. 11-14 (1898). 780 MESSRS. 0. THOMAS AND H. SCHWANN ON [Nov. 13, the North-Eastern Transvaal; but as he obtained no examples of species not mentioned in our list of his Woodbush collection*, we do not think any list of them is necessary. 1. CERCOPITHECUS LALANDEL Geoff. 3. 1418, 1426, 1464. Legogot. 2. RHINOLOPHUS AUGUR K. And. ©. 1412, 1416. Legogot. 6. 1863-5. @. 1866. Woodbush. “These six specimens give the following range of variation :— “* Forearms 52—95°7 mm. “Upper canine to back of m*® 83-877 m. Maxillary width across parastyles of m° 8°3-8°7, ‘“¢ Minute lower premolar present on both sidesin one specimen ; absent but with trace of the alveolus, in three; absent without trace in two. “Upper canine and p’ slightly separated in three, in simple contact in one; slightly overlapping at base in two.”-——K. A. 3. RHINOLOPHUS DARLING! K. And. Q. 1427. Legogot. “Forearm 46°2mm. Upper canine to back of m® 7-5. Maxil- lary width 7-8. P, wanting on both sides. P* external; upper canine and p* practically in contact. “Of the five examples of this species in the Museum, p, is wanting on one side and present but exceedingly minute on the other in three ; in the other two skulls this tooth is wholly absent. Tn all five skulls the teeth are unworn.”—K. A. 4, VESPERTILIO CAPENSIS A. Sm. ©. 1372. Pietersburg. 5). PIPISTRELLUS KUHLIT FUSCATUS Thos. 3.14387. ©. 1444. Legogot. 6. PIPISTRELLUS NANUS Peters. 3. 1443, 1449. ©. 1431, 1440. Legogot. 7. CrocrpurA sp. (near argentata Sund.). 3. 1371. Pietersburg, 4350’. 3. 1397, 1417, 1453, 1460. Legogot. 8. CROCIDURA sp. (near martensi Dobs.). 6. 1375, 1376. Pietersburg. gd. 1414. Legogot. * P.Z.S. 1906, p. 585. 1906. | MAMMALS FROM EASTERN TRANSVAAL, 781 9. PACHYURA GRATULA, sp. n. 3g. 1436, 1458, 1476. Legogot. A medium-sized species of a bluish-grey colour, with bicolor tail. Size about as in Crocidura pilosa, therefore immensely larger than such pygmy shrews as P. gracilis and P. varilla. Fur close and fine, rather over 3°5 mm. in length on the back. General colour above clear uniform bluish grey (between grey No. 5 and “»lumbeous”). Under surface not sharply defined, more whitish grey (about grey No.7). Upper surface of hands and feet white. Tail about two-thirds the length of the head and body, well-haired with fairly numerous bristle-hairs on its proximal half; dark brown above, white below. Lateral gland of male distinct, half- way between elbow and hip, its hairs whitish. Skull of normal proportions. Third unicuspid slightly larger than second, fourth about half the size of third. Dimensions of the type (measured in the flesh) :— Head and body 76 mm. ; tail 50; hind foot 13; ear 10. Skull—greatest length including incisors 20 mm.; basal length 17-2; greatest breadth 8:7; length of upper tooth-row 8:4; breadth of palate across molars 6; combined length of p*, m’ & m’ 4-4; tip of i' to tip of p’* 4:3. Hah. as above. Type. Male. B.M. No. 6.8.2.46. Original number 1476. Collected 22 May, 1906. No members of Pachyura have hitherto been described from South Africa other than the pygmy shrews P. gracilis and varilla. The bluish pelage and bicolor tail will also distinguish this well- marked species. 10. Myosorex VARIUS Smuts. ©. 1471. Legogot. 11. Lycaon protus Temm. Q. 1472, 1473, 1474, 1475. Legogot. 12. GENETTA LETAB# Thos. & Schw. Q. 1445. Legogot. 13. HERPESTES GRACILIS PUNCTULATUS Gray. 3. 1466. Legogot. 14. DENDROMUS NIGRIFRONS True. Q. 1478. Legogot. This little animal agrees so closely with True’s description 7of nigrifrons that we see no reason to distinguish it. Mr. Darling obtained examples of the same species at Mazoe, Mashonaland. In the presence of a nail instead of a claw on the fifth hind toe, it agrees with the D. melanotis group. 782 ON MAMMALS FROM EASTERN TRANSVAAL. [Nov. 13, 15. ARVICANTHIS DORSALIS A. Sm. 3. 1410. @. 1400, 1411. Legogot. 16. ARVICANTHIS PUMILIO DILECTUS de Wint. 3d. 1401. Legogot. 17. Mus curysopHitus de Wint. 6. 1395, 1421, 1422, 1429, 1430, 1431,1434. ©. 1399, 1428, 1433, 1454. Legogot. 18. Mus coucna A. Sm. ©. 1370. Pietersburg. S. 1393, 1394, 1402, 1403, 1404, 1446. Legogot. @. 1398, 1406, 1407, 1408, 1409, 1415, 1419, 1420, 1423, 1432, 1450. Legogot. 19. LEGGADA MINUTOIDES A. Sm. 2. 1405, 1435, 1457. Legogot. 20. STEATOMYS PRATENSIS Pet. 3. 1413. Legogot. 21. Grorycuts, sp. (near hottentotus). So. 1448, 1451, 1452, 1455, 1459, 1461. Legogot. @. 1439, 1447. The Legogot specimens seem to show the lateral grooves on the molars for a longer period than is customary in this group. Perhaps the local food is softer, so that the teeth wear down less quickly than usual. 2: iS . Lepus zutuensis Thos. & Schw. 1462, 1467. Legogot. OQ, bo SU) . PRoNOLAGUS RUDDI Thos. & Schw. 1424, 1425, 1470. Legogot. hese additional specimens of the rare large form of Pronolagus are most welcome. ‘The species was only previously known from Natal and Zululand. 2 24, PROGAVIA CAPENSIS Pall. g. 1442. ©. 1441. Legogot. 25. CEPHALOPHUS NATALENSIS Smith. 3. 1468, 1469. 9. 1456. Legogot. IP ZO, IDOE] ITI MOLLUSCA OF THE PERSIAN GULF & ARABIAN SEA. Pe Sal 906, PLL. Lith et a 2.Green de IN Sina. fais & ARABL a} fay ask 1 GU - {At fy MOLLUSCA O V. AR Pia oe 06 - PLL J.Green del. lit het imp. AN SEA. TD LEN. MOLLUSCA OF THE PERSIAN GULF & ARAB Pao Oot lk LYE o.Green del. lith.et imp. ay MOLLUSCA OF THE PERSIAN GULF & ARABIAN SEA. : ; Pea ye) tata. |” Sheet of F war Pee ahh TE ty nae 1906. | ON MOLLUSKS FROM THE PERSIAN GULF, 783 The Mollusca of the Persian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and Arabian Sea,as evidenced mainly through the Collections of Mr. F. W. Townsend, 1893-1906; with Descriptions of new Species. By Jamms Cosmo Matvitt, M.A., F.L.S., F.Z.S.,and Rospurr Sranpen, Assist.-Keeper, Manchester Museum. Parr LI.—PELECYPODA.* [ Received September 10, 1906. | (Plates LIIL.LVI1.*) In this, the second portion of our enumeration, over 420 species are mentioned, and, of these, more than one-sixth, say 76 species, were discovered either by Mr. Townsend or My. Alexander Abercrombie, and have been in greater part deseribed by one of the present authors during the past thirteen or fourteen years. These include a considerable number of, mainly, small and abyssal forms, now to be differentiated in the subsequent pages of this paper. In the first part of our Catalogue, a census of 935 species, all Gastropoda, excepting for about 12 or 13 Scaphopoda, was given. Five or six years having now elapsed since its publication, the number has heen continually increased owing to the products of several further dredgings on the part of Mr. Townsend having been now fully worked out, and the results—at all events, so far as the new species are concerned—published in a series of articles, references to which will be given below. With these additions, the number of Mollusca as yet detected in this area is as follows :— Cephalopoda ........ aH CA GRY VOCE. dee Sane oe ays Rn alONoki — Aonbe eee 15 iRelecypodaminns a4. 4. 426 Notal .... — 1618 species: This, we believe, already slightly eclipses the sum of the rich Mediterranean Fauna, to which it bears a considerable generic analogy, though so w idely. differing specifically. And, likewise, compared with Erythrean forms, it will be found, numerically, to surpass them in even still greater a degree, for hardly more than a thousand species have so far been catalogued as natives of the Red Sea, rich though that Sea be both in variety and prolific occurrence of individuals. It must also be borne in mind that both the Mediterranean and Erythrean Seas have been far more assiduously explored than the region under discussion, and any further discoveries * For Part I. see P.Z.S. 1901 (vol. ii.), p. 327. + For explanation of the Plates, see p. 848. £ In Cephalopoda, only the genera Nautilus, Argonauta, and Spirula have been considered here. 784. MESSRS. MELVILL AND STANDEN ON [ Nov. 13, will therefore almost certainly tend to the advantage and pro- portionate gain of the North Arabian Sea and Persian Gulf. Numerical comparison with Adenese Mollusca. Commander E. R. Shopland has within the last four and a half year's published a second edition of his invaluable Catalogue of ‘Aden Shells *—all, to quote from his preface, “collected within a radius of six miles from Steamer Point, chiefly on the shores of the Inner Harbour, and from the coral brought in from Little Aden for washing lime.” The list, as foreshadowed by one of us in a paper? giving descriptions of new Mollusea from this locality, and revise giving a brief historic réswmeée of the Krythrean fauna, and its bil Tage has now been augmented to, roundly speaking, 750 species. Of these, about 310 seem common to Aden and the Gulf of Oman. It is not now feasible, owing to exigencies of space, to give a list of these in detail, but the following are enumerated as being of special interest. Murex rota Sowb. (=anatomicus, | Cerithium clypeomorus Jouss. Perry, 1811, nom. prius.). yerbury1 Sin. Pleurotoma baynhami Si. | Rissoma pachystoma Melv. catena Reeve. secuenziana Issel. — cecchi Jouss. | Onoba delicata Phil. —— pouloensis Jouwss. Turritella maculata Reeve. variabilis Sm. | Calyptrea edgariana Melv. Bullia tahitensis Ginel. Vanikoro cancellata Chemn. Cyllene grayi Reeve. Leptothyra leta Montr. Nassa marratu Sz. | ——pilula Dunker. obockensis Jouss. (=zailensis | Hthalia carneolata Welv. Sowb.). ' Calliostoma scobinatum 4._4d. (formerly Mitra bovei Avien. | considered endemic at Bombay). ceeligena Reeve. carnicolor Reeve. | Thracia adenensis Ielv. fissurata Lamhk. Mactra fauroti Jouss. —— pretiosa Reeve. | Raéta abercrombiei Mev. shoplandi Jelv. | Psammobia elegans Desh. Marginella mazagonica IMelv. | occidens Chemn. Columbella propinguans Si. | Tellina kolabana Melv. Scalaria decussata Lamk. (=Kkieneri methoria Welw. T. Can.). micans Hanley. Terebra nassoides Hinds. pharaonis Hanley. pellyi Sm. | Donax erythreus Berth. Elusa brunneomaculata Jelv. scalpellum Gray. Eulima shoplandi Je/v. | Cumingia occatilla Welv. Solarium regium Hanley. Tivela ponderosa Koch. Conus clytospira WZ. Sv Sé. | Sunetta contempta Sm. thomasi Sow). | Petricola hemprichi Issel. traversianus Sim. Crenella cumingiana Dunker. Strombus beluchiensis JZe/v. Septiter excisus JV/iegm. fusiformis Sowd. Cucullea concamerata Chemn. Rostellaria curta Soezwb. (=curviros- | Pectunculina multistriata Forsh. tris Lamk., 3). | Pecten layardi Reeve. Cyprea lentiginosa Gray. | luculentus Reeve. Cancellaria hystrix Reeve. | townsendi Sowd. * Proc. Mal. Soc. vol. v. part 2, pp. 177-179 (July 1902). The first edition was published in Journ. Bombay Soc. x. pp. aus ae with addendum, ¢. c. pp. 503-504. + Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. iv. pp. 461-463; also op. cit. vol. vii. pp- 550-556. 1906. | MOLLUSKS FROM THE PERSIAN GULF. 785 There can, of course, be no doubt that these 310 species also inhabit the intermediate seas, as yet, unfortunately, but little explored, between Aden and Ras-el-Had, that wash the coasts of the Hadramaut, Dhofar, &e. It is much to be hoped that some investigator may soon turn his attention to this neglected area. Ceylon. With regard to Ceylon, comparison seems impossible at present, as we do not possess recent catalogues of the productions of the seas and shores of that proverbially rich island. The enumeration, compiled, we believe, by the late Mr. Sylvanus Hanley with the aid of Mr. E. L. Layard, C.M.G.,and published in the treatise on Ceylon by Sir J. Emerson Tennant*, is altogether out of date, as also are the slight additions made by the late Mr. A. W. Langdon to the Mollusca fauna. The researches of the late Messrs. Hugh and Geofirey Nevill, of Mr. J. R. Henderson and My. Edgar Thurston, C.M.Z.S., in the Gulf of ManaarZ, and the cursory dredgings off Batticaloa and Humbantotte by Captain W. A. Tindall, all tend, in some small measure, to reveal what a superlatively productive region, conchologically speaking, is that of Ceylon. We may add, that the scientific appendices to the Pearl-Oyster Fishery Reports brought out by Professor W. A. Herdman, F.R.S., have likewise added to our knowledge of this fauna, as regards Cephalopoda (Dr. W. E. Hoyle), Polyplacophora (My. E. R. Sykes), and Opistho- branchiata (My. G. P. Farran), while the Gastropoda and Pele- cypoda are being reported upon by one of us (R. Standen) in conjunction with Mr. Alfred Leicester. Maldive and Laccadive Islands. Mr. Edgar Smith enumerated 380 species$ as occurring in these islands, collected by the Stanley Gardiner Expedition, remarking that “this probably comprises a large proportion of the forms which occur.” Only 49 of these are noted by him, in the tabular list of distribution, as occurring in the Persian Gulf. We notice, however, that Conus maldicus L. is not included, the name of which would incline us to the belief it had first been detected in the Maldives. Pecten maldivensis Sm., has also been found to occur in the Gulf; and no doubt the number of species common to both regions will be found much larger, with more detailed research. In the Pelecypoda for instance, Semipecten forbesianus, Septifer bilocularis, Arca imbricata, Cardium suexense, C. fornicatum, Venus marica, &c., all occur in both. Referring, cursorily, to the brief réswmé given in our first paper on the distribution of the chief genera of Gastropoda in the * “Ceylon, vol. i. pp. 233-243 (2nd edition, 1859). + Journ. of Conch. i. p. 71 (1874). ~ Bull. Mus. Madras, No. 3 (1895) ; Journ. of Conch. ix. pp. 30, 75. § ‘The Fauna and Geography of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes,’ vol. ii. pp- 589-630, pls. xxxv. & xxxvi. (1903). : || P. Z.S. 1901 (vol. ii.), pp. 330, 331. 786 MESSRS, MELYILL AND STANDEN ON { Nov. 13, Persian-Gulf region, we would say, as regards the Pelecypoda, that the most distinctive and widely-spread family appears to be the Tellinacea, between 40 and 50 species of the typical genus Vellina being present, several endemic and hitherto unknown, others of wide range. Veneracea are likewise plentiful, some, e. g. Tivela ponderosa Koch, and Calista multiradiata Sowb., being among the finest of their race. The only Solenomya is peculiar, being also an inhabitant of Patagonia. The members of the Arcacea are freely distributed, amongst them being two fine endemic Pectwneuli, P. maskatensis Mely. and heroicus M. & St., this last now described in this paper. In Nueulidee, Yoldia and Leda can boast of several most interesting species, Vacwla being also present, but not to so prominent a degree. In Mytilacea, several Modiole, Orenelle, Wwe. occur, mostly of small size, but in some variety and refinement of form. In Aviculide a few striking species occur, the most notable, of course, being the local varieties of the Pearl-Oyster, an important fishery of which exists in the Persian Gulf. Among the true Oysters (Ostrea), some large and important forms are found, e. g., 0. cucullata Born, and iridescens Gray, the latter attaining a large size. But to O. townsendi Melv., an endemic species discovered about ten years ago by Mr. Townsend, adhering to the telegraph- cable in the Gulf, must be given the palm, it being one of the few Ostrew exhibiting real beauty both in sculpture, form, and delicacy of coloration. Pecten townsendi Sowb., a noble species, Vola dorothew Melv., and a few deep-sea Amussia must nob be passed without notice. Spondylus exilis Sowb. and S. gloriandus M. & St. are likewise two conspicuous endemie species, the former to some extent allied to the Mediterranean S. gedaropus U.., though quite distinct. Indeed, close affinities with South- European forms are the characteristics of many species in this fauna, seeming to point in frequent instances to a common archaic ancestry. In the Lucinidee, Loripes victorialis Melv., a most delicate milky-white transparent species, with close con- centric lamelle, is endemic; and the same may be said of the somewhat similarly ornamented Mactrinula tryphera* Melv., from the Persian Gulf. The Cardiacea are many in numbers, but few of conspicuous size, Cardium fornicatum Sowb. being perhaps the most inter- esting; while the smaller C. centwm-liratum Melv., described below, is a particularly delicately-sculptured abyssal shell. Among the Myacea, Gari (Psammobia) exhibits 13 or 14 species, some endemic, all being varied in both sculpture and coloration. Some large Pholadacea occur: Pholas bakeri Desh. (named after the late Major Baker, the first recorder of Mollusca from Karachi, in 1850), has a wide range over the northern shores, and Ph. orientalis Gm. occurs with valves sometimes 8 inches in length. In the Anatinacea are one or two pagina interna pallide margaritacea, ligamento marginali, cardinali crenulato. Alt. 7, lat. 13, diam. 7 mm. Hab. India: Karachi; on loose stones at low water. This species has remained long at the British Museum unnamed. * Proc. Mal. Soc. vol. vi. p. 222. + Three species of Modiola —philippinarum Hanley, watsoni Smith, and arborescens (Chemn.)—also a new Crenella, C. persica Smith, were lately dredged in the Persian Gulf by s.s. ‘ Investigator.’ 1906. | MOLLUSKS FROM THE PERSIAN GULF. 801 Superticially it is somewhat akin to Mytilus cubitus Say, found by one of us on the shores of Florida several years ago, and like- wise to MZ. charpentiert Dunker, from West Africa, but in our opinion is sufficiently distinct from all its congeners to merit a separate description. Mr. A. J. Jukes-Browne, to whom our thanks are due for having examined our specimens, considers it, with Jf. cubitus Say, charpentiert Dky., and others formerly considered J/ytili, as belonging to the genus Brachyodontes Sw., subgenus Hormomya (Moreh) * CRENELLA ADAMSIANA, nom. nov. (Plate LV. fig. 2.) Crenella decussatu A. Ad. Proce. Zool. Soe. 1870, p. 7, noi Montagu. Cryptodon decussatus Ad. P.G. Gulf of Oman, Maskat. 15 fathoms. M.C. Dredged in various places, at 10 to 15 fathoms. I. Karachi. This is not, as was thought by Dr. Arthur Adams, identical with the British and Northern Atlantic species, and therefore requires a name. CRENELLA PRACELLENS Melvill, sp. n. (Plate LV. fig. 4.) CU. testa tenwi, albida vel pallide brunnea, subobliqua, profunde convexa, pyriformi, superne latiore, undique radiatim pulchre tenwlirata, lineis concentricis incrementalibus fortiter predita, antice fere recta, postice obliqua, ad marginem ventralem sensim delabente; wmbonibus parvulis, linea cardinali in valva sinistra paullum prominula, dentiformi,; pagina interna alba, mar- ginibus minutissime crenuliferis. Alt. 8, lat. 6, diam. 5 mm. Hab. Persian Gulf: Gulf of Oman. Lat. 24° 58’ N., long. 56° 54’ K.; 156 fathoms, shell-sand. Maskat, 15 fathoms. From the last-mentioned place come small, perfect examples, pale brown in colour. A beautiful species, the fine radiating lire, crossed with repeated concentric incremental lines of erowth, being conspicuous ; the form pear-like, while within a tooth- like projection attached to the hinge-plate is noticeable in the left valve, the whole internal margin being crenulate. The valves are profoundly convex and swollen; some variation existing as regards depth and width of convexity. oh iy Spam. (Plate IVs hie 3.) M. testa parva, anguste oblongo-rhomboidea, albida, incequi- laterali, convexa, lateribus fere rectis; wmbonibus parvis, poullum incurvis, bina serie striarum radiatim disposita, antice simul ac postice, inter quas superficie concentricis incre- MoDIOLARIA CALCEATA * Proc. Mal. Soc. vol. vi. p. 223. + Calceus, a shoe, from the very convex oblong form. 802 MESSRS. MELYILL AND STANDEN ON [ Nov. 13, menti liris solum ornata, ligamento lineart, margine minute crenulato. Alt. 5, lat. 3, diam. 2:75 mm. Hab. Persian Gulf. Lat. 24° 58° N., long. 56° 54’ H.; 156 fathoms, shell-sand. Many half-valves of a small, narrowly rhomboid Modiolaria, bearing the characteristic generic sculpture. The ligament is linear and marginal, no tooth visible, and the interior margin is minutely crenulate. All our specimens are of much the same size, and we deem them adult. MopDIoLARIA CUMINGIANA Dkr. IT. Karachi. From 3 to 7 fathoms, amongst growth of sponges, we. Extends in range to South Australia. LItHODOMUS ATTENUATUS Desh. P.G. Locality not precisely specified. I. Karachi. Found on rocks off Beach Fort, Manora. LirrHopoMUs CINNAMOMEUS Lam. I. Karachi, not plentiful. LItHoDOMUS MALACCANUS Reeve. I. Karachi. A little doubt attends this identification, the specimens having been mislaid. LiTHODOMUS TOWNSENDI, sp. n. (Plate LV. fig. 8.) L. testa parva, cylindracea, tenwi, epidermide nigro-brunnea, super- jicie fere levigata, antice paullulum rugulosa, postice globosa, extremitate antice producta, multum attenuata, fere caudata. Alt. 7, lat. 18, diam. 5 mm. Hab. Persian Gulf: Gulf of Oman, on rocky ground. Lat. 27° N., long. 52° HE. 40 fathoms. This little species, resembling a miniature Z. caudigerus Lamk., an inhabitant of the West Indies, or attenwatus Desh., from Chile, differs from its congeners not only in size, but in the almost complete absence of the wrinkled anterior surface, sometimes channelled and shagreened, so usual in members of this genus. We consider it full-grown. Two examples, exactly matching each other, have as yet only occurred. It is a pleasure to associate with this the name of Mr. F. W. Townsend. Order IIT. PSPEUDOLAMELLIBRANCHIATA. Fam. AVICULID®. AVICULA MACROPTERA Lam. (= Pteria Scop.) P.G. Maskat. 15 fathoms. Called ‘‘ Mussel” or ‘“* Bombay Mussel.” 1906. | MOLLUSKS FROM THE PERSIAN GULF. 803 AYVICULA MARMORATA Phil, (=Péeria Scop.) P.G. In two or three places found adhering in considerable clusters to the telegraph-cable, at 50-55 fathoms, mud bottom.’ N.B.—Several immature Aviculw, dredged at various depths, occur in the collection, but none is capable of exact identification. One is allied to A. zebra Reeve, and may possibly be that species. MARGARITIFERA IMBRICATA (Reeve). (= Jeleagrina Lam.) P.G. Rare on the telegraph-cable. MARGARITIFERA MARGARITIFERA (L., 1760). (= Meleagrina Lam.) Var. ¢. persica Jameson. P.G. & M.C. Generally distributed and found on most rocky patches. A curious young form occurred at Charbar, at 8 fathoms, in muddy sand. Dr. Lyster Jameson* gives the Bahrein district in the Persian Gulf as supplying this species most copiously, and adds that it is “‘ called ‘ Bombay shell’ in the Pearl trade.” MARGARITIFERA MURICATA (Reeve), (= Meleagrina Lam.) P.G. On the telegraph-cable, with J/. imbricata Rve. MARGARITIFERA VULGARIS (Schum. 1817). (= Jeleagrina Lam.) Avicula fucata Gould, 1850. P.G. The ‘ Linjah” shell of the Persian Gulf, e.g. at Dabai, adhering frequently to the telegraph-cable. This species, having its headquarters in the Arabian Sea, extends, according to Dr. Lyster Jameson (/. c. pp. 385-386) to Hast Africa, Malay Pen- insula, Australia, and New Guinea. It is also reported from Japan and New Zealand, being one of the most variable of all the pearl. shells. MW. margaritifera and this species are styled the Bombay and Ceylon Pearl-Oysters, respectively, by the traders. Mr. J. Calcott Gaskin, Assistant Political Agent, Bahrein, kindly supplied the following notes, which are well worth perusal here :— A Memorandum on the Pearl-shells and Pearl-fishing Operations in the Persian Gulf. There are three sorts of marketable shells found in the Persian Gulf, viz. :— The Mother-o’- Pearl The Mussel. The Pearl-Oyster. Mother-o’-Pearl Shells.—The hest Mother-o’-Pearl shells are found round the islands near the Persian coast, principally at Hinderahbi, Shaikh Shuaib, Kais Island, and Chira on the Persian coast; some are also obtained at Das, Karunein, and Zerukah * Proc. Zool. Soc. 1901, vol. i. p. 375. 804 MESSRS. MELVILL AND STANDEN ON [ Nov. 13, Islands, and off the Oman coast between Ras-el-Khaima and Ghobat Ghazira. They are sought at varying depths, from a little below the surface to 18 fathoms of water, on hard mud and sandy bottom. There is no information as regards the quantity annually exported, but 1t may be stated that it is small, and probably about 120 to 150 tons. The shells brought up weigh from 4 lb. to 2 lbs. each, and are sold from 4d. to 8d. per lb. according to quality and the supply and demand. Pearls are very seldom “Foonendl in these shells, but when they do occur they are generally large and of a fine quality. Aussel-Shells—The banks off the coast between Ras-el-Khaima and Ghobat Ghazira produce the most and largest mussel-shells in the Gulf. The best qualities, however, obtain round the islands of Hinderabi, Shaikh Shuaib, and Kais. The mussel is plentiful also round Drijina and Arzana Islands. They are procured at the same depths as the Mother-o’-Pearl shells, and on similar bottoms. The annual export of this description of shell is about 400 to 500 tons. They weigh from 5 to 20 Ibs. per hundred, and are generally disposed of Sih Linjah and Dalma Island. Those brought to Bahrein are sold from 10s. to 15s. per 60 lbs. Pearls are but varely obtained in this shell. Pearl-Oyster.—Vhe richest Pearl-Oyster banks are situated round the northern and eastern coasts of the Bahrein Islands. The next in importance are those off the Katar coast, and there are also numerous other banks between Koweit and Bahrein, and south of Katar to Ras-el-Khaima. 995, Rhyparosomus inequalis, 933. mashunus, 911, 933, 958. Rimula cumingt, 848. Rissoina pachystoma, 784. sequenziana, 754. Rostellaria curta, 784. curvirostris, TSA. delicatula, 789. Saccostomns campestris, 590. Saltator magnus, TI9. Samla annuligera, 638, 685. bicolor, 638, 685, 690. Sarcobotrylloides parvin, 907, 911. wyvillii, 906, 911. Scalaria decussata, 784. hieneri, 784. Scapanorhynchus, 744, 757. owstoni, T44. Scapharca nequiscul pla. =~] RS) Tod, INDEX, Scintilla callipareja, 818. layardi, 818, 324. pulchra, 818, 848. Sciurus chapmani, 760. Sclerodoris osscosa, 1005. (Peronodoris) tubercu- lata, 667. Sclerorhynchus, 724, 754, 7A5. Seoteinus halstoni, 472, 764. GP CY, 472, 537. Scotophilus migrita, O17. — dingani, 577. Sy Ode Tes Scotosia dubitata, 851. Seyliorhinus, 723, 735, 738, TAD. Scylleea, 668, 674. bicolor, 675. dracend, 679. elegantula, 675. marmorata, 67). pelagica, 675. viridis, 675. Seyllium, 730, 984. canicula, 869, 878. Scymnodon, 728. Seymnorhinus, 723, 742, 749. Sceymnus lichia, 874, 882. Semele cordiformis, 824. crenata, 824. regularis, 825. Semipecten Jorbesianus, 785, 508. Sepedon hemachates, 528, 529. Septifer bilocularis, 785, 729. excisus, 784, 799. Sida crystallina, 693. Siliqua, 855. Simia, 463. vellerosus, 467. — fuliginosus, 467. Simocephalus gibbosus, 693, 694. obtusatus, 698, 694. vetulus, 698. Sminthopsis hirtipes, 45, larapinta, 542, 54 1049 Sminthopsis murina, 477, 772. nitela, 542. psanvmophilus, 545. stalkeri, 5435. Solarium regium, 784. Solecurtus, 844, 855. philippinarum, 855. Solen acinaces, 856, 857. brevis, B44. corneus, 844, 856. ensis, 857. philipptanus, 857. sloamit, 857. strigilatus, 859. vagina, 856. Solenocurtus coarctatus, 844, cxzaratus, 844. Solenomya, 786. patagonica, 793. Soletellina atrata, 842. blanfordi, 842. diphos, 842. violacea, 842. Sommiosus, 7238, Hast 739 ), 757. inioh geen Ee 871. Sorex annerus, 859, araneus, 860. buatom, 859, 860. HLACrOpygmeUs, 8d), 860. minutus, 859. Spharodoris, 666. Sphenacanthus, 725. Sphenodon, 592, 598, 599, 600. punctatus, 600. Sphenophorus castaneipennis, 997. Sphyrna, 723, 746. Spinax acanthias, 878. niger, 869), 872. Spirula, 783. Spondylus extlis, 786, 806, 811. g@daropus, 786, 811. gloriandus, 736, 811, 848. mwicobaricus, 811. rubicundus, 811. Squaloraia, 724. Squalus, 723, tales TAT, 748, 749, 750, 751. 860. 593, 906, 1050 Squalus acanthias, 738. canicula, 876. catulus, 876. maximus, 876. Squatina, 728, 733, 734, 736, 737, 739, 746, TAT, 748, 749, 751, 872. angelus, 734. Standeila (Merope) egyptiaca, 828. (—) capillacea, 828. (—) pellucida, 828. Staurodoris, 654, 666. pustulata, 658. rusticata, 639, 652, 1000, 1005, 1006. verrucosa, 1006. Steatomys bocaget, 583. pratensis, 583, 782. Stegostoma, 723. Stenometopon, 598. Stenophida linearis, 958. Stereosternum, 596. Stigmatotrachelus guttiferus, 920. Stiliger, 686. viridis, 639, 686, 690. Stramia, 958. Strombus heluchiensis, 784. Susiformis, 784. Strophosomus acuticollis, 911, 958. binotatus, 911, 913. brevicollis, 915. lineatus, 9138. plumbeus, 914. salisburiensis, 911, 912, 913. strigifrons, 914. sulcatifrons, 911, 914, 958. Styela corrugata, 908. partita, 904, 910. Stylochocestus, 711. Stylochoplana sargassicola, (07. Stylochus, 714. neapolitanus, 707. Sunetta contempta, effossa, 831. hians, 831, 832 wiles, | 784, 831, | | | | | Symmorium, INDEX. ; Sunetta hkurachensis, 831. meroé, 831. picta, 831. solandri, 832. Sus leucomystax, 759. (2 Teall 758 Sympiezorrhynchus, 924. Sympterygia, 724, 756. Syndesmya cistula, 824, 825, 848. opatina, 825. prismatica, 825. Synechodus, 723, 747, 790, Synstyela incrustans, 908, 911. Synthocus nigropictus, 9D7 sagittarius, 957. Sypna punctosa, 491. Syrmium nuchale, 849. Systates amplicollis, 922 dentipes, 911, 921, 958. Tachyglossus aculeatus, 477. — ineptus, 477, 772 — setosus, 477. Teeniura, 757. Taonius abyssicola, 787. Tapes leta, 832. recens, 833. (Amygdala) florida, 832. (—) indica, 833. (—) encodes, 833. (Hemitapes) cor, 833. (—) flammea radiata, 833 (—) marmorata, 853. (—) orientalis, 833. (—) pinguis, 833. (—) radiata, 833. (—) rimularis, 833. (—) virgineus, 833. (Parembola) corrugata, 832. (—) deshayest, 832. (—) obsoleta, 852. (—) turgida, 832. (Textrix) malabarica, 832. Tapes (Lextrix) suleosa, 832. (—) tewtrix, 832. (—) undulata, 832. Tarbophis, 527, 528, 530. obtusus, 527. Tarentola annularis, 618. Tarsipes rostratus, 475, @& spenser@, 475, 770. Tatera brantsti, 582, 589. miliaria salsa, 582, 589. Taurotragus oryx, 463, 632. Teius, 527. Tellidora pellyana, 824. Tellimya, 816. Tellina, 786. diluta, 820. kolabana, 784. lechriogramma, 820, 821. malaccana, 821. methoria, 784. micans, 784. murrayt, 818, 819. obtusalis, 821. pharaonis, 784, 819. pygmea, 821. semen, 820, 821. (Angulus) ¢ridescens, 822. (—) nitens, 822. (—) rubella, 822. (—) rubra, 822. (— ) sericata, 822. (—) @icaonica, 822. (—) unifasciata, 822 ee) one (& (on ( (= (= es Bee ei 821. ) habrotima, 821. ) isselt, 821. ) nue, 821. ) perplexa, 821. (—) savigny?, 821, 8 (—) scobinata, 8: 21. (—) stamensis, 822 (Metis) angulata, 823. (—) lacunosa, 823. (—) turgida, 823. (Meera) actinota, 819. (—) lechriogramma, ( ( —) methori wa, 820. —) mir acyllium, 820, 848. Tellina (Meera) obtusalis, 820. (—) pygmea, 820. (—) rhomboides, 820. (—) rosamunda, 820, 848. (—) semen, 821. (Peronea) erythre- ensis, 823. (—) micans, 823. (Tellinella) asmena, 818, 848. (—) eruciata, 819. ‘(—) dissimilis, 819. (—) inflata, 819. (—) kolabana, 819. (—) pharaonis, 819. (—) rastellum, 819. (—) rugosa, 819. —) virgata, 819. —) vulsella, 819. Tellinides) emargi- nata, 822. —) opalina, 822. —) ovalis, 822. —) sinuata, 822. —) thymares, 822. —) truncatula, 822. —) vestalis, 823. (Tellinula) claudia, 823, 848. (—) exiqua, 823. (—) tenuis, 823, Temera, 723. Tenagomysis ; nove-zealandie, 694, 702, 703, 704. Terebra fuscocincta, 848. nassoides, 784. pellyi, 784. Tethys, 676. Thalacomys, 475. lagotis,469,475,769,770. Thalassorhinus, 723. Thaumalea picta, 761. Theates angusticollis, 957. eristatus, 957. magus, 957. Theropithecus obscurus, 760. Thimna, 669. Thordisa, 654. carinata, 654, 655. caudata, 638, 654, 655, 657, 659, 660. clandestina, 654, 655. crosslandi, 639, 654, 655, 656. ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( INDEX, Thordisa dubia, 654, 655, 657. hilaris, 654, 655. ladislavii, 654, 655. maculigera, 638, 654, 655, 656, 657, 1000, 1006. maculosa, 654. millegrana, 654. pallida, 654, 655, 657. stellata, 654, 656. tristis, 654, 655. villosa, 638, 654, 655, | 1000, 1006. Thracia, 787. adenensis, 784, 845. salsettensis, 845. Thuridilla, 688, 690. Thylacis, 476. Thylacomys, 475. Thylax, 476. Thysanozoon brocchit, 713. | Timandra | correspondens, 492. Timola, 948. Tivela ponderosa, 784, 786, 828. trigonella, 829. Torpedo, 723, 730, 753, TD, VON. Tortrix, 498. sp., 498. argentana, £98. — plumbeana, 498. Trachypterus, 547. Traunfelsia, 718. elongata, 714, 715, 719. Trevelyana, 667, 668. alba, 668. bicolor, 668. ceylonica, 638, 667, 668, 669, 1900, 1007. citrina, 668. coccinea, 668. concinna, 668. crocea, 668. defensa, 668. inornata, 668. picta, 668, 670. plebeia, 668. rubra, 668. rubromaculata, 638, 668, 669. rubropapulosa, 668. Triacis, 723. Trizenodon, 7238, 746. Trichanarta, 487. Trichoclea albicolon, 490. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1906, No. LXX. 1051 Trichosurus vulpecula, 475, 770. — arnhemensis, 540. | Trichotropis pulcherrima, 848. Tridachia, 688. crispata, 688. Tridacna crocea, 840. Tringa carutus, 901. Triopa, 668. Trippa, 657. affinis, 657. anceps, 658. areolata, 657, 660, 1000, 1006. hispida, 657, 658. leoparda, 657, 660, 1007. luteola, 638, 655, 657, 658, 690. mephitica, 657, 1000, 1006. monsoni, 6389, 657, 660, 690, 1007. ornata, 639, 657, 658. spongiosa, 657, 660, 690, 1006. tristis, 1006. (Doris) areolata, 660. Tristychius, 723. Tritonia, 678. Trochilium lasicera, 495, 498. Trochus fultoni, 806. Tropidonotus, 505. natriz, 499. Trygonorhina, 724, 753. Trypanosoma balbianii, 901. Turritella maculata, 784. Tylonycteris pachypus, 541. | Ungalia, 529, 530. | Urogymnus, 724. Urolophus, 724. Ursus Japonicus, 759. malayanus. 997, 999. — wardi, 998, 999. torquatus, 997, 999. Vanessa kashinirensis, 483. ladakensis, 483. 70 1052 ‘Vanessa urtice, 483. — chinensis, 483. — rigana, 483. Vanikoro cancellata, 784. Varanus, 507, 601, 603, 604, 605, 606, 607, 609, 610-619. arenarius, 603, 610, 612. bengalensis, 616, 617. exanthematicus, 612, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618. gouldi, 617. griseus, 603, 610, 613, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618. niloticus, 611, 612, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618. ocellatus, 616, 617. Venerupis macrophylla, 836. monstrosa, 836. INDEX. Venerupis obesa, 836. pulcherrima, 836. Venus marica, 785. Venusia conisaria, 492. Verticordia sp., 846. deshayestana, 846. multicosiata, 846. Vespertilio capensis, 780. pumitis, A470, 764. tasmaniensis, 470. Vesperugo krefftii, 470. scotinus, 576. Vola dorothee, 786. Xenacanthus, 722. Xiphocaris curvirostris, 674, 703. THE END. Xiphocaris fluviatilis, 703. Xiphotrygon, 724, 756. Xystrodus, 723. Yoldia, 786. clara, 792. lepidula, 792. nicobarica, T92. serotina, 792. tenella, 792. tropica, 792. Zamenis gemonensis, 505. Zeugorygma, gen. nov., 911, 923. hirta, 911, 924. orangi@, 911, 924. Zygantroplana, gen. nov., 709. verrilli, 709, 719. P. Z. S. 1906, pp. 463-758, were published on October 10th, 1906. Printed by Taytor and Francis, Red Lion Court, Fleet Street. THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Tuts Society was founded in 1826 by Sir Sramrorp RarFrtes, Mr. J. Sanrne, Mr. N. A. Vigors, and other eminent Naturalists, for the advancement of Zoology and Animal Physiology, and for the introduction of new and curious subjects of the Animal Kingdom, and was incorporated by Royal Charter in 1829. COUNCIL. HIS GRACE THE DUKE OF BEDFORD, K.G., President. Str ALexanper Barrp, Br. Joun Rost BrapForp, Kse., M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., Vice-President. Mason Tue Hon. Witriam EB. CavVmENDISH. F, Dawtrey Derewitt, Ese., M.A., M.D. Caartes Drummonp, Kse., Treasurer. Sir Epwarp Duranp, Br., C.B. Freperick Gittetr, Ese., Vice- President. W. R. Ocitvis-Grant, Esa. Mason Tur Maravis or Hamitton, M.P. JosEpH Jackson Lisrmr, M.A., F.RS. Kse., Srr Epwunp Gites Lopur, Br., Vice-President. KE. G. B. Meapz-Watpo, Hse. P. Caatmers Mircnent, HEse., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Secretary. KE. Lorr Pariires, Esa. Tur Hon. Watter RoruscHiLp M.P., Pa.D. | Howarp Saunpers, Esa., Vice- President. | Davin Seru-Suira, Ese. OxprieLD THomas, Ese., F.R.S. Cuartes 8. Tomns, Ese., M.A., F.R.S., Vice-President. Henry Woopwarp, Ese., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President. 2 The Society consists of Fellows, and Honorary, Forcign, and Corresponding Members, elected according to the By-Laws. The Gardens in the Regent’s Park are open from Nine o’clock a.m. till Sunset. The Offices and Library (8 Hanover Square, W.), where all communications should -be addressed, are open from Ten till Five, except on Saturdays, when they close at Two o’elock p.m. The Library is closed for cleaning purposes during the month of September in each year. The Meetings of the Society for General Business are held at the Office on the Thursday following the third Wednesday in every month of the year, except in September and October, at Four p.m. The Meetings for Scientific Business are held at the Office twice a month, except in July, August, September, and October, at half- past Hight o’elock p.m. The Anniversary Meeting is held on the 29th April, or the nearest convenient day, at Four p.m. The dates of the General Meetings are now posted with the annual supply of tickets to all Fellows of the Society on or before January Ist in eaeh year. TERMS FOR THE ADMISSION OF FELLOWS. Friiows pay an Admission Fee of £5, and an annual Contri- bution of £3, due on the 1st of January, and payable in advance, or a Composition of £30 in lieu thereof; the whole payment, including the Admission Fee, being £35. No person can become a Frriow until the Admission Fee and First Annual Subscription have been paid, or the annual payments have been compounded for. Frettows elected after the 31st of August are not liable for the Subseription for the year in which they are elected. PRIVILEGES OF FELLOWS. Frettows have Personal Admission to the Gardens with Two Companions daily, upon signing their names in the book at the entrance gate. The Wire or Huszanp of a FELLow can exercise these privileges in the absence of the Fellow. 3 The annual supply of Tickets will be sent to each Fritow on the Ist of January in every year, upon filling up and returning the form of Standing Order supplied to Fellows. Every Fstnow is entitled to receive annually 60 undated Green Cards, and, when no specific instructions are received, the supply will be sent in this form. If preferred, however, 20 Green Cards may be exchanged for a book containing 2 Orders for each Saturday * throughout the year. A similar book of Sunday Orders may also be obtained in lieu of 20 Green Cards. A Green Card may also be exchanged for 2 Buff Cards for the use ef Children under 12 years of age. It is particularly requested that Fellows will sign every Ticket before it goes out of their possession. Unsigned Tickets are not available. Green and Buff Tickets may be used on any day and im any year, but in ne case can two Children be admitted with one Adult Ticket, or an Adult admitted with two Children’s Tickets. Frttows are not allowed to pass in friends on their written Order or on presentation of their Visiting Cards. Fettows are exempt from payment of the fee for Painting, Sketching, and Photographing in the Society’s Gardens. Frttows have the privilege of receiving the Society’s ordinary Publications issued during the year upon payment of the additional Subscription of One Guinea. This Subscription is due upon the Ist of January, and must be paid before the day of the Anniversary Meeting, after which the privilege lapses. FxEttows are likewise entitled to purchase these Publications at 25 per cent. less than the price charged to the public. A further reduction of 25 per cent. is also made upon all purchases of Publications issued prior to 1881, if above the value of Five Pounds. Fettows also have the privilege of subseribing to the Annual Volume of ‘ The Zoological Record,’ which gives a list of the Works and Publications relating to Zoology in each year, for the sum of One Pound Ten Shillings. Separate divisions of the volume can also be supplied. Full particulars of these publications can be had on application to the Secretary. * The Saturday Orders are not ayailable if the Fellow introduces friends personally on that day. 4 Frttows may obtain a Transrerapte Tvory Ticker admitting Two Persons, available throughout the whole period of Fellowship, on payment of Ten Pounds in one sum. A second similar Ticket may be obtained on payment of a further sum of Ten Pounds upon the recommendation of the Council. Any Frttow who intends to be absent from the United Kingdom during the space of one year or more, may, upon giving to the Secretary notice in writing, have his or her name placed upon the ‘dormant list,” and will be thereupon exempt from the payment of the annual contribution during such absence. Any Fettow, having paid all fees due to the Society, is at liberty to withdraw his or her name upon giving notice in writing to the Secretary. Ladies or Gentlemen wishing to become Fellows of the Society are requested to communicate with the undersigned. P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, M.A., D.Se., F.R.S., Secretary. 3 Hanover Sguare, London, W., October, 1906. MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON FOR SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS. (AT 3 HANOVER SQUARE, W.) 1906. Tunspay, NovemBer 13 and 27 | Tvxspay, DecemBer 11 1907. Turspay, January 15 Ivnspay, APRIL .. 9 and 23 = Frpruary 5 and 19 ae WMS sha Ve ehaGl OS a MARCH eu eo mune = Anais oo US} Lhe Chair will be taken at half-past Hight o’clock in the Evening precisely. LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Tue scientific publications of the Zoological Scciety of Londen are of two kinds—“ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, and ‘‘ Transactions,” in quarto. According to the present arrangements, the ‘‘ Proceedings” contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien- tifie meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings and recommended to be published in the ‘‘ Proceedings ”’ by the Committee of Publication. A large number of coloured plates and engravings are issued in the volumes of the “ Proceedings,” to illustrate the new or otherwise remark- able species of animals describedin them. Amongst such illustrations, figures of the new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society’s Gardens are often given. The “ Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts, on the first of the months of June, August, October, and April, the part published in April completing the volume for the last half of the preceding year. From January 1901 they have been issued as two half-yearly volumes. The “ Transactions” contain such of the more important communications made to the scientific meetings of the Society as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate them, are better adapted for publication in the quarto form. They are issued at irregular intervals. Fellows and Corresponding Members, upon payment of a Subscription of One Guinea before the day of the Anni- versary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive the Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise entitled to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less than the price charged for them to the Public. A further reduction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of Publications issued prior to 1881, if they exceed the value of five pounds. Fellows also have the privilege of subscribing to the Annual Volume of the Zoological Record for a sum of 80s. (which includes cost of delivery), payable on the Ist July in each year; but this privilege is forfeited unless the subscription be paid before the Ist of December following. The following is a complete list of the publications of the Society already issued. | October, 1906. | TRANSACTIONS* OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 4to. 16 vols. and Index. Eenice te GE (bp He ellows. Public. Vcl. _1., containing 59 Plates.... (1833-35) ..., £8 18 6 .... £418 OF am ii aman CVS MOD Reh al RGN Ge F jut, 5 63 S| rare (LOAZAAOME a2 at Toe! tOymaer as 411 OF 2 aoe We se eel eo) aren 6 =o Oe 8 2 6t faa We 67 7, (86268) bs). 8 de 8) oem in aS 5 92) Gs oe ie CSO6=69) Mise Eso One eel omen OME ra Ge 73. 869279) 10d. vay, Syeb Mae.) aero eay A208) hen Oman me NM oy) O90 4 os. (BYE) ae MO eX ee OB Co IBT7270)7. 10 Oo aes eT Jkncless; \VOlls ews penitent GSse=1) Gide O GF & . 010 0 Vole es contaimime: 9/7 Plates an @iSS0—Sa)) errs Onn Ole 12 16 0 BX 4 6B. oe (US86290)' %4.6 915) 18 100) ee exalt: SO Ee ASLO eG ean. | Sil Oo ae INS | te (CESS) 5 ©. 7, JODO oe AICO ats aes. OF IL O exe ORES ee aes, 7 4 0 VIP Pls. B.S u(Aug 008i att 62.4 arene eX, 8 2a, |) BO, Ye Aue908)), 2 Ons 6s eon MeV IT soe Bul. AbIS: oie 2 uct 1904 eae 4 In 2ictG eae ON BRQL 4 nO 2. (Oct 1005)e ak 6 Om OXY IER Sie 0 es tect: (DEG OS) eos, Ole © , On 0) evils 6k), 122 (Oct. 1906) 6). 1) es OO PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRESPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 2 vols. (Letterpress only). tice t Pree ee Fellows. lees Ih, AOS WO, EW@s VSegadoadooceec As. Od. 2.1 Osah lie ies2 dN ach rate hierar As, 6d ye mes PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY CF LONDON. 8vo. 15 vols. (Letterpress only) and Index. (First Series.) Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. Part J. 1883. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s6d. .. 6s.f | Part IX. 1841.1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. Gsif > le 1 CE ae (Co: 1842. sues » llUh, TERS, = ep ls Ceden Oo. a a CEG, Gai I, WE i GEE oo Cs, OKI, 1844. 3 as eaneion pa AVescS 7) ay We iet Gs: |) MIT, 1845) 4.5) seas Utils TEES ER ee aoe 5» XIV. 1846. 4. ds eaapiitemee NI. TEED, i OE XV. 1847. ,, 4s. 6d, |, Gsth CIIL 1840, 4s. Gd. .. G+ || Index 1830-1847, j, 4s Gal toe 8vo. 13 vols. and Index. (Sccond Series.) Letterpress only. With Plates coloured. Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. Part SOW, WBA. I spall, Bw, 4 O26 dn OSs aban sos £140) 08 eas Sa Pree XeVIIS40. 4,» 4s Cl wrausy. Gate. 1 Ov8>.5. Deon PREPAC 0 0 pi ant AciGds ahi Oa) ae 1 8 6 Li Oy MEDONIS Is ASG ON ener Ne 015 9 1 1 Of¢ ‘ No eset Neel MiZenGgs hence. Oo w 015 9 1 1 Of POX 1550 80! HO baa Cs aiaes Mra tee 0 18° 0 1 4 OF . XAT. 1854. i AS OG) 298 AOSIS saat eh 019 6 WS Oi pee OCU CS tins thon Ash Cd ued Ose acran tees 1 8 6 118 O¢ pa OXOOIV Oe ICOGH col, ue is Od) a Ges Ga mole 1 © & 17 6 Ge MV EIS Hose ee ACS seem Gate ee ae: 1 © ag Ge & XXVI. 1858. r AGU Iai (OStan. ea eee i iil & yD Ore » XXOVOI 1659; 9 ASNIGG ae ea Ga O Shaman y wari Hid G y 2 OF <> SONNE ere bk Guin etGg) ein Vi 6 2 2 OF Index 1848-1860. 6 4s. 6d. Os. it Out of print. * In consequence of a re-arrangement of the stock of the ‘'Transactions,’ the Society is now able to offer for sale, at the reduced price of £80, sets from Vol. y.—xvi. inclusive, and separate papers at about one-fourth their published price, PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8yvo. 40 vols. and 4 Indices. With Plates uncoloured. Letterpress only. With Plates coloured. Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. Fellows. Publie, Fellows. Public. ISO 55 45 Gh cone OSS oosno 9s. Serer Bai GU gong ocr S62 5, 445 Gh ooc5 Ohi coanes 9s. POSS cent BB, eh, onoc 4538.7 ISOS 6.4 28, Gee bao 0 OS mes aon 9s. OS eee eveye Bam Qh sooo GDS IGE 65. Zs Oth osc 5 Oey eco 9s. aE eect OG, Gh soon 45s. SG Oma SOG na C1OSH. antic ies 9s. 5 ts, , Bis OW nooo GHDE NEES 5 4S Gh oo00 Cho concen 9s Be PSEA Pecloisia'o Ba Oh coco 45s. WS G Maer ee crete ereva armies mene 9s. 123.* 5 B88, Deb oes 45s. TRCKGNS) oft bccn Sick He GRRL Cea 9s. ene rs BG, Ce, soon AIS ES COM ee cnet cantons cee a sacar 9s. TOs sores Bos, Bh coco 4S ES 7 Oar wear eee nee head ntcwstte: sesbsni en Qs, Cr LOS Creat Bes, Boh sooo 44S Inglesz, Ikslol- ae) agcoaacooenn Ash Ode OS: SAU arty rest be sic elbatielis 9s. LES eeu Bm, Se cone 445K TCO? 5 Gant none r Sa ee a 9s. ID See eee SE Qh coos ZT SOMe vase Fit aE ee 9s, 12s. Bes BYE sco 45s. ES EA aera aatar gO ae rr a 9s. 1238.+ 36s. sooo ASR, LISTED) aly RA IG CO REE Ona Os} TP Nee 36s. 48s. STOMA ene on csner eae ata Maelo at's 9s. 113. 36s. 48s. LUGE Rulcnatoan ot osc Oc nee Siero ene 9s. UDR aero nasi 36s, A483, I Sif Sirerarae esol teuenvate icon shea tears 9s. 125 Sean 36s. 48s. TSH AS) ae ra ale en rae oe ee 9s. 125i naan 36s. 483, USS OMe ri sper yeas rata acnnerar aay she os 9s. : LDS ese 36s. 483s, Itnclese, SW AUSIs0) nageoeu sono 4s, 6d... 6s. SCRE ere Aare Me call 9s. Ds) 36s. 48s, HS OD Bert ceey esl castrate anata s 9s. 12s. 36s. 48s. Tete es oes Gis CICERO RE ct ene 9s. 12s, 36s. A8s. WS SAN ose eteeecas oan eee cea ekone 9s. Se einen seae 36s. 48s. NSS OVE Arete chensoraeer sce erecciteienart Gites 9s. AA avenneney aan 36s. po | 485, MISS Gi ete ee cise crenn Arncrstiahie 9s. Dg. 36s. 48s, BS SiGe Meets se eae tc na calle aay men, ee 9s. Hh a eee ee 86s. 48s. HSS Spaeceece secevctce eee tak cer ammenncate 9s. 12s. 36s. 48s, TNS) a ae eet ese et arta cen PIN rte 9s. eins mie 36s. 48s, MS 9 OMe ces nace stirrisuehateneveiava: skener acd 9s. PO Sea wales 386s. 48s, Thales, SIEM UO) 65 bo o5eu000 AsiGd sain OSs HS OM cess secre che isce absences ae ut eared eairsaa} cuslataeetele Remeron 36s. 48s, IUGR) ee Breer eh eae eee ORC TTS RARER TCR RPE EE EOS ote orn 36s. 48s. HS SMR ceenes Memp eee iene read mebcmerr acer hae ow ac iauiee eleamtua shaneoedetenci en 36s. A8s, DAS ea ha. yculice Bt cede Can SE EDL RR ORR oe TiC RRS TPC Er PPM ECM TR ara Ouch 1 36s. 48s, ISOS: ss Ge ea ne RNC COREE RRA, iDrere rr) MIMI annen pase 36s. 48s. BES DG enter ene aces cer cM ailavec es eser tar ae aehere font oeconeenrete 36s. 48s, TY epoch cB or i CA CREE Ee MERCI TRE Cerio mornin oe ceo 36s. 48s, TONY aes Sees patie WN Mes Oe OR ed Oe ae NIP Uy REET MOR CRETE ore 36s. 48s, TRESS No la eee pees De Hype IRR Sse ai At 36s. A8s, SD OER Rares eas sete eee loot co cous ee canateat gs ean eC ene 36s. 48s, Jingle, HOMO geacocoscoce Ais OW seater OS: * No perfect copies in stock, t Out of print. PROCEEDINGS or toe GENERAL MERTINGS ror SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS or tots ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 11 vols. Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. TCTOUAS fol lGe AR Ais aneet acinar a CER ILN Ore orneean® Rearing Aces ont AA 0 IESE 3 oag4 c 24s, fine Raith ear eM CATE enor PCa RR Serene oon ec inst T'Sss eee 4s, EG Dies arene cor seeti as ravevieve teuesctslscetevel@haimi esr are nee ee RAL Ssh teers QAs, ne nl Ek Wiener eee EAA arora rn Aeterna Eben aad Saree 18s. . 24s HIS) O Si ees es LW aa ease Aas oe ie eta eke am ONS 80. HME outa VSSin eee 2As. Fp 7 ha tee gM as oan an Mari en aN teeta cr 8 18s eee DAs, WS Aree RAL cera tere ace oihr es Sutasv eat iae th aye Ghats Meee nN eee eR TS Loa Serene. 2As, ss ee AU ie te wtrtevacs aide Sue NoRORNOIN ACen aaa Re oat pete een LS she eer 24s, MOOD M aot enc wenre ak rae oo: ts a atretere wi Kan cide eee RRL Cate aR: tS spears 24s, - Be PALO hes Aa se oe ea fe eee sate ane i eePeaac anes ava Eee Isa aree 2As. NS OGM eA GOS) hb a hac tok erukin ik hielele tn ly outta ronan taeakaniepents DH ioitiath oo 36s. LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Highth Edition.) 8vo. 1883. Cloth, 4s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Ninth Edition.) 8vo. 1896. Cloth, 6s.; Paper, 5s. Catalogue of the Library of the Zoological Society of London. (Fifth Edition.) S8yvo. 1902. Cloth, 6s.; Paper, 5s. These publications may be obtained at the Socisry’s OFrrice (8 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Lonemans’ (Paternoster Low, 45.C.), or through any bookseller. THE ZOOLOGICAL RECORD: —079500——_ THE object of the Zootoercat Recorp is to give, by means of an annual Volume, complete lists of the Works and Publications relating to Zoology in all its branches that have appeared during the year preceding the issue of the Volume, together with full information as to the points they deal with, arranged in such a manner as to serve as an Index to the literature of Zoology in all parts of the globe, and thus to form a repertory that will retain its value for the Student in future years. The ‘ Zoological Record’ is published by the Society at the price of 40s. per volume. But all Members of the Zoological Society of London have the privilege of receiving it, including the cost of delivery, at a subscription price of 30s. per annum. This Sub- scription is due on the Ist of July in every year, and the privilege of Subscription is forfeited unless the amount be paid before the 1st of December following. The Zoological Society, having purchased the entire stock of the ‘Zoological Record,’ is able to supply complete sets. ‘he thirty-seven Volumes tc the end of the nineteenth century, and the Index-Volume (1880-1900) in addition, will be supplied for £15 net (or without the Index-Volume, for £14 10s. net). Volumes of any single year (exclusive of the last five volumes and Vols. 4 and 6) can likewise be supplied at 10s. per volume net. The price of the Index Zoologicus (Index-Volume 1880-1900) is 20s., to Fellows 18s. Members of the Society wishing to subscribe to the ‘ Record ’ are requested to apply at this office for a Form, to be returned when filled up and signed by the subscriber. In order to facilitate the payment of the subscription, a Banker’s Order Form is also supplied to those who prefer that mode of payment. This order, when filled up and signed, should be sent to the Society’s office for registration ; it will then be sent to the Agents named therein. Learned Societies and Institutions and members of the former Zoological Record Association are permitted to subscribe to tho ‘Record’ on the same conditions as are accorded to Members of the Zoological Society. The divisions of the ‘Zoological Record,’ commencing with Vol. 39, may be obtained separately as shown on the next page. SEPARATE DIVISIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL RECORD. At present each Volume of the Zoonocitcan Recorp consists of 20 separately paged Divisions. These may be obtained separately, in paper covers, stitched and lettered. The following are the Divisions and their net prices, viz. :— Suede List of abbreviations of journals, ete. .. .. .. 2 O Special Records, viz. :— I. General Subjects .. 11. Mammalia II]. Aves he ae IV. Reptilia and Batrachia.. V. Pisces VI. Tunicata VIL. Moilusca XS xae XT. XII, xT. XGVic OWL pNaValele xCVaT: Brachiopoda .. . Bryozoa Crustacea Arachnida Myriopoda Insecta .. Echinoderma Vermes .. Ceelenterata .. Spongiz Protezoa Index of new names of genera and subgenera ps WNNFWWNHWrYFNYNFHE BH pW oObd pw bo S On receipt of the price any Division will be forwarded as soon p p J as ready. These separate Divisions can be obtained from the Zoological Society, 5 Hanover Square, London, and also from Messrs. Fried- lander & Sohn, 11 Carlstrasse, Berlin. Cheques and Post-Office Orders should be made payable to “The Zoological Society,” and crossed ‘* Drummond’s,” P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, M.A., D.Sc, F.R-S., Secretary. October, 1906. Zoouoaicau Society or Lonpon, 3 Hanover Squarr, W. LIST OF VOLUMES or rae ‘ZOOLOGICAL RECORD,’ The Record of Zoological Literature, 1864-1866, Vols. 1.-111., and 1868, Vol. vy. Edited by Atperr C. L. G. Ginrumr, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.Z.8., &e. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. (1867, Vol. rv., supplied with sets only.) The Record of Zoological Literature, 1869, Vol. v1.. Edited by Atprrt C. L. G. Gtnraer, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.RB.S., F.Z.8., &c. London, 1870. Price 30s. The Zoological Record for 1870-1872, Vols. vit.—1x. Edited by Atrrep Newton, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., V.P.Z.8., &c. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1873-1883, Vols. x.-xx. Edited by Epwarp Canpwett Rye, F.Z.S., M.E.S, Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1884, 1885, Vols. xx1., xx11. Edited by F. Jerrrey Bert, M.A. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1886-1890, Vols. xx111.-xxvi. Edited by Franx HE. Bepparp, M.A., F.Z.8. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1891-1899, Vols. xxvii1.—xxxvi. Edited by D. SHarp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8., &. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record, Volume the Thirty-seventh; being tecords of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1900. By J. A. Thomson, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, W. A. Herdman, E. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, G. C. Crick, A. W. Brown, D. Sharp, F. A. Bather, A. Willey, and E. A. Minchin. Edited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davin Suarp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8., &c. London, 1901. Price 3Us. The Zoological Record, Volume the Thirty-eighth; being Becords of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1901, By J. A. Thomson, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, Alice L. Embleton, E. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, S. Pace, Albert Brown, D. Sharp, F. A. Bather, and E. A. Minchin. Edited (for the Zcological Society of London) by Davip Swarr, M.A., F.RS. F.Z.8., &c. London, 1902. Price 30s. The Zoological Record, Volume the Thirty-ninth ; being Records of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1902. By D. Sharp, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, W. T. Calman, E. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, Alice L. Embleton, F. A. Bather, ki. A, Minchin, and H. M. Woodcock. Edited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davin Suarp, M.A., F.RS., F.Z.S., &c. London, 1903. Price 30s. The Zoological Record, Volume the Fortieth; being Records of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1903. By D. Sharp, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, W. T. Calman, E. R. Sykes, EK. A. Smith, Alice L. Embleton, F. A. Bather, KK. A. Minchin, and H. M. Woodcock. Edited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davin SHarp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8S., &e. London, 1904. Price 30s. The Zoological Record, Volume the Forty-first ; being Records of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1904. By D. Sharp, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, W. T. Calman, E. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, Alice L. Embleton, F. Silvestri, i. Simon, F. A. Bather, W. Woodland, and H. M. Woodcock. Edited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davip Suarp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8., &c. London, 1905. Price 40s. Index Zoologicus. An alphabetical list of names of genera and subgenera proposed for use in Zoology, as recorded in the Zoological Record, 1880-1900; together with other names not included in the ‘ Nomenclator Zoologicus’ of 8. H. Scudder. Com- piled (for the Zoological Society of London) by Cuartes Owen WATERHOUSE and edited by Davip Suarp, Editor of the Zoological Record. London, 1902. Price to Fellows, 18s.; price to the publie, 20s. ; These publications may be obtained at the Socrety’s OFFICE (3 Hanover Square, W.). THE LOOLOSICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, Tats Society was founded in 1826 by Sir Sramrorp Rarries, Mr. J. Sazrne, Mr. N. A. Vigors, and other eminent Naturalists, for the advancement of Zoology and Animal Physiology, and for the introduction of new and curious subjects of the Animal Kingdom, and was incorporated by Royal Charter in 1829. COUNCIL. HIS GRACH THE DUKE OF BEDFORD, K.G., President. Srr ALEXANDER Barrp, Br. Joun Ross Braprorp, Ksa., M.D., D.Sce., F.R.S., Vice-President. F, Dawtrey Drewirt, Ese, M.A., M.D. Coartes Drummonp, Ese., Treasurer. Srr Epwarp Dovranp, Br., C.B. Freverick Ginterr, Ese., Vice- President. W. R. Oeitvie-Grant, Esa. Mason Tue Maravis oF Hamitton, M.P. JosEPpH JAcKson Lisrzr, Ese., IMeAGS ERS: Sir Epmunp Gries Lover, Br., Vice-President. | E. G. B. Muapr-Watpo, Ese. Pror, E. A. Mincurn. P. Caatmers Mircuetr, Esa, M.A., D.Sc., F.B.S., Secretary. K. Lort Parnries, Ese. Toe Hon. Water Roruscatrp, Wille, 12% 1D). Howarp Saunpers, Ese., Vice- President. Davin Seru-Smira, Esa. OxtprietD Tomas, Ese., F.R.S. Cuartes 8. Tomus, Ese., M.A., F.R.S., Vice-President. Henry Woopwarp, Hsqa., LL.D., F.R.S., Vice-President. 24 The Society consists of Fellows, and Honorary, Foreign, and Corresponding Members, elected according to the By-Laws. The Gardens in the Regent’s Park are open from Nine o’clock a.m. till Sunset. The Offices and Library (8 Hanover Square, W.), where all communications should be addressed, are open from Ten till Five, except on Saturdays, when they close at Two o’clock p.m. ‘The Library is closed for cleaning purposes during the month of September in each year. The Meetings of the Society for General Business are held at the Office on the Thursday following the third Wednesday in every month of the year, except in September and October, at Four p.m. The Meetings for Scientific Business are held at the Office twice a month, except in July, August, September, and October, at half- past Hight o’clock p.m. The Anniversary Meeting is held on the 29th April, or the nearest convenient day, at Four p.m. The dates of the General Meetings are now posted with the annual supply of tickets to all Fellows of the Society on or before January Ist in each year. TERMS FOR THE ADMISSION OF FELLOWS. FrLtows pay an Admission Fee of £5, and an annual Contri- bution of £3, due on the 1st of January, and payable in advance, or a Composition of £30 in lieu thereof; the whole payment, including the Admission Fee, being £35. No person can become a Frttow until the Admission Fee and First Annual Subscription have been paid, or the annual payments have been compounded for. Frttows elected after the 31st of August are not liable for the Subscription for the year in which they are elected. PRIVILEGES OF FELLOWS. Frttows have Personal Admission to the Gardens with Two Companions daily, upon signing their names in the book at the entrance gate. The Wire or Huspanp of a Frntow can exercise these privileges in the absence of the Fellow. 3 The annual supply of Tickets will be sent to each Frttow on the Ist of January in every year, upon filling up and returning the form of Standing Order supplied to Fellows. Every Frtnow is entitled to receive annually 60 undated Green Cards, and, when no specific instructions are received, the supply will be sent in this form. If preferred, however, 20 Green Cards may be exchanged for a book containing 2 Orders for each Saturday * throughout the year. A similar book of Sunday Orders may also be obtained in lieu of 20 Green Cards. A Green Card may also be exchanged for 2 Buff Cards for the use of Children under 12 years of age. It is particularly requested that Fellows will sign every Ticket before it goes out of their possession. Unsigned Tickets are not available. Green and Buff Tickets may be used on any day and in any year, but in no case can two Children be admitted with one Adult Ticket, or an Adult admitted with two Children’s Tickets. Frettows are not allowed to pass in friends on their written Order or on presentation of their Visiting Cards. Fetiows are exempt from payment of the fee for Painting, Sketching, and Photographing in the Society’s Gardens. Frttows have the privilege of receiving the Society’s ordinary Publications issued during the year upon payment of the additional Subscription of One Guinea. This Subscription is due upon the 1st of January, and must be paid before the day of the Anniversary Meeting, after which the privilege lapses. Frttows are likewise entitled to purchase these Publications at 25 per cent. less than the price charged to the public. A further reduction of 25 per cent. is also made upon all purchases of Publications issued prior to 1881, if above the value of Five Pounds. Fettows also have the privilege of subscribing to the Annual Volume of ‘ The Zoological Record,’ which gives a list of the Works and Publications relating to Zoology in each year, for the sum of One Pound Ten Shillings. Separate divisions of the volume can also be supplied. Full particulars of these publications can be had on application to the Secretary. * The Saturday Orders are not available if the Fellow introduces friends personally on that day. 4 Fettows may obtain a Transrerasie Tvyory Trcxet admitting Two Persons, available throughout the whole period of Fellowship, on payment of Ten Pounds in one sum. A second similar Ticket may be obtained on payment of a further sum of Ten Pounds upon the recommendation of the Council. Any Frtiow who intends to be absent from the United Kingdom during the space of one year or more, may, upon giving to the Secretary notice in writing, have his or her name placed upon the “dormant list,” and will be thereupon exempt from the payment of the annual contribution during such absence. Any Fritow, having paid all fees due to the Society, is at liberty to withdraw his or her name upon giving notice in writing to the Secretary. Ladies or Gentlemen wishing to become Fellows of the Society are requested to communicate with the undersigned. P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, M.A., D.Sc., F.B.S., Secretary. 3 Hanover Square, London, W., April, 1907. MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON FOR SCLEN TIP FC) BU SAN ESIs: (AT 3 HANOVER SQUARE, W.) 1907. TuEspay, JANUARY 15 Turspay, APRIL .. 9 and 23 es Frsrvuary 5 and 19 3 Mas nk) Mandeas 5 INVAR CHE eo imea LO 5 JUNE aces lS The Chair will be taken at half-past Hight o'clock in the Evening precisely. LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Tue scientific publications of the Zoological Society of London are of two kinds—“ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, and ‘‘ Transactions,” in quarto. According to the present arrangements, the “ Proceedings” contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien- tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings and recommended to be published in the “ Proceedings”’ by the Committee of Publication. A large number of coloured plates and engravings are issued in the volumes of the “ Proceedings,” to illustrate the new or otherwise remark- able species of animals describedin them. Amongst such illustrations, figures of the new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society’s Gardens are often given. The “ Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts, on the first of the months of June, August, October, and April, the part published in April completing the volume for the last half of the preceding year. [Irom January 1901 they have been issued as two half-yearly volumes. The ‘ Transactions” contain guch of the more important communications made to the scientific meetings of the Society as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate them, are better adapted for publication in the quarto form. They are issued at irregular intervals. Fellows and Corresponding Members, upon payment of a Subscription of One Guinea before the day of the Anni- versary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive the Society’s Publications for the year. They are lkewise entitled to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less than the price charged for them to the Public. A further reduction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of Publications issued prior to 1881, if they exceed the value of five pounds. Fellows also have the privilege of subscribing to the Annual Volume of the Zoological Record for a sum of 30s. (which includes cost of delivery), payable on the Ist July in each year; but this privilege is forfeited unless the subscription be paid before the 1st of December following. - The following is a complete list of the publications of the Society already issued. [ April, 1907.] TRANSACTIONS* OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 4to. 16 vols. and Index. Price to __ Price to the ellows, Public. Vol. I., containing 59 Plates.... (1833-35) .... £3 138 6. £418 OF A ji 3 Ts Bee panne (Glee nee 4b OO). 5 6 6f on JUUte, ap G3) op) erties USA —40) ee Po eee ee AA OF Toes i Uo ene acta, CUI oh OO) 8) 2 Gi . Vis . Gl wy pone (ISCAGS) coon 4B . 619 O re PEN of Oo goo CGH) 4.5, Ul & ©, SOMO a Wale as EOD a seee aot LOCO =e) eae O een Oe 138 12 O pny alileley - CO eae CIS72 a4) eae Onesr aoe 1211 O Pimples, 55 OO i acon (ISE=ID) Gace IA Ay Oo IG 2B @ x. OH 5 se00 CIST7E@)) cock 1O © 8B. 13 7 © Index, Vols. ieSe AER es ern a ered GIBB) ooo OY 4 &. 010 O Wol, Oks Comune Sy lene. 4 CIES D) 5s55 BI © ..,, Wie © is XI, een SOEs Map Norge CUSSCAO OD) cis o pe 2 tsi Ole “ a © oy QA IIO I, py OS gy so (csi) 6 8 BB. Sul @ “4 Oe Se eae CLS OO 9S) ae. % ©. ” @ © _ Kae i ODay ISOS 1901) . we ) OAS: Ji 3 “il @ opie We ms Bet py 00 (ISOISIGOS) 26 O SO “a @ oy OW Bley Jin EN pp Ba on (Ame, 1908) 65 1 @ Ge. 110 O wp OR IU Gp I Dm oo (Came SOR) 55 Ole @ . 018 O sy oe ig te sy OI peo (Oct. 1904)... OAC a 110 O an OS AUIS pee er SS oy ao (eK 1905)... dehy el GO Oar 110 O 5) SSW 4 OD gy eee cooce (Deca905) ae 0 elon One i @ © PRPNaV Ali e'G mNyy, LD Use aoe (Oem: ISOS). 565 1° 2 6 . 110 O PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRESPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 2 vols. (Letterpress only). rife te Price oie Berek Jo NGOS, IsrOb rs sseconscc0eede As! (OG. Sack eiOSsi II. 1882. RPM ener onan Os Bl Goana Ag (Odi acta iaOSs 7 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 15 vols. (Letterpress only) and Index. (First Series.) Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. Part I. 1833.1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. | Part IX. 1841.1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. 6s.f Moles. 1 AseGa) 16s. i 1842: op 4 ma Cae , IOUT, IGG, An Gh ss Ga, ONL 1848. ,, 45. Gas arse . IN, WEG, 1 iy CEL 5 Oe XIE 1644. — 4secemen Mem S876) ©), 1) cds 6d. aaics: RI. 1845. |. | seu ieaiaan ~ WILT 4% 456 .. Ge 5 (XIV 1846... ds Cae ener VINE 1889, 4 a, Asida6s.t1| 4, - XV 1847. | 7 Asacd aes oy WEG MEO, Ge og Cap || line MERON, =, FS dL a. Ge. 8vo. 13 vols. aha Index. (Second Series.) Letterpress only. With Plates coloured. Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Fellows. Public, Fellows. Public. Part SOW, IGAR, Nwoll Sr@s 4S Gi 56 GS oadco0ce Sn eee ff Chr PS PME IS40,. os ABC d, OS ee 10.8 1 7 6 ON WIL, HEROS py 9 ey Go OG) aes oun 18) 16 118 Of+ PON 155 As rOuh le 16s eece 015 9 1 1G fi Oe eon Ey raed oe ies TL hee, 015 9 1 1 OF X XI. 18538. 95 ASO GES tice ht MOSH se aee eee ee 018 0 a Op io OITA Mn Ne On pect Oe 7 ania ete 019 6 1 6 OF WAP OCIS S55 ipl por ACs: ea es hee ed 11.8.6 118 OF S| ORI HOG Gs a rm a hey eens ih amen a 1 ® 8 1 7 6+ Be EXORVA TSS FOG ee Lach Ca, Se esen A Sen 1 Oo8 1 7 6+ PE PXOMGVL C58) | a AenOda miCsl eee 1 6 2 2 OF VT. 1859: AS OMA cieset OS aint tet, Wt & YY 2 (Ohp MO NGI ISCO! - | GS ayaa Oa He eeG saya vege Lil 6 2 2 Of Index 1848-1860. > As. 6d, Gs, ii Out of print. * In consequence of a re-arrangement of the stock of the ‘Transactions,’ the Society is now able to offer for sale, at the reduced price of £30, sets from Vol. y.—xvi. inclusive, and separate papers at about one-fourth their published price, PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 40 vols. and 4 Indices. Letterpress only. With Plates uncoloured. With Plates coloured. Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. BS Giller A SHE Gaara ists: OSs), re ee eile 9s. Seritres MUS ae apa re os Oda ee Osan UsOA 45 41h bo05 OH Goode Os Benen ne op ac BEte cli saan Loar 1863 Actes Gamer OSs 'ecc ciate 9s. a aD oh anes aa Shh coon 458 1864 ao. Gh 6005 Sou aoc 9s. «TOs ee 33s. 9d _ 4bgar 1865 ASW OC See Na rae OSs svat ures 9s, 5 IDs BBS Sth coon 2S 1866 ACMIOG Manor OSeE are sits 5 O8 ON A Geni 36 Bh coon GOS WG: ain Gy Oto.0D HCHO RO ONE Cen 9s . 125.% S35, Bh ooog 41oo TUCKS) -S @olocn Selo Bb Ma Eon 9s te UD sees BBkD Wh sane 415% INAS 8) 2n:6 5 tig Oc IchEts Gia ane ORE 9s. Pe PRO iy NOI KTS lob oo. ZS TUGTO) ea clei o 0 OR RIOR Reena 9s. sional Rl Seteerorneee BB BUR coon 4inB: inidex I SGIA1STOy weve ee ie « AS (Sth ng oe 6s. TCV ETL ak, ohn er CeArotb Gate een a MRE 9s. ceric LA Sek eens a Bh booe 4455: GOA. no Bic oO OEE GOI CRO nia 9s. oD see a Spi Wh coon ARNT CBs aaa Oke een aa ori ten 9s. ct Dehua Bi Bh ooo 45s NCS 8 cere tity Ie iy Oe REO 9s. lea 36s, nan Gbseer Sea errar aes tis crater Sekai reve. Giaionet ave) 9s. Rae Ue tec ee be F 36s, soo ALS US Olen erste ecevonretoscaverierersiane 9s. lei er 36s. os GWT see cab Dea cen eee ae 9s. FULD See eg s 36s, soo. aes SSM eee nite eee 9s. 2 CUD gre See 36s, boo. Gksks USS) es Seteeeth occ op tl cola Oe ee 9s, oes LOS ae 36s. soe 48s SSO eri ween rctey ets v Seees chadais hae os sagt” aD St uate ies 36s. Ra aie Choe Index, VS 71-1880" oa. cess « Aigts Clive cere 6s. TKS Gis bo ene ES ano eee 9s. patos ADSS Set eee OOS: 4 48s, SSD GPa VEN ain ot scin sick Snes 9s. elias 36s 48s, SBS meee estan cic seer 9s. rel Pree a 36s 48s. NSS Ane davai erarapecsmirs (ors ee reins 9s. pee ae 36s : A8s. USS Sara tetersrteveratewatone se ter hovereuies 9s. , las 36s a. 488) MSS Grae ae hayes eltararsea aeons. oraretons 9s. 5 Be. 36s A8s, LUSIS HM ante aco. OnE REVEL Apa aio CE eR 9s hie Dslr ae 36s 48s WIS SSE nieve vee cee Se Sr eRe 9s 5 NBs, 36s 48s ThetetS) sat cae area Bs ercreearm rea oun eneorens 9s. Nicre LOS ee aneeat 36s. ate CA Ses USS OA are sicie nalixwvous econ eaiote hare 9s. BAe ea ein OE boon ees: lbnGlesx, ISIE) BEB AGeanoonc Ass Oda aes 6s NS Ores eet eae cite ah sian ol ves’ eae pret elena ck eitene set eyia re del oucireten oe aeon ew arae 36s, NLS TO are eon DCE MOCO CIC TEER ACUI Ee NCICROI a Or tearieny cra cnuicne 36s 48s. ICS ba blo. Be a ER PORE OISLORI AO ees LO OuenS 36s 48s, MS OAT erie svanetarea wetens IES See its ee MER part aera AON Ole ERS ae 36s 48s, LS syiternnene yt iiel cn o's: ois) ota hay Biss Bea ca a cane Ee ino 36s. A8s, SS GI ern eee so ca aliasc a ante atpon tae Mme teteee pen c Ret enemas 36s. . 48s, UST OT) - sai ah ANA Ge Suet ea aR ey aE TIE aie pee ON oC Wo ee ee 36s oss SOS Rae erste ae al dra cael a Ura SS Eyed cat A Sao On eRe Che 36s . 48s, UNS OG Meee ata Ay revise corre avis Scand a alicui toleves Onsale latent SPE TOL Oba toNat mele tees 36s A8s, TCT OTO) |e Ora ee Le MPS Ie APCS Torre Ge nein AL eres eer 363 483 Index sISOME GOO) Feces cleets « AS, Gi, sob, OS * No perfect copies in stock. t Out of print. PROCEEDINGS or toe GENERAL MEETINGS ror SCIENTIFIC BUSINESS or tar ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 11 vols. Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. DOOM Sy Ole te Tees csttte ys cars tai at ata atesaniarerdiettireaaecensta te kes eonnas te opelarctees IESER G4 o80.6 24s. x mee Lee ace rairpiay tnt ua Tate cad anerecte Aire ar cave unpe vecone amcneec ta Stee eaeN rae VS Sie clea cre 24s, BS OMB ambien auc cakes toisus cosfeaitiscs se haeiic sve Caer kosehe radar oneneie uveneneenars TUSK OW ees AN As, <3 Fe Deter crati cia ala gade eo eetigata ok cer SAN aot ee, ore Tereun OR nT TSS. seus 24s JISTOSS 2S a ca eins ns Get Gn REAL ot CERAM IVa IB se7 Geter 24s, mA Bey LUT ace eaaane cite SIS lela oe vero aoa aerate eae ceca eee heh repeat 24s, NOAH we UL Ser sitchen, aati lovate eid BOR Cee unit Meno aee gS retei en enor LSsy oe exes 24s. SAUL ct csekever eee: Geis Bel Suet casks oS PRE uke teccalneal Soe Mecwenaet ae ISS sooo. 2S. NSO teres ee Micke eter e aie tr ibe Gate «dread: ite es ah cae tr eee A ee Ssh tea 24s, * Fl ic nn ee ra eral ON ar ee A te Ha PSE we LSSeae eee 245 MSO G2 vi listeners, 5 octhauc: pretcoshe rn cect oleh aust Mohetee netatek SOS gehen 48s LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Highth Edition.) 8vo. 1883. Cloth, 4s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Ninth Edition.) 8vyo. 1896. Cloth, 6s.; Paper, 5s. Catalogue of the Library of the Zoological Society of London. (Fifth Edition.) 8vo. 1902. Cloth, 6s.; Paper, 5s. These publications may be obtained at the Socrery’s OFFICE (3 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Loyauans’ (Paternoster Low, E.C.), or through any bookseller. THE ZOOLOGICAL RECORD. ——0F0500—— ‘HE object of the Zootogicat Recorp is to give, by means of an annual Volume, complete lists of the Works and Publications relating to Zoology in all its branches that have appeared during the year preceding the issue of the Volume, together with full information as to the points they deal with, arranged in such a manner as to serve as an Index to the literature of Zoology in all parts of the globe, and thus to form a repertory that will retain its value for the Student in future years. The ‘ Zoological Record’ is published by the Society at the price of 40s. per volume. But all Members of the Zoological Society of London have the privilege of receiving it, including the cost of delivery, at a subscription price of 30s. per annum. This Sub- scription is due on the Ist of July in every year, and the privilege of Subscription is forfeited unless the amount be paid before the 1st of December following. The Zoological Society, having purchased the entire stock of the ‘Zoological Record,’ is able to supply complete sets. The thirty-seven Volumes to the end of the nineteenth century, and the Index-Volume (1880-1900) in addition, will be supplied for £15 net (or without the Index-Volume, for £14 10s. net). Volumes of any single year (exclusive of the last five volumes and Vols. 4 and 6) can likewise be suppled at 10s. per volume net. The price of the Index Zoologicus (Index-Volume 1880-1900) is 20s., to Fellows 18s. Members of the Society wishing to subscribe to the ‘ Record ’ are requested to apply at this office for a Form, to be returned when filled up and signed by the subscriber. In order to facilitate the payment of the subscription, a Banker’s Order Form is also supplied to those who prefer that mode of payment. ‘This order, when filled up and signed, should be sent to the Society’s office for registration ; it will then be sent to the Agents named therein. Learned Societies and Institutions and members of the former Zoological Record Association are permitted to subscribe to the ‘Record’ on the same conditions as are accorded to Members of the Zoological Society. The divisions of the ‘Zoological Record,’ commencing with Vol. 39, may be obtained separately as shown on the next page. SEPARATE DIVISIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL RECORD. At present each Volume of the Zootocicat Recorp consists of 20 separately paged Divisions. These may be obtained separately, in paper covers, stitched and lettered. The following are the Divisions and their net prices, viz. :— SW Jiist of abbreviations of journals,ete. .. .. .. 2 0 Special Records, viz. :— I. General Subjects .. 11. Mammalia IIT. Aves SEAMS AE: TV. Reptilia and Batrachia. . V. Pisces VI. Tunicata VII. Moilusca VIII. Brachiopoda .. oS & or) IX, aK, XI. XCar SOU0E XLV. Xavi WAL, WANE DOWABO Bryozoa Crustacea Arachnida Myriopoda Insecta .. Echinoderma Vermes .. Coelenterata .. Spongiee Protozoa Index of new names of genera and subgenera LO SS Tt 18S) WG) Cony KS) [) = (So) 118) bd to wore ww aoe ef © @ (=>) — S So SOqQce @ © & On receipt of the price any Division will be forwarded as soon as ready. These separate Divisions can be obtained from the Zoological Society, 3 Hanover Square, London, and also from Messrs. Fried- lander & Sohn, 11 Carlstrasse, Berlin. Cheques and Post-Office Orders should be made payable to “The Zoological Society,” and crossed “* Drummond’s.” P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Secretary. April, 1907. ZoouoGicaL Society or Lonpon, 3 Hanovur Square, W, LIST OF VOLUMES or rae ‘ZOOLOGICAL RECORD. The Record of Zoological Literature, 1864-1866, Vols. 1.-111., and 1868, Vol. v. Edited by Anserr C. L. G. Ginrumr, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.Z.S., &e. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. (1867, Vol. 1v., supplied with sets only.) The Record of Zoological Literature, 1869, Vol. vi. Edited by Arprrt ©. L. G. Guyraer, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., FIRS: E-Z:8., &e: London, 1870. Price 30s. The Zoological Record for 1870-1872, Vols. vir.—1x. Edited by Aurrep Newron, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., V.P.Z.8., &e. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1873-1883, Vols. x.-xx. Edited by Epwarp Canpwett Ry, F.Z.S., M.E.S. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1884, 1885, Vols. xx1., xxi1. Edited by F. Jurrrey Bert, M.A. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1886-1890, Vols. xx11.—xxvir. Edited by Frank E. Bupparp, M.A., F.Z.8. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record for 1891-1900, Vols. xxvi11.—xxxvil. Edited by D. Suarp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., &c. Price 10s. each Volume. Net. The Zoological Record, Volume the Thirty-eighth; being Records of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1901, By J. A. Thomson, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, Alice L. Embleton, I. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, 8. Pace, Albert Brown, D. Sharp, F. A. Bather, and E. A. Minchin. LEdited (for the Zeological Society of London) by Davin Suarp, M.A., F.R.8. F.Z.S8., &c. London, 1902. Price 30s. The Zoological Record, Volume the Thirty-ninth ; being Records of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1902. By D. Sharp, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, W. T. Calman, E. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, Alice L. Embleton, F. A. Bather, Ki. A. Minchin, and H. M. Woodcock. Jdited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davin SuHarp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8., &e. London, 1903. Price 30s. The Zoological Record, Volume the Fortieth; being Records cf Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1903. By D. Sharp, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, W. T. Calman, I. R. Sykes, KE. A. Smith, Alice L. Embleton, F. A. Bather, H. A, Minchin, and H. M. Woodcock. Edited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davin Suarp, M.A., F.RS., F.ZS., We. London, 1904. Price 30s. The Zoological Record, Volume the Forty-first; being Records of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1904. By D. Sharp, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, G. A. Boulenger, W. T. Calman, EH. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, Alice L. Embleton, F. Silvestri, KH. Simon, F. A. Bather, W. Woodland, and H. M. Woodcock. Edited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davrp Snare, M.A., F.K.S., F.Z.8., &e. London, 1905. Price 40s. The Zoological Record, Volume the Forty-second ; being Records of Zoological Literature relating chiefly to the year 1905. By D. Sharp, R. Lydekker, R. Bowdler Sharpe, Igerna B. J. Sollas, W. T. Calman, EH. R. Sykes, E. A. Smith, Helen P. Kemp, F. Silvestri, A. 8. Hirst, Margaret Grant, Cora B. Sanders, E. A. Minchin, and H. M. Woodcock. dited (for the Zoological Society of London) by Davin Suarp, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.8., &c. London, 1906. Price 40s. . Index Zoclogicus. An alphabetical list of names of genera and subgenera proposed for use in Zoology, as recorded in the Zoological Record, 1880-1900; together with other names not included in the ‘ Nomenclator Zoologicus’ of 8. H. Seudder. Com- piled (for the Zoological Society of London) by Cuartzs Owen Warernovuse and edited by Davin Suarp, Editor of the Zoological Record. London, 1902. Price to Fellows, 18s.; price to the public, 20s. These publications may be obtained at the Socrmty’s Orrice (3 Hanover Square, W.). ‘ No. 31. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* May Ist, 1906. Dr. Henry Woopwarp, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secrerary read a report on the additions that had been made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March 1906, which stated that they were 124 in number. Mr. OvpFIELD THomas, F.R.S., exhibited the skin of a re- markable new Duiker from Nyasaland, which had been presented to the British Museum by Mr. 8. W. Frank. Tt was (by Mr. Frank’s request) named as follows :— CEPHALOPHUS WALKERI, Sp. n. Size medium. General ground-colour dark greyish brown, darkening almost to black on the back. Under surface scarcely lighter. Whole of forehead deep glossy black, connected by a narrow dark line down the nape with the black of the back. Cheeks and chin pale fawn. Limbs dark throughout, Hab. Tuchela River, 8. Nyasa. Type. B.M. No. 6.4.21.1. The Hon. Watter Rotruscuitp, M.P., F.Z.8., read a short paper entitled “ Further Notes on Anthropoid Apes,” and exhi- bited five mounted specimens, one skeleton, six skulls, and a photograph of the following races:—Gorilla gorilla dark-headed race, G. gorilla red-headed race, G. gorilla matschiei, G. gorilla diehli, Simia vellerosus, and S. vellerosus fuliginosus. Mr. OnprietD THomaés, F.R.S., read a paper on Mammals collected in South-west Australia for Mr. W. E. Balston. * This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London, W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications, along with the ‘ Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Stxpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Sia Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 2 Mr. Balston had been good enough to defray the expenses of a collector, Mr. G. C. Shortridge, for the exploration of South- west Australia, in the interests of the National Museum, and the present paper gave an account of the Mammals thus obtained. Thirty-two species and subspecies were enumerated, of which the following were described as new :— SCOTEINUS BALSTONI, Sp. n. Allied to S. greyi; but the fur bicolor, smoky brown basally, pale brown terminally. Forearm 36 mm. Hab. Laverton, West Australia. Type. Female. Original number 170. TACHYGLOSSUS ACULEATUS INEPTUS, subsp. n. Very spinous, the spines with dark tips. Snout unusually short, the rostral index 77-80. Greatest length of typical skull 104 mm.; greatest breadth 47-8; rostrum 43:5. Hab. Parker’s Range, Southern Cross. Type. Male. Original number 123. A series of papers was read on the Lepidoptera collected in South Tibet by the officers during the recent expedition to that country under Col. Sir Frank Younghusband. Mr. H. J. Enwus, ¥.R.S., gave an account of the Butterflies contained in the collecticn, which comprised 33 species and varieties, four of which were described as new. The Moths, exclusive of the 7ineide, had been worked out by Sir Grorce Hampson, Bt., who eiumerated the 63 species of which specimens were obtained. O: these, examples of 36 species were taken at moderate elevations in Sikhim, and belonged to the Indian fauna, two being described as new; 27 species belonged to the Palearctic fauna, of which 9 were widespread and 18 Tibetan; 10 of these were described as new. An account of the Zineide was supplied by Mr. J. Harrury Durrant: they were referred to 4 species, two of which were new. My. F. E. Bepparp, F.R.S., read a paper entitled ‘“ Contri- butions to the Knowledge of the Vascular and Respiratory Systems in the Ophidia and to the Anatomy of the Genera Boa and Corallus.” 3 The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, the 15th May, 1906, at half-past Hight o’clock P.m., when the following communications will be made :— 1. Mr. J. N. Hatserr.—Zoological Results of the Third Tanganyika Expedition conducted by Mr. W. A. Cunnington, 1904-05. Report on the Hydrachnde. 2. Mr. OupFreLp Tuomas, F.R.S.—On Mammals from Northern Australia presented to the National Museum by Sir William Ingram and the Hon. John Forrest. 3. Prof. W. B. Benuam, D.Sc., and Mr. W. J. Dunpar.—On the Skull of a young Specimen of the Ribbon Fish (Regalecus). The following Paper has been received :— Dr. von Linsvow.—Gordtiiden aus Korea. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the ZOOLOGICAL Socrery oF Lonvon should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. 3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W. 8th May, 1906. WA eases) oe ae Muerte Ce etic ioe ME VE ek Ht peyy ay ae | : ‘ Ray Py i FPL gia eee LR Mee oe et Dae eee Sd No. 82. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. May 15th, 1906. Dr. J. Rost Braprorp, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read a report on the additions that had been made to the Society's Menagerie during the month of April 1906, which stated that they were 171 in number. Mr. F. E. Bepparp, F.R.S., exhibited a nearly full-time foetus of Lemur rufifrons, and called attention to the carpal vibrisse, which were extremely conspicuous, though the rest of the ventral surface of the arm was devoid of hair. Mr. Bepparp also exhibited, on behalf of Dr. C. G. SELIGMANN, a cock of mixed breed which had been caponised for commercial purposes whilst young. The bird, which had been under obser- vation for over a year, at no time showed any evidence of sexual attraction for or towards either sex. On dissection, there was no trace of testicular tissue. The head was hen-like, but the bird possessed well-marked and rather stout but short spurs, whilst the tail, which contained sickle-feathers, was ‘‘ over-furnished.,” Mr. R. I. Pococx, F.Z.8., Superintendent of the Gardens, exhibited and made remarks upon a specimen of a Leaf-insect (Phyllium) from the Seychelles, which had been brought to the Gardens by Mr. E. G. B. Meade- Waldo, F.Z.8. Mr. Henry Mount, F.Z.S., exhibited, on behalf of Mr. Bussey, a skin of the Spotted-necked Otter (Lutra maculicollis) obtained * This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London, W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications, along with the ‘ Proceedings’; butit may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Sir Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 6 at Fort Johnston, Uganda. The skull and carcase had been extracted through the mouth, thus leaving the skin intact. A communication from Mr. J. N. Hapert contained descrip- tions of the two species of Water-Mites (Hydrachnide) collected by Mr. W. A. Cunnington in Lake Nyasa during the Third Tanganyika Expedition 1904—05. Mr. Onprretp Tromas, F.R.S., read a paper on a collection of Mammals made by Mr. W. Stalker in the Northern Territory of South Australia, and presented to the National Museum by Sir William Ingram, Bart., and the Hon. John Forrest. The collection included 16 species, of which the two following were of special interest :— MUs FORRESTI, sp. 0. Size medium. Colour drab-grey above, white below. Teeth with their lamine peculiarly twisted, the first molars with large cingular ledges. Head and body 104 mm.; tail 72; hind foot 19. Type. B.M. No. 6.3.9.39. PHASCOGALE INGRAMI, Sp. Nn. Size minute; the teeth and feet smaller than in any known Australian Marsupial. Head peculiarly flattened. Head and body 80 mm. ; tail 60; hind foot 10. Type. B.M. No. 6.3.9.77. Mr. F. E. Bepparp, F.R.S., communicated a paper by Prof. W. B. Bennam and Mr. W. J. Dunzar dealing with the skull of a young Ribbon-Fish (Regalecus). A communication from Dr. von Linsrow contained descriptions of two species—one of them new--of Hair-Worms of the family Gordiide. The specimens had been obtained in Korea by Mr. Malcolm Anderson, who was making collections of the fauna of Eastern Asia for the Duke of Bedford. A communication from Mr. G. A. BouLENGER contained de- scriptions of a new Lizard, a new Snake, and a new Toad collected in Uganda by Mr. KE. Degen, F.Z.8. Mr. R. I. Pocock read a paper on the gestation and parturition of certain Monkeys that had bred in the Society’s Menagerie in the spring of the present year. if The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, the 29th May, 1906, at half-past Hight o'clock p.M., when the following communications will be made :— 1. Messrs. OtprreLD THomas and Haro~tp Scuwann.—The Rudd Exploration of South Africa.—V. List of Mammals ob- tained by Mr. Grant in N.E. Transvaal. 2. Mr. F. EK. Bepparp, F.R.S8.—On the Vascular System of Heloderma, with Notes on that of the Monitors and Crocodiles. The following papers have been received :— 1. Dr. R. Broom, C.M.Z.8.—On the South African Diapto- saurian Reptile Howesia. 2. Dr. G. Srewarpson Brapy, F.R.S.—On the Entomostracan Fauna of the New Zealand Lakes. 3. Dr. CHARLES Cururon.—Note on some Crustacea from the Freshwater Lakes of New Zealand. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the ZOOLOGICAL Soctery or Lonpon should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. 3 Hanover Squars, Lonpon, W. 22nd May, 1906. 5 ree Baie No. 33. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.® May 29th, 1906. FREDERICK GitLErr, Esq., Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. R. H. Burns, F.Z.8., exhibited, on behalf of Prof. Srewarr, some dissections prepared for the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons from material derived from the Society’s Gardens. The specimens included the head of a Ki-wi(Apieryx mantelli) in sagittal section, showing the relatively large size of the olfactory parts of the brain and the complexity of the olfactory chamber; the head of a Crowned Crane (Balearica regulorwm), showing the dilatable pharynx, which by its inflation when the bird crows causes a sudden distension of the gular wattle, and apparently acts as a resonating-chamber ; preparations of the cheek-pouches of a. Spotted Cavy (Celogenys paca); and the stomach of a fetal Giraffe (Giraffa camelopardalis antiquorum g X G. c. wardi 2). Mr. R. EK. Hoxnprye exhibited,.and made remarks upon, the skull and horns of a male, so-called ‘‘ Wild” Irish Goat, also th e skull of a Domestic Cat in which the posterior border of the orbit. was complete. Dr. L. W. Sampon exhibited a series of diagrams illustrating the transmission of diseases by Insects and Ticks. Prof. Rosert T. Jackson exhibited a photograph of the Champley collection of eggs of the Great Auk taken before the collection was dispersed, and made remarks on specimens of the bird that had lately come under his notice. He also exhibited a long-focus lens for museum work and dissections. * This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London, W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications, along with the ‘Proceedings’; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Sir Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 10 The Sucrerary exhibited the skull of a Wild Boar that had lately been dug up during building operations in James Street, Oxford Street, W. Mr. Harotp Scuwann, F.Z.S., read a paper prepared by Mr. OupFiELD THomas, F.R.S., and himself, on Mammals collected by Mr. C. H. B. Grant in the Zoutpansberg district of the Transvaal, and presented to the National Museum by Mr. C. D. Rudd. The collection had been obtained at two localities—Klein Letaba at 1000’ altitude and Woodbush at 4500’, and so gave a good general idea of the fauna of the region. In all it consisted of about 250 specimens belonging to 51 species and subspecies, of which several were described as new. In addition, the old genus Macroscelides was broken up into three, the new name HLEPpHAN- TULUS being given to the group of which JZ. rupestris was the type, and Nasruio to that typified by M. brachyrhynchus. Of the species the following was specially noteworthy :— HELOGALE BRUNNULA, Sp. 0. Allied to H. parvula, but with the head paler than the body, a suffusion of buffy in the general colour and with the limbs not darkening terminally. Hab. Klein Letaba. Type. Male. B.M. 5.12.9.22. Hight specimens examined. Mr. F. E. Bepparp, F.R.8., read a paper entitled ‘“‘ On the Vascular System of Heloderma, with Notes on that of the Monitors and Crocodiles.” Mr. BepDARD also read a paper containing a description of the external characters of an unborn feetus of a Giraffe (Giraffa camelopardalis antiquorum 3 X G.c. wardi 2). Dr. A. SmitrH Woopwarp, F.R.S., communicated a paper by Dr. Rosert Broom, C.M.Z.S8., on the South African Diapto- saurian Reptile Howesva. The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business (closing the Session 1905-06) will be held on Tuesday, the 19th June, 1906, at half-past Eight o’clock p.m., when the following com- munications will be made :— 1. Sir Cuarztes Exiot, K.C.M.G.—The Nudibranchs of South India and Ceylon. ll 2. The Hon. Watrer Roruscutp, F.Z.S.—Description of a new Species of Zebra. 3. Dr. G. Stewarpson Brapy, F.R.S.—On the Entomostracan Fauna of the New Zealand Lakes, 4. Dr. CHARLES Cuturon.—Note on some Crustacea from the Freshwater Lakes of New Zealand. 5. Mr. C. Tare Recan, F.Z.S.—A Classification of the Selachian Fishes. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the ZooLoGicaAL Socrery oF Lonpon should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. 3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W. 5th June, 1906. e au No. 34. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* June 19th, 1908. Sir Epmunp G. Loprr, Bart., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secrerary read a Report on the additions that had been made to the Society's Menagerie during the month of May 1906. Dr. W. T. Cauman, F.Z.8., exhibited, on behalf of Dr. A. Ducks, C.M.Z.8., a specimen of the Crustacean Palemon jamaicensis Herbst, from the Atoyac River, Vera Cruz, Mexico. Dr. Cauman also exhibited a photograph of a Lobster with abnormal chelee. Dr. C. G. Seriemann, F.Z.S8., the Society’s Pathologist, exhibited and made remarks upon the heart of a Tiger that had died in the Society’s Menagerie. Dr. SetigMANN also exhibited some feathers from the tail of a cock Pheasant which were gradually assuming the pattern of the feathers of the hen bird. Mr. W. Savitte Kent, F.Z.8S., exhibited a series of lantern- slides, taken from photographs in natural colours, illustrating the Fish and associated fauna of the Polynesian Coral Reefs. * This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London, W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications, along with the ‘ Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day ef publication at the price of Stxpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 14 Sir Cares Exior, K.C.M.G., F.Z.8., communicated a paper entitled “On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with Special Reference to the Collections and Drawings preserved in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne.” This paper was an attempt to settle the synonymy of various Nudibranchiata of the Indo-Pacific with the help of Kelaart’s drawings and the collections made by him and Walter Elliot, and now preserved at Newcastle. It also contained some new information as to the anatomy of several species (particularly Platydoris formosa, P. papillata, Doriopsilla miniata, Kalinga ornata, and several Pleurophyllidiidee). Of the identifications suggested, the following were regarded as more or less certain :—(1) Hexabranchus maz ‘ginatus (Q. & G.)= Doris gloriosa Kel.; (2) Chromodoris diardii (Kel.)=(C. semperi Bgh.; (3) Casella maccarthyi (Kel.)=C. cincta Bgh.; (4) Ken- tr adlomiis maculosa (Cuv.)=K. annuligera Bgh.; (5) ‘Discodoris concinna (A. & H. )=D. concinniformis Bgh.; (6) Archidoris violacea Bgh.=A. africana Eliot ; (7) Thordisa villosa A. & H.= ft speeder a Bgh.; (8) Trippa luteola (Kel.)=Thordisa ? cau- data Farran ; (9) Ty evelyana ceylonica Kel.= 7. rubromaculata Bgh.; (10) Bornella . di gitata Ad. & Reeve = B. hancockana Kel. ; (11) Samla bicolor (Kel.)=S, annuligera Bgh.; (12) Elysia cerulea Kel. = H. lineolata Bgh.; (13) #. punctata Kel. = EL, nigropunctata (Pse.). The following were regarded as probable, but not certain until further specimens could be examined -—(1) Chromodoris fidelis (Kel.)=C. flammulata Bgh.; (2) Hoplodoris desmoparypha Bgh. = Platydoris papillata Eliot ; (3) Asteronotus hemprichi Ehrenb. = Doris exanthemata Kel.; (4) Thordisa crosslandi Eliot, 1904= Diaulula? gigantea Bgh., 1905; (5) Doris intecta Kel. = Trippa ornata Bgh.; (6) Doris leopar da Kel. = Tri ippa monsont Eliot ; (7) Doridopsis tuberculosa (Q. & G.) var. = Doris car bunculosa Kel. ; (8) Diphyllidia marmorata Kel. = Linguella cinerea Farran ; (9) Phyllobr anchus orientalis (Kel.)=P. prasinus and P. rubi- cundus Bgh. In both these lists the first specific name had priority, if established. The following references to genera were certain or probable :— Chromodoris gleniei (ele) C. amabilis (Kel.); C. tennantana (Kel.); Platydoris (not Discodoris) ellioti (A. & H.); Halgerda? apiculata (A. & H.); Staurodoris rusticata (A. & H.); Doriopsilla miniata (A. & H.); Stiliger ? viridis (Kel.). The Hon. Watrer RotuscuiLp, M.P., ¥.Z.8., exhibited specimens of, and described, a new species of Zebra, intermediate between Hquwus zebra and £. burchelli, from N.K. Rhodesia, and a new Bush- buck from Portuguese East Africa. Mv Roruscuixp also exhibited specimens of the Forest-Pigs, Hylocherus meinertzhagent, Potamocherus johnstoni, and P.chero- potamus demonis, and described certain distinctive features. 15 A paper was read from Dr. G. Srewarpson Brapy, F.RS., C.M.Z.8., which contained an account of the Entomostraca taken during a ‘bathymetr ical survey of the New Zealand Lakes, and a comparison of this fauna with that of the English Lakes, which appeared to present very similar physical conditions. A paper by Prof. Cuarues Cuinron, F.L.S., dealing with the higher Crustacea obtained during the same survey, was also read. Mr. C. Tare Recan, B.A., F.Z.8., read a paper entitled “A Classification of the Selachian Fishes.” The author stated that the Selachii were regarded as entitled to rank, at least, as a well-marked subclass, and he divided them into two principal groups, viz. Trematopnea and Chasmatopnea, the latter including the single order Holocephali. The Trematopnea were arranged as follows :-— Order. Suborder. Division. Family. Subfamily, TRY ( Cladoselachide. JET DTD RX ONE TN OY BINA GA UE soe esos e ees aan Wen reo eer Rio aan eee Th Olededeneide. Diplacanthide. NGMNENEODUE eee ee Ditacanth JCOTETET EI CUNO EW) s arrconedopseetadareaneacnnecninasaes .... Pleuracanthide. Chlamydoselachide. (Hysancuorner, ee ( Odontaspidide. | Lannide. Oretolobide. GALEOIDEI ...... Scyliorhinide. | Y jo BBU SOREN dg | Carchariide. eee IL Sphyrnine. ( Cochliodontide. | Hybodontide. SQUALOIDEI ...... < Cestraciontide. é EUSELACHII... Squalide. ; Squaline. 7! Pristiophorine. Hybodontine. Palzospinacinz. cr | Squatinide. J NarcopatorpEr. Narcobatide. g [ Rhinobatide, § Rhinobatine. s Pristine. (GB Acro repr Tener Fee Rsle Dasybatide. LHYPoTREMATA...... A paper by Mr. F. F. Larpiaw gave an account of the Polyclad Turbellaria from the Cape Verde Islands collected by Mr. C. Crossland, F.Z.S. The collection showed that, on the whole, the fauna of this region of the Atlantic agreed closely with that of the Mediterranean so far as the Polyclads were concerned. The most interesting of the 16 or 17 species represented in the collection were, perhaps, a species of Anonymus (of which several specimens were taken) and Zraunfelsia elongata, gen. etsp.nov. The latter was an elongated form remarkable for the possession of marginal tentacles, which were not usually associated with a long narrow body in this class. A unique feature in this genus was the presence 16 of a pair of alveolar glands, each with a long duct opening on either side of antrum masculinum. The genus was referred to the Diposthiide of Woodworth. Messrs. E.G. B. Mzapr-WaAtpo, F.Z.S., and Micnarnt J. Nicoun gave an account of a large unknown marine animal they had observed off the coast of Brazil during their cruise in the Earl of Crawford’s yacht the ‘ Valhalla.’ This Meeting closes the Session 1905-06. The next Session (1906-07) will commence in November next. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the ZOOLOGICAL Society oF Lonpon should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. 3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W. 26th June, 1906. No. 35. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. November 13th, 1908. HowarpD SAunpDErs, Esq., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary read a Report on the additions that had been made to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of June, July, August, and September, 1906. Mr. A. Dicksze exhibited a living specimen of the Golden Pheasant (Thaumalea picta) in abnormal plumage. Mr. H. C. Becx, F.Z.8S., exhibited a skull of the Capybara (Hydrocherus capybara) showing an elongation of the first pre- molar in the lower jaw. Prof, E. A. Mrncutn, F.Z.S., exhibited some diagrams of 'Trypa- nosomes from Tsetse-flies and made remarks on the dissemination of diseases by these insects. A communication was read from Prof. R. BurckuaArt, C.M.Z.8., containing a short account of a very young embryo of the Okapi (Okapia johnstoni) obtained by his correspondent Dr. T. David from a specimen which had been shot in the Semliki Forest. The object not being well preserved and in an early stage, it could only be stated that all the particulars ascertainable were specially Ungulate in character. * This Abstract is published by the Society at 5 Hanover Square, London, W.., on the Tuesday followmg the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications, along with the ‘ Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Six Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 18 Dr. P. L. Scnater, F.R.S., made some remarks on the letter from Capt. P. H. G. Powell-Cotton, published in the ‘Times’ of Sept. 27th, 1906, on the Okapi. A communcation was read from Mr. F. F. Larpuaw which contained a description of a new species of Turbellarian obtained during Dr. W. A. Cunnington’s expedition to Lake Tanganyika. A communication from Mr. OLDFIELD THomas, F.R.S8., contained a list of a second collection of Mammals made in Western Australia for Mr. W. E. Balston, with Field-notes by the collector, Mr. G. C. Shortridge. This second collection had been made in the Avon watershed, and consisted of about 350 specimens, of which a fine series had been presented to the National Museum by Mr. Balston. In all 42 species were enumerated, and of these Mr. Shortridge had given notes on the distribution and comparative rarity at the present time, such notes being of particular value in the case of a disappearing fauna like that of Australia. An appendix dealt with a small series obtained on Bunier Island, Shark’s Bay, on the N.W. coast of Australia. The sixth instalment of the results of the Rudd Exploration of South Africa, prepared by Messrs. OLDFIELD Tuomas, F.R.S., and Haroup Scuwann, F.Z.8S., was read. It contained an account of the Mammals obtained by Mr. C. H. B. Grant in the Eastern Transvaal. ‘Twenty-one species were represented in the collection, of which one was new. Mr. J. Cosmo MELVILL, F.Z.S., read a paper prepared by himself and Mr. Rospert StanpEN of the Manchester Museum, entitled ‘The Mollusea of the Persian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and Arabian Sea, as evidenced mainly through the Collections of Mr. F. W. Townsend, 1903-1905, with descriptions of new Species.— Part IJ. Pelecypoda.” Tt was a continuation of the enumeration of the Mollusca of the above-named seas published in the Proc. Zool. Soc. vol. ii. 1901, and completing the Catalogue, the total number embraced being nearly sixteen hundred species, many of these being found to be new to science. Amongst the Pelecypoda, Tellina held the premier place; most orders and families were, however, repre- sented, and the result was a very refined and varied molluscan fauna. Some interesting forms occurred amongst the Lardiacea ; while the Pectinide showed alliance and, in some cases, specific identity with the Erythrzan fauna, lately so ably monographed by Dr. Sturany. 19 The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, the 27th November, 1906, at half-past Hight o’clock p.m., when the following communications will be made :— 1. My. T. A. Cowarp, F.Z.8.—On some Habits of Rhinolophus hipposiderus. 2. Messrs. Epear A. Surra, I.8.0., F.Z.S.,and H. H. Broomsr. —The Marine Fauna of Zanzibar and British East Africa, from Collections made by Cyril Crossland in the Years 1901 and 1902. On some Species of Solenide. 3. Mr. W. Woopianp, F.Z.8.—Suggestions concerning the Origin and Significance of the “ Renal-portal System,” with an Appendix on the Production of Subadominal Veins. 4. Mr. W. Wooptanp, F.Z.S.—On the Anatomy of Centro- phorus calceus (crepidalbus Bocage and Capello) Giinther. The following Papers have been received :— 1. Mr. Ouprietp Tuomas, F.R.S.—The Duke of Bedford's Zoological Exploration in Eastern Asia.—I!. List of small Mammals from Korea and Quelpart. 2. Messrs. Joun Rennie, D.Sc., and Harry Wiseman, M.A.— On Collections of the Cape Verde Island Marine Fauna made by Cyril Crossland from July to September 1904. Ascidians. 3. Mr. Lionen K. Crawsuay, M.A.—On Variations in the Arterial System of certain Species of Anura. 4. Mr. Guy A. K. Marsaatt, F.Z.S.—On new Species of African Curculionide. 5. Dr. R. W. Suvuretpr, C.M.Z.S.—On the Osteology of the Tubinares. 6. Mr. O. A. Merrirr Hawxes—The Cranial and Spinal Nerves of Chlamydoselachus anguineus. 7. Mr. R. LypexKer.— Descriptions of two Mammals from the Ituri Forest. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the ZooLOGICAL Society oF Lonpon should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. 3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W. 20th November, 1906. nary No. 36. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* November 27th, 1906. HowaArpD SAUNDERS, Hsq., Vice-President, in the Chair. The SEcRETARY read a Report on the additions that had been made to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of October 1906. Mr. EH. T. Newron, F.R.S., exhibited the leg-bones of two Foxes that had been caught in snares. The wire in each case had cut through the skin and was drawn tight round the bone, which in course of development had grown over the wire and enveloped it. Mr. T. A. Cowarp, F.Z.S., read some notes on the habits of the Lesser Horseshoe Bat, 2hinolophus hipposiderus, in the course of which it was stated that this Bat usually occupied different retreats In summer and winter, and that during the earlier period of occupation of the winter retreat sleep was not profound. The Bats fed probably in the caves or retreats, and the food was at times, if not always, consumed when the animal was at rest and not on the wing. When feeding it did not—probably could not—make use of the interfemoral membrane, after the manner of the Vespertilionide, but, as a substitute, the interbrachial membrane was employed. These facts suggested that the hibernation of this species, and probably of other cave-haunting Bats, was not really a profound winter sleep. A communication from Messrs. Epeéar A. Surry, 1.8.0., and H. H. Bioomer contained an account of four species of Solenidcee contained in the collections made by Mr. Cyril Crossland in Zanzibar and British Hast Africa in 1901-02. * This Abstract is published by the Society at 3 Hanover Square, London, W.., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications, along with the ‘ Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Stxpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Str Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 22 Mr. W. Wooptanp, F.Z.8., read a paper in which an attempt was made to explain the existence of the so-called “ renal-portal ” system. Arguments and facts were adduced to prove that the venous blood supplied to the “ portal” kidney was not used for excretory purposes. On the other hand, it was suggested that the “renal-portal” system was solely due to the fact that the lumen of the venous sinus offered a convenient space for the kidney-substance to intrude upon, the kidney developing under conditions in which space was extremely limited, and con- sequently under pressure. This view, which was justified by all known morphological and physiological facts, implied that all kidney-elements in the Vertebrata had a similar vascular supply. Mr. WoopLanD also read a paper on the anatomy of Centro- phorus calceus, the Author describing in particular the anatomy of the alimentary tract, which differed in several respects from that of most Selachians and, as regards the length of the bile-duct, from most Vertebrates. Mr. Ouprietp Tuomas, F.R.S., read a paper on mammals col- lected in Korea and Quelpart Island by Mr. Malcolm P. Anderson for the Duke of Bedford’s Exploration of Eastern Asia, and presented by His Grace to the National Museum. The collection consisted of about 130 specimens, belonging to nine species, of which four were described as new. Quelpart Island proved to contain a very poor mammal-fauna, | and the only specimens obtained there were a Putoriws and a Micromys, both identical with forms found on the Korean Peninsula. The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, the 11th December, 1906, at half-past Exght o'clock P.m., when the following communications will be made :-— 1. Messrs. Joun Rennie, D.Sc., and Harry Wiseman, M.A.— On Collections of the Cape Verde Island Maxine Fauna made by Cyril Crossland from July to September 1904, Ascidians. 2. Mr. Lionst K. Crawsuay, M.A.—On Variations in the Arterial System of certain Species of Anura, 3. Mr. Guy A. K. Marsuatt, F.Z.S.—On new Species of African Curculionide. 4, Mrs. O. A. Merritt Hawxkes.—The Cranial and Spinal Nerves of Chlamydoselachus anguwineus. 5. Mr. R. Lypexxer.—Descriptions of two Mammals from the Ituri Forest. 23 The following Papers have been received :— 1. My. J. Lewis Bonnore, F.Z.S.—On a Collection of Mammals made by Dr. Vassal in Annam. 9. Mr. P. H. Baur, F.Z.S.—On the “Bleating” or “ Drumming” of the Snipe (Gallinago cclestis). 3. Dr. E. A. Gornp1, C.M.Z.S.—Some new and insufficiently- known Species of Marmoset Monkeys from the Amazonian Region. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the ZOOLOGICAL SoOcIETY OF Lonvon should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary 3 Hanover Square, Lonpon, W. ' December Ath, 1906. pai. Eh es No. 87. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON.* December 11th, 1906. Dr. Henry WoopwarD, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secrerary exhibited a drawing, by Mr. Carton Moors- Park, F.Z.S8., of ‘“ Martha,” the young Gorilla that had recently died in the Society’s Menagerie. Mr. H. B. Fanruam, B.Sc., F.Z.S., exhibited original drawings of “ Trypanosoma” balbianii (Certes), showing apparent cilia, which might, however, be only threads of the sheath or undulating membrane which had become ruptured. These were first seen in this organism by M. Fred Vlésand himself at Roscoff this summer. This parasite, which occurs in the crystalline style of the Oyster, was compared with various Spirilla and Spirochetes, and its syste- matic position among the Protista was discussed. The Secretary exhibited, on behalf of Dr. C. G. SetiagMAnn, two skulls of the Domestic Sheep, one of which was of a normal male and the other of a male castrated in youth, and called attention to the differences in the bones apart from those directly associated with the absence of the horns in the castrated specimen. Mr. F. E. Bepparp, F.R.S., exhibited some examples of the Earthworm (Lenhamia johnstoni) from Mt. Ruwenzori, which had been entrusted to him for study by Mr. W. R. Ogilvie-Grant. Mr. J. L. Bonuors, F.Z.S., exhibited one of the innermost secondaries of the Knot (Zringa canutus) taken from a bird in his aviaries. The feather was remarkable from the fact that the summer feather instead of being cast at the autumn moult was continuous with the new autumn feather; it did not merely adhere to the tip of this latter, but the shaft was continuous and * This Abstract is published by the Society at 5 Hanover Square, London. W., on the Tuesday following the date of Meeting to which it refers. It will be issued, free of extra charge, to all Fellows who subscribe to the Publications, along witb the ‘ Proceedings’ ; but it may be obtained on the day of publication at the price of Sixpence, or, if desired, sent post-free for the sum of Siw Shillings per annum, payable in advance. 26 the barbs forming at the proximal extremity, the white tip of the winter feather formed also the light base of the summer feather. The summer feather was rather shorter than the normal, and possibly was not fully grown when the autumn moult intervened. Mr. R. I. Pococr, the Superintendent of the Gardens, exhibited the tail of a Crested Porcupine to show the peculiar structure of the quills which constituted the animal’s so-called “ rattle.” A communication was read from Messrs. Joon Renniz, D.Sc., and Harry Wiseman, B.Sc., of the University of Aberdeen. It contained an account of the Ascidians of the Cape Verde Marine Fauna collected by Mr. Cyril Crossland, B.A., B.Sc., F.Z.8., and recorded the occurrence of ten species of Ascidie Simplices, of which three were described as new. Mr. F. EK. Bepparp, F.R.S., communicated a paper, on behalf of Mr. Lionen K. Crawsuay, on variations in the Arterial System of certain species of Anura. A communication was read from Mr. Guy A. K. MarsHAtt, ¥.Z.8., containing descriptions of fifty-three new species of African Coleoptera of the family Curculionide. A paper by Mrs. O. A. Merrirr Hawxus, B.Sc. (Lond.), on the Cranial and Spinal Nerves of Chlamydoselachus anguineus, was vead. Itcontained a description of these nerves and discussions of them from the point of view of the nerve-component theory, and showed that the nervous as well as the other systems of Chlamy- doselachus combined specialized and primitive features; that the nervous system was intermediate in position between that of Scylium and of Chimera; that the trigemino-facial complex exhibited but few signs of the primitive; that the true facialis was interesting owing to the presence of pre- and post-trematic rami apart from the.truncus hyomandibularis ; that there was a chorda tympani; that the glossopharyngeus probably supplied two neuromasts; that the vagus was disappointing in that its gangha were mostly indistinguishable, but this was probably due indirectly to the marked backward swing of the jaws. On the other hand, it showed that there was a sixth ramus branchialis vagi to the remnants of a seventh arch; that a hypoglossal nerve was present; that the acoustico-lateralis rami were closely related to one another, their distribution showing the close functional relationship of neuromasts and ampulle of Lorenzini; and that both the lateral line system and ampulle were primitive and remarkably unstable. In a communication regarding two mammals obtained by Major Powell-Cotton in the Ituri Forest, Mr. R. Lypexxer, F.Z.S., referred a dark-coloured Cat’s skin to a race of Felis chrysothria, and also described a giant Klephant-Shrew as new. 27 In a second paper Mr. LypexKer described the skull of a Bruang, or Malay Bear, from Tibet, which. he proposed to regard as representing a distinct race. In continuation of his paper on South-Indian Nudibranchs (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1906, pp. 636-691), Sir Cartes Exror, K.C.M.G., presented a supplementary account of the radule of various species based on microscopic slides prepared by Alder and Hancock, which had just been discovered in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle on-Tyne. These slides confirmed many of the identi- fications suggested in the first paper, and in particular showed that Doris glenet was a Chromodoris, and that Doris villosa was Thordisa maculigera Bgh. The next Meeting of the Society for Scientific Business will be held on Tuesday, the 15th January, 1907, at half-past Eight o'clock P.M., when the following communications will be made :— 1. My. J. Lewis Bonnore, F.Z.S.—On a Collection of Mammals made by Dr. Vassal in Annam. 2. Mr. P.H. Baur, F.Z.S.—On the “ Bleating” or “ Drumming” of the Snipe (Gallinago celestis). (Illustrated with lantern- slides.) 3. Dr. E. A. Gornp1, C.M.Z.S.—Some new and insufficiently- known Species of Marmoset Monkeys from the Amazonian Region. 4, Mr. F. E. Bepparp, F.R.S.—Contributions to the Knowledge of the Systematic Arrangement and Anatomy of certain Genera and Species of Squamata. The following Papers have been received :— 1. Dr. W. T. Catman, F.Z.S.—On new or rare Cumacea from the Collection of the Copenhagen Museum. Part I. 2. Mr. G. H. Kenricn, F.Z.S.—A List of the Pyralide, with Descriptions of new Species, collected by A. HE. Pratt in British New Guinea in 1902-03. Communications intended for the Scientific Meetings of the ZooLoGIcAL Society or Lonpon should be addressed to P. CHALMERS MITCHELL, Secretary. 3 Hanover Square, London, W. December 18th, 1906. ag Hite) * Ps MeO his (ONLI OS” big Spane 5 ContTENTS (continued). December 11, 1906. — : ie Page The Seeretary. Exhibition of a sketch of a young Gorilla. (Plate LXIII.) ............ 901 Mr. H. B. Fantham, B.Sc, F.Z.S. Exhibition of drawings of “ Trypanosoma” balbianti, Blom nA Aero CHA 2 .hese< eleners ce abner dou mannerer erator ore Rafer teense Ni Caran Pee 901 Mr, F. E. Beddard, F.R.S. Exhibition of examples of the Earthworm Benhamia johnstoni, HOMME ARI CZORL 4 sis otere Sao cic te one cla ore ieee bes oaeecnar Ca arc SST SSC Ne au as pe GOL Mr. J. L. Bonhote, F.Z.8. Exhibition of an abnormal feather of the Knot-............-. SOL Mr. R. I. Pocock, ¥.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, the “rattle” of a Poreupine.. 902 Dr. C. G. Seligmann, F.Z.8. - Exhibition of a skull of a Domestic Sheep which had been EQuinatedpwalensy OU Oe rau. cries ce eeeles whee ausiepeyajancrs tae srelteler fai efalaneie sriehe see Tsie ene 903 1. On. Collections of the Cape Verde Island Marine Fauna, made by Cyril Crossland, M.A. (Cantab.), B.Sc. (Lond.), ¥.Z.8., of St. Andrews University, July to September 19U4+.—The Ascidians. By Jonny Renarz, D.Sce., and Harry Wiseman, M.A., B.Sc., University of Aberdeen. (Plates LXIV. & LXV.) ......-......... PAPE EN ye oc 903 i) . On New Species of African Coleoptera of the Family Ourtulionide. By Guy A. K. Manrsmauu, B.Z.8. (Plates LXVI. & UXVII.)........... ge na eon 911 3. The Cranial and Spinal Nerves of Ch/amydosclachus anguineus (Gar.). By Mrs. O. A. Mrremr Hawsus, M.Se. (Zoological Laboratory University of Birmingham). Calley Hey GP. RIEL aid Bp. @ 1.) eer eee oni nAle Merri harm armnmisc rect attic. ai 959 4, Descriptions of Two Mammals from the Ituri Forest. [With a Supplementary Note on the Buffalo of the Semliki district.] By R. Lypuxxer. (Plate LXX.)............ 92 5. On the Oveurrence of the Bruang in the Tibetan Province. By R, Lypexker Rene Bc 997 6. On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with special reference to the Drawings by Kelaart and the Collections belonging to Alder and Hancock preserved in the Haneock Museum at Neweastle-on-Tyne.—No. Il. By Sir Carnes Enror, BIKE OMG Cte Be Zia tape cclleset aosee ni un ee cte hata tat ai nra/ S'al(e um lela ee tabaltpobene vueid ate reopen eiaeg aia 999 7. On Variations in the Arterial System of certain Species of the Anura. By Lronen R. OIPAWBIUAN AES ACHR is 5 Tien < Gratstatee Salieri a eat eau aitadis caine caer nna Cela eR teeta ae sae OOS Tin bake SS aren cp EAA in Ran N Ie RAE mine Ursune cnn knarhanie ie wit gg Sia eae 1035 aA ONG Oe elas wire vio) 25 aia iallece tem loeaeataia cs Je + aintatehn Giiajuiaieies icra nase scion Nal eet I Pisa@uncl and Oiicersc’ Siete le. Mme CE Cae al esac Re Nena aes os cs il. TGA OFA Chovals AUS Sue en mes cern SU Kena ee oie nee Mens Gis oom s MRA Ie Aiea o4 Gey hichci din ul Alpbaneriod List of Contributors, 2. ev es iia eee oleae elect e he ay cle ananctele XI ABTS Sen eel beset tee es fie ny cian cine ea Oa aren Lae iy @aMRRaM ae dace veld Ng le eighey afk io Aart naan XXi TaiatronmMestian enn es eee ree sae alee Wie Me aaa niet ie ra bes cielia nue at ar haath BOn ep eet es Fey ean Mas tuois ING wh GENERIC LONINS) vj syevarn cho vyic ixtole) sunt orefaUann sy mak Cf ctelntess oi ately aWialtp averlane’ eke Seneca Been Sean. DPA GRUTIRY Pe CSrira ale ahtereta ar arc peselneteebace ie) atau cebe cep MNere ma ene ara aetna: satan aiierchal re weetne arate Saito een eR LIST OF, PEATES. 1906, pp. 759-1052. Plate Page LUT. LIV. ty, { Mollusca of the Persian Gulf and Arabian Sea ......... 783 LVI. LVIi. \ LVI. | Xe LX, { Anatomy of Centrophorus calceus ......20+e cee en seveee 865 LX. | LXII_/ IATL povoung female Gorilla os. Vic. eae owe sou (Eka ee bata 901 LXIV. we ( < LXV Ascidiavisitrom, Cape Verde. fei cucuy «nee nes one vaee 903 LXVI. | , : LXVII } New, Atrican Curculionids” (ee wale tae eel tee nae 911 _LXVIII. Chlamydoselachus, Cranial nerves ......... eamlbarmute: 00 ‘ , “\ 959 LXIX. Chlamydoselachus. Fye-muscles and Brain.............. ite LXX. 1. The Dusky African Tiger-Cat (Felis chrysothrix cotton‘). ; 2. The Red African Tiger-Cat (Ff. c. rutia)........-.-- 992 NOTICE. The ‘ Proceedings’ for the year are issued in fowr varts, forming two volumes. as follows:— | Papers read in January and February, in June. March and April, in August. May and June, in October. . November and December, in April. Ly) thy 29 2? ted 29° ~ ‘ Proceedings,’ 1906, pp. 463-758, were published on October 10th, 1906. The Abstracts of the papers read at the Scientific Meetings in ‘November and December are contained in this Part. i it { yh) ieee ip hee @ vans a, i ee 4 Ry 7 A f y Nena wiley Tee) galing Sasa oe ih | | SMITHSONIA\ | 2 3 9088 008 ree ae ag